pROPErtY OF ——_
“TAR ee cc
: FOR THR ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE,

c=. | SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ; ey ‘

* BEHNOLOGY J.-W.-POWELL; DIRECTOR

at
Pi ite

2

OF THE

BY

[ES CONSTANTINE PILLING

“WASHINGTON
VERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1892

y

gd ne

SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION

BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR

OF THE

JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING

WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1892

LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY.

Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of. lin-
guistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By
James C. Pilling.

In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p. 553, text pp.
555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°.

Issued separately with cover title as follows:

Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau
of ethnology | by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | | Vignette| |

Washington | Government printing office | 1881

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p.553,
text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued.

Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell di-
rector | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the
| North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib-
uted only to collaborators) |

Washington | Government printing office | 15885

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884)
pp. v-vili, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re-
ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxvill, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp.
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp.
1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or
first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of
the sheet only.

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di-
rector | Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constan-
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1887

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (April 20, 1887) pp. iii-v,
text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100
copies was issued in royal 8°.

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di-
rector | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Coustan-
tine Pilling | [Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1887

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (September 1, 1887)
pp. lli-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°. An edition of 100 copies

Was issued in royal 8°.
Il

IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY.

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di-
rector | Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Con-
stantine Pilling | [Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1888

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (December 15, 1888)
pp. li-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fae-
similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°.

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di-
rector | Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James
Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1859

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp.
iii-y, text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114, 8°. An edition of 100 copies
issued in royal 8°.

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot’s Indian bible | and | on his other
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts |
Extract from a ‘“ Bibliography of the Algonquian languages” |
[Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1890

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-58, 21 fae similes,
royal 8°. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued.

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di-
rector | Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James
Constantine Pilling | | Vignette] |

Washington | Government printing office | 1891

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp.
iii-iv, introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii-vili, list of fac-similes pp. ix—x,
text pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 fac-similes, 8°.
An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°.

/

es ae G CS oie

The series of bibliographies of which this forms the sixth number
was started in 1887 with the Eskimauan as the first issue. They are
all based upon the “ Proof Sheets of a Bibliography of the North Amer-
ican Languages,” by the same author, printed in 1885, in an edition of
110 copies. Titles and collations of these works will be found on a
previous page.

The next in order of publication are to be the Chinookan (including
the Chinook jargon), the Salishan, and the Wakashan, all of which are
well under way.

The name adopted by the Bureau of Ethnology for this family of
languages (Athapascan) is that used by Gallatin in the American An-
tiquarian Society’s Transactions, vol. 11, 1836. It has been objected to
by a number of missionaries—students of various dialects of this family
in the Northwest—but priority demanded that Gallatin’s name should
be retained. It is derived from the lake of the same name, which, ac-
cording to Father Lacombe, signifies ‘place of hay and reeds.”

The following account of the distribution of the Athapascan people
is taken from Powell’s “Indian Linguistic Families,” in the Seventh
Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology:

The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are best given under
three primary groups: Northern, Pacific, and Southern.

Northern group.—This includes all the Athapascan tribes of British North America
and Alaska. In the former region the Athapascans occupy most of the western
interior, being bounded on the north by the Arctic Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow
strip of coast; on the east by the Eskimo of Hudson’s Bay as far south as Churchill
River, south of which river the country is occupied by Algonquian tribes. On the
south the Athapascan tribes extended to the main ridge between the Athapasca and
Saskatchewan rivers, where they met Algonquian tribes; west of this area they
were bounded on the south by Salishan tribes, the limits of whose territory on Fra-
ser River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and Dawson’s map of 1884. On the
west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes nowhere reach the coast, being cut
off by the Wakashan, Salishan, and Chimmesyan families.

The interior of Alaska is chiefly occupied by tribes of this family. Eskimo tribes
have encroached somewhat upon the interior along the Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak,
and Noatak rivers, reaching on the Yukon to somewhat below Shageluk Island and
on the Kuskokwim nearly or quite to Kolmakoff Redoubt. Upon the two latter
they reach quite to their heads. A few Kutchin tribes are (or have been) north of
the Poreupine and Yukon rivers, but until recently it has not been known that they
extended north beyond the Yukon and Romanzoff mountains. Explorations of

oe

VA PREFACE.

Lient. Stoney, in 1885, establish the fact that the region to the north of those moun-
tains is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map is colored accordingly. Only
in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes reach the coast: the K’naia-kho-
tana, on Cook’s Inlet, and the Ahthena, of Cooper River.

Pacific group.—Unlike the tribes of the Northern group, most of those of the Pacific
group have removed from their priscan habitats since the advent of the white race.
The Pacific group embraces the following: Kwalhioqua, formerly on Willopah River,
Washington, near the lower Chinook; Owilapsh, formerly between Shoalwater Bay
and the heads of the Chehalis River, Washington, the territory of these two tribes
being practically continuous; Tlatscanai, formerly on a smull stream on the north-
west side of Wapatoo Island. Gibbs was informed by an old Indian that this tribe
‘formerly owned the prairies on the Tsilalis at the mouth of the Skukumchuck, but,
on the failure of game, left the country, crossed the Columbia River, and occupied
the mountains to the south,” astatement of too uncertain character to be depended
upon; the Athapascan tribes now on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservations,
Oregon, whose villages on and near the coast extended from Coquille River south-
ward to the California line, including, among others, the Upper Coquille, Sixes,
Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu tinné, anid other ‘Rogue River” or ‘ Tou-touten
bands,” Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tinné, and Chetco villages; the Atha-
pascan villages formerly on Smith River and tributaries, California; those villages
extending southward from Smith River along the Ualifornia coast to the mouth of
Klamath River; the Hupa villages or “clans” formerly on Lower Trinity River,
California; the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: ‘‘They live along the
western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley,
to Hay Fork; along Eel and Mail rivers, extending down the latter about to Low
Gap; also on Dobbins and Larrabie creeks; and Saiaz, who ‘formerly occupied
the tongue of land jutting down between Eel River and Van Dusen’s Fork.”

Southern group.—Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer José Cortez,
one of the earliest authorities on these tribes, writing in 1799, defines the boundaries
of the Lipan and Apache as extending north and south from 29° N. to 362 N., anl
east and west from 99° W. to 114° W.; in other words, from central Texas nearly
to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they met tribes of the Yuma stock. The
Lipan occupied the eastern part of the above territory, extending in Texas from the
Comanche country (about Red River) south to the Rio Grande. More recently both
Lipan and Apache have gradually moved southward into Mexico, where they extend
as far as Durango.

The Navajo, since first known to history, have occupied the country on and south
of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona and extending into
Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by the cognate Apache
except upon the north, where they meet Shoshonean tribes.

The present volume embraces 544 titular entries, of which 428 relate
to printed books and articles and 116 to manuscripts. Of these, 517
have been seen and described by the compiler, 422 of the prints and
95 of the manuscripts, leaving 27 as derived from outside sources, 16 of
the prints and 21 manuscripts. Of those unseen by the writer, titles
and descriptions have been received in most cases from persons who
have actually seen the works and described them for him.

So far as possible, during the proof-reading, direct comparison has
beea made with the works themselves. For this purpose, besides his
own books, the writer has had access to those in the libraries of Con-
gress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, and to
several private collections in the city of Washington. Mr. Wilberforce

PREFACE. Vil

Eames has compared the titles of works contained in his own library
and in the Lenox, and recourse has been had to a number of librarians
throughout the country for tracings, photographs, etc. The result is
that of the 517 works described de visu comparison of proof has been
made direct with the original sources in the case of 424. In this later
reading collations and descriptions have been entered into more fully
than had previously been done. and capital letters treated with more

WASHINGTON, D. C., June 15, 1892.

severity.

LT RO) CE TON:

In the compilation of this catalogue the aim has been to include
everything, printed or in manuscript, relating to the Athapasean lan-
guages: books, pamphlets, articles in magazines, tracts, serials, ete.,
and such reviews and announcements of publications as seemed worthy
of notice.

The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the sub-
ject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, ete., being included in
one alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by
authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as
authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, by printed works,
and second, by manuscripts, each group being given chronologically;
and in the ease of printed books each work is followed through its
various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up.

Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author,
when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or
preposition, when not known. <A cross-reference is given from the first
words of anonymous titles when entered under an author and from the
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under
the dialect to which they refer when he is not known.

Each author’s name, with his title, ete., is entered in full but once,
i. e., in its alphabetic order. Every other mention of him is by sur-
name and initials only, except in those rare cases when two persons of
the same surname have also the same initials.

All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all
collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil.

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the
spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers
is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has
adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best.

As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in
only two cases: first, for proper names, and second, when the word
actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the
remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been
respected.

When titles are given of works not seen by the compiler the fact is
stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in
either case the authority is usually given.

IX

PRE OL oA N GUAGE S:

Page.
Antena. See Ahtinné,
Ce LULU 25s cd Sp a Ee le ae SE oy a te Re ae a eae l
oo TEA SLES hs oe OTTER eal
Applegate Creek. See Nabiltse.
Arivaipa Apache. See Apache.
PMMA Ace ema go OR Ne eters ce NL Se ions Se) ws ve See 4
Atna. See Ahtinné.
ee MPI es) SOE Oe SN one ate Saye ee ave Hatt 8

Carrier Indians. See Taculli.

Chin Indians. See Nagailer.

REMI ANA ee area ic os ee Ee 19
Chiracahua Apache. See Apache.

Cook’s Inlet Indians. See Kenai.

Copper Indians. See Alitinne.

Coppermine Apache. See Apache.

MN Per me yee a ee ee NS. eee ee 20
Coyotero Apache. See Apache.

_ SDE J aves ed sibs See 2 enn eee ans ee Clete Sis ce | Sem 25
Deéné Dindjie. See Dene.

LE SD Sane 2 ee SS See reer Seat ar Cee 26

Faraone. See Apache.
Hare Indians. See Peau de Liévre.
Haynarger. See Henagi.

eee et ER 8 38 Se Poke Ye a Oe Same 41
Hoopa. See Hupa.

CE SiSTE SAS Ra 2 cs ena a 41
bo ONTUP. gives) 28 2 HS IRIS 2 oS ASN a nr 41
ES AL SUE oS a a ais ee re 2

Inkalit-Kenai. See Kenai.
Jicarilla Apache. See Apache.

Peony nae eo te oe te Sey Se okey ns Dees ae 43
ALLY Hae os O0S oa a a eae SR Cae eR alg en i 44
Klatskenai. See Tlatskenai.

TOE PES Bis eh Se ie SR Ne ae ee aa ce 49
2 TUM Eset “Be a aie ig ae ga a 50
1A D SSE | aR RGR eae ie Lge pee ees Oe a an 50

XII INDEX OF LANGUAGES.

pM eee es oe isis See Se ies ee ems een Ce
Lototen. See Tututen.
WOUCHOWK 1322 iso Se bo ee ee A cr one ee 5

Mesealero Apache. See Apache.

Midnooski. See Ahtinné.

Mimbreno Apache. See Apache.

Mombasmaiss = Si j0 == 5 24 Se ecient gee ee ee
NGTMERG oes Bec. ft Se ei ee ae ecu ae a
Naaman 2. Sas 6 AE ee Mie ile PR SE te ee ee te ee
Nahawny. See Nehawni.

DAV a Oe He eS Shore Se ie Hee Sa eee ee
Se arava fe lor sal ane te Ses Be eee la ee ER Reais
Northern Indians. See Athapascan.

Nulato Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Beat Ge LIGNTe 6088 Vase ee Ae a ee ee
Pinaleho Apache. See Apache.

OO WG UV EN Sn Sete ao jeans wb Se ene a ence ne
Sierra Blanea Apache. See Apache.

PRAM 2. lca oe ees 2 SoG. 8 eee eee
Sa VETo La ee Fel he ees iaod ee ee eee ee en
Slavi. See Slave.

SIRS OR teers orb es LS oe ee. Sa eeren Fre
Sussee. See Sursee.

Optiarc ee bid sO es he ae eee
Tahkali. See Taculli.

Tahlewal af set Aas ac Seka ae Lo, ee ee

Takudh. See Tukudh.
Tenan-Kutehin. See Kutehin.
Tenana. See Kutchin.
Tenana-Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Meise Sots ko ON a ee ee
Tolowa. See Tahlewah.

ADUURRLCU OS 2 oes Risk i is. sk vlene ROE en etre
REMI. scr 5 ee Sa OS Le RS wee Ba oe eee
Gioplenven) 6-085 oeel ini noes sole ee eae ee er
Ululuk-Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Wmiphkwa 225 an Bee eek i a
Unakhotana::. 5 Sat hale oe ks 2 ea eee
Woailakkions 3. tcc oe SPLRS ES. . nck 2 oe 2 eee
White Mountain Apache. See Apache.

Willopah... . ...-22 2: Vee ee es Oe ee

riot OF PACSIMILEES.

Pete erne, Syllabaly... 2.2... : see ene eee ce dee eh oes:
Title page of Morice’s Dené Primer

Title page of Morice’s Déené Catechism
Perrault?s Monutagnais Syllabary

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

By JAMES C. PILLING.

[An asterisk within parentheses indicates that the compiler has seen no copy of the work referred to.]

ae

Abbott (G. H.) Vocabulary of the | Adelung (Johann Christoph) [and Vater

Coquille language.

Manuscript, 6 pages, folio, in the library of
the Burean of Ethnology, Washington, D.C.
Taken down in 1858 at the Siletz Indian A gency,
Oregon, with the assistance of the interpreter
at that agency,and recorded on one of the blanks
of 180 words issued by Mr. Geo. Gibbs. The
blanks are all filled and about 20 words added.

A partial copy, made by Mr. Gibbs, consist-
ing of the 180 words of the standard vocabulary,
with some changes in the alphabetic notation,
is in the same library.

Adam (Lucien). Examen grammatical
comparé de seize langues américaines.

In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte
rendu, second session, vol. 2, pp. 161-244, and

six folded sheets, Luxembourg & Paris, 1878,-

8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Congress.)

This work is subdivided under twenty-two
headings, ‘‘ Des différentes classes de noms et
du genre,” ‘‘Du pluriel des noms,” ete., un-
der each of which occur remarks on all the six-
teen languages, among which is the Monta-
gnais. Thesix folded sheets at the end contain
a comparative vocabulary (185 words and the
numerals 1-100) of fifteen languages, among
them the Montagnais.

Issued separately as follows:

—— Examen grammatical comparé | de |
seize langues américaines | par) Lucien
Adam | Conseiller ala Cour de Nancy. |

Paris | Maisonneuve et Cie, Editeurs,

| 25, Quai Voltaire, 25 | 1878

Half-title verso ‘‘extrait du” ete. 11. title as
above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-88, six folding
tables, 8°.

Linguistic contents as under title nextabove.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Congress,
Gatschet, Wellesley.

Triibner, 1882 catalogue, p. 3, prices a copy
6s.; Leclerc, 1887, p. 3, 15 fr.; Maisonneuve,
1888, p. 42, 15 fr.

ATH——l

(J.S.)] Mithridates | oder | allgemeine
| Sprachenkunde | mit | dem Vater
Unser als Sprachprobe | in bey nahe |
fiinfhundert Sprachen und Mundarten,
| von | Johann Christoph Adelung, |
Churfiirstl. Siichsischen Hofrath und
Ober-Bibliothekar. | [Two lines quo-
tation.] | Erster[-Vierter] Theil. |

Berlin, | inder Vossischen Buchhand-
lung, | 1806[-1817].

4 vols. (vol. 3 in three parts), 8°.

Vol. 3, part 3, is devoted to American lin-
guistics; the Athapascan contents are as fol-
lows: General remarks on the Apache, pp. 177-
179; of the Nabajoa, pp. 179-180.—Short discus-
sion of the Kinai, pp. 228-229.—Comparative
vocabulary of the Ugaljachmutzi (from Resan-
off), with four Kinai vocabularies respectively
from Dawidoff, Resanoff, Lisiansky, and ‘ Un-
genannten,” pp. 230-231.—A few words in
Sussee (from Umfreville), p. 254.—General dis-
cussion of the Chepewyan, with examples
from Mackenzie and Dobbs, pp. 419-424.—Vo-
cabulary of the Chepewyan and Nagailer (both
from Mackenzie) and the Hudson Bay Indians
(from Dobbs), p. 424.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mnu-
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames,
Trumbull, Watkinson.

Priced by Triibner (1856), no. 503, 11. 16s. Sold
at the Fischer sale, no. 17, for 1l.; another copy,
no. 2042, for 16s. At the Field sale, no. 16, it
brought $11.85; at the Squier sale, no. 9, $5.
Leclerc (1878) prices it, no. 2042, 50 fr. At the
Pinart sale, no. 1322, it sold for 25 fr. and at the
Murphy sale, no. 24, a half-calf, marble-edged
copy brought $4.

Ahtena. See Ahtinné.
Ahtinné ;: ‘

General discussion See Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Numerals Allen (H. T.)
Numerals Dall (W, H.)

1

= BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Ahtinné— Continued.

Numerals Ellis (R.)
Sentences Allen (H. T.)
Tribal names Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Allen (H. 'T.)
Vocabulary Baer (K. E. von).
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Dall (W. H.)
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.)
Vocabulary Jéhan (L. F.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.)
Vocabulary Wrangell (F. von).
Words Daa (L. K.)

Words Ellis (R.)

Words Petitot (EK. F.S. J.)
Words Pott (A. F.)

Words Schomburgk (R. H.)

Allen (Lieut. Henry T.) 49th Congress,
| 2d Session. | Senate. | Ex. Doe. | No.
125. | Report | of | an expedition | to |
the Copper,
rivers, | in the | Territory of Alaska, |
in | the year 1885, | ‘for the purpose
of obtaining all information which will
| be valuable andimportant, especially
to the | military branch of the govern-
ment.” | Made under the direction of |

General Nelson A. Miles, Commanding |
the Department of the Columbia, | by |
Allen, | Second |

| heut. Henry T.
United States Cavalry. |

Washington: | Government printing
office. | 1887.

Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 3-8, cor- |

respondence pp. 9-14, introduction p. 15, half-

title p.17, text pp. 19-172, 5 maps and 29 plates, }

‘Bie

Sentences in the Midnoosky language, p.51.—
Natives of Copper River (pp. 125-136) contains
some general remarks on their language, a
vocabulary of 53 words English-Midnoosky, p.
134, and the numerals 1-10 of the Midnoosky
and Apache (the latter from Lieut. T. B.
Dugan, U.S. A.) compared, p. 135.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, |

Pilling.
Some copies are issued without the docu-

mentary heading of five lines at the beginning of |

thetitle-page. (Bureauof Ethnology, Pilling.)
Partly reprinted as follows:

—— Atnatanas; natives of Copper river,
Alaska. By Lieut. Henry T. Allen, U.
S. Army.

In Smithsonian Inst. Annual Report for
1886, part 1, pp. 258-266, Washington, 1889, 8°.
(Pilling.)

Vocabulary and numerals as under title next
above, p. 265.

Reprinted as follows:

Tanand, and Kéyukuk |

Allen (H. T.) — Continued.
— Atuatanas, ornatives of Copper river.
In Quebee Soc. de Géog. Bull. 1886-87-88-89,
pp. 79-90, Quebec, 1889, 8°.
Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 87-88.

American Bible Society: These words following
a title or within parentheses after a note indi-
cate that a copy of the work referred to has been
seen by the compiler in the library of that in-
stitution, New York City.

American Bible Society. 1776. Centen-
nial exhibition. 1876. | Specimen verses
| from versions in different | languages
and dialects |in which the | holy
scriptures | have been printed and cir-
culated by the | American bible society

| and the | British and foreign bible
society. | [Picture and one line quota-
tion. | |

New York: | American bible society,
instituted in the year MDCCCXVL. |
1876.

Title verso picture ete. 1 1. text pp.847, ad-
vertisement p. 48, 16°.

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinné language (syl-
labie charaeters), p. 36.

Copies seen: American Bible Society, Pilling,
Trumbull.

Editions, similar except in date, appeared in
1879 (Wellesley) and in 1884 (Pilling).

Specimen verses | from versions in
different | languages and dialects | in
which the | Holy Scriptures | have been
printed and circulated by the | Ameri-
and the | British and
foreign bible society.| [Picture of bible
and one line quotation. ] | Second edi-
tion, enlarged. |

New York: | American bible society,
| instituted in the year MDCCCXVI. |
1885.

Title verso note 1 1. text pp. 38-60, index pp.
61-63, advertisement p. 64, 16°.

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinné or Chippewyan
(roman and syllabic) and Tukudh (roman), p.
47.

Copies seen: Wellesley.

There is an edition, otherwise as above, dated
1888 (Pilling).

Issued also with title as above and, in addi-
tion, the following, which encircles the border
of the title-page: Souvenir of the World’s in-
dustrial and cotton | centennial exposition. |
Bureau of education: Department of the in-
terior. | New Orleans, 1885. (Pilling.)
Muestras de versiculos | tomados de
las versiones en diferentes | lenguas y
dialectos | en que las | sagradas eseri-
turas | han sido impresas y puestas en
circulacion por la | Sociedad biblica

can bible society

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

American Bible Society — Continued.
americana | y la | Sociedad biblica in-

glesa y extranjera. | [Design and one |

line quotation. ]

Nueva York: | Sociedad biblica ame-
ricana. | Fundada en el Ano de 1816. |
1889,

Title as above verso picture etc. 1 1. text pp.
3-50, historical and other observations pp. 51-
60, index pp. 61-63, picture and description p.
64, 16°. mi

St.John iii, 16, in the Tinné (syllabic char-
acters), Chippewyan (roman), and Tukudh
(roman), p. 47.

Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley.

American Tract Society: These words following

a title or within parentheses after a note indi- |

eate that a copy of the work referred to has

been seen by the compiler in the library of that |

institution, New York City.

Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). Voeab- |

ulary of the Tahkali or Carrier.

In Hale (H.), Ethnography and philology of

the U.S. exploring expedition, pp. 570-629, line |

A, Philadelphia, 1846, 4°.

Reprinted in Gallatin (A.), Hale’s Indians of

northwest America, in American Eth. Soc.
Trans. vol. 2, pp. 78-82, New York, 1848, 8°.
Notes on the Indian tribes of British
North America, and the northwest
coast. Communicated to Geo. Gibbs,
esq. By Alex. C. Anderson, esq., late
of the hon. H. B. co., and read before
the New York Historical Society, No-
vember, 1862.

In Historical Mag. first series, vol. 7, pp.
73-81, New York & London, 1863, sm. 4°.

Ineludes a short account of the Tahcullys,
with a few proper names with English signifi-
eation.

Notes | on | north-western America.
| By | Alexander Caulfield Anderson,
J.P. | (Wormerly of the Hudson’s Bay
Company.) |

Montreal: Mitchell & Wilson, Print-
ers, 192 St. Peter Street. | 1876.

Cover title as above, no inside title; text pp. |

1-22, 12°.
Under the heading of ** Indians,” pp. 20-22, is
given a short account of the natives of that

region, including the ‘* Chipewyanrace,” whieh |

includes a few tribal names with English sig-
nifications.
Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology.
Concordance of the Athabasean lan-
guages.

Manuscript, 8 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Wash-
ington, D.C.

Recorded at Cathlamut, Wash-
ington Ty., 24th February, 1858,

Anderson (A. C.) — Continued.

The first four leaves, written on one side
only, contain a comparative vocabulary of 108
words of the following languages: English,
Chipwyan, Tacully, Klatskanai, Willopah,
Upper Umpqua, Tootooten, Applegate Creek,
Hopah, and Haynarger. The remaining four
leaves, written on both sides and headed Ap-
pendix, contain notes and memoranda con-
nected with the vocabularies collated in the
accompanying abstract.

Apache:
General discussion See Adelung (J. C.)
Vater (J.5S.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Berghaus (H.)
Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Cremony (J.C.)
Jéhan (LL. F.)
Orozco y Berra (M.)
Pimentel (F.)
Smart (C.)
White (J. B.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Featherman (A.)
Miiller (F.)
White (J. B.)
3ancroft (H. H.)
Cremony (J.C.)

and

General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
Gentes
Grammatic comments
Grammatic comments
Grammatic comments
rammatic treatise
Grammatic treatise

Numerals Allen (7H. T.)

Numerals Bancroft (1H. 1.)
Numerals Cremony (J.C.)
Numerals Dugan (T. B.)
Numerals Gatschet (A.5.)
Numerals Haines (E. M.)
Numerals Haldeman (8. 8.)
Numerals Pimentel (F.)
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-

son (G. M.)
Catlin (G.)
Cremony (J. C.)
White (J. B.)
Morgan (L. H.)
White (J. B.)

Proper names
Proper names
Proper names
Relationships
Relationships

Sentences 3ancroft (H. H.)
Sentences White (J. B.)
Text Bancroft (H. H.)

Tribal names
Tribal names
Tribal names
Tribal names
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Balbi (A.)
Higgins (N.S.)
Jéhan (L. F.)
White (J. B.)
Allen (H. T.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Bartlett (J. R.)

Vocabulary Bourke (J. G.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Chapin (G.)
Vocabulary Cremony (J. C.)
Vocabulary Froebel (J.)
Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 8.)
Vocabulary Gilbert (G. KK.)
Vocabulary Henry (C.C.)
Vocabulary Higgins (N.5.)
Voeabulary Hoffman (W.J.)
Vocabulary Loew (0.)
Vocabulary McElroy (P, D,)

4

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Apache — Continued.

Vocabulary Palmer (E.)
Vocabulary Pimentel (F.)
Vocabulary Ruby (C.)
Vocabulary Schooleraft (H. R.)
Vocabulary Sherwood (W. L.)
Vocabulary Simpson (J. H.)

Smart (C.)
Ten Kate (H. F.C.)
Turner (W. W.)

Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Vocabulary White (J. B.)
Vocabulary Wilson (E. F.)
Vocabulary Yarrow (H. C.)
Words Bourke (J. G.)
Words Daa (LL. K.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Gatschet (A. S.)
Words Latham (R. G.)
Words Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)
Words Wilson (E. F.)

Apache John.

Apostolides (S.) L’oraison dominicale
Jen | Cent Langues Différentes; |
publiée et vendue au profit des | mal-
heurenx réfugiés Crétois, | actuelle-
ment en Gréce. | Compilée par 8. Apos-
tolides. | [Scripture text, two lines. ] |

Londres: | imprimé et publié par W.
M. Watts, | 80, Gray’s-inn road. | (En-
tered at stationers’ hall). [1869.] (*)

Second title: Our lord's prayer | in | One
Hundred Different Languages; | published for
the benefit of the | poor Cretan refugees, | now
in Greece. | Compiled by S. Apostolides. |
{Scripture text, two lines.] |

London: | printed and published by W.M.
Watts, | 80, Gray’s-inn road.

First title verso blank 1 J. second title verso

See Gatschet (A. 58.)

blank 1 1. dedication in French verso blank 1 1. |
dedication in English verso blank 1 1. preface |

(French) pp. ix-x, preface (English) pp. xi-xii,
index pp. xiii-xiv, half-title verso blank 1 1.
text (printed on one side only) 11. 17-116, 12°.
The Lord’s prayer in Chepewyan, 1. 32.
Title from Mr. Wilberforce Eames, from copy
belonging to Mr. E. P. Vining, Brookline, Mass.

For title of the second edition see in the Ad-

denda, p. 1138.
Applegate Creek. See Nabiltse.
Arivaipa Apache. See Apache.

Arny (Gov. W. F. M.)
the Navajo language.
Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected
on the Navajo reservation in New Mexico,
November, 1874, with the assistance of Prof.
Valentine Friese and Rey. W. B. Truax.
Recorded on one of the forms (no. 170) of the
Smithsonian Institution. containing 211 words,
equivalents of all of which are given in Navajo.

Vocabulary of

Arny (W. I. M.) — Continued.

This manuscript was referred, Dec. 26, 1874,
to Dr. Trumbull for inspection, and was
returned by him with the recommendation that,
after certain changes in the phonetic notation,
it be published by the Institution.

Astor: This word following a title or within paren-

theses after a note indicates that a copy of the
work referred to has been seen by the compiler
in the Astor Library, New York City.

Athapascan. Vocabulary of the lan-

guage spoken by the Indians of Cook’s
Inlet Bay.
Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on both
sides, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.
Contains 60 words.

Athapascan:

General discussion See Bastian (P. W. A.)
General discussion Buschmann (J. C. E.)
General discussion Campbell (J.)
General discussion Gabelentz (H. G. C.)
General discussion Keane (A. H.)
General discussion Scouler (J.)
General discussion Trumbull (J. H.)
Geographic names Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Grammatic comments Dorsey (J. 0.)
Grammatic comments Gallatin (A.)
Grammatic comments Grasserie (R. de la).
Proper names Catlin (G.)

Proper names Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Relationships Dorsey (J. O.)
Sentences Petitot (E. F.8.J.)
Sylabary Morice (A. G.)

Gallatin (A.)
Latham (R. G.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Tribal names
Tribal names
Tribal names

Vocabulary Athapascan.
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Words Brinton (D.G.)
Words Daa (L. K.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Hearne (S.)
Words Kovar (E.)
Words Lubbock (J.)
Words Pott (A. F.)

See also Chippewyan; Montagnais; Tinné.

Atna. See Ahtinne.

Authorities:

See Dufossé (E.)
Field (T. W.)
Latham (R. G.)
Leclere (C.)
Ludewig (H. E.)
McLean (J.)
Pilling (J. C.)
Pott (A. F.)
Quaritch (B.)
Sabin (J.)
Steiger (E.)
Triibner & Co.
Trumbull (J. H.)
Vater (J.S.)

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

5

Azpell (Dr. Thomas F.) Vocabulary of | Azpell (T. F.) — Continued.

the Hoopa language.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washing-
ton, D.C. Recorded at Camp Gaston, Califor-
nia, Aug. 14, 1870, on Smithsonian form no. 170.

The printed form contains blanks for 211

words, all of which are given, and in addition a |

few other words and about 25 phrases and sen-
tences. In transmitting the manuscript Dr.
Azpell writes as follows:

Camp GASTON, Hoopa VALLEY, CAL.,

Aug. 14th, 1870.
Secretary of Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, D. C.:

Sm: I have the honor to enclose herewith the |

vocabularies of the Noh-tin-oah (or Hoopa) and
Sa-ag-its (or Klamath) tribes of Indians.

I have adhered as closely as possible to the
orthography given in the Smithsonian instruc-

tions, with the single exception of substituting |

the Greek x for ‘‘kk”’ in representing the

B.

Baer (Karl Ernst von). Statistische und
ethnographische Nachrichten | iiber |
die Russischen Besitzungen | an der |
Nordwestkiiste von Amerika, | Gesam-
melt | von dem ehemaligen Oberver-
walter dieser Besitzungen, | Contre-
Admiral v, Wrangell. | Auf Kosten der
Kaiserl. Akademie der Wissenschaften |
herausgegeben | und mit den Berech-
nungen aus Wrangell’s Witterungs-

beobachtungen | und andern Zusiitzen |

vermehrt | von | K. E. y. Baer. |

St. Petersburg, 1839. | Buchdruckerei
der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissen-
schaften,

Forms vol. 1 of Baer (K. E. von) and Helmer-
sen (G. von), Beitriige zur Kenntniss des Russ-
ischen Reiches, St. Petersburg, 1839, 8°.

Short comparative vocabulary of the Atna,
Ugalenzen, and Koloschen, p. 99.—Comparative

vocabulary of the Aleut, Kadjack, Tschugut- |

schen, Ugalenzen, Kenaier, Atnaer of Copper
River, Koltschanen of Copper River, and
Koloschen of Sitka, p. 259 (folding sheet).

Balbi (Adrien). Atlas | ethnographique
du globe, | ou | classification des peu-
ples| anciens et modernes|d’aprés leurs
langues, | précédé | d@’un discours sur

Vutilité et Vimportance de l’étude des |

langues appliquée 4 plusieurs branches
des connaissances humaines; d’un
aperg¢u | sur les moyens graphiques em-

guttural aspirate, which letter I think repre-
sents the sound better.

The syllabic sounds have been carefully com-
pared in the pronunciation of several Indians
of each tribe, and I am able to hold communica-
tion with them by reading off the words as I
have written them, which seems to prove their
accuracy. °

The Indian languages in this vicinity are
rapidly becoming corrupted by contact with
the white man, the younger Indians speaking
in a different dialect from the elder ones, and
probably in a generation or two will be no
longer recognizable. Knowing this to be the
case, I have endeavored to get the most cor-
rect pronunciation from the older Indians, and
this, being very tedious, must be my apology
for seeming delay and also for writing the two
tribes on one form, as I have spoiled one by
pencil marks.

Very respectfully, your ob’t serv’t,
T. F. AZPELL,
Asst. Surg. U.S.A.

Balbi (A.) — Continued.

ployés par les différens peuples de la
terre; @un coup-d’cweil sur histoire |

de la langue slave, et sur la marche pro-
gressive de la civilisation | et de la lit-
térature en Russie, | avee environ sept
cents vocabulaires des principaux idi-
omes connus, | et suivi| du tableau
physique, moral et politique | des cing
parties du monde, | Dédié a 8. M. ?Em-
pereur Alexandre; par Adrien Balbi, |

ancien professeur de géographie, de
physique et de mathématiques, | mem-
bre correspondant de lAthénée de Tré-
vise, etc. etc. | [Design. ] |

A Paris, | Chez Rey et Gravier, li-
braires, Quai des Augustins, N° 55. |
M.DCCC.XXVI [1826]. | Imprimé chez
Paul Renouard, Rue Garenciére, N° 5.
F.-S.-G. ;

Half-title 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication
2. table synoptique 1 1. text plates i-xli (single
and double), table plates xlii-xlvi, additions
plates xlvii-xlix, errata 1 p. folio.

Plate xxxii, Langues du plateau central de
VAmérique du Nord, embraces the Apaches,
with a list of the principal divisions.—Plate
xxxili, Région Missouri-Columbienne, em-
braces the Sussee.—Plate xxxiv, Langues de la
région Alléghanique et des lacs, embraces the
Tacoullies.—Plate xxxv, Langues de la céte
occidentale de ! Amérique du Nord, includes
the Kinaitze.—Plate xli, Tableau polyglotte des
langues américaines, includes a yocabulary of

6

Balbi (A.) — Continued.

26 words of the Sussee, Cheppewyan, Tacoullies
or Carriers, and Kinai.

Oopies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con-
gress, Watkinson, Wellesley.

Bancroft: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy
of the work referred to has been seen by the
compiler in the library of Mr, H. H. Bancroft,
San Francisco, Cal.

Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native
races | of | the Pacific states | of |
North America. | By | Hubert Howe
Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild tribes[-V.
Primitive history]. |

New York: | D. Appleton and com-
pany. | 1874[-1876].

5 vols. maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild
tribes; II. Civilized nations; III. Myths and

languages; IV. Antiquities; V. Primitive his-
tory.

Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875.

Chapter 2 of vol. 3 (pp. 574-603) includes a
general discussion of the Tinneh family, with
examples, pp. 583-585. — Chepewyan declen-
sions, pp. 585-586.—Partial conjugation of the
verb yaws’ thee, to speak, p.586,—General dis-
cussion of the Kutchin and Kenai, with exam-
ples, pp. 586-588; of the Atnah, with a short
vocabulary, pp. 589-590; of the Kenai, with
examples, pp. 590-591; of the Tacullies, with
examples, pp. 591-593.—Numerals 1-10 of the
Tolewah, Hoopah, and Wi-lackee, p. 593.—
General discussion of the Apache and Navajo,
with examples (from Cremony), pp. 593-597,.—
Conjugation of the Apache verbs to be, to do, to
eat, to sleep, to love, and numerals 1-2000, pp.
597-600.—Apache sentences, p. 600.—Speech of
Gen. Carleton in Apache, with interlinear Eng-
lish translation, pp. 600-602.—Lord’s prayer in

Lipan (from Pimentel), p. 602.--Comparative |
vocabulary of 11 words of the Apache, Apache

Coppermine, Atnah, Beaver, Chepewyan, Dog-
rib, Hoopah, Inkilik, Inkalit, Kenai, IKolt-
shane, Kutchin, Kwalhioqua, Loucheux, Nav-
ajo, Northern Indian, Apache Pinaleiio, Sursee,
Tacully, Tenan Kutchin, Tlatskanai, Ugalenze,
Umpqua, Unakatana, Xicarilla, Apache Mes-
calero, p. 603.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, Brit-
ish Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames, Powell.

The | native races | of | the Pacific

states | of | North America. | By | Hu- |

bert Howe Bancroft | Volume I. | Wild
tribes[-V. Primitive history]. |

‘Author’s Copy, | San Francisco, 1874

[-1876].
5 vols. 8°. Similar, except on title-page, to
previous editions. One hundred copies issued.
Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Con-
gress.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued.

Tn addition to the above the work has beeti
issued with the imprint of Longmans, London;
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig;
none of which have I seen.

The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban-
croft. | Volume I[-V]. | The native
races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes[-V. Primi-
tive history]. |

San Francisco: | A. L. Bancroft &
company, publishers. | 1882.

5 vols. 8°. This series includes the History of
Central America, History of Mexico, etc., each
with its own system of numbering and also
numbered consecutively in the series.

Of these works there have been published
vols. 1-89. The opening paragraph of vol. 39
gives the following information: ‘‘ This volume
closes the narrative portion of my historical
series; there yet remains to be completed the
biographical section.”

Copies seen: Bancroft, British
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress.

Museun,

. Baptismal card:
Chippewyan
Barnhardt (W.H.) Comparative vocab-
ulary of the languages spoken by the
“Umpqua,” ‘‘Lower Rogue River,”
and Calapooia tribes of Indians.

Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves (recto of
the first and verso of the last blank), folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Re-
corded in May, 1859.

Each vocabulary (of which only the Umpqua
is Athapascan) contains 180 words, those con-
stituting the standard vocabulary compiled by
the Smithsonian Institution. The vocabulary
is followed by the ‘rules adopted in spelling.”

There is a copy of this manuscript, 4 ll. folio,
made by its compiler, in the same library, and
also a copy of the Umpqua (6 11. folio), aecord-
ing to the original spelling in one column and a
revised spelling in a second. The latter copy
was made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs.

Barreiro (Antonio). Ojeada | sobre
Nuevo-México, | que da una idea | de
sus producciones naturales, y de algu-
nas otras | cosas que se consideran
oportunas para mejorar | su estado, é ir
proporcionando su futura felicidad. |
Formada | por el lic. Antonio Barreiro,
| asesor de dicho territorio. | A peti-
cion | del escmo. sefior ministro que fué
de justicia don | José Ignacio Espinosa.
| Y dedicada | alescmo. setior vice-pres-
idente de los Estados Uni- | dos Mexi-
canos don Anastacio Bustamente. |

Puebla: 1832. | Imprenta del ciuda-
dano José Maria Campos, esquina | de
la Carniceria numero 13,

See Church.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 7

Barreiro (A.) — Continued.
Title verso blank 1 1. dedication 1 1. text pp.

5-42, statistics 2 I. apéndice half-title and pp. |

2-10 of text, sm. 4°.

Ten Nabajoe words and expressions, p. 10 of |

apéndice.
Copies seen: Congress.

Bartlett (John Russell).
the Apache language.

In Whipple (A. W.) and others, Explorations
and surveys, p. 85, Washington, 1855, 4°.

Consists of 25 words used in comparison with
other languages of the same stock, the other
vocabularies being taken from printed sources.

Vocabulary of the Coppermine
Apache (Mimbreno) language.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, written
on one side only, folio, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. ‘‘ Obtained by Mr. Bart-
lett from Mancus Colorado, chief of the Copper-
mine Apaches, July, 1851. The language
abounds in gutturals. Mr. Turner identified it
as of the Chipewyan stock.”

The vocabulary is recorded on one of the
Smithsonian forms of 180 English words, equiv-
alents of about 150 of which are given. Itisa
copy by Dr. Gibbs. The whereabouts of the
original I do not know.

Jobn Russell Bartlett, author, born in Proy-
idence, R.I., 23 Oct., 1805, died there 28 May,
1886. Hewas educated fora mercantile career,
entered the banking business at an early age,
and was for six years cashier of the Globe bank
in Providence. His natural bent appears to
have been in the direction of science and belles-
lettres, for he was prominent in founding the
Providence athenztmn and was an active mem-
ber of the Franklin society. In 1837 he engaged
in business with a New York house, but was
not successful, and entered the book-importing
trade under the style of Bartlett & Welford.
He became a member and was for several years
corresponding secretary of the New York his-
torical society, and was a member of the Amer-
ican ethnographical society. In 1850 President
Taylor appointed him one of the commissioners
to tix the boundary between the United States
and Mexico under the treaty of Guadaloupe
Hidalgo. This service occupied him until 1853,
when he was obliged to leave the work incom-
plete, owing to the failure of the appropriation.
He became secretary of state for Rhode Island
in May, 1855, and held the office until 1872. He
had charge of the John Carter Brown Library
in Providence for several years, and prepared
a four-volume catalogue of it, of which one
hundred copies were printed in the highest
Style of the art.—A ppleton’s Cyclop. of Am.Biog.

Bastian (Philipp Wilhelm Adolf). Eth-
nologie und vergleichende Linguistik.

In Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, vol. 4 (1872), pp.
137-162, 211-231, Berlin [n,d.], 8°.

Vocabulary of

| Bastian (P. W. A.) — Continued.

Contains examples in and gramimatic com
ments upon a munber of American languages,
among them the Athapaskan, p. 230.

Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford’s | com-

pendium of geography and travel |
based on Hellwald’s ‘ Die Erde und ihre
Volker’ Central America | the West In-
dies and | South America | Edited and
extended | By H. W. Bates, | assistant-
secretary of the Royal geographical
society; | author of ‘The naturalist on
the river Amazons’ | With | ethnolog-
ical appendix by A. H. Keane, B, A. |
Maps and illustrations |

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char-
ing cross, S. W. | 1878

Half-title verso blank 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp.
vii-xvi, list of illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of
maps p.xix, text pp. 1-561, index pp. 563-571,
maps, 8°.

Keane (A. H.), Ethnography and philology of
America, pp. 443-561.

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress,
Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum.
Stanford’s | Compendium of geogra-
phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s
‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central
America | the West Indies | and | South
America | Edited and extended | By H.
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines. ]
| With | ethnological appendix by A.
H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra-
tions | Second and revised edition. |

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char-
ing cross, S. W. | 1882.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1
1. preface pp. v—vi, contents pp.vii-xvi, list of
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix,
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp.
563-571, maps, 8°.

Linguistics as under previous title, pp.443-561.

Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard.

— Stanford’s | Compendium of geogra-

phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s
‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central
America | the West Indies | and | South
America | Edited and extended | By H.
W. Bates, | assistant-secretary [&c.
two lines.] | With | ethnological ap-
pendix by A. H. Keane, M. A. I. | Maps
and illustrations | Third edition |

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char-
ing cross, S. W. | 1885

Collation and contents as in second edition,
title and description of which are given above.

Copies seen: Geological Survey.

8

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Beach (William Wallace). The | Indian |

miscellany ;| containing | Papers on the
History, Antiquities, Arts, Languages, |
Religions, Traditions and Superstitions
jot | the American aborigines; | with |
Descriptions of their Domestic Life,
Manners, Customs, | Traits, Amuse-
ments and Exploits; | travels and ad-
ventures in the Indian country; | Inci-
dents of Border Warfare; Missionary
Relations, ete, | Edited by W. W.
Beach. |

Albany: | J. Munsell, 82 State street.
| 1877.

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank
1 l.advertisement verso blank 1 1. contents pp.
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata 1 p. index pp. 479-
490, 8°.

Gatschet (A. 8.), Indian languages of the |

Pacific states and territories, pp. 416-447.

Copies seen; Astor, Brinton, British Museum,
Congress, Kames, Geological Survey, Massachu-
setts Historical Society, Pilling, Wisconsin His-
torical Society.

Priced by Leclerc, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20
fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25;
priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271,
$3.50, and by Littlefield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4.

Beadle (J. H.) The | undeveloped West;

| or, | five years in the territories: |
| being | a complete history of that vast
region be- | tween the Mississippi and
the Pacific, | its resources, climate, in-
habitants, natural curiosities, ete.,
etc. | Life and adventure on | prairies,
mountains, and the Pacific coast.) With
two hundred and forty illustrations,
from original | sketches and photo-
graphic views of the scenery, | cities,
lands, mines, people, and curi- | osities
of the great West. | By J. H. Beadle, |
western correspondent of the Cincin-
nati Commercial, and author | of ‘ Life
in Utah,” etce., ete. |

Issued by subscription only [&e. two |

lines.] | National publishing company,

| Philadelphia, Pa.; Chicago, I1.;
Cincinnati, Ohio; | and St. Louis, Mo.
[1873.]

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. 15-16,
list of illustrations pp. 17-22, contents pp. 23-
32, text pp. 33-823, map, plates, 8°.

Short vocabulary, Navajo, Mexican-Spanish,
and English, p. 545.—Numerals 1-20 of the
Navajo, p.545.—Navajo words passim.

Copies seen: Boston Athenzeum, Congress.

There is an edition, with title but slightly
ditferent from the above, except in the imprint,

which reads; Published by | the National pub-

Beadle (J. H.) — Continued,
lishing co., | Philadelphia, Pa., Chicago, Tl.,
and St. Louis, Mo. (Brooklyn Public, Con-

gress.)
Beaver:
Bible, Mark See Garrioch (A. C.)
Bible passages Garrioch (A. C.)
Catechism Bompas (W.C.)
Catechism Garrioch (A. C.)
Hymns Bompas (W. C.)
Hymns Garrioch (A. C.)
| Prayer book Bompas (W. C.)
| Prayer book Garrioch (A. C.)
Prayers Bompas (W. C.)
Primer 3ompas (W.C.)
| Ten commandments Garrioci (A. C.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
| Vocabulary Bompas (W. C.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Vocabulary Garrioch (A. C.)
Vocabulary Howse (J.)
Vocabulary Kennicott (R.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary M’Lean (J.)
Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.)
Words Daa (L. K.)

Beaver Indian primer, See Bompas (W.
(G5)

Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). Physikal-
ischer Atlas. | Geographische Jahrbuch
| zur Mittheilung aller wichtigern neuer
Erforschungen | von| Dt. Heinrich Berg-
haus, | 1851/| IIT. | Inhalt: | [&e. twen-
ty-three lines in double columns. ] |

Gotha: Justus Perthes. [1851.]

Title verso blank 1 1, text pp. 1-66, 3 plates,
4°.

Ueber die Verwandtschaft der Schoschonen,
Komantschen und Apatschen, pp. 48-62, con-
tains general comments on the Apache language
and its relations to the others mentioned, but
gives no examples.

Copies seen: Congress.

Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik), The Lord’s
Prayer | in the | Principal Languages,
Dialects and | Versions of the World, |
printed in | Type and Vernaculars of
the | Different Nations, | compiled and
published by | G. F. Bergholtz. |

Chicago, Illinois, | 1884.

Title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. 3-7,
preface p. 9, text pp. 11-200, 12°.

Lord’s prayer in Chipewyan (from Kirkby),
p. 37; Slavé (from Bompas), p. 169.

Copies seen: Congress.

Bible:
Genesis Taculli See Morice (A. G.)
New test. Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
New test. Tukudh M’Donald (R.)
Matthew Slave Reeve (W, D.)

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 9

Bible — Continued.

Mark Beaver Garrioch (A. C.)
Mark Slave Reeve (W. D.)
Mark Tinné Kirkby (W. W.)
John Tinné Kirkby (W. W.)
Gospels Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
Gospels Slave Bompas (W. C.)
Gospels Tukudh M’ Donald (R.)
John i-iii Tukudh M’ Donald (R.)

Bible history:

Montagnais See Legoff (L.)
Tukudh M’Donald (R.)

Bible lesson:
Déné See Faraud (H. J.)

Bible passages:
Beaver See Garrioch (A. C.)
Chippewyan Church.
Déné Grouard (E.)
Hudson Bay British.
Slave British,
Slave Gilbert & Rivington.
Tinné American.
Tinné Bible Society.
Tinné Bompas (W.C.)
Tinné British.
Tinné Gilbert & Rivington.
Tukudh American.
Tukudh Bible Society.
Tukudh Bompas (W. C.)
Tukudh British.
Tukudh Church.
Tukudh Gilbert & Rivington.

Bible Society. Specimen verses | in 164
| Languages and Dialects | in which
the | holy scriptures , have been printed
and circulated by the | Bible society.
| [Design and one line quotation. } |
Bible house, | Corner Walnut and
Seventh Streets, | Philadelphia. [1876?]
Cover title as above verso advertisement, no
inside title, text pp. 3-29, index pp. 40-41, his-
torical sketches etc. pp. 4246 and cover, 18°.
St. John, iii, 16, in Tinné (syllabic characters),

p. 36.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

—— Specimen verses | in 215 | languages
and dialects | in which the | holy serip-
tures|have been printed and circulated
by the | Bible society. | [Design and
one line quotation. ] |

Bible house, | corner Walnut and
Seventh streets, | Philadelphia. | Craig,
Finley & co., prs, 1020 Arch st. Philada.
[1878 ?]

Printed covers (title as above on the front
one), no inside title, contents pp. 1-2, text pp.
3-48, 16°.

St.John, iii, 16, in Tukudh (Loucheux In-
dians), p. 26; Chippewyan or Tinné (syllabic
characters), p. 27. The so-called ‘‘ Chippe-
wyan’ in roman on p. 27 is really Chippewa.

Copies seen; Pilling.

Bible Society — Continued.

Some copies have slightly variant title
(Eames); others have the title printed in a dif-
ferent type and omit the line beginning with
the word ‘‘Craig.’’ (Hames.)

Bollaert (William). Observations on the
Indian Tribes of Texas. By William
Bollaert, F. R. G.S.

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 2,
pp. 262-283, London, n. d. 8°.

A few words in the Lipan language, pp. 278-
279.

[Bompas (Bishop William Carpenter). ]
Beaver Indian primer.

Colophon: London: Gilbert & Rivy-
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St.
John’s Square. [187-2]

No title-page, heading only; text (with head-
ings in English) pp. 1-36, 16°. Printed for the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

Lord's prayer, creed, general confession, com-
mandments, pp. 1-2.— Catechism, pp. 3+—
Prayers, pp. 5-7.—Lessons, pp. 8-11.—Texts, p.
11.—Lessons 1-26, pp.11-24.— Hymns (double
columns), pp. 25-30.— Vocabulary (alphabet-
ically arranged by English words, double col-
umns), pp. 31-36.

Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

[——] Chipewyan primer.

Colophon: London: Gilbert & Riv-
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St.
John’s Square. [187-?]

No title-page, heading only; text (with Eng-
lish headings) pp. 1-36, 16°. Printed for the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

Lessons 1-24, pp. 1-9.—Lord’s prayer, creed,
commandments, prayers, etc., pp. 9-13.—Les-
sons 1-41, pp. 13-32.—Hymns (double columns),
pp. 33-36.

Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

[——] Dog Rib primer.
Colophon: London: Gilbert & Riv-

ington, Whitefrairs Street, and St.
John’s Square. [187-?]

No title-page, heading only; text (with head-
ings in English) pp. 1-22, 16°. Printed for the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

Lord's prayer, morning prayer, creed, com-
mandments, confession, prayers, etc., pp. 1-6.—
Scripture texts, pp. 6-16.—Hymns (double col-
umns), pp. 17-22.

Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

{[——] Tinné primer.
Colophon: London: Gilbert & Riv-
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St.
John’s Square, [187-?]

10

Bompas (W. C.) — Continued.

No title-page, heading only; text (with head-
Printed for the

Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

ings in English) pp. 1-76, 16°,

Texts on scripture subjects, prayers, ete., pp.
1-37.—Catechism, pp. 37-40.—Creed, command-
ments, prayers, ete., pp. 40-48.—Catechism, pp.
48-55.—Creation, patriarchs, ete., pp. 55-65,.—
Hymns (double columns), pp. 67-76.

Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

[——] Tukudh primer.

Colophon: London: Gilbert & Riv-
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St.
John’s Square. [187-?]

No title-page, heading only; text (with Eng-
lish headings) pp. 1-55, 16°. Printed for the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

Scripture lessons, prayers, commandments,

gospels, collects, catechism, ete., pp. 1-51.— |

Hymns (double columns), pp. 52-55.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

[——] Manual of devotion, | in the | Bea-

ver Indian Dialect. | Compiled from the
manuals of the venerable | archdeacon
Kirkby, | by the | bishop of Athabasca.
| For the use of the Indians | in the |
Athabasea diocese, | [Seal of the soci-
ety.] |

London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, | Northumber-

‘land avenue, Charing cross; | 48, Queen

[

Victoria street; and
[1880. ]

Title verso syllabarium 1 1. text (in syllabic
characters with English headings in roman)
pp. 3-48, 24°.

Hymns nos. 1-21, pp. 3-24.—Prayers, pp. 25-

48, Piccadilly.

37.—Catechism, pp. 37-43.—Lessons nos, 1-7, pp. |

44-48.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

See Garrioch (A.C.) for another edition of
this work.

] The four gospels, | translated into

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

| Bompas (W. C.) — Continued.

—_—<

the | Slavé language, | for the Indians |

of north-west America. | By the |
Right Rev. The bishop of Athabasca. |

London: | printed for the British and |

foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria
street. | 1883.

Title verso printers 1 1. contents verso blank
11. text in roman characters pp. 1-282, 169°.

Matthew, pp. 1-84.—Mark, pp. 85-134.— Luke,
pp. 135-221.—John, pp. 222-282.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Pilling, Wellesley.

Colonial Church Histories. | Diocese
of Mackenzie river. | By right reverend
| William Carpenter Bompas, D.D. |
bishop of the diocese. | With map. |
Published under the direction of the
Tract committee. |

London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, | Northumber-
land avenne, Charing cross, W. C.; |
43, Queen Victoria street, KE. C.; |
Brighton: 135, North Street. | New
York: KE. & J. B. Young & co. | 1888.

Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1
1. text pp. 1-108, map, 16°.

In some copies the author’s name is mis-
printed Bompus.

Chapter v, Languages (pp. 51-58), consists of
general remarks on the three languages within
the Tukudh, and Western
Esquimaux—and gives in each St. John, iii, 16,
p.55, and the Lord’s prayer, pp. 57-58.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

diocese — Tenni,

{[——] Words of the Chipewyan Indians

of Athabasca, arranged according to
Dr. Powell’s schedules [in the Intro-
duction to the study of Indian lan-
guages, second edition ].

Manuscript, 10 pages, 4°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in the
early part of 1890.

Tn transcribing this material Bishop Horden
has given the Chipewyan words only, using
the numbers given in Powell's Introduction in
lieu of the English words there given. Some
at least of the words in each of the 29 schedules
in the Introduction are given, in some cases—
those of the shorter schedules—equivalents of
all the words being given, the vocabulary as a
whole embracing about 800 words, phrases, and
sentences.

The manuscript is clearly written, three
columns to a page.

[——] Vocabulary of the language of the
Tene Indians of Mackenzie River,

being a dialectic variety only of the
Chipewyan language, with the same
linguistic structure.

Manuscript, 11 pages, 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D,C. Re-
corded in the early part of 1890.

The vocabulary proper consists of about 2,000
words, alphabetically by English
words, and is followed by the numerals, adverbs
of time, place, and quantity, conjunetions,
prepositions, interjections, pronouns, verbs,
with conjugations.

arranged

— See Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas

(W. C.)
Mr. Bompas, a son of the late C.C. Bompas,
esq., sergeant-at-law, was born in London, Eng-

Boston Athenzum: These words following a title

Boston Public: These words following a title or

ATHAPASCAN

Bompas (W. ©.)—Continued
land, in 1834. Having been first trained to the |
legal profession, he was ordained deacon by the
then Bishop of Lincoln in 1859. After serving
several curacies in the diocese of Lincoln, he
came to Canada as a missionary of the Church
missionary society in 1865, having first received
priestly orders from the present Bishop of
Rupert's Land acting as commissary for the late
Bishop of London. In 1874 he was again sum-
moned to England to receive episcopal orders
as Bishop of Athabasea, and in 1884, the pres-
ent diocese of Mackenzie being portioned off
from that of Athabasca, his title was changed
to Bishop of Mackenzie River, the Right Rey.
Dr. Young being consecrated as Bishop of Ath-
abasca.

He has written and published material in the
Algonquian languages, as well as a primer in
Eskimo.

or within parentheses after a note indicate that |
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by
the compiler in the library of that institution,
Boston, Mass.

within parentheses after a note indicate that a
copy of the work referred to has been seen by
the compiler in that library, Boston, Mass.

Bourke (Capt. John Gregory). An
Apache campaign | in the Sierra Madre.
| An account of the expedition in pursuit
of the | hostile Chiracahua Apaches in
the | spring of 1883. | By | John G.
Bourke, | Captain Third Cavalry, U.S.
Army, | Author of ‘The Snake Dance |
of the Moquis.” | lustrated |

New York | Charles Scribner’s sons.
| 1886.

Title verso copyright 11. preface pp. iii-iv, list
of illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-112, |
16°. |

Many Apache terms with English definitions |
passim.

Copies seen: Congress.

|

Vesper hours of the stone age. By
John G. Bourke,

In American Anthropologist, vol. 3, pp. 55-
63, Washington, 1890, 8°. (Pilling.)

Contains a number of Apache terms passim.
Notes upon the gentile organization
of the Apaches of Arizona.

In the Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol.
3, pp- 111-126, Boston and New York, 1890, 8°.
(Pilling.)

List of Apache gentes, with English mean-
ings, collected at San Carlos Agency and Fort
Apache, Arizona, in 1881 and 1882, pp. 111-112;
of the Tonto Apaches, p.112; of the Chima-
huevis, p. 118; of the Apache-Yumas, p. 113.—
‘* Parcialidades ”
dero), p. 125.

of the Apaches (from Esecu-

LANGUAGES. Ta

Bourke (J. G.) — Continued.

—— Notes on Apache mythology.

In the Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol.
3, pp. 209-212, Boston and New York, 1890, 8°.
(Pilling.)

Many Apache terms passim.

— Vocabulary of the Sierra Blanca and
Chiracahua dialects of the Apache-
Tinneh family. Ge)

Manuscript in possession of its author. Con-
sists of 2,500 words, ete.. and includes a vocab-
wary of the same language prepared by Lieut.
Wm. G. Elliot, Ninth Infantry.

During the time Captain Bourke was on duty
as aide-de-camp to the late General Crook he
enjoyed exceptionally good opportunities for
compiling an Apache vocabulary, and suce-
ceeded in obtaining and analyzing a number of
complete sentences, prayers, invocations, many
names of animals, plants, places, ete.

Brinley: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy
of the work referred to was seen by the com-
piler at the sale of books belonging to the late
George Brinley, of Hartford, Conn.

Brinton: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Dr, D, G, Brinton, Phila-
delphia, Pa.

| Brinton (Dr. Daniel Garrison). The

language of paleolithic man.

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 25,
pp- 212-225, Philadelphia, 1888, 8°. (Congress.)

General discussion of the Tinné or Athapas-
can language, pp. 214-215.—Terms for J, thou,
man, divinity, in Athapascan, p, 216.—Tinné
words, p. 220.

Issued separately as follows:

—— The language | of | paleolithic man,

| By | Daniel G. Brinton, M. D., | Pro-
fessor of American Linguistics and Ar-
chieology in the University of Pennsyl-
vania. | Read before the American phil-
osophical society, | October 5, 1888. |

Press of MacCalla & co., | Nos. 237-9
Dock Street, Philadelphia. | 1888.

Printed cover as above, title as above verso
blank 1 1. text pp. 8-16, 8°.

Linguistics as under title next above, pp. 5—
Uyi7ie alate

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Essays of an Americanist. | I. Eth-
nologic and Archieologic. | II. Mythol-
ogy and Folk Lore. | III. Graphic
Systems and Literature. | IV. Lin-
guistic. | By | Daniel G. Brinton, A.M.,
M.D., | Professor [&c. nine lines. ] |

Philadelphia: | Porter & Coates, |
1890.

12

Brinton (D. G.) — Continued.

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv,
contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 17-467, index of
authors and authorities pp. 469-474, index of
subjects pp. 475-489, 8°.
some of Dr. Brinton’s more important essays.

The earliest form of human speech as re-
vealed by American tongues (read before the
American Philosophical Society in 1885 and
published in their proceedings under the title
of “The language of palolithic man’’), pp.
390-409.

Comments on the Tinné language, pp. 394-
395.—Tinné words, p. 405,

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling.

. —— The American Race: | A Linguistic

Classification and Ethnographic | De-
scription of the Native Tribes of |
Northand South America. | By | Daniel

G. Brinton, A. M., M. D,, | Professor

[d&c. ten lines. | |

New York: |N. D. C. Hodges, Pub-
lisher, | 47 Lafayette Place. | 1891.

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedication
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix—xil, contents pp.
xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-332, linguistic appendix
pp. 333-364, additions and corrections pp. 365-
368, index of authors pp. 369-373, index of: sub-
jects pp. 374-392, 8°.

A brief discussion of the Athabascans
(Tinné), with a list of divisions of the Atha-
bascan linguistic stock, pp. 68-74.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in
Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. He was
graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jefferson
Medical College in 1861, after which he spent a
year in Europe in study and in travel. On his
return he entered the army, in August, 1862, as
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the
following year he was commissioned surgeon
and served as surgeon-in-chief of the second

division, eleventh corps. He was present at the |

battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and
other engagements, and was appointed medical
director of his corps in October, 1863. In con-
sequence of a sunstroke received soon after the
battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for

active service, and in the autumn of that year he

became superintendent of hospitals at Quincy
and Springfield, Il., until August, 1865, when,
the civil war having closed, he was brevetted
lieutenant-colonel and discharged. He then
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor
of ‘‘The Medical and Surgical Reporter,” and
also of the quarterly ‘‘Compendium of Medical
Science.’ Dr. Brinton has likewise been a
constant contributor to other medical journals,
chiefly on questions of public medicine and
hygiene, and has edited several volumes on
therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the pop-
ular series known as ‘‘ Napheys’s Modern Ther-

apeuties,’”’ which has passed through many
editions. In the medical controversies of the |

A collected reprint of |

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Brinton (D. G.) — Continued,

day, he has always taken the position that med-
ical science should be based on the results of
clinical observation rather than on physiological
experiments. He has become prominent as a
student and a writer on American ethnology,
his work in this direction beginning while he -
was astudent in college. The winter of 1856-57,
spent in Florida, supplied him ‘with material
for his first published book on the subjeet. In
1884 he was appointed professor of ethnology
and archeology in the Academy of Natural
Sciences, Philadelphia. For some years he has
been president of the Numismatic and Anti-
quarian Society of Philadelphia, and in 1886 he
was elected vice-president of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, to
preside over the section on anthropology. Dur-
ing the same year he was awarded the medal
of the Société Américaine de France for his
“numerous and learned works on American
ethnology.” being the first native of the United
States that has been so honored. In 1885 the
American publishers of the ‘‘ lconographie En-
cyclopedia” requested him to edit the first vol-
ume, to contribute to it the articles on ‘‘Anthro-
pology”’ and ‘‘ Ethnology,” and to revise that
on ‘‘ Ethnography,” by Professor Gerland, of
Strasburg. He also contributed to the second
volume of the same work an essay on the ‘‘ Pre-
historic Archeology of both Hemispheres.”
Dr. Brinton has established a library and pub-
lishing house of aboriginal American litera-
ture, for the purpose of placing within the
reach of scholars authentic materials for the
study of the languages and culture of the native
races of America. Each work is the production
of native minds and is printed in the original,
The series, most of which were edited by Dr.
Brinton himself, include ‘‘ The Maya Chron-
icles” (Philadelphia, 1882); ‘‘The Iroquois
Book of Rites’ (1883); ‘The Giiegiience: A
Comedy Ballet in the Nahuatl Spanish Dialect
of Nicaragua” (1883); ‘‘A Migration Legend of
the Creek Indians” (1884); ‘‘The Lenape and
Their Legends” (1885); ‘‘The Annals of the
Cakchiquels”’ (1885). [‘‘ Ancient Nahuatl
Poetry ” (1887); Rig Veda Americanus (1890) ].
Besides publishing numerous papers, he has
contributed valuable reports on his examina-
tions of mounds, shell-heaps, rock inscriptions,
and other antiquities. He is the author of ‘‘ The
Floridian Peninsula: Its Literary History, In-
dian Tribes, and Antiquities’ (Philadelphia,
1859); ‘‘ The Mythsof the New World: A Treat-
ise on the Symbolism and Mythology of the Red
Race of America’ (New York, 1868); ‘‘ The
Religious Sentiment: A Contribution to the
Science and Philosophy of Religion” (1876) ;
‘American Hero Myths: A Study in the Native
Religions of the Western Continent” (Philadel-
phia, 1882); ‘‘Aboriginal American Authors and
their Productions, Especially those in the Native
Languages” (1883); and ‘“‘ A Grammar of the
Cakchiquel Language of Guatemala” (1884).—
Appleton’s Cyclop, of Am, Biog.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Fe

British and Foreign Bible Society—C’td.
—— St. John iii. 16 | in most of the | lan-

British and Foreign Bible Society: These words
following a title or within parentheses after a

note indicate that a copy of the work has been
seen by the compiler in the library of that insti-
tution, 146 Queen Victoria Street, London, Eng.

Britishand Foreign Bible Society. Speci-
mens of some of the languages
dialects | in which | The British
Foreign Bible Society | has printed or
circulated | the holy scriptures.

and
and

Colophon: London: printed by Messrs.
Gilbert & Rivington, for the British and
foreign bible society, Queen Victoria
street, E.C., where all information con-
cerning the society’s work may be
obtained. [18602]

1 sheet, large folio, 28 by 38 inches, 6 columns.

St. John, iii, 16, in 134 langnages, among them
the Tinne (syllabic characters), no. 128.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Pilling, Wellesley.

—— St. John iii. 16 | in some of the | lan-
guages and dialects | in which the |
British & Foreign Bible Society | has
printed or circulated the holy serip-
tures. | [Picture and one line quota-
tion. ] |

London: | printed for the British and
foreign bible society, | By Gilbert &
Rivington, 52, St. John’s Square, E. C.

| 1875.

Title as above verso contents 11. text pp. 8-30,
historical and statistical remarks verso officers
and agencies of the society 11.

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinné (syllabic charae-
ters), p. 29.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Pilling, Wellesley.

Some copies are dated 1868. (*)

The two ‘Specimens’ of 1865? and 1868,

issued by this society and titled in the previous
bibliographies of this series, contain no Atha-
pascan.
—— St. John III. 16 | in some of the |
languages and dialects | in which the |
British and foreign | bible society | has
printed and circulated | the holy serip-
tures. |

London: | British and Foreign Bible
Society, Queen Victoria Street. | Phila-

delphia Bible Society, Cor. Walnut and |

Seventh Sts., | Philadelphia. [1876?]

Cover title verso contents, no inside title,
text pp. 3-80, 16°.

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinné (syllabic charac-
ters), p. 29.

Copies seen: Pilling.

—— Eran, 0rb Joanna, ra. 3ii er. 16.

guages and dialects | in which the |
British & Foreign Bible Society | has
printed or circulated the holy serip-
tures. [Design and one line quotation. ]
| Enlarged edition. |

London: | printed for the British and
foreign bible society, | By Gilbert &
Rivington, 52, St. John’s Square, E.C.

| 1878.

Printed covers (title as above on the front one
verso quotation and notes), no inside title, con-
tents pp. 1-2, text pp. 3-48, 16°.

St. John, iii, 16, inthe Tukudh, p. 26.—Chippe-
wyan or Tinné (syllabic characters), p. 27.
The so-called ‘‘ Chippewyan” version in roman
characters given in this and subsequent edi-
tions is really Chippewa.

Copies seen: American Bible Society, Pilling.

St. John iii. 16 | in most of the | lan-
guages and dialects | in which the |
British & Foreign Bible Society | has
printed or circulated the holy serip-
tures. | [Design and one line quotation. ]
| Enlarged edition. |

London: | printed for the British aud
foreign bible society, | By Gilbert &
Rivington, 52, St. John’s Square, E, C.

| 1882.

Title as above reverse quotation and notes 1
l. contents pp. 1-2, text pp. 3-48, historical and
statistical remarks verso ofticers and agencies
PST Ges

Linguistic contents as in the edition of 1878,
titled next above.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, British Museum, Pilling, Wellesley.

OOpasiist |
TepeBOAOB'b CBALENHATO nocania, | 3 AHABIXS |
BEHKOOPUTANCKIWS HM HNOCTPANHABIM'S | 6u6.0e-
iickuM' oonjectBom®s. | [Design and one line
quotation. ] |

Hevarano 441 OputancKaro MW unoctTpannaro
BuOAeHCK aro | oomectBa, | y Taabdepra m Pu-
puartona (Limited), 52, Cr. Jxones CKseps,
Joujons. | 1885.

Literal translation: The gospel by John, 3d
chapter, 16th verse. | Samples | of the transla-
tions of the holy seripture, | published | by the
British and foreign | bible society. | ‘God's
word endureth forever.” |

Printed for the British and foreign bible |
society, | at Gilbert & Rivington’s (Limited),
52, St. John’s Square, London. | 1885.

Printed covers (title as above on front one
verso quotation and notes), contents pp. 5-7,
text pp. 9-68, 16°.

St. John, iii, 16, in Chippewyan or Tinne (syl-
‘labic characters), Slave, and Tukudh, p. 37,

Copies seen; Pilling,

14

British and Foreign Bible Society—Ct'd.
Ey. St. Joh. iii. 16. | in den meisten
der Sprachen und Dialecte | in welchen
die | Britische und Ausliindische Bibel-
gesellschaft | die heilige Schrift druckt
und yverbreitet. | [Design and one line
quotation.] | Vermehrte Auflage. |

London: Britische und Auslindische
Bibelgesellschaft, | 146 Queen Victoria
Street, E. C. | 1885.

Title as above on cover reverse a quotation,
contents pp. 14, text pp.5-67 (verso of p. 67
notes), remarks, officers, agencies, ete. 3 11. 16°.

St. John, iii, 16,in the Slavé of Mackenzie
River (syHabie and roman), p. 58; Tinne or
Chippewyan of Hudson's Bay (syllabic), p. 63;
Tukudh, p. 64.

Copies seen: Pilling.

In this and the following editions the lan-

guages are arranged alphabetically.
—— St. Jean III. 16, &c. | Spécimens | de
la traduction de ce passage dans la plu-
part | des langues et dialectes | dans
lesquels la | Société Biblique Britan-
nique et Etrangére | a imprimé ou mis
en circulation les saintes écritures. |
[Design and one line quotation. } |

Londres: | Société biblique britan-
nique et étrangeére, | 146, Queen Vic-
toria Street, EE. C. | 1885.

Title on cover as above reverse quotation,
contents pp. 14, text pp. 5-67 (verso of p. 67 ob-
servations), remarks etc. 3 11. 16°.

Linguistic contents as in the German edition
of 1885 titled next above.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-

ety, Pilling.
—— St. John iii. 16,&c. | in most of the |
languages and dialects | in which the |
British and foreign bible society | has
printed or cireulated the holy serip-
tures. [Design and one line quotation. ]
| Enlarged edition, |

London: | the British and foreign
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria

Street, London, E. C, | 1885,

Title as above verso quotation and notes,
contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-67, remarks ete.
verso p. 67 and two following 11. 16°. s

Linguistic contents as in the German edition
of 1885 titled above.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible So-
ciety, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

Some copies, otherwise unchanged, are dated
1886, (Pilling.)

—— St. John iii. 16, &e. | in most of the |
languages and dialects | in which the |
British and foreign bible society | has

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

|

Bureau of Ethnology:

—— Uber | den

AISHS

British and Foreign Bible Society—Ct’d.

printed or circulated the holy serip-
tures. | [Design and one line quota-
tion.] | Enlarged edition. |

London: | the British and foreign
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria
Street, London, E. C. | 1888.

Frontispiece (fac-simile of the Queen's text)
11. title as above verso quotation and notes 1 1.
contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-67, remarks ete.
verso p. 67 and two following 11. 16°.

Linguistic contents as in the German edition
of 1885 titled above.

Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley.

—— St. John iii. 16, &c. | in most of the |

languages and dialects | in which the |
British and foreign bible society | has
printed or circulated the holy serip-
tures. | [Design and one line quotation. ]
| Enlarged edition. |

London: | the British and foreign
bible society, | 146 Queen Victoria
Street, London, E. C. | 1889.

Title as above verso notes ete. 1 1. contents
pp. 38-4, text pp. 5-83, historical sketch ete. 2 11.
16°. :
St. John, iii, 16, in Beaver, p. 10; Chipewyan,
p- 21; Slave (roman and syllabic), p.73; Tinné
(sylabic), p.79; Tukudh, p.79. The so-called
“Tinne,” in roman characters, p, 78, is Chip-
pewa.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Wellesley.

Some copies are dated 1890 (Pilling).

British Museum: These words following a title or

within parentheses after a note indicate that a
copy of the work referred to has been seen by
the compiler in the library of that institution,
London, Eng.

These words following a
title or within parentheses after a note indicate
that a copy of the work referred to has been seen
by the compiler in the library of the Bureau of
Ethnology, Washington, D.C.

Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard). Uber

den Naturlant. Yon Hrn. Buschmann.

In K6nigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,
Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1852, pt. 3, pp.
391-423, Berlin, 1853, 4°.

Contains a few words of Tacullies, Kinai,
Ugalenzisch, and Inkilik.

Issued separately as follows:
Yaturlaut, | von | Joh.
Carl Ed. Buschmann. |

Berlin, | In Ferd, Diimmler’s Verlags-
Buchhandlung. | 1853. | Gedrueckt in
der Druckerei der kéniglichen Akade-
mnie | der Wissenchaften.

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-33, Inhalts-
Ubersicht p. [84], 4°.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames,

Translated and reprinted as follows:

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 15

Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued.
— ‘On Natural Sounds,” by Professor |
J. C. E. Buschmann. Translated by
Campbell Clarke, esq., from the Ab-
handlungen der kéniglichen Akademie
der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1852. |

In Philological Soc. [of London] Proce, vol. 6,
pp. 188-206, London, 1854, 8°.
Verwandtschaft der Kinai-Idiome
des russischen Nordamerika’s mit dem
grossen athapaskischen Sprachstamuine.

In Kénigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,
Bericht aus dem Jahre 1854, pp. 231-236, Berlin,
[1855], 8°.

Comparative vocabulary of 66 words of the |
Kenai-Sprachen (Kenai, Atnah, Koltschanen,
Inkilek, Inkalit, and Ugalenzen), with the |
Athapaskische-Sprachen (Chepewyan, Tahkoli, |
Kutehin, Sussee, Dogrib, Vlatskanai, and Ump- |
qua), on folded sheet facing p. 236.

Der athapaskische Sprachstamm,
dargestelt von Hrn. Buschinann,

In Konigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, Ab-
handlungen aus dem Jahre 1855, pp. 144-319,
Berlin, 1856, 49.

Divisions of the Athapascan family, pp. 156—-
161.—Numerals 1-6 of the Chepewyan and Kut- |
chin, p.163.—Words in the Chepewyan, Tah-
kali, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatskanai, and |
Umpqua, pp. 166-168.— Vocabulary, English and
Chepewyan (from Richardson), pp. 174-177.—A.
few words of the Taeullies (from Mackenzie),
p. 177.— Vocabulary of the Tacullies (from Har-
mon), pp. 177-179.—A few Kutchin words (from
Richardson), p. 179.—Vocabulary of the Dog-
rib (from Richardson), pp. 179-180.—A short
vocabulary of the Umpqua (from Tolnie), p.
180.—A short Chepewyan vocabulary (from
Mackenzie), pp. 180-181.—Chepewyan vocabu-
lary (from Thompson in Dobbs’), pp. 181-182.—

—— Der | athapaskische

A few Chepewyan words (from Archieologia
Americana), p. 182. — Chepewyan vocabulary
(from Richardson), pp. 182-183.—Short vocab-
ulary of the Dogrib (from Richardson), p.183.—
Short comparative vocabulary of the Chepe-
wyan of Thompson, Mackenzie, and Richard-
son, p. 183; of the Chepewyan (from Dobbs,
Mackenzie, and Richardson) and Tacullie |
(from Harmon), p. 184; of the Chepewyan (from |
Thompson) and Tahkali (from Harmon), p. 184;

of the Chepewyan (from Mackenzie) and Tah- |
kali (from Harmon), p.184; of the Chepewyan |
(from Richardson) and 'Tahkali (from Harmon),
p. 184.—Comparative vocabulary of the Chip-

ewyan and Kutchin (Sussee), p. 185; of the

Chepewyan and Dogrib, pp. 185-186; of the

Chepewyan and Umpqua, p. 186; of the Tahkali |
and Kutehin, p. 186; of the Tacullies and Dog-

rib, pp. 186-187; of the Tahkali and Umpqna; |
Kutchin and Dogrib; Sussee and Umpqua; |
Dogrib and Umpqua, p.187; of the Tlatskanai |
and Umpqua, p. 188.—Comparative tables of
words of the Chepewyan, Tahkali (from Har- |

| Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued.

mon), Kutchin, Dogrib, Umpqua, Tlatskanai,
Tahkali (from Hale), Sussee, p. 188-197.—Com-
parative vocabulary in 10 parallel columns of
the Chepewyan of Dobbs, Mackenzie, and
Richardson; Tacullies of Harmon and Hale;
Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatskanai, and
Umpqua, p. 198-209.—Alphabetische und sys-
tematische Verzcichnung zu den Wortverzeich-
nissen der athapaskischen Sprachen, pp. 210-
222.—Comparative tables of words of the Kinai
language of Dawydow, Resanow, Kinaize,
Wrangell, and Lisiansky, pp. 233-245.—Alpha-
betische Verzeichnung zu den Kinai-Wortver-
zeichnissen, pp. 245-249.—Divisions of the Ath-
apaskische and Kinai, p. 260.—Ubersicht der
kinai-athapaskischen Worttafeln, pp. 264-266.—
Alphabetische Verzeichnung zu den Worttafeln
des athapaskischen Sprachstamms, pp. 266-
268.—Comparative vocabulary of the Chepe-
wyan, Tahkali, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlats-
kanai, Umpqua, Navajo, Ticorilla, Kinai, Atnah,
Ugalenzen, Inkilik, Inkalit, Koltschanen, and
Koloschisch, pp. 269-272; of the Chepewyan,
Tahkali, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatskanai,
Umpqua, Navajo, Ticorilla, Kinai, Atnah, Ugal-
enzen, Koltschanen and Koloschisch, pp. 273-
282; of the Chepewyan, Tahkali, Dogrib, Tlats-
kanai, Umpqua, Kinai, Atnah, Ugalenzisch, In-
kilik, Inkalit, Koltschanen, and Koloschisch,
p. 283.—Comparative tables of words from the
above-named languages, pp. 284-312.
Issued separately as follows:

Sprachstamm

| dargestellt | von | Joh. Carl Ed.
Buschmann. | Aus den Abhandlungen
der k6nigl. Akademie der Wissen-

schaften | zu Berlin 1855. |

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Druckerei
der kénigl. Akademie | der Wissen-
schaften | 1856. | In Commission bei I.
Diimim ler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung.

Cover title as above, title as above verso note
1 l.text pp. 149-313, Inhalts-Ubersicht pp. 314—
319, Berichtigungen p. [320], 4°.

Linguistic contents as in original article
titled next above.

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, British Museum,
Hames, Pilling, Trumbull.

Triibner’s catalogue, 1856, no. 639, prices it

6s.; the Fischer copy, catalogue no. 273, brought
lls.; the Squier copy, catalogue no. 142, $1.13;
priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2050, 10 fr.; the
Murpky copy, catalogue no. 2850, brought $2;
priced by Quaritch, no. 30031, 7s. 6d.
Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache
im noérdlichen Mexico und héheren
amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine
Musterung der Volker und Sprachen des
nordlichen Mexico’s und der Westseite
Nordamerika’s von Guadulaxara an bis
zn Kismeer, Von Joh, Carl Ed, Busch-
mann,

16

Buschmann (J. 0. E.)—Continued.
In Kénigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,

Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1854, Zweiter

Supp.-Band, pp. 1-819 (forms the whole vol-
ume), Berlin, 1859, 4°.

General discussion of the Navajo, pp. 293-
298; of the Apache, pp. 298-322.—Comparative
vocabulary (42 words) of the Navajo and Ti-
corilla (from Simpson), p.320.—General diseus-
sion ‘‘ Athapaskischer Sprachstamm,” pp. 322-
323.—Remarks on the Hoopah, with a short vo-
cabulary, pp. 575-576.— Remarks on Hale’s Eth-
nography and Philology, with linguistic classi-
fication of languages, pp. 602-608.—Remarks on
the Atnahs, pp. 690-691.— W ortverzeichniss der
Atnah am Kupferfluss, nach Wrangell, pp.
691-692. Remarks on the Kinai, pp. 695-696,—
Remarks on the Inkilik and Inkalit, pp. 704—
707.—Wortverzeichniss der Inkilik nach Sagos-
kin und Wassiljew, pp.707-708.— W ortverzeich-
niss der Inkalit-Jug-eljnut, nach Sagoskin, p.
708.

Tssued separately as follows:

— Die | Spuren der aztekischen Sprache

| im nérdlichen Mexico | und hoheren
amerikanischen Norden. | Zugleich |
eine Musterung der Vélker und Spra-
chen | des nérdlichen Mexico’s | und der
Westseite Nordamerika’s | von Guadal-
axara an bis zum Hismeer. | Von | Joh.
Carl Ed. Buschmann. |

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck-
erei der Konig]. Akademie | der Wissen-
schaften. | 1859.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. general title of the
series verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank
1 1. abgekurtzte Inhalts-Ubersicht pp. vii-xii,
text pp. 1-713, Hinleitung in das geographische
Register pp. 714-718, geographische Register
pp. 718-815, vermischte Nachweisungen pp. 816—
818, Verbesserungen, p. 819, 4°.

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Maison-
nerve, Quaritch, Smithsonian
Trumbull, Pilling.

Published at 20 Marks. An uncut half-mo-

rocco copy was sold at the Fischer sale, cata-
logue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 2/. 11s.; the latter
prices two copies, catalogue no. 12552, one 21. 2s.
the other 22. 10s.; the Pinart copy, catalogue no.
178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440,
prices it 13 M.50 pf.; priced again by Quaritch,
no. 30037, 20.
— Systematische Worttafel des atha-
paskischen Sprachstamms, aufgestellt
und erliutert von Hrn. Buschmann.
(Dritte Abtheilung des Apache, )

In K@énigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1859, pt. 3, pp.
501-586, Berlin, 1860, 4°.

General discussion, with examples, pp. 501-
519.—Comparative vocabulary. English-Chep-
ewyan (two dialects), Biber (two dialects) and
Siccani (all from Howse), pp, 520-527; of the

Institution,

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued,

Chippewayan and Biber (both from McLean),
pp. 529-531.—General discussion, pp. 531-545,—
Systematische Worttafel des athapaskischen
Sprachstamms, ineluding words of the Apache,
Apachen der Kupfergruben, Atnah, Biber-
Indianer, Chepewyan, Dogrib, Hoopah, Inkilik,
Inkalit, Kinai, Koltschanen, Koloschen, Kut-
chin, Kwalhioqua, Loucheux, Navajo, Northern
Indians, Pinaleiio, Sussee, Sicani, Tahkali oder
Tacnllies, Tlatskanai, Ugalenzen oder Ugal-
achmjut, Umpqua, and Xicarilla, pp. 546-581.
Issned separately as follows:

Systematische Worttafel | des atha-
paskischen Sprachstamms, | aufgestellt
und erliutert | von | Joh. Carl Ed.
Buschmann, | Dritte Abtheilung des
Apache, | Aus den Abhandlungen der
kénigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften
zu Berlin 1859. |

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Druckerei
der kénigl. Akademie | der Wissen-
schaften. | 1860. | In Commission von
F. Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung.

Cover title as above, title as above verso note
11.text pp. 501-581, Inhalts-Ubersicht pp. 582-
585, Bemerkungen p. 586, 4°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen: Astor, Eames, Pilling, Trum-
bull, Watkinson.

Published at 7 M. 80 pf.; a copy at the Fischer

sale, catalogue no. 277, brought 13s.; priced in
the Triibner catalogue of 1882, 38.

Die Vélker und Sprachen im Innern
des britischen Nordamerika’s.

In K6nigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin,
Monatsberichte aus dem Jahre 1858, pp. 465-486,
Berlin, 1859, 8°. (National Museum.)

Mainly devoted to the Athapascan and its

various (divisions.
Das Apache als eine athapaskische
Sprache erwiesen von Hrn,. Buschmann
in Verbindung mit einer systemati-
schen Worttafel des athapaskischen
Sprachstamms. Erste Abtheilung.

In Kénigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, Ab-
handlungen, aus dem Jahre 1860, pp. 187-282,
Berlin, 1861, 4°.

Geschichte der athapaskischen Verwandt-
schaft, pp. 187-202.— Nachrichten iiber die
Vilker, pp. 202-222.—Sprachen, pp. 223-244,—
Wortverzeichnisse, pp. 244-276.

Under the three divisions first named oceurs
a general discussion of the various Athapascan
languages, with comments upon and examples
from the works of Turner, Eaton, Whipple,
Bartlett, Schoolcraft, Henry, and others.
In the last division occur the following:
Comparative vocabulary of the Apache
(from Henry), Navajo (from Eaton), Navajo
(from Whipple), Pinalefio (from Whipple), and
Hoopah (trom Gibbs), pp. 250-261,—Compara-

ATHAPASCAN

LANGUAGES. ne

Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued. Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued.

tive vocabulary of the Apache (from Henry),
Navajo (from Eaton), and Pinaleiio (from
Whipple), pp. 262-269.—Comparative vocabu-
lary of the Navajo (from Eaton), and Pinaleiio
(from Whipple), pp. 269-272.—Vocabulary of
the Coppermine Apache (from Bartlett), p.
272.—Vocabulary of the Xicarilla (from Simp-
son), p. 273.
Issued separately as follows:

Das Apache | als eine athapaskische
Sprache erwiesen | von | Joh. Carl Ed.
Buschmann; | in Verbindung mit einer

| systematischen Worttafel des atha-
paskischen Sprachstamms. | Erste Ab-
theilung. | Aus den Abhandlingen der
kénigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften
zu Berlin 1860. |
Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Druckerei
der kénigl. Akademie | der Wissen-
schaften. | 1860. | In Commission von
F. Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung.
Cover title, title 1 1. text pp. 187-252, 4°.
Linguistic contents as under title next above.
Copies seen: Dunbar, Pilling, Watkinson.

— Die Verwandschafts - Verhaltnisse
der athapaskischen Sprachen darge-
stellt von Hrn. Buschmann, Zweite
Abtheilung des Apache,

C.

Campbell (John). The affiliation of the
Algonquin languages. By John Camp- |
bell, M. A.

In Canadian Inst. Proc. new series, vol. 1, pt. |
1, pp. 15-53, Toronto, 1879, 8°.

Comparison of characteristic forms in Algon-
quin, with the same in neighboring families,
among them the Athapascan.

Issued separately as follows:

— The affiliation of the Algonquin lan-
guages. By John Campbell, M. A., pro-
fessor of church history, Presbyterian
college, Montreal.

[ Toronto, 1879. ]

No title-page, text pp. 1-41, 8°.

Linguistics as under title next above.

Copies seen: Shea.

--— The unity of the human race, consid-
ered from an American standpoint.

In British and Foreign Evangelical Review,
new series, no. 37, pp. 74-101, London, January,
1880, 8°. (Pilling.)

By a copious exhibition and comparison of
grammatical and lexical forms, this article pro-
fesses to discover in America two main families
of speech, and to connect these with the North-

ATH. 2

In Konigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, Ab-
handlungen, aus dem Jahre 1862, pp. 195-252,

3erlin, 1863, 4°.

Die Sprachen zusammen, alle oder mehrere,
pp. 196-208. — Verwandschafts - Verhaltnisse
mit beschrankten Sprachen, pp. 208-226.—Blos
zwei Sprachen vergleichen, pp. 226-236.—Stu-
fenleiter der Verwandschaft der athapaskis-
chen Sprachen, pp. 251-252.

The languages treated are the Apache,
Navajo, Pinaleno, Xicarilla, Hoopah, Chepe-
wyan, Sussee, Tahkali, Tlatskanai, Umpqua,
Kinai, Dogrib, Inkalik, Loucheux, Ugalenzi.

Issued separately as follows:

— Die Verwandschafts - Verhaltnisse
| der athapaskischen Sprachen | darge-
stellt von | Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann.

| Zweite Abtheilung | des Apache. |
Aus den Abhandlungen der kénigl.
Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Ber-
lin 1862. |

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Druckerei
der koénigl. Akademie | der Wissen-
schaften, | 1863. | In Commission bei
F. Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung
| Harwitz und Gossmann.

Cover title, title 1 1. text pp. 195-252, 4°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen; Bancroft, Pilling, Watkinson,

Campbell (J.) — Continued.
ern Asiatic and Malay Polynesian families, re-
spectively. Itabounds in words and sentences
from and remarks concerning the American
languages, among them the Tinneh.

—— Origin of the aborigines of Canada.

In Quebec Lit.and Hist. Soc. Trans. session

1880-1881, pp. 61-93, and appendix, pp. i-xxxiv,
Quebec, 1882, 12°. (Pilling.)

The first part of this paper is an endeavor to
show a resemblance between various families
of the New World and between these and va-
rious peoples of the Old World, and contains
words in several American languages. Com-
parative vocabulary of the Tinneh and Tungus
languages, about 75 words and phrases, pp.
xii-xiv.

Issued separately as follows:

Origin | of the | aborigines of Can-
ada. | A paper read before the Literary
and historical society, | Quebec, | by |
prof. J. Campbell, M. A., | (of Mon-
treal,) | Délégué Général de VInstitu-
tion Ethnographique de Paris. |

Quebec: | printed at the “ Morning
chronicle” office. | 1881,

18

Campbell (J.) — Continued.

Printed cover as above, title as above verso
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text pp.
1-33, and appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 8°, Twenty-five
copies printed.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.
Copies seen: Wellesley.
Asiatic tribes in North America. By
John Campbell, M. A.

In Canadian Inst. Proc. new series, vol. 1, pp.
171-206, Toronto, 1884, 8°.

General comments on the Tinneh family,
with a list of tribes and examples, pp. 172-173,
174-175.— Comparative vocabulary of the Tinneh
and Tungus languages (about 80 words, alpha-
betically arranged by English words), pp. 190-
191.—Numerals 1-10 of the Tinneh compared
with the Peninsular, p. 192.

Issued separately, repaged, as follows:
Asiatic | tribes in North America. |
By John Campbell, M.A., | Professor of
Church History, Presbyterian College,

Montreal.

[Toronto, 1884.]

Half-title reverse blank 1 1.no inside title,
text pp. 3-38, 8°. Extract from the Proceed-
ings of the Canadian Institute.

Linguistics as under title next above, pp. 4—
5, 6-7, 22-23, 24.

Copies seen; Brinton, Pilling, Wellesley.
Canadian Indian. Vol. I. October, 1890,
No. I [-Vol.I. September, 1891. No.
12]. | The | Canadian | Indian | Editors

| rev. E. F. Wilson | H.B. Small. | Pub-

lished under the Auspices of | the Cana-
dian Indian Researchal [sic] | Society
| Contents | [&c. double columns, each
eight lines.] | Single Copies, 20 cents.
Annual Subscription, $2.00. |

Printed and Published by Jno. Ruth-

erford, Owen Sound, Ontario [Canada].
[1890-1891.]

12 numbers: cover title as above, text pp. 1-
356, 8°. A continuation of Our Forest Children,
described elsewhere in this bibliography. The
publication was suspended with the twelfth
number, with the intention of resuming it in
January, 1892. The word ‘‘ Researchal”’ on the
cover of the first number was corrected to
‘‘Research ” in the following numbers.

Wilson (E. F.), A comparative vocabulary,
vol. 1, pp. 104-107.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

Carrier Indians. See Taculli.

Catechism :
Beaver See Bompas (W.C.)
Beaver Garrioch (A. C.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W.W.) and Bom-

pas (W.C.)

Déné Clut (J.)
Deéné Morice (A. G.)

Déné Seguin (—).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Catechism — Continued.

Montagnais Legoff (L.)
Montagnais Perrault (C. 0.)
Montagnais Végréville (V. T.)
Slave Kirkby (W. W.)
Tukudh M’Donald (R.)

Catlin (George). North and South Amer-
ican Indians. | Catalogue | descriptive
and instructive | of | Catlin’s | Indian
Cartoons.| Portraits, types,and customs.

| 600 paintings in oil, | with | 20,000
full length figures | illustrating their
various games, religious ceremonies,
and | other customs, | and | 27 canvas
paintings | of | Lasalle’s discoveries. |

New York: | Baker & Godwin, Print-
ers, | Printing-house square, | 1871.
Abridged title on cover, title as above verso

blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92,
certificates pp. 93-99, 8°.

Proper names with English significations in

a number of American languages, among them
the Navaho, Copper, Athapasea, Dogrib, and
Chippewyan.

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Welles-
ley, Wisconsin Historical Society.

Chapin (Col. G.) Vocabulary of the
language of the Sierra Blanco Apaches.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected
at Camp Goodwin, Arizona, July, 1867.

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms
(no. 170), containing 211 words, equivalents of
about 180 of which are given in the Apache.

There is in the same library a copy (6 11. folio)
of the vocabulary, also made by Dr. Chapin.

Charencey (Comte Charles Félix Hya-
cinthe Gouhier de). Recherches sur les
noms des points de l’espace.

In Académie nationale des sciences, arts et
belles-lettres de Caen, Mém. pp. 217-303, Caen,
1882, 8°.

Terms for the cardinal points of the compass,
with discussion thereon in Peau de Liévre, pp.
236-238; Chippewyan or Montagnais, p. 239;
Dindjie, pp. 289-240.

Issued separately as follows:

Recherches | sur les| noms des points
deVespace | par|M. le Ctede Charencey |
membre [&c. two lines.] | [Design.] |

Caen | imprimerie de F. le Blane-
Hardel | rue Froide, 2 et 4 | 1882

Cover title as above, title as above verso note
11. text pp. 1-86, 8°.

Famille Athabaskane: Peau de Liévre, Chip-
pewyan or Montagnais, and Dindjie, pp. 21-23.

Copies seen: Brinton, Pilling, Wellesley.

Linguistic contents as under title next above,

Chilig Takudh tshah zit. See M’Donald
(R.)

Chin Indians. See Nagailer.

Chipewyan primer.

C.)

Chippewyan:

Baptismal card
Bible, New test.
Bible, four gospels
Bible passages
Catechism
Catechism

See Bompas (W.

See Church.

General discussion

General discussion
General discussion
Grammatic comments
Grammatic comments
Grammatic treatise
Hymn book

Hymns

Hymns

Hymns

Legends
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals
Numerals

Prayer book
Prayer book

Prayers

Prayers

Primer

Proper names

Songs

Syllabary

Syllabary

Ten commandments
Ten commandments
Text

Tribal names
Vocabulary

Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Church.

Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.) and
Bompas (W. C.)
Adelung (J.C.) and

Vater (J.S.)
Dunean (D.)
Taché (A. A.)
Gallatin (A.)
Grandin (—).
Bancroft (H. H.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.) and

Bompas (W.C.)
Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Apostolides (S.)
Bergholtz (G. F.)
Bompas (W. G.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Lord's.

Rost (R.)
Buschmann (J.C.E.)
Classical.

Ellis (R.)

Haines (E. J.)
James (E.)

Kirkby (W. W.)
Pott (A. F.)

Tolmie (W. F.) and |

Dawson (G. M.)
Kirkby (W. W.)

Kirkby (W. W.) and |

Bompas (W.C.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Tuttle (C. Rt.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Catlin (G.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Syllabarium.
Tuttle (C. R.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Anderson (A. C.)
Adelung (J.C.) and

Vater (J.S.)
Anderson (A. C.)
Balbi (A.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Buschmann (J.C.E.)
Gallatin (A.)
Howse (J.)

Jéhan (L. F.)
Kennicott (R.)
Latham (R. G.)
Lefroy (J. H.)
Mackenzie (A.)

19

Chippewyan — Continued.
Vocabulary M'Lean (J.)
Vocabulary McPherson (H.)
Vocabulary Reeve (W. D.)
Vocabulary Richardson (J.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Vocabulary toss (R. B.)
Vocabulary Thompson (E.)
Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Vocabulary Wilson (E. F.)
Words Charencey (H. de).
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Latham (R. G.)
Words Lesley (J. P.)
Words Schomburgk (R. H.)
Words Tolmie (W.F.) and
Dawson (G. M.)
See also Athapascan; Montagnais; Tinné.
| Chiracahua Apache. See Apache.

| Church Missionary Gleaner. Languages

| of N. W. America.

| In Church Missionary Gleaner, no. 90, Lon-
don, 1881, 4°. (Wellesley.)

Contains St. John, iii, 16, in Chippewyan or
Tinné in both roman and syllabie characters,
and in Tukudh.

Reprinted from the British and Foreign Bible
Society’s Specimens, ete.

Church Missionary Society: These words follow-
ing a title or inclosed within parentheses after

a note indicate that a copy of the work referred

to has been seen by the compiler in the library

of that institution, London, England.
Church Missionary Society. | Diocese of

Mackenzie river, | N. W. T. | One lord,

one faith, one baptism. | Matt. xxvin.

19. | Born of Water | and | Of the

Spirit. | Luke xvi. 16. | Name......
| | Baptized by the Rev. -.......-.-. | at
Weeat Ones. ese | Sponsers: 22>
eee | -------- | [Scripture text from
Mark xvi. 16. two lines. ]

{London: Church missionary soci-
ety. 187-2]

Card, 6} by 5 inches, verso picture of bap-
tism. Prepared for use among the Chippewyan
Indians.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.
| —— [One line syllabic characters. ] |
| Chureh Missionary Society. | Diocese
of Mackenzie river, | N. W. T. | [One
line syllabic characters.] | Indian
Namesss sei | Baptized Name......

[PBysthom levers... asco pol eee
18.. | [One line syllabic characters. ]

{London: Church missionary soci-
ety. 187-?]

Card, 4% by 3§ inches, verso picture of bap-
tism. Prepared for use among the Chippewyan

| Indians.
{ Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

20 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Classical. The | classical journal; | for |

| September and December | 1811. | Vol.
IV. | [Two lines quotation in Greek
and a monogrammatic device. ] |

London: | printed by A. J. Valpy, |
Took’s court, Chancery lane; | sold by
| Sherwood, Neely, | and Jones, Pater-
noster row; | and all other booksellers.
[ 1811. ]

Title verso blank 11. contents (of no. vii) pp.
jii-iv, text pp. 1-526, index pp. 527-537, verso p.
537 colophon giving date 1811, 8°.

Numerals 1-10 in Chippewyan (from Mac-
kenzie), p. 116.

Copies seen: Congress.

[Clut (Archbishop J.)] Jésus-Christ
Nupankaunweri, wé dzé panyénik‘etan
| lawalessi unzin awo'lé yéniwen si tta,
dégayé Mokeri | Bare Alaco panniyat-
‘inion ° ekkwaaddi:

[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper.
1888 ? ]

A small card, about 3 by 5 inches in size,
headed as above and containing twelve “ Prom-
ises of Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary”
in the Dog Rib (‘‘ Plats-Cétés ”’) language. On
the reverse is a colored picture of the sacred
heart, with verse in English. Mr. Kemper has
published the same promises on similar cards
in many languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

—— Dené Castor catechism by R. P. J.

Clut, bishop of Erundel. ()

Manuscript in possession of Father Emile
Petitot, Mareuil-les-Meaux, France, who has
kindly furnished me the above title. See
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Coleccion polididmica Mexicana | que
contiene | la oracion dominical | ver-
tida en cincuenta y dos idiomas indi-
genos | de aquella reptiblica | dedicada

4 N.S. P. el sefior Pio IX, pont. max.

| por la | sociedad Mexicana de geo-

gratia y estadistica. | [Vignette.] |
México | libreria de Eugenio Maille-

fert y comp. | esquina del Refugio y

Pte. del Espiritu santo | [Imprenta de |

Andrade y Escalante] 1860
Title verso printers 1 1. text pp. i-vii, 1-52,

folio.

Lord's prayer in the Lipan language, p. 12.
Copies seen; Pilling.

Congress: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a ncte indicates that a copy
of the work referred to has been seen by the
compiler in the Library of Congress, Washing-
ton, D:'C:

Cook’s Inlet Indians. See Kenai.

Copper Indians. See Ahtinné.

Coppermine Apache. See Apache.

Coquille ;

Tribal names See Dorsey (J. 0.)
Vocabulary Abbott (G. H.)
Vocabulary Dorsey (J.0O.)

Coyotero Apache. See Apache.

Crane (Agnes). The Origin of Speech
| and | Development of Language. |
By | Agnes Crane.

[Brighton: J. G. Bishop, Printer,
“Herald” office, 188-?]

Cover title as above verso printer, no inside
title, text pp. 1-48, authorities p. [44], 16°.

. Comments upon and examples in a number of
American languages, among them a few Tinné
words, p. 21.

Copies seen: Wellesley.

Cremony (John C.) Life | among the
Apaches: | by | John C, Cremony, |
interpreter [&c. four lines.] | [Mono-
gram. | |

San Francisco: | A. Roman & com-
pany, publishers. | New York: 27 How-
ard Street. | 1868.

Title verso copyright 1 1. dedication verso
blank 1 ].contents pp. 5-10, preface pp. 11-12,
text pp. 13-822, 12°.

Apache numerals 1-1000, pp. 288-289. — A
short account of the Apache language, with
examples, pp. 289-243.

Copies seen: Geological Survey.

— Vocabulary | of the | Mescalero
Apache | language. | By | John C. Cre-
mony, | capt. U. S. A. | 1863

Manuscript, pp. 1-78, 4°, in the Bancroft
library, San Francisco, Cal.

Vocabulary of words in common use, 352
words, pp. 1-15.—Present, imperfect, and future
tenses, indicative mood, verb to be, p. 16.
Author unable to continue investigation by
reason of the lack of ability on the part of the
interpreter.—Personal pronouns, p.17.—Pres-
ent, imperfect, and future tenses, indicative
mood, and present of subjunctive mood, verb to
do, pp. 18-19.—All the tenses of indicative
mood, part of subjunctive and all of imperative
moods, verb to love, pp. 20-22.—Indicative and
imperative moods, verb to eat, pp. 24-26.—Same
moods, verb to sleep, pp. 26-28.—List of 125
verbs in common use, pp. 28-40.—Vocabulary ot
fifty-four miscellaneous words, pp. 40-44.—
Thirty-eight short phrases in ordinary use, pp.
48-54.—Numerals to 20, irregularly to 100, for
200, 1000, 2000, pp. 56-58.—A pache and Spanish
names of thirty-six men and thirteen women
of the tribe, with signification in English, pp.
60-64.—Mode of bestowing names on persons,
pp. 64-66.—Additional words and phrases, pp.
68-78.

Vocabulary of the language of the
Mescalero Apaches.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered Il. folio, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Obtained

ATHAPASCAN

Cremony (J. C.) —Continued.
by Capt. Cremony at Fort Sumner, Bosque
Redondo, on the Pecos River, N. Mex., in 1863. |
Recorded on one of the blank forms of 180
words issued by the Smithsonian Institution.
The Apache equivalents of about 160 of the
English words are given. This manuscript is
a copy, by Dr. Geo. Gibbs; the whereabouts of
the original, which was forwarded to the Smith-
sonian Institution by Brig. Gen. James H.
Carleton, then commanding the Department of
New Mexico, I do not know.

Crook (Gen. George). Vocabulary of
the Hoopah or Indians of the lower
Trinity river.

Manuscript, 2 leaves, 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D.C.

Consists of about 150 words selected from
those used by the Smithsonian on its blank
form of 180 words.

Vocabulary of the Taluwa language.

Manuscript, 3 umnumbered leaves, folio, in |
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Wash-
ington, D.C.

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms
issued for the collection of American linguis-
tics. The English words given number 180,
and the corresponding blanks in this vocabu-
lary are all filled.

In the same library is a copy of this vocabu-
lary, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs.

George Crook, soldier, was born, near Dayton,
Ohio, Sept. 8, 1828. He was graduated at the
U.S. Military Academy in 1852, and was on
duty with the Fourth Infantry in California in
1852-1861. He participated in the Rogue river
expedition in 1856, and commanded the Pitt
river expedition in 1857, where he was engaged
in several actions, in one of which he was
wounded by an arrow. He had risen to a cap-
taincy, when, at the beginning of the civil war,
he returned to the east and became colonel of
the Thirty-sixth Ohio Infantry. He afterward
served in the West Virginia campaigns, in
command of the Third provisional brigade,
from May 1 to Aug. 15, 1862, and was wounded
in the action at Lewisburg. He engaged in the
northern Virginia and Maryland campaigns in
August and September, 1862, and for his
services at Antietam was brevetted lieutenant-
colonel, U.S. Army. He served in Tennessce
in 1863, and on July 1 he was transferred to the
command of the Second cavalry division. After
various actions, ending in the battle of Chick-
amauga, he pursued Wheeler’s Confederate
cavalry from the 1st to the 10th of October,
defeated it, and drove it across the Tennessee
with great loss. He entered upon the command
of the Kanawha district in western Virginia in
February, 1864, made constant raids, and was
in numerous actions. He took part in Sheri-
dan’s Shenandoah campaign in the autumn of
that year and received the brevets of brigadier-
general and major-general in the U.S. Army,
March 13, 1865. Gen, Crook had command of

LANGUAGES. 21

Crook (G.) — Continued.
the cavalry of the Army of the Potomac from
March 26 till April 9, during which time he was
engaged at Dinwiddie Court-House, Jetters-
ville, Sailor’s Creek, and Farmville, till the sur-
render at Appomattox. He was afterward
transferred to the command of Wilmington, N.
C., where he remained from Sept. 1, 1865, till
Jan. 15, 1866, when he was mustered out of the
volunteer service. After a six weeks’ leave of
absence he was assigned to duty on the board
appointed to examine rifle tactics, was com-
missioned lieutenant-colonel of the Twenty-
third infantry, U.S. Army, on July 28, 1866, and
assigned to the district of Boisé, Idaho, where
he remained until 1872, actively engaged against
the Indians. In 1872 Gen. Crook was assigned
to the Arizona district to quell the Indian dis-
turbances. He sent an ultimatum to the chiefs
to return to their reservations or ‘‘ be wiped
from the face of the earth.” No attention was
paid to his demand, and he attacked them in
the Tonto basin, a stronghold deemed impreg-
nable, and enforced submission. In 1875 he
was ordered to quell the disturbances in the
Sioux and Cheyenne nations in the northwest,
and defeated those Indians in the battle ot
Powder River, Wyoming. In March another
battle resulted in the destruction of 125 lodges,
and in June the battle of Tongue River was a
victory for Crook. A few days later the battle
of the Rosebud gave him another, when the
maddened savages massed their forees and suc-
ceeded in crushing Custer. Crook, on receiving
reénforcements, struck a severe blow at Slim
Buttes, Dakota, and followed it up with such
relentless vigor that by May, 1877, all the hos-
tile tribes in the northwest had yielded. In
1882 he returned to Arizona, forced the Mor-
mons, squatters, miners, and stock-raisers to
vacate the Indian lands which they had seized.
In the spring of 1883 the Chiricahuas began
a series of raids. General Crook struck the
trail, and, instead of following, took it back-
ward, penetrated into and took possession of
their strongholds, and, as fast as the warriors
returned from their plundering excursions,
made them prisoners. He marched over 200
miles, made 400 prisoners, and captured all the
horses and plunder. During the two years fol-
lowing he had sole charge of the Indians, and
no depredation occurred. {He died in Chicago
March 21, 1890.|—Appleton’s Cyclop.of Am.Biog.

Curtin (Jeremiah). [Words, phrases,
and sentences in the language of the

Hoopa Indians, Hoopa Valley, Oregon. |

Manuscript, 101 pp.4°,in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in the Hoopa
Valley, December, 1888-January, 1889. Re-
corded in a copy of Powell’s Introduction to
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition,
pp. 77-102, 105, 109-111, 113-125, 127-130, 132-136,
184-187, 189-228, and 5 unnumbered pages at the
end. Of the schedules given in the work nos.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 18,22, 24. 25, 26, 27, and 28 are

22

Curtin (J.) — Continued.

completely filled, nos. 10, 12, 14, 16,17, 18, 19, 20,
21, and 23 are partly filled, and nos. 9, 11, and 15
are blank.

The alphabet adopted by the Bureau of Eth-
nology is used.

Jeremiah Curtin was born in Milwaukee,
Wis., about 1835. He had little education in
childhood, but at the age of twenty or twenty-
one prepared himself to enter Phillips Exeter
Academy, made extraordinary progress, and
soon entered Harvard College, where he was
graduated in 1863. By this time he had become
noted among his classmates and acquaintances
for his wonderful facility as a linguist. On
leaving college he had acquired a good knowl-
edge of French, Spanish. Portuguese, Italian,
Rumanian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Icelandic,
Gothic, German, and Finnish, besides Greek
and Latin. He had also made considerable
progress in Hebrew, Persian, and Sanskrit, and
was beginning to speak Russian. When Ad-
miral Lissofsky’s fleet visited this country, in
1864, Curtin became acquainted with the officers
and accompanied the expedition on its return
to Russia. In St. Petersburg he obtained
employment as a translator of polyglot
telegraphic dispatches, but he was presently
appointed by Mr. Seward to the office of seere-
tary of the United States legation, and he
held this place till 1868. During this period
he became familiar with the Polish, Bohe-
mian, Lithuanian, Lettish, and Hungarian
languages, and made a beginning in Turk-
ish. From 1868 till 1877 he traveled in east-
ern Europe and in Asia, apparently in the
service of the Russian government. In 1873, at
the celebration at Prague of the 500th anni-
versary of the birth of John Huss, he delivered
the oration, speaking with great eloquence in
the Bohemian language. During his travels in
the Danube country he learned to speak
Slovenian, Croatian, Servian, and Bulgarian.
He lived for some time in the Caucasus, where
he learned Mingrelian, Abkasian, and Arme-
nian. At the beginning of the Russo-Turkish
war in 1877, he left the Russian dominions, and,
after a year in London, returned to his native
country. Since then he has been studying the
languages of the American Indians and has
made valuable researches under the auspices
of Maj. John W. Powell and the Bureau of
Ethnology. He is said to be acquainted with
more than fifty languages.—Appleton’s Cyclop.
of Am. Biog.

Cushing (Frank Hamilton).
lary of the Navajo language.

Manuscript in possession of Mr. A.S. Gat-
schet, Washington, D. C.

Recorded in a folio blank book, on p.46 of
which are twenty-foursentences, and, on p. 73,
twenty-five words and phrases. This isa copy,
made by Mr. Gatschet from the original, which
is in the possession of its compiler.

Vocabu-

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Cushing (1°. H.) — Continued.

See Gatschet (A.S.)

Frank Hamilton Cushing was born in Nortii:
east, Erie County, Pa., July 22,1857. He mani-
fested in early childhood a love for archeolog-
ical pursuits, and at the age of eight years
began to collect fossils and minerals, made a
complete Indian costume, and lived in a bark
hut in the woods. He learned that wherever
Indian encampments had been long established
the soil and vegetation had undergone a change,
which assisted him in his search for relies. At
the age of fifteen he had discovered the process
of making arrow-heads from flint by pressure
with bone. In 1870 his father moved to Medina,
N. Y., where the son’s researches found new
ground. In the town of Shelby were ancient
remains of fortifications, rich in relics, and they,
with ancient burial grounds and camp sites in
Madison and Onondaga counties, were carefully
searched. In the spring of 1875 he became
a student in Cornell University, but later
spent most of his time as assistant to Dr.
Charles Rau in the preparation of the Indian
collections of the National Museum for the Cen-
tennial exposition at Philadelphia, and was
curator of the entire collection until the close
of the exhibition, when he was appointed
curator of the ethnological department of the
National Museum. During the summer of 1876
he gained his first knowledge of the Pueblo
Indians, and in 1879 he joined Maj. J. W.
Powell in his expedition to New Mexico. The
expedition spent two months among the Zuni
Indians, and Mr. Cushing, at his own request,
was left there. During the second year of his
sojourn he had so far made himself one of the
tribe and gained the esteem of the chiefs that
he was formally adopted and initiated into the
sacred esoteric society, the ‘‘ Priesthood of the
Bow.” In 1882 he visited the east with a party
of six Zunhis, who came for the purpose of
taking water from the ‘‘Ocean of Sunrise,” as
a religious ceremony, and carrying it to their
temple in the Pueblos. Four of the Zuiis
returned, while Mr. Cushing remained with the
other two during the summer in Washington,
for the purpose of writing, with their aid, a
paper on Zuni fetiches. In September of the
same year he returned to Zuni; butin the spring
of 1884 failing health obliged his return for two
years to the east. Again he had with him for
some time three of the Zunis, to aid him in the
preparation of a dictionary and grammar of
their language and in translations of myth and
beast stories, songs, and rituals. In 1886 Mr.
Cushing organized the Hemenway Archieolog-
ical Expedition, and as its director discovered
and excavated extensive buried cities in Ari-
zona antl New Mexico; butin 1888 he was again
prostrated by illness. He is now writing con-
tributions for the Bureau of Ethnology on the
relation of primitive drama to creation lore and
other Zuni works.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

D.

| Dall (W. H.)— Continued.

Daa (Ludwig Kristensen). On the affin-
ities between the languages of the
northern tribes of the old and new con-
tinents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of
Christiania, Norway. (Read December
the 20th.)

In Philological Soc. [of London] Trans. 1856,
pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.)

Comparative tables showing affinities be-
tween Asiatic and American languages, pp.
264-285, contain words from many North
Amvrican languages, the Athapascan being as
follows: Athabasca, Beaver, Kutchin, Sikanni,
Tahkali, Navajo, Jecorilla, Tlatskanai, Kinai,
Loucheux, Atnah, Ugalenz, Umkwa, Dogrib,
Navajo, and Apache.

Dall (William Healey). Alaska | and |
its resources. | By | William H. Dall, |
director of the scientific corps of the
late Western union | telegraph expedi-
tion. | [Design.] |

Boston: | Lee and Shepard. | 1870.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright and |

printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. intro-
duction pp. v-viii, contents pp. ix—xii, half-title
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-526, appendix pp.
527-609, index pp. 610-627, notes ete. p. [628],
maps and plates, 8°.

Comparative vocabulary of 26 words and the |

numerals 1-10 of the Ugaléntsi, Ahtena, Kenai-
tend, Tendn-Kutch/in, Kutehaé-Kutech‘in, Kéi-
yuhkhataina (Ulukuk), Kéiyukhaténa (north-

eastern) and Unakhatana, pp. 550-551.—‘‘ Words

r

towards vocabularies of the Tinneh tribes,”

constituting a comparative vocabulary of the |
Nulito In’galik, Ula’/kuk In/galik, Tanana |

In’/galik, Unakhatéana, and Tenin Kutchin,
pp. 566-575.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu-
seum, Congress, Eames, Powell, Trumbull,
Watkinson.

A copy at the Field sale, catalogue no, 480,
brought $1.50.

Some copies have the imprint, London: |
Sampson Low, Son, and Marston, | Crown
Buildings, 188, Fleet Street. | 1870.
Museum, Bureau of Ethnology.)

ean elDetribstiod ofiihe Native |

Tribes of Alaska and the adjacent ter-
ritory. By W. H. Dall.

; In American Ass. Ady. Sci. Proc. vol. 18, pp.
263-273, and 2 folding sheets, Cambridge, 1870, 8°.
Contains, on a folding sheet between pp. 272-
273, a vocabulary of 26 words and the numerals
1-10 of the Ugalentsi, Ahtena, Tenan-kutchin,

Kutcha-kutchin, Unakhatana, Kaiyuhkhotana |

of Ululuk River and Kaiyub River.

(British |

|

owemres ©

Address by William H. Dall. Vice-
president, section H, anthropology,
The native tribes of Alaska.

In American Ass. Ady. Sei. Proce. vol. 34, pp.
363-379, Salem, 1886, 8°. (Pilling.)

General discussion of the habitat and aftin-
ities of the Tinneh or Athabaskans, p.376.—
Tribal divisions of the Tinneh, pp. 378-379.

Issued separately as follows:

—— The native tribes of Alaska. | An |

address | before the | section of
anthropology | of the | American asso-
ciation for the advancement of science,
| at | Ann Arbor, August, 1885. | By |

William H. Dall. | Vice president. |

(From the Proceedings of the American
Association for the Advancement | of
Science, Vol. xxxiv, Ann Arbor Meet-
ing, August, 1885.) |

Printed at the Salem press, | Salem,
Mass. | 1885.

Cover title as above, title as above verso
blank 1 1. text pp. 3-19, 8°.

General remarks upon the habitat and aftin-
ities of the Tinneh or Athabaskans, p. 16.—
Tribal divisions of the Tinneh, pp, 18-19,

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

William Healey Dall, naturalist, was born in
Boston, Mass., Aug. 21, 1845. He was educated
at the Boston public schools, and then became
a special pupil in natural sciences under Louis
Agassiz and in anatomy and medicine under
Jeffries Wyman and Daniel Brainard. In 1865 he
was appointed lieutenant in the International
telegraph expedition, and in this capacity vis-
ited Alaska in 1865-1868. From 1871 till 1880
he was assistant to the U. S. Coast Survey
and underits direction spent the years 1871 to
1874 and 1884 in that district. His work, besides
the exploration and description of the geog-
raphy, included the anthropology, natural his-
tory, and geology of the Alaskan and adjacent
regions. From the field work and collections
have resulted maps, memoirs, coast pilot, and
papers on these subjects or branches of them.
(Since 1884 he has been] paleontologist to the
U.S. Geological Survey, and since 1869 he has
been honorary curator of the department of
mollusks in the U.S. National Museum. In this
oftice he has made studies of recent and fossil
mollusks of the world, and especially of North
America, from which new information has been
derived concerning the brachiopoda, patellide,
chitonidz, and the mollusk fauna of the deep
sea. These studies have grown out of those
devoted to the fauna of northwestern America
and eastern Siberia. Mr, Dall has been honored

24

Dall (W. H.) — Continued.

with elections to nearly all the scientific soci-
eties in this country, and to many abroad. In
1882 and in 1885 he was vice president of the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science, and presided over the sections of biol-
ogy and anthropology. His scientific papers
include about two hundred titles. Among the
separate books are ‘‘Alaska and its Resources”
(Boston, 1870); ‘‘ Tribes of the Extreme North-
west”? (Washington, 1877); ‘‘Coast Pilot of
Alaska, Appendix 1, Meteorology and Bibliog-
raphy” (1879); ‘‘ The Currents and Tempera-
tures of Bering Sea and the Adjacent Waters”
(1882); ‘ Pacific Coast Pilot and Islands of
Alaska, Dixon Entrance to Yakutat Bay, with
the Inland Passage’’ (1883); ‘‘ Prehistoric
America,’ by the Marquis de Nadaillac, edited
(New York, 1885); and ‘‘ Report on the Mol-
lusea, Brachiopoda, and Pelecypoda” of the
Blake dredging expedition in the West In-
dies (Cambridge, 1886).—Appleton’s Cyclop. of
Am. Biog.

David vi psalmut Tukudh. See M’Don-
ald (R.)

Davidoff (GavrilaIvanovich). Asyrpatnoe
nyTemectTBie | Bb AMepuky | MOPCKHXS Oute-
post | XsocroBa M AaBbiqoBa, | MMcanHoe CUMS
nocabjuums. | Tacrs nepsaa [-Bropaa]. |

Bp CG. Herepsypré | Mesamano Bb Mopexoii
Taoorpavin 1810 [-1812] roga.

Translation.—T wo voyages | to America | by
the naval officers | Khwostotf and Davidoff, |
written by the latter. | Part first{[-second]. |

At St. Petersburg | printed in the Naval
Printing Office in the year 1810[-1812}.

2 vols. 8°. Vocabulary of the Kenai (of tribes
living on Kenai Gulf, Cook’s Inlet), vol. 2, pp.
xili-xxviii.

Jopies seen: British Museum, Congress.

The German edition, Berlin, 1816, 8°, contains

no linguistics.

Davidson (George). Report of Assistant
George Davidson relative to the re-
sources and the coast features of Alaska
Territory.

In Coast Survey Ann. Rept. 1867, pp. 187-329,
Washington, 1869, 4°. (Geological Survey.)

Vocabulary of the language of the natives of
Kenai (about 300 words), alphabetically
arranged by English entries (from Lisiansky),
pp. 293-298.

Reprinted as follows:

—— Report of Assistant George Davidson
relative to the coast features and re-
sources of Alaska territory.

In 40th Congress, 2d session, House of Repre-
sentatives, Ex. Doc. No. 177, Russian America,
Message from the President of the United
States, in answer to a resolution of the House

Dawson (George Mercer).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Davidson (G.) — Continued.

of 19th of December last, transmitting corre-
spondence in relation to Russian America.
[ Washington, 1868.) Pp. 1-861, pt. 2, pp. 1-19, 8°.
(Geological Survey.)

Mr. Davidson’s report occupies pp. 219-361,
and contains, pp. 328-333,a vocabulary of the
Kenay (from Lisiansky) of 300 words, alphabet-
ically arranged by English entries.

Reprinted as follows:

United States coast survey. | Benja-
min Peirce, superintendent. | Pacific
coast. | Coast pilot of Alaska, | (first
part,) | from southern boundary to
Cook’s inlet. | By | George Davidson, |
assistant coast survey. | 1869. |

Washington; | Government printing
office | 1869.

Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. 3-4,
text pp. 5-192, appendices pp. 193-246, index pp.
247-251, 8°.

Linguistic contents as under titles above,
pp. 215-221,

Copies seen: Pilling.

Davis (William Watts Hart). El Gringo;

| or, | New Mexico and her people. |
By | W. W. H. Davis, | late United
States attorney. |
New York: | Harper & brothers,
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857.
Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. ded-
ication verso blank 1 1. preface verso blank 1 1.
contents pp. Vii-xii, text pp. 138-432, 12°.
“Vocabulary of upward of sixty words in
Navajo and English,” pp. 419-420, furnished by
Captain H, L. Dodge and a young Indian.
Oopies seen: British Museum, Congress,
Eames, Geological Survey, Pilling.

Geological
and natural history survey of Canada.
| Alfred R. C. Selwyn, C. M. G., LL.
D., F. R.8., Director. | Report | on an
exploration in the | Yukon district, N.
W. T., | and | adjacent northern por-
tion of | British Columbia. | 1887, | By
| George M. Dawson, D.58., F. G. S. |
[Coat of arms.] | Published by author-

ity of parliament. |

Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1888.

In Geological and Nat. Hist. Survey of Can-
ada, Ann. Rept. (new series), vol. 3, part 1,
report B, Montreal, 1889. ‘Title as above verso
blank 1 1. letter of transmittal verso blank 1 1.
text pp. 5B-277B, 8°.

Appendix II. Notes on the Indian tribes of
the Yukon district and adjacent northern por-
tion of British Columbia (pp. 191B-213B), con-
tains a general account of the languages of the
region and ‘‘Short vocabularies [about 100

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Dawson (G. M.) — Continued.
words each] of the Tahl-tan, Ti-tsho-ti-na, and
Ta-gish, obtained in 1887,” pp. 208B-213B.
Copies seen: Geological Survey.
The appendix was issued separately as fol-
lows:
Notes on the Indian tribes of the

Yukon district and adjacent northern

portion of British Columbia. By
George M. Dawson, D. S., F. G. &.,

Assistant Director, Geological Survey
of Canada.

(Reprinted from the An- |

nual Report of Geological Survey of |

Canada, 1887.)

No title-page, heading as above; text pp. I-
23, 8°.

Linguistics as under title next above, py. 18-
23.

Copies seen: Pilling.

See Tolmie (W. I.) and Dawson (G.
M.)

George Mercer Dawson was born at Pictou,
Nova Scotia, August 1, 1849, and is the eldest
son of Sir William Dawson,
McGill University, Montreal. He was edu-
eated at McGill College and the Royal School
of Mines; held the Duke of Cornwall’s schol-
arship, given by the Prince of Wales; and took
the Edward Forbes medal in paleontology and
the Murchison medal in geology. He was ap-
pointed geologist and naturalist to Her
Majesty’s North American Boundary Commis-
sion in 1873, and at the close of the commission’s
work, in 1875, he published a report under the
title of ‘Geology and Resources of the Forty-
ninth Parallel.” In July, 1875, he received an
appointment on the geological survey of Can-
ada. From 1875 to 1879 he was occupied in the
geological survey and exploration of British
Columbia, and subsequently engaged in similar
work both in the Northwest Territory and
British Columbia. Dr. Dawson is the author of
numerous papers on geology, natural history,
and ethnology, published in the Canadian Nat-
uralist, Quarterly Journal of the Geological
Society, Transactions of the Royal Society of
Canada, etc. He was in 1887 selected to take
charge of the Yukon expedition.

De Meulen (Lieut. EK.) Vocabulary of
the Kenay (Kai-ta-na) language of
Cook’s Inlet.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Ob-
tained in 1870.

Recorded on one of the blank forms (no. 170)
issued by the Smithsonian Institution, contain-
ing thestandard vocabulary of 211 words, equiv-
alents of all of which are given in the Kenay.

Déné:

Bible lessons
Bible passages
Catechism
Catechism

See Faraud (H. J.)
Grouard (E.)
Clut (J.)
Morice (A. G.)

principal of |

Deéné Dindjie.

Dobbs (Arthur).

Déné — Continued.

Catechism Seguin (—).

Dictionary Morice (A. G.)
Dictionary Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Grammar Morice (A. G.)
Gramimatic comments Morice (A. G.)
Grammatic treatise Petitot (EK. F.S. J.)
Hymns Morice (A. G.)
Prayer book Morice (A. G.)
Prayers Morice (A. G.)
Primer Morice (A. G.)
Sermons Morice (A. G.)
Songs Morice (A. G.)
Text Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)
Petitot (KE. F. S.J.)
Charencey (H., de).

Tribal names
Vocabulary
Words

See also Tinné.

See Déné.

Dictionary:
Déné See Morice (A. G.)
Déné Petitot (KE. F.S. J.)
Kenai Radloff (L.)
Loucheux Petitot (EK. F.S. J.)
Montagnais Petitot (KE. F.S. J.)
Montagnais Végréville (V. T.)
Navajo Matthews (W.)

Peau de Liévre Petitot (E. F. S.J.)

An | account | Of the
Countries adjoining to | Hudson’s bay,
| in the | North-west Part of America:
| containing | A Description of their
Lakes and Rivers, the Nature of the |
Soil and Climates, and their Methods of
Commerce, &c. | Shewing the Benefit
to be made by settling Colonies, and |
opening a Trade in these Parts; where-
by the French will be | deprived in a
ereat Measure of their Traffick in Furs,
and | the Communication between Can-
ada and Mississippi be cut off. | With |
An Abstract of Captain Middleton’s
Journal, and Observations upon | his
schaviour during his Voyage, and since
his Return. | To which are added, | I.
A Letter from Bartholomew de Fonte,
| Vice-Admiral of Peru and Mexico; |
giving an Accountof his Voyage from |
Lima in Peru, to prevent, or seize upon
| any Ships that should attempt to find
| a North-west Passage to the South
Sea. | II. An Abstract of all the Discov-
eries | which have been publish’d of the
Islands | and Countries in and adjoin-
ing to the | Great Western Ocean, be-
tween Ame- | rica, India,and China, &e.
pointing | out the Advantages that may
be made, | if a short Passage should be
found thro’ | Hudson’s Streight to that

26 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Dobbs (A.) — Continued. | Domenech (LE. H. D.) — Continued.

Dodge (Capt. H. L.)

Ocean, | III. The Hudson’s Bay Com-

pany’s Charter. | 1V. The Standard of

Trade in those | Parts of America; with
an Account | of the Exports and Profits
made an- | nually by the Hudson’s Bay
Company. | V. Vocabularies of the Lan-
guages of se- | veral Indian Nations
adjoining to Hud-|son’s Bay. | The
whole intended to shew the great Prob-
ability of a North-west | Passage, so
long desired ; and which (if discovered)
would be of the | highest Advantage
to these Kingdoms, | By Arthur Dobbs,
Esq; |

London: | Printed for J. Robinson, at
the Golden Lion in Ludgate-Street. |
M DCC XLIV [1744].

Title verso blank 1 1, ‘‘ To the king” pp. i-ii,
folded map, text pp. 1-211, 4°.

Thompson (E.), A short vocabulary of the
language spoken among the Northern Indians,
pp. 206-211.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit-
ish Museum, Congress, Geological Survey,
Lenox, Trumbull. :

Stevens’ Nuggets, no.906, prices a copy 10s.6d.
A copy at the Field sale, no. 538, brought $2.50.
Priced by Quaritch, no. 11650, 11. 5s., large
paper. At the Murphy sale, no, 804, a copy
brought $3.25. Priced by Quaritch, no. 28278,
1. 4s.

See Davis (W.W.

1815)
Dog Rib:
Hymns See Bompas (W. C.)
Lord’s prayer Bompas (W. C.)
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)
Prayers Bompas (W.C.)
Primer 3ompas (W.C.)

Proper names Catlin (G.)
Ten commandments Bompas (W.C.)

Text Nut (J.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Lefroy (J. H.)
Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.)
Vocabulary Murray (—).
Vocabulary O’ Brien (—).
Vocabulary tichardson (J.)
Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Words Daa (L. K.)

Words Ellis (R.)

Words Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-

son (G. M.)
See Bompas (W.C.)
Domenech (Abbé Emanuel Henri Dieu-
donné). Seven years’ residence | in the
great | deserts of North America | by
the | abbé Em, Domenech | Apostolical

Dog Rib primer.

Dorsey (Lev. James Owen).

Missionary: Canon of Montpellier:
Member of the Pontifical Academy
Tiberina, | andofthe Geographical and
Ethnographical Societies of France, &c.
| lustrated with fifty-eight woodeuts
by A. Joliet, three | plates of ancient
Indian music, and a map showing the
actual situation of | the Indian tribes
and the country described by the author
| In Two Volumes | Vol. I[-II]. |

London | Longman,Green, Longman,
and Roberts | 1860. | The right of trans-
lation is reserved.

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank
11. dedication pp. v—vi, preface pp. vii-xiii, con-
tents pp. xv-xxi, list of illustrations pp. xxiii-
xxiv, text pp.1-445; half-title verso printers 1
1. title verso blank 1 I. contents pp. v-xii, text
pp. 1-465, colophon p. [466], map, plates, 8°.

List of Indian tribes of North America, vol.
1, pp. 440-445.— Vocabularies, etc. vol. 2, pp. 164-
189, contain 84 words of the Navajo.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit-
ish Museum, Congress, Watkinson.

At the Field sale a copy,no. 550, brought $2.37,
and at the Pinart sale, no. 328,6 fr. Clarke &
co. 1886, no. 5415, price a copy $5.

Emanuel Henri Dieudonné Domenech, French
author, was born in Lyons, France, November 4,
1825; died in France in June, 1886. He became
a priest in the Roman Catholic church, and was
sent as amissionary to Texas and Mexico. Dur-
ing Maximilian’s residence in America, Dome-
nech acted as private chaplain to the emperor,
and he was also almoner to the French army
during its occupation of Mexico. On his return
to France he was made honorary canon of
Montpellier. His ‘‘Manuscrit pictographique
Américain, précédé d'une notice sur l’idéo-
graphie des Peaux Ronges” (1860) was pub-
lished by the French government, with a fae-
simile of a manuscript in the library of the Paris
arsenal, relating, as he claimed, tothe American
Indians; but the German orientalist, Julius
Petzholdt, declared that it consisted only of
scribbling and incoherent illustrations of a local
German dialect. Domenech maintained the
authenticity of the manuscript in a pamphlet
entitled ‘‘ La vérité sur le livre des sauvages”’
(1861), which drew forth a reply from Petzholdt,
translated into French under the title of ‘‘ Le
livre des sauvages au point de vue de Ja civili-
sation frangaise”’ (Brussels, 1861). During the
latter part of his life he produced several works
pertaining to religion and ancient history.—
Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Indians of
Siletz reservation, Oregon. By J. Owen
Dorsey.

In American Anthropologist, vol. 2, pp. 55-61,
Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.)

Grammatic notes and examples of the Atha-
pascan, p, 06,—Kinship terms, p. 58.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 24

Dorsey (J. O.) — Continued.
— The gentile system of the Siletz
tribes.

In Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. 3, pp.
227-237, Boston and New York, 1890, 8°. (Pil-
ling.)

List of Upper Coquille villages (32), with
English definitions, p. 232.—Athapascans north
of Rogue River (22 names of villages with mean-
ings), pp. 232-233.—Chasta Costa villages (383),
with meanings, p. 234.—Athapasecan villages
(21) south of Rogue River, pp. 235-236.— Atha-
pascan villages in northwest California, pp. 236-
237.

[Vocabulary of words and phrases
in the dialect of the Chasta Costa or
Ci’-st& kqwii’-sti Indians who lived on
the Rogue River or on one of its
branches, Oregon. ]

Manuscript, 13 pp.4°,in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, September and Octo-
ber, 1884, with the assistance of Government
George or Tit-qé-é-sa and two other Indians of
the tribe. Recorded in acopy of Powell's Intro-
duction to the Study of Indian Languages, sec-
ond edition, pp. 77-79, 97, 122, 131, 182-184, 192-
193, 196, 228.

Of the schedules given in the work no.1 is

filled and nos, 2, 8, 12, 14, 18, 24,25, and 30 are
partly filled.
[Words, phrases, and sentences in
the language of the Chetco (Tcé/-ti-
gtin-né’) formerly of Cheteco River,
Oregon. ]

Manuscript, 32 pp.4°,in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, September, 1884, with
the assistance of Baldwin Fairchild, a Cheteo.
Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition,
pp. 77-228 and 7 extra leaves at the end, many of
the pages being left blank.

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2,
and 30 are filled; nos. 3, 5,7, 8,12, 18, 24, 25, and
27 are partly filled; and the remaining numbers
are blank. The unnumbered leaves at the end
contain a list of the parts of the body in great
detail, dress and ornaments, the conjugation of
a number of verbs, a table of classifiers, and
pronouns. The total number of entries is 480.

[Vocabulary of words and phrases
in the language of the Da-ku-bé t&/-dé,
formerly living on Applegate Creek,
Oregon. }

Manuscript, 9 pp.4°, in the library of the

* Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Agency, Oregon, October, 1884,with the assist-
ance of Rogue River John, a Ta-kél-ma, whose
mother was a Da-ku-bé té/-dé. Recorded in a
copy of Powell’s Introduction to the Study of
Indian Languages,second edition, pp. 77-79, 184,
196, 228, and 3 unnumbered pages at the end.

Dorsey (J. O.) — Continued.

Of the schedules given in the work no. 30 is
filled and nos. 1, 2,18, and 25 are partly filled.
The final unnimbered pages at the end give the

parts of the body in detail.

—— [Vocabulary of words and phrases in

the Kwa-ta/-mi or Sixes dialect of the
Ti’qwe-t’a‘yfn-né’, formerly living on
Sixes Creek, Oregon. ]

Manuscript, 23 pp.4°,in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, August-October, 1884,
with the assistance of Jake Rooney and Jake
Stuart. Recorded in a copy of Powell’s Intro-
duction to the Study of Indian Languages, see-
ond edition, pp. 77-78, 82, 97-102, 109-112, 115-116,
196, 206-207, 210, 220, 228, and three unnumbered
pages at the end.

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2,
3, 8, 12, 25, 27,28, and 30 are partly filled, the
remainder being blank. The entries sum up a
totalof 356. The three pages at the end contain
a number of partial verbal conjugations.

[ Vocabulary of words and phrases of
the Mi’-kwi-nuw’ jiin-né’ tribe or gens,
formerly living on the Lower Rogue
River, Oregon. ]

Manuscript, 10 pp. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the
assistance of William Simpson, a native.
Recorded in a copy of Powell’s Introduction to
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition,
pp. 76-81, 97, 196, 220, 228, and 8 unnumbered
pages at the end.

Of the schedules nos. 1, 2, 8, and 30 are partly
filled; the unnumbered pages at the end con-
tain an extended list of the parts of the body,
pronouns, nouns used as classifiers, partial
conjugation of a number of verbs, ete.

[ Words, phrases, and sentences in the
language of the Nal’-tfn-ne’-yfn-né’
gens. |

Manuscript, 75 pp. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the
assistance of Alex Ross, chief of the gens, and
a full-blood. Recorded in a copy of Powell’s
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages,
second edition, pp. 77-228, and 5 unnumbered
leaves at the end, a number of the pages being
left blank.

Of the lists of words given in this work
schedules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 18, and 30 are
completely filled and schedules 6, 7, 9, 14, 17, 22,
and 24 partly filled. The extra leaves at the
end contain the parts of the body in great de-
tail, a list of pronouns, verbal classifiers, cor-
relatives, and the conjugation of a number of
verbs. There are 1,345 entries in all.

[Vocabulary of the Qa’‘-am-o'te-ne’,
formerly living at the mouth of Smith
River, California. ]

eee eos

Dorsey (J. 0.) — Continued,

Manuscript, 7 pp. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Reservation, Oregon, Sept., 1884, with
the assistance of Smith River John. Recorded
in a copy of Powell's Introduction to the Study
of Indian Languages, second edition, pp. 77-78,
82, 122-123, 182, 184, the remaining pages of the
work being left blank.

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2,
and 18 are partly filled. The total entries amount
to 57.

[A vocabulary of words and phrases
in the dialect of the Tal’-t’fic-t’tn ti’-
Galice Creek Indians who
formerly lived in Josephine County,
Oregon, 30 miles north of Kerby. ]

Manuscript, 10 pp.4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the
assistance of Yacl/-tim or Galice Creek Jim
and Peter Muggins. Recorded in a copy of
Powell’s Introduction to the Study of Indian
Languages, second edition, pp.77-228 and 2 extra
leaves at the end, many of the pages being left
blank.

Of the schedules given in the work none is
completely filled, and nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 12, 18, 24,
and 30 are but partly filled. The 2 leaves at the
end contain the parts of the body in great
detail, a few possessive pronouns, and the con-
jugations in brief of the verbs to desire and to
know. The entries as a whole number 254.

de, or

[ Words, sentences, and grammatical
material in the Tu-tu’tfin-né’, or Tu/-tu
language (dialect of several villages, ) ]

Manuscript, 155 pp.4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Reservation, Oregon, August-October,
1884, with the assistance of twelve members of
the Tu’-tutribe. Recorded in acopy of Powell's
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages,
second edition, pp. 76-86, 88-89, 95-103, 106, 108—
129, 131-147, 149-155, 162-178, 180-185, 188-199,
206-213, 220, 228, and 46 unnumbered pages at
the end, with many intercalated pages passim.

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2, 3,
8, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 22, 23,25, and 30 are filled;
nos. 4, 5, 6, 7,9, 10, 17,19, 21, 24, 26, 27, and 28 are
partly filled, and nos. 11,20, and 29 are blank.
The total entries number 3,962, besides a text
with interlinear and free translation.

— Vocabulary of the Upper Coquille
or Mi-ci-qwit-me tin-né.

Manuscript, 38 pp. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz
Indian Agency, Oregon, August-October, 1884,
with the assistance of Coquille Thompson and
Coquille Solomon. Recorded in a copy of
Powell's Introduction to the Study of Indian
Languages, second edition, pp. 77,81, 84, 88-89,
96-98, 100-103, 109-111, 128-129, 132-136, 183-184,
(92-198, 228, and 4 unnumbered leaves at the end.

Drake (Samuel Gardiner).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Dorsey (J. O.) — Continued.

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2,
(8, 24, and 30 are filled, and nos. 4, 5, 6,7, 8, 9, 12,
13, 14, 16, 17,22,and 25 are partly filled; the
remaining numbers are blank. There is a total
of 745 entries.

— A vocabulary of the Yu’-ki-tcé or

Yu'-ki-tee’ tin-né dialect spoken by
the Indians formerly living on Euchre
Creek, Oregon.

Manuscript, 6 ll. 4°, written on one side only,
in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected at the Siletz Indian Agency, Oregon,
September, 1884, with the assistance of James
Warner, sr., Who could speak a little English.

The entries number 236, and are arranged in
the order of the schedules given in Powell's In-
troduction to the Study of Indian Languages,
second edition.

James Owen Dorsey was born in Baltimore,
Md., in 1848. He attended the Central High
School (now the City College) in 1862 and 1863,
taking the classical course. Illness caused him
to abandon his studies when a member of the
second year class. In a counting room from 1864
to 1866. Taught from September, 1866, to June,
1867. Entered the preparatory department of
the Theological Seminary of Virginia in Sep-
tember, 1867, and the junior class of the semi-
nary in September, 1869. Was ordained a deacon
of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the
United States by the bishop of Virginia, Easter
day, 1871. Entered upon his work among the
Ponea Indians, in Dakota Territory, in May of
that year. Had an attack of scarlet fever in
April, 1872, and one of typho-malarial fever in
July, 1873. Owing to this illmess he was
obliged to give up the mission work in August,
1873, soon after he had learned to talk to the
Indians without an interpreter. He returned to
Maryland and engaged in parish work till July,
1878, when, under the direction of Maj. J. W.
Powell, he went to the Omaha reservation in
Nebraska in order to increase his stock of lin-
guistic material. On the organization of the
Bureau of Ethnology, in 1879, he was trans-
ferred thereto, and from that time he has been
engaged continuously in linguistic and socio-
logic work for the Bureau. He remained among
the Omaha till April, 1880, when he returned to
Washington. Since then he has made several
trips to Indian reservations for scientifie pur-
poses, not only to those oceupied by tribes of
the Sionan family, but also to the Siletz reser.
vation, in Oregon. At the last place, which he
visited in 1884, he obtained vocabularies, gram-
matic notes, etc., of languages spoken by In-
dians of the Athapascan, Kusan, Takilman,
and Yakonan stocks. The reports of his office

and field work will be found in the annual

reports of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The | Abo-
riginal races | of | North America; |
comprising | biographical sketches of

Baton (Capt. J. H.)

ATHAPASCAN

Drake (S. G.) — Continued.

eminent individuals, | and | an histor-
ical account of the different tribes, |
from | the first discovery of the conti-
nent | to| the present period | with a
dissertation on their | Origin, Antiq-
uities, Manners and Customs, | illustra-

tive narratives and anecdotes, | and a |

| copious analytical index | by Samuel | ‘
| Dufossé (E.)

G. Drake. | Fifteenth edition, | revised,
with valuable additions, | by Prof. H.
L. Williams. | [Quotation, six lines. } |

New York. | Hurst & company, pub-
lishers. | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.]

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp.38-4, con-
tents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations pp. 9-16,
half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 19-767, index
pp. 768-787, 8°.

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the
Pacific states and territories, pp. 748-763.

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Wisconsin His-
torical Society.

Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3.

Duflot de Mofras (Eugéne). Explora-
tion | du territoire | de l’Orégon, | des
Californies | et de la mer Vermeille, |
exécutée pendant les années 1840, 1841
et 1842, | par M. Duflot de Mofras,
| Attaché & la Légation de France a
Mexico; | ouvrage publié par ordre du
roi, | sous les auspices de M. le maré-
chal Soult, duc de Dalmatie, | Président
du Conseil, | et de M. le ministre des
affaires étrangéres. | Tome premier
[-second]. |

Paris, | Arthus Bertrand, éditeur, |
libraire de la Société de géographie, |
Rue Hautefeuille, n° 23. | 1844.

2vols.: half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. avant-
propos pp. vii-xii, avertissement verso note 1 1.
nota verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-518, table des
chapitres pp. 519-521, table des cartes pp. 523-

Eames: This word following a title or within

parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Eames,
Brooklyn, N. Y.
Vocabulary of the
language of the Navajoof New Mexico.
By Capt. J. H. Eaton, U.S. A.

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 4,
pp. 416-431, Philadelphia, 1854, 4°.

A vocabulary of 300 words and the numerals
1-100,000.

LANGUAGES.

E.

29

| Duflot de Mofras (.) — Continued.

524; half-title verso printers 11. title verso blank
1 1. text pp. 1-500, table des chapitres pp. 501-
504, table des cartes pp. 505-506, table analytique
etc. pp. 507-514, 8°.

Numerals 1-10 of a number of American lan-
guages, among them the Umpqua, vol. 2, p. 401.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe-
neum, British Museum, Congress, Geological
Survey.
Americana | Catalogue de
livres | relatifs & Amérique | Europe,
Asie, Afrique | et Océanie | [&c.thirty-
four lines] |

Librairie ancienne et moderne de E.
Dufossé | 27, rne Guénégaud, 27 | pres
le Pont-neuf | Paris [1887]

Printed ‘cover as above, no inside title, table
des divisions 1 1. text pp. 175-422, 8°.

Contains, passim, titles of works in various
Athapascan languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

This series of catalogues was begun in 1876.

Dugan (Lieut. T. B.) Numerals [1-10]

of the White Mountain Apache.

In Allen (H. T.), Report of an expedition to
the Copper, Tanand and Kéyukuk rivers, p.
135, Washington, 1887, 8°.

Reprinted in other articles by Allen (H. T.),
q.v.

Dunbar: This word following a title or within

parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Mr, John B. Dunbar,
Bloomfield, N. J.

Duncan (David). American races. Com-

piled and abstracted by Professor Dun-
can, M. A.

Forms Part 6 of Spencer (H.), Descriptive
sociology, London, 1878, folio. (Congress.)

Under the heading ‘‘ Language,” pp. 40-42,
there are given comments and extracts from
various authors upon native tribes, including
examples of the Chippewyan.

Some copies have the imprint New York, D.
Appleton & co. [n.d.] (Powell.)

| Elliot (Lieut. William G.) See Bourke

Ellis (Robert).

(J. G5)

On | numerals | as signs
of primeval unity | among mankind. |
By | Robert Ellis, B. D., | late fellow of
St. John’s college, Cambridge. |
London: | Triibner & co. 57 & 59 Lud-
gate hill. | 1873. | All rights reserved.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printer
1 1. contents pp. i-ili, text pp. 1-94, 8°.

30

Ellis (R.) — Continued.

Numerals and other words in Atnah, p. 52;
Chepewyan, pp. 42, 45, 54; Kenay (Athabaskan),
p. 88; Slave (Great Slave Lake), pp. 5, 10,11;
Tahlewah (California), pp. 5, 10,24; Takulli, pp.
8, 11,54; Tlatskanai, p. 88.

Copies seen: Kames.

Peruvia Scythica. | The | Quichua
language of Pern: | its | derivation
from central Asia with the American |

languages in general, and with the
Turanian | and Iberian languages of
the old world, | including | the Basque,
the Lycian, and the Pre-Aryan | lan-
guage of Etruria, | By | Robert Ellis,
B.D., | author of ‘ The Asiatic affinities
of the old Italians”, and late fellow | of
St. John’s college, Cambridge. | [Quo-
tation, three lines. ] |

London: | Triibner & co., 57 & 59,
Ludgate hill. | 1875. | All rights re-
served.

Title verso printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-vii, con-
tents pp. ix—xi, errata p. [xii], text pp. 1-219, 8°.

Words in Atna, pp. 78, 81, 85, 105, 117, 151;
Athabaskan, p. 120; Apatsh, pp. 105, 123;
Chepewyan, pp. 62, 81, 96, 99; Dog-Rib, p. 127;
Hoopah, p.78; Kenay, pp. 56, 78, 91, 104, 106, 117;
Kutshin, pp. 104, 106; Navaho, pp. 63, 68, 83, 104,
105, 106, 107, 120, 122, 130, 134; Pinalero, p. 85;
Slave, p. 105; Takulli, pp. 51, 54, 61, 78, 91, 105,
127; Tlatskanai, pp. 83, 85; Umkwa, pp. 381, 83,
89, 104, 120.

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Wat-
kinson.

Etruscan numerals. | By | Robert
Ellis, B. D., | late fellow of St. John’s
college, Cambridge. |

London: | Triibner & co., 57 & 59,
Ludgate hill. | 1876. | (All Rights
Reserved.) | Price Two Shillings and
Sixpence.

Cover title as above, inside title (as above,
omitting the last two lines) verso printer 1 1.
remarks on pronunciation verso erratum and
addendum 1 1. text pp. 1-52, 8°.

A few numerals and words in Atnah, pp. 9,
13; Hoopah, p. 9. Remarks and criticisms on
Dr. J. H. Trumbull’s essay on numerals in In-
dian languages, pp. 12-13, note.

Copies seen: Eames.

Fairchild (Baldwin). See Dorsey (J. O.)

Faraone. See Apache.

Faraud (Mgr. Henry J.) Dix-huit ans |
chez les Sauvages | Voyages et mis-
sions | de Mt' Henry Faraud | evéque
d’Anemour, vicaire apostoliq ue de Mac-

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Ellis (R.) — Continued.
Sources| of the| Etruscan and Basque
| languages. | By | Robert Ellis, B. D.,
| late fellow of St. John’s college,
Cambridge. |

London: | Triibner & co., Ludgate
hill. | 1886. | (All rights reserved.)

Title verso printers 1 1. prefatory notice verso
blank 1 1. contents pp. v—vii, remarks on pro-
nunciation p. [viii], text pp. 1-166, 8°.

A few numerals and words in Atnah, pp. 13,
17; Hoopah, p.9.

Copies seen: Eames.

Erman (Georg Adolph), Ethnographische
Wahrnehmungen und Erfahrungen an
den Kiisten des Berings-Meeres yon A.
Erman,

In Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, vol. 2 (1870),
pp. 295-307, 309-393; vol. 3 (1871), pp. 149-175,
205-219, Berlin [n. d.], 8°.

Numerals 1-200 and a few words of the Ttynai
oder Kenaizi, vol. 3, p. 216.

Ettunetle choh . . . Takudh. See
M’Donald (R.)

Ettunetle tutthug . . . Takudh. See
M’Donald (R.)

Everette (Will E.) [Words, phrases, and
sentences in the language of the Tu-tu-
té-ne and nine confederated tribes of
Siletz River, Oregon. ]

Manuscript, 158 pp. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected December,
1882. Recorded in a copy of Powell’s Introduc-
tion to the Study of Indian Languages, second
edition. ‘‘ Transliterated at the request of the
Director of the Bureau of Ethnology from vol.
22 of [Everette’s] Indian Languages of North
America, into the ‘ Bureau alphabet’ at Wash-
ington, July 1, 1883, and at Fort Simcoe, Wash-
ington Ty., July 23, 1883. Completed August
20, 1883.”’

Almost every word, phrase, and sentence
given in the 30 schedules of the ‘‘ Introduction ”’
has its equivalent given in Tu-tu-té-ne, and
nearly every schedule has explanatory notes,
On the blank pages following the schedules Mr.
Everette has given the phonetic alphabet with
notes and explanations.

Ewbank (Thomas). See Whipple (A.
W.), Ewbank (T.),and Turner (W.W.)

F.

Faraud (H. J.) — Continued.
kensie, | dans extreme nord de ’ Amé-
rique Britannique | @aprés les docu-
ments de Mst VEvéque d@’Anemour | par
| Fernand-Michel | membre de la So-
ciété Eduenne | Avee la biographie et
le portrait de Mgr Faraud |

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Faraud (H. J.) — Continued.

Librairie catholique de Perisse freres |
(nouvelle maison) | Regis Ruffet et C',
successeurs | Paris | 38, rue Saint-Sul-
pice. | Bruxelles | place Sainte-Gudule,
4, | 1866 | Droits de traduction et de re-
production réservés.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xvi, text pp.
1-447, table pp. 449-456, 8°.

Tribus sauvages, pp. 333-383, contains names
of tribes, with meanings, scattered through.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Shea.

Dix-huit ans | chez | les Sauvages |
Voyages et missions | dans Vextreme
nord de VAmérique Britannique |
dapres les documents de Mer Henry
Faraud | Evéque [&c. one line] | par
Fernand-Michel | [Design] |

Nouvelle Maison Perisse Fréres de
Paris | Librairie Catholique et Classi-
que | [&c. five lines] | 1870 | Droits de
traduction et de reproduction réservés.

Printed cover, title 11. pp. i-xix, 1-364, 12°.

Linguistics, as in earlier edition titled next
above, pp. 260-312.
Copies seen: British Museum.

—— Abridgment of the bible in Deéné
Tchippewayan, by Mgr. Faraud, Vicar
Apostolique of Mackenzie. ey

In a letter from Father Emile Petitot, dated
from Mareuil, France, April 24, 1889, he tells me
that among the manuscripts left by him at his
last residence, St. Raphael des Tchippewayans,
Saskatchewan, was a copy, written by himself,
of the above-named work. See Grouard (E.)

Farrar (Rev. Frederic William). Families
of speech: | four lectures | delivered
before | the Royal institution of Great
Britain | In March 1869 | by the | rev.
Frederic W. Farrar, M. A., F. B.S. |
late fellow of Trinity college [&c. four
lines.] | Published by request. |

London: | Longmans, Green, and co.

| 1870.

List of works verso blank 1 1. half-title verso
printers 1]. title verso blank 11. dedication verso
blank 1 1. preface pp. ix—x, contents pp. xi-xiii,
list of illustrations p. xiv, text pp. 1-187, table
of the chief allophylian languages p. [188],
index pp. 189-192, two tables and two maps, 12°.

A few words in Tlatskanai, p. 178.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Congress,
Eames.

Families of Speech: | Four Lectures

| delivered before | the Royal Institu-

tion of Great Britain | In March 1869.

| By the ! Rev. Frederic W. Farrar, D.

dl

Farrar (F. W.) — Continued.
D., F. R. 8. | Late Fellow [&c. three
lines.] | New edition. |
London: | Longmans, Green, & Co. |
1873. | All rights reserved.
p. i-xi, 1 1. 1-142, 169°.
Copies seen: British Museum.

—— Langnage and languages. | Being |
‘Chapters on language” | and | “ Fam-
ilies of speech.” | By the | rev. Frederic
W. Farrar, D. D. F. BR. S. | late fellow
[&c. three lines.] | New edition. |

London; | Longmans, Green, and co.
| 1878. | (All rights reserved.)

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank
11. preface (November 15, 1877) verso quotations
11. half-title (Chapters on language) verso dedi-
cation 1 1. preface to the first edition (August,
1865) pp. ix—xii, list of illustrations verso blank
1 l.synopsis pp. xiii-xx, text pp. 1-256, books
consulted pp. 257-260, half-title (Families of
speech, etc.) verso dedication 1 1. preface to the
second edition (August, 1873) verso blank 1 1.
contents pp. 265-267, text pp. 269-403, table of
languages p. [404], index pp. 405-411, verso
printers, two maps and two tables, 12°.

A few Tlatskanai words, pp. 396-397.

Copies seen : Astor.

—— Language and languages. | Being |
“Chapters oh language” | and | ‘ Fam-
ilies of speech.” | By the | rev. Frederic
W. Farrar, D. D. F. R.S. | late fellow
[&c. three lines.] | New edition. |

London: | Longmans, Green, and co.

| 1887. | (All rights reserved.)

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank
1 1. preface (November 15, 1877) verso quotations
11. half-title (Chapters on language) verso dedi-
cation 1 1. preface to the first edition (August,
1865) pp. ix—xii, synopsis pp. xiii-xx, text pp. 1-
256, books consulted pp. 257-260, half-title (Fam-
ilies of speech, etc.) verso dedication 1 1. preface
to the second edition (August, 1873) verso list
of illustrations 1 1. contents pp. 265-267, text pp.
269-403, table of languages p. [404], index pp.
405-411, verso printers, two maps, and two
tables, 12°.

Linguistics as under the next preceding title,
pp. 396, 397.

Copies seen: Eames.

Faulmann (Karl). [llustrirte | Geschichte
der Schrift | Populiir-Wissenschaftliche
Darstellung | der | Entstehung der
Schrift | der | Sprache und der Zahlen
|sowie der | Schriftsysteme aller V6lker
der Erde | von | Karl Faulmann | Pro-
fessor der Stenographie [&c. two lines. ]
| Mit 15 Tafeln in Farben- und Tondruck

| und vielen in den Text gedruckten

32

Faulmann (K.) — Continued.
Schriftzeichen und Schriftproben. |
[Printer’s ornament. ] |

Wien. Pest. Leipzig. | A. Hartleben’s
Verlag. | 1880. | Alle Rechte vorbehal-
ten.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printers
1 1. preface pp. v-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp.
1-632, 8°.

Schrift der Tinne-Indianer, p. 231.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Wat-
kinson.

Featherman(A.) Social history | of the
| races of mankind. | First division: |

Nigritians[—Third division: | Aoneo- |

Maranonians]. | By | A.Featherman. |
[Two lines quotation. ] |

London: | Triibner & co., Ludgate |

Hill. | 1885[-89].| (All rights reserved. )

3 vols, 8°.

A general discussion of a number of North
American families occurs in vol. 3, among them:
the Apaches (pp. 184-192), including, on p. 188,
a brief sketch of their grammar, with a few
examples, among them the verb to drink; Nav-
ajos, pp. 193-200; and Taculles, pp. 378-384.

Copies seen: Congress.

Field (Thomas Warren). An _ essay |
towards an| Indian bibliography. |
Beinga | catalogue of books, | relating
to the | history, antiquities, languages,
customs, religion, | wars, literature,
and origin of the | American Indians, |
in the library of | Thomas W. Field. |
With bibliographical and historical
notes, and | synopses of the contents of
some of | the works least known. |

New York: | Scribner, Armstrong,
and co..| 1873.

Title verso printers 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, text |

pp. 1-480, 8°.

Titles and descriptions of works in or relating
to Athapascan languages passim.

Copies seen; Congress, Eames, Pilling.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

THE

Field (T. W.) — Continued.

At the Field sale, no. 688,acopy brought $4.25;
at the Menzies sale, no. 718, a ‘‘half-erushed, red
levant morocco, gilt top, uncut copy,” brought
$5.50. Priced by Leclere, 1878, 18 fr.; by Quar-
itch, no. 11996, 15s.; at the Pinart sale, no. 368,
it brought 17 fr.; at the Murphy sale, no. 949,
$4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30224, 11.

— Catalogue | of the | library | belong-
ing to | Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be
sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin
& co., | May 24th, 1875. and following
days. |

New York. | 1875,

Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank
1 l. notice ete. pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1-376, list of
prices pp. 377-393, supplement pp. 1-59, 8°. Com-

piled by Joseph Sabin, mainly from Mr. Field’s
Essay, title of which is given above.

Contains titles of a number of works in
various Athapascan languages.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames.

At the Squier sale, no. 1178, an uneut copy
brought $1.25.

Four gospels

| See Bompas (W. C.)

| Friese (Prof. Valentine). See Arny (W.
EeMi5)

Froebel (Julius). Aus Amerika, | Er-
fahrungen Reisen und Studien | von |
Julius Froebel. | Erster [-Zweiter]
Band. | Zweite wohlfeile Ausgabe. |

Leipzig | Dut’sche Buchhandlung.
[1858. ]

2 vols. 12°.

A short Mescalero-Apache vocabulary, vol.
2, p. 163.

Copres seen: Bancroft, British Museum.

First edition, Leipzig, 1857-1858, 2 vols. 8°. (*)

There is an English edition of this work,
London, Bentley, 1859, 8°, which does not con-
tain the vocabulary. (Astor, Bancroft, Boston
Atheneum, British Museum, Congress.)

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 25993, titles an edition

| Bruxelles, 1861, 3 vols. 12°.

Slave language.

|

G.

Gabelentz (Hans Georg Conor von der).
Die Sprachwissenschaft, | ihre Aufga-
ben, Methoden | und | bisherigen
Ergebnisse. | Von | Georg von der
Gabelentz. | [Vignette.] |

Leipzig, | T. O. Weigel nachfolger |
(Chr. Herm. Tauchnitz). | 1891.

Cover title as above, title as above verso
blank 1 1. Vorwort pp. iii-vii, Inhalts- Verzeich-
niss pp. vili-xx, text pp. 1-466, Register pp.
467-502, Berichtigungen p. 502, 8°.

Gabelentz (H. G. C.) — Continued.

Brief discussion and a few examples of Ath-
apascan, p. 402.
Copies seen: Gatschet.

Galice Creek Jim. See Dorsey (J. 0.)

| Gallatin (Albert). A svnopsis of the
Indian tribes within the United States
east of the Rocky Mountains, and in the
British and Russian possessions in North
America. By the Hon. Albert Gallatin.

ATHAPASCAN

Gallatin (A.) — Continued.

In American Antiquarian Soc. Trans. (Ar-
cheologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. 1-422, Cam-
bridge, 1836, 8°. ;

Subdivisions by geographic limits of the
Kinai, pp. 14-16; of the Athapascas, pp. 16-20.—
Indian languages, with grammatical examples
of the Cheppeyan, p. 170. — Grammatical
notices, Athapascas, pp. 215-216.—Cheppeyan
conjugations, p.269.—Comparative vocabulary
of 180 words of the Kinai (from Resanoff in
Krusenstern), Tacullie (from Harmon), Chep-
peyan (from M’Kenzie), pp. 307-367.—Vocab-
ulary of 44 words of the Sussee (from Umfre-
ville), p. 374.—Vocabulary of 13 words of the
Atnah or Chin, p. 378.

—— Hale’s Indians of north-west Amer-

ica,and vocabularies of North America ;
with an introduction. By Albert Gal-
latin.

In American Eth. Soc. Trans. vol. 2, pp. xxiii-
elxxxviii, 1-130, New York, 1848, 8°.

Brief reference to the Athapascas, their hab-
itat, ete., p. ci—The Tahkali-Umkwa family
(general discussion), pp. 9-10.—Vocabulary of
180 words of the Tahculi (from Anderson), pp.
78-82.— Vocabulary of 60 words of the Kenai
(from Resanoft), pp. 99-101.— Vocabulary of the
Cheppeyan, Tlatskani, and Umkwa (50 words
and numerals 1-10 each), p. 105.

Table of generic Indian families of
languages.

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3,
pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°.

Includes the Athapascans, p. 401.

Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer-
land, January 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, L.I.,
August 12, 1849. He was descended from an an-
cient patrician family of Geneva. whose name had
long been honorably connected with the history
of Switzerland. Young Albert had been bap-
tized by the name of Abraham Alfonse Albert.
In 1773 he was sent to a boarding school, and a
year later entered the University of Geneva,
where he was graduated in 1779. He sailed from
L’Orient late in May, 1780, and reached Boston
onJuly 14. He entered Congress on December 7,
1795, and continued a member of that body until
his appointmentas Secretary of the Treasury in
1801, which office he held continuously until 1813.
His services were rewarded with the appoint-
ment of minister to France in February, 1815;
he entered on the duties of this office in Janu-
ary, 1816. In1826, at the solicitation of President
Adams, he accepted the appointment of envoy
extraordinary toGreat Britain. On hisreturnto
the United States he settled in New York City,
where, from 1831 till 1839, he was president of the
National Bank of New York. In 1842 he was
associated in the establishment of the American
Ethnological Society, becoming its first presi-
dept, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi-
lar office in the New York Historical Society, an
honor which was annually conferred on him
until his death.—A ppleton’s Oyclop. of Am. Biog.

ATH 3

LANGUAGES.

Garrioch (Rev. Alfred Campbell).

33

The
gospel according to | St. Mark, | trans-
lated into the | Beaver Indian lan-
guage | by | the rev. A. C. Garrioch, |
missionary of the Church missionary
society. |

London: | British and Foreign Bible
Society. | 1886

Title verso blank 1 1. text entirely in the Bea-
ver language (roman characters) pp. 3-79, colo-
phon p. [80], 16°.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible So-
ciety, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

Issued also in syllabic characters as follows:

—— [One line syllabic characters. ] | The

gospel | according to | St. Mark. |
Translated by the | Rev. Alfred C.
Garrioch, | missionary of the Church
missionary society, | into the | lan-
guage of the Beaver Indians, | of the
diocese of Athabasca. | [Seal of the
Nee. Co Ke

London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, | Northumber-
land avenue, Charing cross, W. C.
[1886. ]

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. sylla-
barium verso blank 1 1. supplementary syllaba-
rium verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic
characters) pp. 1-47, sq. 16°.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

— Manualof devotion | inthe | Beaver

Indian language. | By the | Rev. Alfred
C. Garrioch, | missionary of the Church
missionary society. | [Seal of the S. P.

CBs}
London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, | Northumber-

land avenue, Charing cross, W. C, |
1886.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. sylla-
barium verso blank 1 1. supplementary syllaba-
rium verso blank 11. text (in syllabic characters,
with some headings in English and Latin) pp.
1-87, 16°.

Order for morning prayer, pp. 1-23.—Order
for evening prayer, pp. 24-39.—Prayers, etc.,
pp. 40-52.— Watts’s first catechism, pp. 53-57.—
Grace, ten commandments, prayers, etc., pp.
57-62._Hymns, pp. 63-74,—Selections from
scripture, pp. 75-87.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

See Bompas (W, C.) for other editions of this
work.

A | Vocabulary | of the | —-Beaver
Indian Language- | consisting of | Part
I Beaver-English | Part II English-

34

Gaxrioch (A. C.) — Continued.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

| Gatschet (A. 8.) — Continued.

Gatschet

Beaver-Cree- | By the Rey. A. C. Gar-
rioch | Missionary of the | Church Mis-
sionary Society- | 5

Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge. | London. Northumberland
Avenue.| Cyclostyled by | E.S. Brewer.

| Printed by M's Garrioch [1885]

Title verso blank 1 1. text (on one side of the
leaf only) Il. 1-188, 4°,

Part I Beaver-English (alphabetically ar-
ranged by Beaver words in double columns), Il.
1-64.—Part II English and Beavor [sic] [and
Cree] English
words, in triple columns), Il. 65-138.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge.

The original manuscript of this work is in
the possession of its author. Fifty copies of the
work were printed from the copy made with the
cyclostyle by Mr, Brewer, an employé of the

(alphabetically arranged by

society.

Mr. Garrioch, of St. Xavier’s Mission, Fort
Dunvegan, Peace River, was born in St. Paul's
Parish, Red River Settlement, or Manitoba, Feb.
10, 1848, and is of Scotch and English parentage.
He was for three years a student at St. John’s
College, Winnipeg, and in 1874 was engaged as
schoolmaster by Bishop Bompas for the Church
Missionary Society. The winter of 1875-76 he
spent in study with the bishop at Fort Simp-
son, McKenzie River, and was admitted to dea-
con's orders, and in the autumn of 1876 he

established a Church Missionary Society station |

at Fort Vermilion under the name of Unjaga
Mission. Mr. Garrioch subsequently visited
Canada and England, where he saw his trans-
lations printed; but in the spring of 1886 he
returned to mission work among the Beavers of
Peace River, but at Dunvegan instead of Ver-
milion.

Gatschet: This word following a title or within

parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Mr. Albert 5. Gatschet,
Washington, D.C.
(Albert Zwolt
Sprachen | aus dem | Siidwesten Nord-
amerikas | (Pueblos- und Apache-
Mundarten; Tonto, Tonkawa, | Digger,
Utah.) | Wortverzeichnisse | heraus-
gegeben, erliutert und mit einer Kin-
leitung iiber Ban, | Begriffsbildung
und locale Gruppirung der amerikan-
ischen | Sprachen versehen | von |
Albert S. Gatschet. | [Vignette.] |
Weimar | Hermann Béhlan | 1876.
Cover title as above, title as above verso note
1 1. Vorwort pp. iii-iv, Inhalt p. v, Einleitung
pp. 1-3, Lautbezeichnung p. 4, Literatur pp. 5-

Samuel).

6, text pp. 7-148, illustrations pp. 149-150, large |

8°,

Die Sprachen des Siidwestens (pp. 37-86) con-
tains Apache and Navajo examples on pp. 39,
40, 52, 55, 59, 62; general discussion of the
Apache, linguistic divisions, ete., with com-
parison of Apache and Navajo words with those
of the Zuni, Kiowa, Comanche, and Shoshone,
pp. 62-69; Tinné (Apache, Navajo, Hoopa,
and Taculli) words, p. 79.—Sammlung von Wor-
tern und Sitzen (pp. 87-91) contains a short
Apache vocabulary and one of the Navajo, p.
88; an Apache vocabulary (from White and
Henry), p. 88-89.— Auswahl von Satzen aus den
Sprachen der Tehuas, Apaches, Tonkawas und
Acomas (pp. 91-95) contains 20 phrases in
Apache (from Loew).—Worttabellen der zwolf
Sprachen und Dialecte (pp. 97-115) contains a
vocabulary of 200 words of the Apache (from
Loew), Navajo (from Loew), and Apache (from
White).—Anmerkungen zu den Worttabellen
(pp. 117-138) contains comments upon the vari-
ous vocabularies.—Zahlworter (pp. 139-143) con-
tains the numerals 1-10 of the Navajo (from
Eaton) and Hoopa (from Schoolcraft).

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, British Museum,
Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley.

— Indian languages of the Pacific

states and territories.

In Magazine of American History, vol. 1,
pp. 145-171, New York, 1877, 4°. (Congress.)

A general discussion, with examples passim.
The Tinné family, with its linguistic divisions,
the Hoopa, Rogue River, and Umpqua, is
treated on pp. 165-166.

Issued separately as follows:

Indian languages | of the | Pacific
states and territories | by | Albert S.
Gatschet | Reprinted from March Num-
ber of The Magazine of American His-
tory. :

[New York, 1877. ]

Half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, 49.

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Pilling,
Wellesley.

Reprinted in the following:

Beach (W. W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416-
447, Albany, 1877, 8°.

Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal Races of North
America, pp. 748-763, New York [1880], 8°.

A later article, with the same title, appeared
in the April, 1882, number of the same peri-
odical, and was also issued separately. It con-
tains no Athapascan linguistics.

—— U.S. geographical surveys west of

the one hundredth meridian, Ist Lieut.
Geo. M. Wheeler, Corps of Engineers,
U. S. Army, in Charge. Appendix.
Linguistics. Prefaced by a classification
of western Indian languages. By Albert
S. Gatschet.

In Wheeler (G.M.), Report upon U.S. Geo-
graphical Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 399-485, Washing-
ton, 1879, 4°,

ATHAPASCAN

Gatschet (A.S.) — Continued.

Areas and dialects of the seven linguistic
stocks (pp. 406-421), embraces the Tinné, pp.
406-408.—General remarks, pp. 467-485.

Gilbert (G. K.), Vocabulary of the Arivaipa,
pp. 424-465.

Loew (O.), Vocabulary of the Arivai’pa, pp.
468-469.

— Vocabulary of the Navajo, pp. 424-465,
469.

Yarrow (H. C.), Vocabulary of the Jicarilla,
pp. 424-465, 469-470.

—— Apache-Tinné language. | Dialect of
the Na-isha band. | Collected at Kiowa,
Apache and Comanche Agency, | Ana-
darko, Ind. Territory, |in Noy. and
Dec. 1884 | by | Albert 8. Gatschet.

Manuscript, pp. 1-74, sm. 4°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology.

Consists of words, phrases, and short texts
with interlinear translation into English.

—Lipan,|a dialect of the Apache-
Tinné family | collected at | Fort
Griffin, Texas, (Shackleford county),
from Apache John, a Mexican | and
Louis, a scout. | By Albert S. Gatschet
| September, 1884.

Manuscript, pp. 1-69, sm. 4°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology.

Consists of words, phrases, and sentences,
tribal and clan names, and short stories, all
accompanied by an English translation.

This manuscript has been partially copied by
Mr. Gatschet into a copy of Powell's. Introduc-
tion to the Study of Indian Languages, second |
edition. |

— Terms, phrases and sentences | from
Apache dialects | gathered from various |
informants | by | Albert S. Gatschet.

Manuscript, pp. 3-19, sm. 4°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology.

Tribal names and other terms of the Chiraca-
hua Apaches, obtained from delegates visiting
Washington, Feb. 12, 1881, pp. 5-6.— Short
vocabulary of the Tsigakinii dialect, pp. 7-8.—
Sentences and words in the Navajo dialect,
obtained from F. H. Cushing, 1882, pp. 9-12.—
Navajo terms obtained from the interpreter of
a Navajo delegation present in Washington in
March, 1885, pp. 14-16.—Some words of Jicarilla
Apache, from Eskie, an Apache in Washington,
Jan. 1884, pp. 18-19.

— Vocabulary of the Navajo language.

Manuscript, 2 leaves, folio (a blank book),
in possession of its compiler. Obtained from
Mr. Frank H. Cushing in 1884.

Consists of 10 words and 50 phrases.

—— [Words, phrases, and sentences in
the Umpkwa language. |

Manuscript, 22 Il. 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology, Recorded in a copy of

LANGUAGES. 35

Gatschet (A.S.) — Continued.
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages,
first edition. Collected at Grande Ronde
Agency, Oregon, in 1877.

—— [Words, phrases, and sentences in
the language of the Pinal Apache. }

Manuscript, pp. 3-108, sm. 4°, in possession
of its compiler. Collected from Na-ki, an
Apache whose English name is Robt. McIntosh,
a student at Hampton, Va., in August, 1883.

Contains also a number of texts with inter-
linear English translation.

Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat-
enberg, in the Bernese Oberland, Switzerland,
October 3, 1832. His propedeutic education was
acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843-1845)
and of Berne (1846-1852), after which he followed
courses in the universities of Berne and Berlin
(1852-1858). His studies had for their object the
ancient world in all its phases of religion, his-
tory, language, and art, and thereby his atten-
tion was at an early day directed to philologic
researches. In 1865 he began the publication of
a series of brief monographs on the local ety-
mology of his country, entitled ‘ Ortsetymolo-
gische Forschungen aus der Schweiz” (1865—
1867). In 1867 he spent several months in London
pursuing antiquarian studies in the British
Museum. In 1868 he settled in New York and
became a contributor to various domestic and
foreign periodicals, mainly on scientific sub-
jects. Drifting into a more attentive study of
the American Indians, he published several
compositions upon their languages, the most
important of which is ‘‘Zw6lf Sprachen aus
dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas,’’ Weimar, 1876.
This led to his appointment to the position
of ethnologist in the United States Geological
Survey, under Maj. John W. Powell, in March,
1877, when he removed to Washington, and first
employed himself in arranging the linguistic
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution,
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology,
which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively
connected with that bureau. To increase its
linguistic collections and to extend his own
studies of the Indian languages, he has made
extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic ex-
ploration among the Indians of North America.
After returning from a six months’ sojourn
among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas of Oregon,
settled on both sides of the Cascade Range, he
visited the Kataba in South Carolina and the
Cha'hta and Shetimasha of Louisiana in
1881-'82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, Yat-
tassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoe, and other tribes
in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe and
Lipans, in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians of
Louisiana in 188485, In 1886 he saw. the
Tlaskaltecs at Saltillo, Mexico, aremnant of the
Nahua race, brought there about 1575 from
Anahuac, and was the first to discover the
affinity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan
family. He also committed to writing the
Tunixka or Tonica language of Louisiana, never

36 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Gatschet (A. 8S.) — Continued. General discussion — Continued.
before investigated, and forming a linguistic Tinné See Brinton (D. G.)
family of itself. Excursions to other parts of Tinné Faulmann (K.)
the country brought to his knowledge other Tukudh Bompas (W. C.)
Indian languages, the Tuskarora, Caughna- Umpkwa Gallatin (A.)
waga, Penobscot, and Karankawa. Umpkwa Gatschet (A.8.)

Mr. Gatschet has written an extensive report | Gentes:
embodying his researches among the Klamath Apache See Bourke (J. G.)
Lake and Modoe Indians of Oregon, which Navajo Matthews (W.)
forms Vol. IL of ‘‘Contributions to North Taculli * Hale (H.)
American Ethnology.” It is in two parts, Upmkwa Hale (H.)

whichaggregate 1,528 pages. Among the tribes P
5 : Raat: Geographic names:
and languages discussed by him in separate Ath See Petitot (E.F.S.J
Sb te H 3 ; shapascan ee Petitot (E. F.S.J.
publications are the Timucua (Florida), Tor- P oz 5; )

kawe (Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mex- | Geological Survey: These words following a title

ico), Chiméto (California), Beothuk (New- or within parentheses after a note indicate that
foundland), Creek and Hitchiti (Alabama). His a copy of the work referred to has been seen by
numerous publications are scattered through the compiler in the library of the United States
magazines and government reports, some being Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.

contained in the Proceedings of the American | Gibbs (George). Observations on some of
Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. the Indian Dialects of Northern Cali-

General discussion:

Ahtinné See Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Apache

Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chippewyau

Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Hupa

Hupa

Hupa
Inkalik
Kenai

Kenai
Kenai
Kenai
Kutchin
Nabiltse
Navajo

Navajo
Navajo
Sursee
Taculli
Taculli
Tahlewah
Tinné
Tinné

Adelung (J. C.) and Vater
(J.5.)

Bancroft (H. H.)
Berghaus (H.)
Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Cremony (J. C.)
Jéhan (L. F.)

Orozco y Berra (M.)
Pimentel (F.)
Smart (C.)
White (J. B.)
Jastian (P. W. A.)
Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Campbell (J.)
Gabelentz (H. G. C.)
Keane (A. H.)
Scouler (J.)
Trumbull (J. H.)
Adelung (J.C.) and Vater
(J...)

Duncan (D.)

Taché (A. A.)

Gatschet (A. 5.)

Gibbs (G.)

Powers (S.)

Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Adelung (J. C.) and Vater |
(J.S.)

Balbi (A.)

Bancroft (H. H.)

Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Bancroft (H. H.)

Gibbs (G.)

Adelung (J. C.) and Vater
(J.S.)

Bancroft (H. H.)

Busechmann (J.C. E.)

Balbi (A.)

Balbi (A.)

3ancroft (H. H.)
Gibbs (G.)

Bancroft (H. H.)

Bompas (W, C.)

fornia. By G. Gibbs.

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3,
pp. 420-423, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°.

Includes brief remarks on the Hoopah, Tahle-
wah, and Nabiltse.

— Vocabularies of Indian Languages
in northwest California. By George
Gibbs, esq.

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3,
pp. 428-445, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°.

Among these vocabularies are one of the
Hoopah and one of the Tahlewah, pp. 440-445.

— Notes on the Tinneh or Chepewyan
Indians of British and Russian Amer-
ica. Communicated by George Gibbs.

In the Smithsonian Inst. Annual Report for
1866, pp. 303-3827, Washington, 1867, 8°. (Pil-
ling.)

The Loucheux Indians (pp, 311-320), based
upon communications from W. L. Hardesty, of
the Hudson’s Bay Co., contains a number of
Loucheux words on p. 315.

Issued separately also, without change.
(Eames, Pilling.)

Vocabularies of the | Alekwa | Arra

Arra & | Ho-pa | of the Klamath and

Trinity Rivers | Northern California |

Collected in 1852 | by | George Gibbs.
Manuscript, 26 unnumbered leaves, written

on one side only, folio, in the library of the

Bureau of Ethnology.
Arranged alphabetically by English words in

four columns, the English column containing

about 700 words, the other languages from 300

to 500 words each, the Ho-pa (which is the only

one belonging to the Athapascan family) being
the most incomplete.

There are in the same library two partial
copies (180 words each) of the Hopa, made by
Dr. Gibbs, including only the words given in
the early issues of the Smithsonian Institution
‘standard vocabulary.”

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Gibbs (G.) — Continued.
— Vocabulary of the Nabiltse language.
Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.
Contains about 100 words.
Vocabulary of the Willopah (dialect
of the Taheully Athabasca).

Manuscript, 6 unnumberel leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected ‘‘from an Indian at S. 8S. Ford’s, Feb.
1856."

Includes the 180 words given in the standard
schedule issued by the Smithsonian Institu-
tion and about 20 words in addition.

George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs,
was born on the 17th of July, 1815, at Sunswick,
Long Island. near the village of Halletts Cove,
now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was
taken to Europe, where he remained two years.
On his return from Europe he commenced the
reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree
of bachelor of law at Harvard University. In
1848 Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to
Oregon and established himself at Columbia.
In 1854 he received the appointment of collector
of the port of Astoria, which he held during Mr.
Fillmore’s administration. Later he removed
from Oregon to Washington Territory, and set-
tled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort Steila-
coom. Here he had his headquarters for several
years, devoting himself to the study of the In-
dian languages and to the collection of vocabu-
laries and traditions of the northwestern tribes.
During a great part of the time he was attached
to the United States Government Commission
in laying the boundary, as the geologist and bot-
anist of the expedition. He was also attached
as geologist to the survey of a railroad route to
the Pacific, under Major Stevens. In 1857 he
was appointed to the northwest boundary sur-
vey under Mr. Archibald Campbell. as commis-
sioner. In 1860 Mr. Gibbs returned to New
York, and in 1861 was on duty in Washington
in guarding the Capitol. Later he resided in
Washington, being mainly employed in the
Hudson Bay Claims Commission, to which he
vas secretary. He was also engaged in the
arrangement of a large mass of manuscript
bearing upon the ethnology and philology of the
American Indians. His services were availed
of by the Smithsonian Institution to superin-
tend its labors in this field, and to his energy and
complete knowledge of the subject it greatly
owes its success in this branch of the service.
The valuable and laborious service which he
rendered to the Institution was entirely gratu-
itous, and in his death that establishment as
well as the cause of science lost an ardent friend
and important contributor to its advancement.
In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married his cousin, Miss
Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, R. I., and removed
to New Haven, where he died on the 9th of
April, 1873.

Gilbert (Grove Karl). Vocabulary of the
Arivaipa language.

37

Gilbert (G. K.) — Continued.

In Wheeler (G. M.), Report upon U.S. Geog.
Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, Washington, 1879, 4°.

Collected at Camp Grant, Arizona, December,
1871. It contains 211 words.

Gilbert (—) and Rivington (—).
mens | of the | Languages of all Na-
tions, | and the | oriental and foreign
types | now in use in| the printing
offices | of | Gilbert & Rivington, |
limited. | [Eleven lines quotations. ] |

London: | 52, St. John’s
Clerkenwell, E.C. | 1886.

Printed cover as above, no inside title, con-
tents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-66, 162.

St. John iii, 16, in Slavé of Mackenzie River
(syllabic and roman), p. 58; Tinné or Chepe-
wyan of Hudson Bay (syllabic), p.62; Tukudh
of Youkon River, p. 64.

The so-called Tinné specimen in roman char-
acters on p. 63 is really Chippewa.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Speci-

square,

Gospel according to Saint John . . .
Tinné language. See Kirkby (W. W.)
Gospel of St. Mark translated into the
Slavé language. See Reeve (W. D.)
Gospel of St. Matthew translated into the
See Reeve (W. D.)
Gospels of the four evanvelists . . .
in the language of the Chipewyan In-
dians. See Kirkby (W. W.)
Government George. See Dorsey (J. O.)

Slave language.

Grammar:
Déné See Morice (A. G.)
Montagnais Legoff (L.)
Montagnais Végréville (V.'T.)
Navajo Matthews (W.)

Grammatic comments:

Apache See Featherman (A.)
Apache Miiller (F.)
Apache White (J. B.)
Athapascan Dorsey (J. 0.)
Athapascan Gallatin (A.)
Athapasecan Grasserie (R. de la).
Chippewyan Gallatin (A.)
Chippewyan Grandin (—).
Déné Morice (A. G.)
Kenai Miller (F.)
Kenai Radloff (L.)
Loucheux Miiller (F.)
Navajo Featherman (A.)
Navajo Miiller (F.)
Nayajo Wilson (E. F.)
Peau de Liévre Miiller (F.)
Sursee Wilson (E. F.)
Taculli Miller (F.)
Tlatskenai Miiller (F.)
Umpkwa Miiller (F.)
Grammatic treatise:
Apache See Bancroft (H. H.)
Apache Cremony (J. C.)

Grammatic treatise

Grandin

38

Continued.
See Bancroft (H. H.)

Chippewyan

Déné Petitot (Hf. F.S. J.)
Loucheux Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Montagnais Petitot (EK. F.S. J.)

Peau de Liévre Petitot (BE. F.S. J.)

(Bishop —).
the Chipewyan verb.

Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves, written
on one side only, folio, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

Contains the indicative present, future, and
past of the verbs fo eat, to walk, and to look.

This manuscript is a copy made by Dr. Geo.

Gibbs.
Grasserie (Raoul de la). Etudes de
grammaire comparée. | De la conju-
objective | par | Raoul de la
Grasserie, | docteur en droit, juge au
tribunal de Rennes, | membre de la
société de linguistique de Paris. | (Kx-
trait des Mémoires de la Société de
linguistique, t. VI, 4° fascieule.) | [De-
sign. | |

Paris. | Imprimerie nationale. | M
DCCC LXXXVIITI [1888].

Printed cover as above, half-title reverse
blank 1 1. title as above reverse blank 1 1. text
pp. 5-39, 8°.

In chapter 3 the conjugation ‘objective
polysynthétique”’ is illustrated by examples
from a number of American languages, among
them the Athapascan.

Copies seen: Gatschet, Powell.

gaison

Etudes | de | grammaire comparée |
Des relations grammaticales | considé-
rées dans leur concept et dans leur ex-
pression | ou de la | catégorie des cas |

BIBLIOGRAPHY

OF THE

| Grasserie (It. de la) —Continued.

|
|
|
|
|
|

Some forms of |

par | Raoul de la Grasserie | docteur en |

Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The
American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba).
| The Whole Subject Complete in One
Volume | Illustrated with Numerous
Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah
M. Haines. | [Design.] |

Chicago: | the Mas-sin-na-gan com-
pany, | 1888.

Title verso copyright notice ete. 1 1. preface
pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illustrations
pp. 9-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°.

Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives
special lists and a general alphabetic list of
the tribes of North America, derivations of
tribal names being sometimes given.—Numer-
als 1-102 of the Navajo (from Catlin), p. 443; of
the Apache, pp. 444-445.—Numerals 1-10 of the

sae

Haines (EK. M.) — Continued.

Grouard (Pére Emile).

droit | Juge au Tribunal de Rennes |
Membre de la Société de Linguistique
de Paris. |

Paris | Jean Maisonneuve, éditeur |
25, quai Voltaire, | 25 | 1890

Printed cover as above, half-title verso blank
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. 345-
351, 8°.

Examples from several North American lan-
guages are made use of by the author: Nahuatl,
Dakota, Othomi, Maya, Quiché, Totonaque,
Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasque, Esquimau,
Iroquois, Athapaske, Chiapanéque, Sahaptin,
Tchinuk, Choctaw, pp. 17, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74,
84, 129-132, 133, 177, 325-326, 394, 395.

Copies seen: Gatschet.

Abridgment of
the bible in the Dené Tchippewyan
language, syllabie characters. (*)

In a letter from the Rey. Emile Petitot, dated
from Mareuil, France, Apr. 24, 1889, he tells me
that among the manuscripts left by him at his
last residence, St. Raphael des Tcheppewayans,
Saskatechewan, was a copy of the above work.
Whether the original was in manuscript or in
printed form he failed to inform me, In answer
to further inquiries on the subject, Father
Petitot wrote me under date of June 1, 1891:
“ Referring to your questions, I reiterate that
the abridgment of the bible, a copy of which
was left by me at St. Raphael Mission, is the
work of Mer. Faraud [q. v.], made while he was
a simple missionary at Athabasca, before my
arrival in the missions of the far north in 1862.
The same work was printed in Indian charae-
ters by Pére Grouard at Lac la Biche in 1878-'79,
as well as a new and more complete edition
of the Déné-Tchippewyan prayer book, another
intended for the Dendjie, a third intended for
the Cree.”

Chippewyan (four sets, one ‘‘ from a German
interpreter,” one ‘‘ from McKenzie,” one ‘* from
a woman, a native of Churchill,’’ and one-
‘from a Chippewyan"’), p. 450.

Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling.

’

| Haldeman (Samuel Stehman). Analytic

orthography: | an | investigation of
the sounds of the voice, | and their |
alphabetic notation; | including | the
mechanism of speech, | and its bearing
upon | etymology. | By | 8.8. Halde-
man, A.M., | professor in Delaware
college; | member [&c. six lines. ] |
Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co.
| London: Triibner & co. Paris: Ben-

ATHAPASCAN
Haldeman (S.8.) — Continued.

ler. | 1860.

Half-title ‘‘Trevelyan prize essay” verso
blank 1 I. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi,
contents pp. vii-viil, slip of additional correc-

tions, text pp. 5-147, corrections and additions |

p. 148, 4°.

Numerals 1-10 of the Apache, p. 146.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu-
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull.

First printed in American Philosoph. Soc.
Trans. new series, vol.11. (*)

Samuel Stehman Haldeman, naturalist, was
born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa.,
August 12, 1812; died in Chickies, Pa., September
10, 1880. He was educated at a classical school
in Harrisburg, and then spent two years in
Dickinson College. In 1836 Henry D. Rogers,
haying been appointed state geologist of New
Jersey, sent for Mr. Haldeman, who had been
his pupil at Dickinson, to assist him. <A year
later, on the reorganization of the Pennsylvania
geological survey, Haldeman was transferred
to his own state, and was actively engaged on

the survey until 1842. He made extensive |

researches among Indian dialects, and also in
Pennsylvania Dutch, besides investigations in
the English, Chinese, and other languages.—A p-
pleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Hale (Horatio). United States | explor-
ing expedition. | During the years |
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the
command of | Charles Wilkes, U.S.N.
| Vol. VI. | Ethnography and _ philol-
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist
of the expedition. |

Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sher-
man. | 1846.

Half-title ‘‘ United States exploring expedi-
tion, by authority of Congress” verso blank 11.
title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v—vii, alpha-
bet pp. ix—xii, half-title verso blank 11. text pp.
3-666, map, 4°. : ‘

General remarks on the Tahkali-Umkwa
family, including alist of clans, pp. 201-204.—
Vocabularies of the Tlatskanai (Tlatskanai and
Kwalhioqua) and Umkwa (Umpqua), lines B,
C, pp. 570-629.

Anderson (A. C.), Vocabulary of the Tahkali
(Carriers), line A, pp. 570-629.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con-
gress, Lenox, Trumbull.

At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought
$13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon
morocco, top edge gilt, $13.

Issued also with the following title:

— United States | exploring expedi-
tion. | During the years | 1838, 1839,
1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command
of | Charles Wilkes, U. 8. N. | Ethnog-

LANGUAGES. 39

| Hale (H.) — Continued.
jamin Duprat. | Berlin: Ferd. Diimm- |

raphy and philology. | By | “uratio
Hale, | philologist of the expecuition. |

Philadelphia: | Lea and Blanchard.

| 1846.

Half-title ‘* United States exploring expedi-
tion’ verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. con-
tents pp. v—-vii, alphabet pp. ix—xii, half-title
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen: Eames, Lenox.

—WWas America peopled from Polynesia?
In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte-
rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°.
Table of the pronouns J, thou, we (inc.), we
(exc.), ye, and they in the languages of Polynesia
and of western America, pp. 386~387, includes
the Tinné.
Issued separately as follows :

— Was America peopled from Poly-
nesia? | A study in comparative Philol-
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale. | From the
Proceedings of the International Con-
gress of Americanists | at Berlin, in
October 1888. |

Berlin 1890. | Printed by H. 8. Her-
mann.

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°.

Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and
of western America, including the 'Tinné, p. 14.

Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley.

Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport,
N. H., May 3, 1817, was graduated at Harvard in
1837,and was appointed in the same year philol-
ogist to the United States exploring expedition
under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity
he studied a large number of the languages of
the Pacific islands, as well as of North and
South America, Australia, and Aftiea, and also
investigated the history, traditions, and customs
of the tribes speaking those languages. The
results of his inquiries are given in his ‘* Eth-
nography and Philology” (Philadelphia, 1846),
which forms the seventh volume of the expedi-
tion reports. He has published numerous
memoirs on anthropology and ethnology, is a
member of many learned societies both in
Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice
president of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, presiding over the
section of anthropology.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of
Am. Biog. D

Hamilton (Alexander 8.) Vocabulary
of the Haynarger.

Manuscript, 5 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on both sides the sheets, in the library
of the Bureau of Ethnology. Sent to the Smith-
sonian Institution by its compiler from Crescent
City, Cal., Nov., 1856. Recorded on one of the
Smithsonian forms of 180 words, with an added
leaf, the whole conitprising about 220 words and
phrases.

40) BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Hamilton (A.S.) — Continued.
The same library has two copies of the orig-
inal manuscript, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs.

Hare Indians. See Peau de Liévre.

Harmon (Daniel Williams). A | journal
| of | voyages and travels | in the |
interiour of North America, | between
the 47th and 58th degrees of north lati-
tude, extend-| ing from Montreal nearly
to the Pacific ocean, a distance | of
about 5,000 miles, including an account
of the prin- | cipal occurrences, during
a residence of nineteen | years, in differ-
ent parts of the country. | To which are
added, | a concise description of the face
of the country, its inhabitants, | their
manners, customs, laws, religion, ete.
and considera-| ble specimens of the two
languages, most extensively | spoken;
together with an-account of the princi-
| pal animals, to be found in the forests
and | prairies of this extensive region.
| Illustrated by a map of the country.
| By Daniel Williams Harmon, | a
partner in the north west company. |

Andover: | printed by Flage and
Gould. | 1820.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title
verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v—xxiii, text
pp. 25-432, map, 8°.

A specimen of the Tacully or Carrier tongue
(a vocabulary of 280 words), pp. 403-412.—The
numerical terms of the Tacullies (1-1000), p. 413.

Extracts from the linguistic portion of this
volume are given by many authors.

Oopies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe-
neum, British Museum, Congress, Dunbar,
Eames, Geological Survey.

At the Field sale, no. 908, a half-morocco copy

brought $3.50; at the Brinley sale, no. 4685,
$5.25; at the Murphy sale, no. 1146, $2.25.

Harvard: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy
of the work referred to has been seen by the
compiler in the library of Harvard University,
Cambridge, Mass.

Haynarger. See Henagi.

Hazen (Gen. William Babcock). Vocab-
ulary of the Indians of Applegate
creek (Na-bilt-se).

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded by its com-
piler to Dr. Geo. Gibbs, from Ft. Yamhill, Ore-
gon, Jan. 10, 1857.

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms of
180 words, all the blank spaces being filled.

William Babcock Haz®n, soldier, born in |

West Hartford, Vt., September 27, 1830, died

Hazen (W. B.) — Continued.

in Washington, D. C., January 16, 1887. He
was a descendant of Moses Hazen. His
parents removed to Ohio in 1833. William was
graduated at the U. S. Military Academy in
1855, and after serving against the Indians in
California and Oregon joined the 8th Infantry
in Texas in 1857. He commanded successfully
in five engagements. until, in December, 1859, he
was severely wounded in a personal encounter
with the Comanches. He was appointed
assistant professor of infantry tacties at the
U.S. Military Academy in February, 1861, 1st
lieutenant, April 6, and promoted captain on
May 14. Inthe autumn of 1861 he raised the
41st Ohio volunteers, of which he became
colonel on Oct. 29, 1861. He was appointed brig-
a(lier-general of volunteers Nov. 29, 1862. He
assaulted and captured Fort McAllister, Dee.
13, 1864, for which service he was promoted a
major-general of volunteers the same day. He
Was in command of the 15th army corps from
May 19 till Ang. 1, 1865. At the end of the war
he had received all the brevets in the regular
army up to major-general. He was made
colonel of the 88th infantry in 1866; was in
France during the Franco-Prussian war, and
was U.S. military attaché at Vienna during the
Russo-Turkish war. In the interval between
those two visits, while stationed at Fort Buford,
Dak., he made charges of fraud against post-
traders, which resulted in revelations that were
damaging to Secretary Belknap. On Dee. 8,
1880, he succeeded Gen. Albert J. Meyer as chief
signal-oflicer, with the rank of brigadier-gen-
eral.—A ppleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Hearne (Samuel). A | journey | from |
Prince of Wales’s Fort in Hudson’s
Bay, | to | the northern ocean. | Under-
taken | by order of the Hudson’s Bay
company, | for the discovery | of cop-
per mines, a northwest passage, &c. |
In the Years 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. |
By Samuel Hearne. |

London: | Printed for A. Strahan and
T.Cadell: | And Sold by TT. Cadell
Jun.and W. Davies, (Successors to |
Mr. Cadell,) in the Strand. | 1795.

Folded map, title verso blank 1 1. dedication
pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-x, contents pp. xi-xix,
errata p. [xx], introduction pp. xxi-xliy, folded
plate, text pp. 1-458, list of books verso direc-
tions to the binder 1 1.seven other maps and
plates, 4°.

A number of Athapascan terms and proper
names passim.

‘To conclude, I cannot sufficiently regret
the loss of a considerable Vocabulary of the
Northern Indian Language, containing sixteen
folio pages, which was lent to the late Mr.
Hutchins, then Corresponding Secretary to the
Company, to copy for Captain Dunean, when he
went on discoveries to Hudson’s Bay in the

ATHAPASCAN

Hearne (S.) — Continued.
year one thousand seven hundred and ninety.
But, Mr. Hutchins dying soon after, the Vocab-
ulary was taken away with the rest of his
effects, and can not now be recovered ; angl mem-
ory, at this time, will by no means serve to
replace it.’— Preface.

Copies seen: Lenox.

——A | journey | from | Prince of
Wales’s fort, | in Hudson’s bay, | to |
the Northern Ocean. | Undertaken |
by order of the Hudson’s bay company.
| For the discovery of | copper mines,
a north west passage, &c.|In the
Years: 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | By
Samuel Hearne. |

Dublin: | printed for P. Byrne, No.
108, and J. Rice, No. 111, | Grafton-
street. | 1796. .

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1

}. dedication pp. ui-iv, preface pp. v-x, contents |

xi-xxy, introduction pp. xxvii-l, text pp. 1-459,
directions to the binder p. [460], maps, plates,
8°.
Linguistic contents as under title next above.
Copies seen: Geological Survey.

Henagi:
Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.)
Vocabulary Hamilton (A.5S.)

Henry (Dr. Charles C.)
the Apachee language.

Vocabulary of

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 5,
pp. 578-589, Philadelphia, 1855, 4°.

The vocabulary, consisting of about 400
words, pp. 578-587.— Numerals 1-10000000, pp.
587-589.

Collected in New Mexico in 1853.

Herdesty (W.L.) [Terms of relation-
ship of the Kutchin or Louchieux, col-
lected by W. L. Herdesty, Fort Liard,
Hudson’s Bay Ty.]

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity
and affinity of the human family, pp. 293-382,
lines 67, Washington, 1871, 4°.

—— See Ross (R. B.)

Higgins (N. 8.) Notes on the Apache
tribes inhabiting the
Arizona.

Manuscript, pp. 1-30, folio, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C.
Transmitted by its author to the Smithsonian
Institution, April 21, 1866.

On pp. 1-2 is given a list of the names of the
Apache tribes with comments thereon. Pp. 3-
22 contain a general discussion of these In-
dians, their number, physical constitution,
picture writing, dress, ete. Pp. 23-29 contain
a vocabulary of about 100 words and phrases
arranged by classes.

territory of |

LANGUAGES.

Hubbard (Dr. —).

A]

Hoffman (Dr. Walter James).
lary of the Jicarilla Apache language.
Manuscript, 2 ll. 4°, in the library of the
3ureau of Ethnology. Collected at Washing-
ton, D. C., in 1880.
Consists of 50 words and several songs set to
music.
Hoopa.

Vocabu-

See Hupa.
Vocabularies of cer-
By

Howse (Joseph).
tain North American languages.
T [J?] Howse, Esq.

In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 4,
pp. 191-206, London, 1850, 8°. (Congress.)

Vocabulary (words, phrases, and sentences)
of the Chipewyan (1), Chipewyan (2), Beaver

(1), Beaver (2), and Sikanni of New Caledonia,

pp. 191-193.

Vocabulary of the

Lototen or Tutatamys (from Dr. Hub-

bard’s Notes, 1856.)

In Taylor (A.S.), Indianology of California,
in California Farmer, vol. 13, no. 16, June 8,
1860. (Powell.)

List of rancherias and clans (13) of the Toto-
ten, and vocabulary of 61 words.

Hudson Bay:
Bible passages See British.
Vocabulary Adelung (J. C.) and

Vater (J.S.)
Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Hupa:
General discussion See Gatschet (A. S.)
General discussion Gibbs (G.)

General discussion Powers (S.)

Numerals Bancroft (H. H.)
Numerals Gatschet (A.S.)
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) and
Dawson (G. M.)
Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.)
Vocabulary Azpell (T. F.)
‘Vocabulary Bancrott (H. H.)
Vocabulary Busechmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Crook (G.)
Vocabulary Curtin (J.)
Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 5S.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Powers (S.)
Vocabulary Turner (W. W.)
Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Gatschet (A. 8.)
Words Latham (R. G.)
| Hymn book:
Chippewyan See Kirkby (W. W.)
Slave Hymns.
Slave Kirkby (W. W.)
Tukudh M’ Donald (R.)
Hymns:
Beaver See Bompas (W.C.)
Beaver Garrioch (A. C.)
Chippewyan Bompas (W. C.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) and
Bompas (W. C.)
Déné Morice (A. G.)

42 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

.

s
Hymns — Continued. | Hymns — Continued.

Dog Rib See Bompas (W, ©.) {London:] Society for promoting
Montagnais ae ee christian knowledge, | Northumber-
Montagnais -errault (C.O.) panei ic s

% € av i ‘haringe’ cross 5 :
Sie Reeve (WD) eee ienue, Charing cross, W. C
Tukudh M’ Donald (R.) [ 1890. ]

Hymns |in the | Tenni or Slavi lan-
euage |-of the | Indians of Mackenzie
river, | in the | north-west territory of
Canada, | [Seal of the 8. P.C. K.] |

Title verso blank 1 1. text in the Tenni lan-
guage (154 hymns with English headings) pp.
1-118, 11. recto blank verso printers, 16°. Pos-
sibly by Rev. W. D. Reeve or Bishop Bompas.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

ids

Inkalik:

General discussion See Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Dall (W. H.)
Vocabulary Schott (W.)
Vocabulary Zagoskin (L. A.)
Words Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Inkalit-Kenai. See Kenai.

Isbester (J.A.) Ona short vocabulary
of the Loucheux language. By J. A.
Isbester.

In Philologieal Soe. jof London] Proc. vol. 4,
pp. 184-185, London, 1850, 8°.

Vocabulary (35 words) of the Loucheux, to
which are added for comparison afew words (14)
of the Kenay, p. 185.

James (Dr. Edwin), A | narrative | of
| the captivity and adventures | of |
John Tanner, | (U.S. interpreter at the
Sant de Ste. Marie,) | during | thirty |
years residence among the Indians |
in the | interior of North America. |
Prepared for the press | by Edwin
James, M. D. | Editor of an Account of
Major Long’s Expedition from Pitts-

burgh | to the Rocky Mountains. |
New-York: | G. & C. & H. Carvill,
108 Broadway. | 1830.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. in-
troductory chapter pp. 3-21, text pp. 23-426, 8°.

Numerals 1-10 of the Chippewyan (from a
German interpreter), asecond set (from MeKen- |
zie), and a third (from a woman, a native of
Churchill), pp. 324-333.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Brinton,
Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Lenox, Trumbull.

At the Field sale,no, 1113, a half-moroceo copy
brought $3.63; at the Squier sale, no. 552, a
similar copy, $3.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no.
1020, 35 frs. The Murphy copy, no. 2449, half
green calf, brought $3.50.

Reissued as follows:

A | narrative | of | the captivity and
adventures | of | John Tanner, | (U.S.
interpreter at the Saut de Ste. Marie, ) |

James (E.) — Continued,

during | thirty years residence among
the Indians | in the | interior of North
America. | Prepared for the press | by
Edwin James, M. D. | Editor of an Ac-
count of Major Long’s Expedition from
Pittsburgh | to the Rocky Mountains. |

London: | Baldwin & Cradock, Pa-
ternoster Row. | Thomas Ward,84 High
Holborn. | 1830.

Pp. 1-426, portrait, 8°. The American edition
with a new title-page only. 2

Copies seen: Astor, Trumbull.

Clarke, 1886, no, 6652, prices a copy in boards
$5.

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 35685, titles an edition
in German, Leipzig, 1840, 8°, and one in French,
Paris, 1855, 2 vols. 8°.

Edwin James, geologist, born in Weybridge,
Vt., August 27.1797, died in Burlington, Iowa,
October 28, 1861: He was graduated at Middle-
bury College in 1816, and then spent three years
in Albany, where he studied medicine with his
brother, Dr. Daniel James, botany with Dr.
John Torry, and geology under Prof. Amos
Eaton. In 1820 he was appointed botanist and
geologist to the exploring expedition of Maj.
Samuel H. Long, and was actively engaged in
field work during that year. For two years fol-
lowing he was occupied in compiling and pre-
paring for the press the report of the ‘‘ Expedi-
tion to the Rocky Mountains, 1818-19” (2 vols.
with atlas, Philadelphia and London, 1823). He
then received the appointment of surgeon in
the U.S. Army, and for six years was stationed
at frontier outposts. In 1830 he resigned his
commission and returned to Albany. In 1834
he again went west, and in 1836 settled in the
vieinity of Burlington, Llowa.—Appleton's
Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Jéhan (Louis-Franeois). Troisiéme et
¢

derniére | Encyclopédie théologique, |
[&c. twenty-four lines] | publiée | par
M. Vabbé Migne | [&c. six lines.] |
Tome trente-quatrieme. | Dictionnaire
de linguistique. | Tome unique, | Prix:
7 francs. |

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Jéhan (L. F.) — Continued.

S’Imprime etse vend chez J.-P.Migne,
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue
d’Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Bar-
riére Venfer de Paris. | 1858.

Second title: Dictionnaire | de
| et| de philologie comparée.| Histoire de
toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou |
traité complet d’idiomographie, | embrassant |
l'examen critique des systémes et de toutes les

linguistique

43

| Jéhan (L. I.) — Continued.

questions qui se rattachent | A l’origine et a la |

filiation des langues, 4 leur essence organique
jet & leurs rapports avee l'histoire des races
humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé
@un | Essai sur le role du langage dans l’évolu-
tion de intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F.Jéhan
(de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Société géo-
logique de France, de l’Académie royale des

sciences de Turin, ete. | [Quotation, three
lines.] | Publié | par M.1' Abbé Migne, | éditeur |

de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou |
des cours complets sur chaque branche de la
science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix:
7 francs. |

S'Imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne,
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue d’Am-
boise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Barriére d’eufer
de Paris. | 1858.

Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 11. columns
(two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°.

Copies seen: British Museum, Shea.

A later edition as follows:

—— Troisiéme et derniere | Encyclopédie
| théologique, | ou troisiéme et der-
niere
les parties de la science religieuse, |
offrant en frangais, et par ordre alpha-
bétique, | la plus claire, la plus facile,
la plus commode, la plus variée | et la
plus complete des théologies: | [&e.
seventeen lines] | publiee | par M. Vabbé
Migne, | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente-
quatriéme. | Dictionnaire de linguis-
tique. | Tome unique.| Prix: 8 franes. |

serie de dictionnaires sur toutes

S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P.
Migne, éditeur, | aux ateliers catho-

liques, rue d’Amboise,20,au Petit-Mont-
rouge, | autrefois Barriere d’enfer de

Second title; Dictionnaire | de | linguistique |
et | de philologie comparée. | Histoire de toutes
les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | traité com-
plet Widiomographie, | embrassant | Vexamen
critique des systémes et de toutes les questions
qui se rattachent | alorigine et a la filiation
des langues, a leur essence organique | eta leurs
rapports avec l'histoire des races humaines, de
leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé d'un | Essai sur
le role du langage dans l’évolution de lintelli-
gence humaine.| Par L.-F. Jéhan (de Saint-
Clavien), | Membre de la Societé géologique de
France. de | Académie royale des sciences de
Turin, etc. | (Quotation, three lines.] | Publié |
par M.l’abbé Migne, | éditeur dela Bibliothéque
universelle du clergé, | ou | des cours complets
sur chaque branche de la science ecclésiastique.
| Tome unique. | Prix: 7 frances. |

S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, edi-
teur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d' Amboise,
20, au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefo1s Barriére
Wenfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864

First title verso ‘‘ avis important” 11. second
title verso printer 1 1. introduction numbered by
columns 9-208, text in double columns 209-1250,
notes additionnelles columns 1249-1434, table
des matiéres columns 1433-1448, large 8°.

Tableau polyglotte des langues de la région
alleghanique (Amérique du Nord), columns
243-248, comprises a comparative vocabulary of
twenty-six words in thirty-five languages, of
which lines 34 and 35 are Cheppewyan (Chep-
pewyan propre) and Tacouillie or Carrier.—Ta-
bleau de Venchainement geographique
langues américaines et asiatiques, columns 290-
299, contains a few words in Kinai.—The article
Apaches, column 308, contains general remarks
on the tribal divisions.— Tableau polyglotte des
langues de la cote occidentale de 1 Amérique du
Nord, columns 445-448, comprises acomparative
vocabulary ef twenty-six words in twelve
languages, of which line 12 is KinaY or
Kinaitze. — Lennappe, ou Chippaways-Dela-
ware ou Algonquino-Mohegane, columns 796—
824, contains in columns 804 and 805 remarks on
the languages of the Cheppewyan propre and
Tacoullies.—Tableau polyglotte de la region
Missouri-Colombienne, columns 899-900, com-
prises a comparative vocabulary of twenty-six
words in ten languages, of which lines 1 and 3
are Sussee and Atnah.

Copies seen: Eames.

des

Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 Jicarilla Apache. See Apache.

K.

.
Kaiyuhkhotana: : | Kautz (A. V.) — Continued.
Numerals See Dall (W. H.) Manuscript, 2 unnumbered leaves, folio,
Vocabulary Dall (W.H.) ~—s| written on both sides, in the library of the
F - » F S Bureauof Ethnology. Transmitted to Dr. Geo.
Katolik Deneya ‘tiye dittlisse. See Gibbs by its compiler, from Fort Oxford,
Legoff (L.) Oregon Territory, June 19, 1855.

The vocabulary is in double columns, English
and Toutouten, and contains about 200 words.

In the same library is a short vocabulary
(about 70 words) of the same language by the

Kautz (Gen. August Valentine). Vocab-
ulary of the Indian language of the
Toutouten tribe.

Kautz (A. V.) — Continued. |

44

then Lieut. Kautz, which contaius a few words
not in the longer vocabulary. There are also in
the same library two copies, by Dr. Geo. Gibbs,
of the longer vocabulary.

August Valentine Kautz, soldier, born in
Ispringen, Baden, Germany, Jan. 5, 1828. His
parents emigrated to this country in 1828, and
settled in Brown County, Ohio, in 1832. The
son served as a private in the Ist regiment of
Ohio volunteers in the Mexican war, and on his
discharge was appointed to the United States
Military Academy, where he was graduated in
1852 and assigned to the 4thinfantry. He served
in Oregon and Washington Territory till the
civil war, and in the Rogue River wars of
1853-55, and was wounded in the latter, and in
the Indian war on Puget Sound in 1856, in
which he was also wounded. In 1855 he was
promoted 1st lieutenant, and in 1857 commended
for gallantry by Gen. Scott. In 1859-’60 he
traveledin Europe. He was appointed captain
in the 6th U.S. cavalry in 1861, and served with
the regiment from its organization through the |
peninsular campaign of 1852, commanding it
during the seven days until just before South
Mountain, when he was appointed colonel of
the 2d Ohio cavalry. He took part in the
capture of Monticello, Ky., May 1, 1863, and on
June 9 was brevetted major for commanding in
an action near there.

|

He was engaged in the
pursuit and capture of John Morgan, in July,
1853, preventing him from crossing the Ohio,
and afterward served as chief of cavalry of the
23d corps. On May 7, 1864, he was made briga-
dier-general of volunteers and assigned to the
command of the cavalry division of the army

of the James. He entered Petersburg with his
small cavalry command on June 9, 1861, for
which attack he was brevetted lieutenant-

colonel, and he led the advance of the Wilson

raid, which cut the roads leading into Richmond
from the south, for more than forty days. On
Oct. 28, 1864, he was brevetted major-general of
volunteers, and in March, 1865, was assigned to
the command of a division of colored troops,
whieh he marched into Richmoad on April
3. He was brevetted colonel in the regular
service for gallant and meritorious service
in action on the Darbytown road, Virginia,
October 7, 1864. Also brigadier and major
general for gallant and meritorious services in
the field during the war, Mar. 13, 1865. Gen.
Kautz was appointed lieutenant-colonel of the
34th infantry in 1866, transferred to the 15th in
1869, and commanded the regiment on the New
Mexican frontier till 1874. He organized several
successful expeditions against the Mescalero®
Apaches, who hid fled from their reservation in
1864, and in 1870-71 succeeded in establishing
the tribe on their reservation, where they have
since remained. In June, 1874, he was pro-
moted colonel of the 8th infantry, and in 1875
was placed in command of the department of
Arizona. Heserved in California from 1878 till
1886, and is now (1887) in Nebraska.—Apple-
ton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Kennicott (Robert).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Keane (Augustus H.) Ethnography and

philology of America. By A. H. Keene.

In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West
Indies, etc. pp. 443-561, London, 1878, 8°.

General scheme of American races and lan-
guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the
branches of the Athabasean or Tinney family
divided into languages and dialects, pp. 463-
465.—Alphabetical list of all known American
tribes and languages, pp. 498-561.

Reprinted in the 1882 and 1885 editions of the
same work and on the same pages.

Kenai:

Dictionary See Radloff (L.)
Adelung (J. C.)
Vater (J. 8.)

Balbi (A.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
3uschmann (J.C. E.)
tadloftf (L.)
Miiller (F_)
Ellis (R.)
Erman (G. A.)
rallatin (A.)
Latham (R. G.)
Adelung (J. C.)
Vater (J.S.)
Baer (K. E. von).
Balbi (A.)

General discussion and
General discussion
General discussion
General discussion
Grammatic comments
Grammatic comments
Numerals

Numerals

Tribal names

Tribal names
Vocabulary and
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Vocabulary 3ancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Vocabulary Dall (W. H.)
Vocabulary Davidoff (G. I.)
Vocabulary Davidson (G.)
Vocabulary De Meulen (E.)
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.)
Vocabulary Jéhan (L. F.)

Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Voeabulary
Vocabulary

Krusenstern (A. J.von).
Latham (R. G.)
Lisiansky (U.)
Prichard (J. C.)

Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.)

Vocabulary Staffeief (V.) and Pet-
roff (I.)

Vocabulary Wowodsky (—).

Words Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Words Daa (L. K.)

Words Ellis (R.)

Words Jéhan (L. F.)

Words Latham (R. G.)

Words Pott (A. F.)

Words Schomburgk (R. H.)

Words Wilson (D.)

Kotch-4-Kutchin
vocabulary. Words from the language
of the Kotch-ad-Kutchin—the Indians
of Yukon River, at the mouth of Por-
cupine River, in northern Alaska.

In Whymper (F.), Travel and adventure in
Alaska, pp. 322-328, London, 1868, 8°.

Consists of 175 words and phrases and the
numerals 1-30.

This vocabulary also appears in the reprint
of Whymper, N. Y., 1869, 8°, pp. 345-350, and in

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Kennicott (R.) — Continued.
the same, N. Y., 1871, 8°, same pages. It is also
printed in Whymper’s article on Russian
America, in Eth. Soe. of London, Trans., vol. 7,
pp. 183-185, London, 1869, 8°. Issued also by
the Smithsonian Institution, as follows:

— Kutch-a’-kutehin. | Words from the |
language of the Kutch-a’-Kutchin’—the |

Indians of Youkon river, at the mouth
of the | Porcupine river, in Russian
America,—Kennicott.

[ Washington, D. C.:
Institution. 1869?)

No title-page, heading only, text ll. 1-5 printed
on one side only, folio.

Contains about 200 words.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling.

The original manuscript of this vocabulary
is in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology,

Smithsonian

Washington, D. C., 5 ll. folio; also a copy by |

Dr. Geo. Gibbs, 511. folio, from which the printed
copy was set up.

[Vocabulary of the] Slave Indians,

Tenne.
[Washington, D.

Institution. 1869?]

No title-page, heading only,

C.: Smithsonian
text ll. 6-12
printed on one side only; contains about 200
words.

“Slave Indians of Liard River, near Fort
Liard. They call themselves A-che-t6-e-tin’-ne,
as distinguished from the other Tenne.
‘A-che-t6-e-tin/-ni’ is ‘ People of the low lands,’
or ‘ People living out of the wind.”

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

The original manuscript of this vocabulary
is in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.
—— [Biography of Robert Kennicott

and extracts from his journal. ]

In Chicago Academy of Sciences, Trans. vol.
1, part 2, pp. 133-224, Chicago, 1869, 8°.
logical Survey.)

Numerous Athapascan terms, proper names,
etc. passim.

(Geo-

{Terms of relationships of the Slave
Lake Indians (Achdotinne), Fort Liard,
Mackenzie river district, Hudson’s
bay ty.]

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity
and affinity of the human family, pp. 293-382
lines 64, Washington, 1871, 4°.

The schedules were filled in March, 1860.

Slave Lake.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected in 1862. Contains about 160 words.

There is in the same library a copy of this
vocabulary, 6 Il. folio, with corrected spelling,
made by Dr. Geo, Gibbs,

Vocabulary of the Chipewyan of

| Kirkby (Rev. William West)

45

Kennicott (R.) — Continued.
— Vocabulary of the Hare Indians, of
Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected in 1862.

Contains about 175 words.

There is in the same library a copy of this
vocabulary, made by the compiler (6 11. folio),
and another with corrected spelling by Dr.
Geo. Gibbs, also 6 11. folio.

— Vocabulary of the Nahawny Indians

of the mountains west of Fort Liard,

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, m
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Col-
lected in 1862.

Contains about 150 words.

There is in the same library a copy of this
vocabulary, 6 11. folio, made by its compiler.

Vocabulary of the Tsuhtyuh (Beaver
People) — Beaver of Peace
River west of Lake Athabasea; and of
the Thekenneh (People of the Rocks)
Siceanies of the Mountains, south of
Fort Liard.

Manuseript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected in 1862.

Contains about 175 words each.

Indians

In the same library is a copy of this manu-
script, made by Mr, Kennicott, 6 1. folio.

Hymns
and prayers: | for the | Private Devo-
tions | of the | Slave Indians of M*Ken-
~zie’s river. | By rev. W. W. Kirkby. |

New York: | Rennie, Shea & Lind-
say. | 1862.

Title verso blank 11. alphabet [syllabary] p.
1, text (in syllabie characters with headings m
English) pp. 2-16, 12°. °‘A small traet, the
beginning of our work. —Kirkby.

Easy words, pp. 2-3.— Morning service, pp.3—

5.—Evening service, pp. 5-7.—Sunday service,
pp. 8-10.— Watts’s catechism, pp. 10-13 —Ten
commandments, pp. 14-16,

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Trumbull.

——A manual | of | devotion and in-
struction | for the | Slave Indians of
M‘Kenzie river, | by | the rev. W. W.
Kirkby. | [Seal of the ‘‘C. M. S.” for
“the diocese of Rupert’s land.” ] |

{London:] Printed by W.M. Watts,

| 80, Gray’s inn road. [186-?]

Title as above p.1, text in roman characters
with headings in English pp. 2-65, 16°.

Hymns, pp. 2-22 (page 23 blank). — The
apostles’ creed, p.24.—The general confession,
p- 29.—Prayer of St. Chrysostom, prayer for a
child, p.26,—The Lord's prayer, the benedic-

46

Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

tion, p. 27.—Sunday morning prayer, p. 28.—
Sunday evening, p. 29.—Morning prayer, p. 30.—
Evening prayev, p. 31.— Morning collect, p. 32.—
Evening collect, p.33.—The decalogve, pp. 34-
36.—Catechism, pp. 37-43.—Of God, p. 44.—Of
sin, p. 45.—Of providence, p. 46.—Of redemp-
tion, p.47.—The Lord's day, p. 48.—The Lord’s
book, p.49.—Of heaven, p. 50.—Of hell, p. 51.—
The Saviour, p.52.—The Christian, p. 53.—The
way to heaven, p. 54.—The judgment, p. 55.—
The creation, p. 56.—The fall, p.57.—The recov-
ery, p. 58.—The deluge, p.59.—Birth of Christ,
p. 60,—Baptism of Christ, p. 61.—Life of Christ,
p. 62.—Death of Christ, p. 63.—Resurrection of
Christ, p. 64.—Ascension of Christ, p. 65; end-
ing with colophon, ‘‘W. M. Watts, 80, Gray’s-
Tnn-Road.”

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

struction | for the | Slave Indians of
McKenzie River. | By | Rev. W..W.
Kirkby. |

London: | printed by W. M. Watts |
28, Whitefriars street, city. [18702]

Title verso blank 1 1. the alphabet [syla-
bary] p. 3, text (in syllabic characters with head-
ings in English) pp. 4-76, 18°.

Easy words, p. 4.—Difficult words, p. 5.—
Hymns, pp. 6-27.— Apostles’ creed and other
prayers, pp. 28-37.—Decalogue, pp. 38-40.—Cat-
echism, pp. 41-49.—Seripture lessons, pp. 50-76.

Copies seen: Church Missionary Society,
Eames, Pilling.

— A manual | of | devotion and in- |

struction | for the | Slave Indians of
McKenzie River, | by rev. W. W.
Kirkby. | [Seal of the ‘‘C. M. 8.” for
“the diocese of Rupert’s land”’.] | With
the approbation of | the lord bishop of
the diocese.

{ London: Church missionary society:
18717}

Title-page verso alphabet [syllabary] 1 1. text
(in sylabic characters with headings in Eng-
lish) pp. 8-86, 24°.

Easy words, p. 3.—Difficult words, p. 4.—
Sunday morning service, pp. 5-12.—Sunday
evening service, pp. 13-20.— Daily morning
service, pp. 21-28.— Daily evening service, pp.
29-41.—The alphabet. p. 43.—Prayers, ete., pp.
44-78.—Catechism, pp. 79-86.

Copies seen: American Tract Society, British

Museum, Pilling, Trumbull. ;
—— Manual | of | devotion and instruc-
tion, | in the | Chipewyan language, |
for the | Indians of Churchill, | By the
rev. W. W. Kirkby. |

London: | Church missionary house,

| Salisbury square. [1872?]

A manual | of | devotion and in- |

— Manual | of

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Kirkby (W. W.)— Continued.

Title verso blank 1 1. alphabet [syllabary] p.
3, text (in syllabic characters with headings in
English) pp. 4-113, pieture of ‘‘ The bible of the
world” 1]. 18°.

“The same as the preceding [London, 1871?]
transliterated into the Chipewyan dialect, as
spoken at Churchill, 3,000 miles from M°Ken-
zie’s River.’—Kirkby.

Difficult words, p.4.—Numerals 1-20, p.5.—
Address, p.6.—Hymns, pp. 7-29.—Prayers for
children, creed, ete., pp. 80-36.—Private morn-
ing devotions, pp. 87-39.— Private evening devo-
tions, pp. 40-42.— Family morning devotions,
pp. 43-46.—Family evening devotions, pp. 47-
50.—Publie morning service, pp. 51-60.—Publie
evening service, pp. 61-66.—Scripture lessons,
pp. 67-96. — Catechism, pp. 97-109. — Burial
service, pp. 110-113.

British Museum, Church Mis-
sionary Society, Eames, Pilling.

Copies seen:

devotion and instrue-
tion | in the | Chipewyan language, |
for the | Indians of Churchill. | By the
rev. W. W. Kirkby. |
London: | Society for

promoting
christian knowledge, | 77, Great Queen
Street, Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields. [187-?]

Title verso syllabarium 1 1. text (in syllabic
characters with English headings) pp. 3-148,
18°.

Difticult words, p. 3.—Numerals 1-20, p. 4.—
Address, p. 5.—Hymns (1-30), pp. 641.—The
creed, Lord's prayer, and benediction, pp. 42-
43. —Decalogue, pp.44-46.—Prayers for children,
p.47.—Private morning devotions, pp. 48-50.—
Private evening devotions, pp. 51-53.—Family
morning devotions, pp. 54-57.— Family evening
devotions, pp. 58-61.—Public morning service,
pp. 62-738. —Public evening service, pp. 74-80.—
Public baptismal service, pp. 81-84.— Service
for holy communion, ete., pp. 85-91.— Marriage
service, pp. 92-94.—Burial service, pp. 99-97.—
Scripture lessons, pp. 98-139.—Catechism, pp.
140-148.

Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge.

] The gospel | according to | Saint
John. | Translated into the Tinné lan-
guage. | [Three lines syllabic charac-
ters. |

London: | British and foreign bible
society. | 1870.

Colophon: W.M. Watts, 80, Gray's Inn Road.

The transliteration of the three lines in sylla-
bie characters on the title-page is: News good |
saint John by | Big river Indians language in.

Title verso blank 1 1. alphabet [i. e. syllabary]
verso blank 1 1. text (in sylabic characters with
chapter headings in English) pp. 3-93, 16°.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Church Missionary Society, National]
Museum, Wellesley.

ATHAPASCAN

Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

[——] Natsun kaothet nake kenidi |
Jesus Christ | be konde nezo | Saint
Mark | ekaonte adikles | Tinne yatie
kesi. |

London: | 1874.

Translation: Our lord our savior | Jesus
Christ | his news good | Saint Mark | by him
written | Indian tongue according to.

Title verso printers 1 1. text in the Tinné

language (roman characters) pp. 3-64, 18°.
Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Wellesley.
] St. Mark.
Colophon: [Lendon.] W.M. Watts,
80, Gray’s Inn Road. |
No title-page, heading only; text in the Tinné

[

language (entirely in syllabic characters, with
chapter headings in English) pp. 1-66, 18°.
The dialect is that spoken by the Indians of
Ft. Simpson.
Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci- |
ety, British Museum, Wellesley.

] The gospels | of | the four evangel-
ists, | St. Matthew, St. Mark, St. Luke,
Jand St. John. | Translated into the |
language | of | The Chipewyan Indians |
| of | north-west America. | |

London: | printed for the British and |
foreign bible society. | 1878.

[

Title verso printers ete. 1 1. sy abarium verso
blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabie characters)
pp. 5-344, 16°.

Matthew, pp. 5-100.— Mark, pp. 101-161.—
Luke, pp. 162-268.—John, pp. 269-344.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, British Museum, Eames, Pilling.

—— [Three lines syllabic characters. ] |
The new testament. | Translated into
| the Chipewyan language, | by the |
ven, archdeacon Kirkby. | |
London: | printed for the | British
and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic-
toria Street, E.C. | 1881.
Title verso printers 1 1. Chipewyan syllaba-
rium verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic
characters) pp. 7-396, 12°.
Matthew, pp. 7-56.—Mark, pp. 56-87.—Luke,
pp. 87-141.— John, pp. 141-179.— Acts—Revela-
tion, pp. 180-396.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.
Portions | of the | book of common
prayer, | Hymns, &c., | in the | Chip-
ewyan language. | By archdeacon
Kirkby. |

Printed at the request of | the bishop
of Rupert’s land, | by the | Society for
promoting christian knowledge, | 77,
Q :

LANGUAGES. . 47

| Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

Great Queen Street, Lincoln’s-Inn-
Fields, London. [1879?]

Title yerso alphabet [syllabary] 1 1. text (in
syllabic characters with English headings) pp.
38-195, colophon p. [196], 16°.

Morning prayer, pp. 3-18.—Evening prayer,
pp. 19-31.—Litany, pp. 32-40.—Prayers, pp. 41-
49.—Holy communion, ete. pp.50-80,—Hymns,
pp. 81-138.— Scripture lessons, pp. 139-181.—
Catechism, pp. 182-192.—Musie for hymus, pp.
193-195.

Copies seen: British Museum, Pilling, Society
for Promoting Christian Knowledge. ;

See Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas (W. ©.)
below for an edition of this work adapted for
the use of the Slavi Indians.

| —— [One line syllabic characters.] |

Portions | of the | book of common
prayer, | and | administration of the
sacraments, | and other rites and cere-
monies of the church, | According to
the use of the Church of England. |
of the |
Chipewyan Indians of N. W. America,
| by the | ven, archdeacon Kirkby. |
[Seal of the 8. P. C. K.] |

Society for promoting christian
knowledge, | Northumberland Avenue,
Charing Cross, London. | 1881.

Title verso printers 1 1. alphabet [syllabary]
verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters
with headings partly in syllabic characters
and partly in English and Latin) pp. 5-160, 16°.

Prayers, etc., pp.5-86.—The order of the ad-
ministration of the Lord’s supper, or holy
communion, pp. 87-106.— The ministration of
public baptism of infants, pp. 106-112. — The
ministration of baptism to such as are of riper
years, pp. 113-121.—A catechism, pp. 122-131.—
The order of confirmation, pp. 131-135. — The

Translated into the language

- form of solemnization of matrimony, pp. 135-

142.—The visitation of the sick, pp. 142-147.—

The order for the burial of the dead, pp. 148-

156.—The churching of women, pp. 157-160.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

—— Hymns, | prayers and instruction, |

in the | Chipewyan language. | By the
| ven. archdeacon Kirkby. | [Seal of
the 8. P.C.K.] |

Society for promoting christian
knowledge, | Northumberland Avenue,
Charing Cross, London. | 1881.

Title verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic char-
acters with English headings) pp. 3-91, colo-
phon p. [92], 16°. :

Hymns in donble columns, pp. 3-36.— Prayers,
pp. 87-62.— Lessons, pp. 63-91.

Copies seen: Kames, Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge,

48 . BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

—— See Bompas (W.C.)

— and Bompas (W.C.) Portions | of
the | book of common prayer, | Hymns,
&c., | in the | Chipewyan language. |
By archdeacon Kirkby. | Adapted for
the use of | the Slavi Indians | by the
| right reverend W.C. Bompas, D. D.,
| bishop of Athabasea. |

Printed by the | Society for pro-
moting christian knowledge, | 77,
Great Queen Street, Lincoln’s-Inn-
Fields, London, [1879?]

Title verso syllabarium 11. text (in syllabic
characters with headings in Enghsh) pp. 3-175,
colophon p. [176], 16°.

Morning prayer, pp. 8-15.—Evening prayer,

97

pp. 16-26 —The litany, pp. 27-34.—Prayers, pp.

35-42. — Holy communion, ete., pp. 438-68.— |

Hymns, pp. 69-123.—Scripture lessons, pp. 124-
165.—Catechism, pp. 166-175.

Copies scen: British Museum, Eames, Pilling,
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.

See Kirkby (W.W.) above for title of the
original edition of this work.

Tssued also in roman characters as follows:

—— Portions of the | book of com-
mon prayer, | hymus, ete., | im the |

Chipewyan language. | By archdea- |

con Kirkby. | Adapted for the use of
the Slavi Indians | by the | right rev.

W. C. Bompas, D.D., | bishop of Atha- |

basca, |
London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge; | Northumber-
land avenue, Charing cross. [1882?]
Title verso sylNabarium in roman 1 1. text
(entirely in roman characters) pp. 3-175, 16°.
Morning prayer, pp. 3-15.—Evening prayer,
pp. 16-26.—The litany, pp. 27-34.—Prayers, pp.

35-42.—Service for holy communion, ete., pp. |

43-68.—Hymns, pp. 69-123.—Scripture lessons,
pp. 124-165.—Catechism, pp. 166-175.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

See title next above for the same work in
syllabic characters.

— Part of the | book of common
prayer, | and administration of | the

sacraments, | and other | rites and |

ceremonies of the church, | according
to the use of | The Church of England ;
| translated into the language of the

| Chipewyan Indians of the queen’s |

dominion | of Canada| by the | ven.
archdeacon W. W. Kirkby, D. D. |
Adapted to the use of the Tenni Indians
of | Mackenzie river| by the! right rey.

Kirkby (W. W.) Bompas (W. C.)--Ct’d.

W.C. Bompas, D. D., | bishop of Mack-
enzie river. | [Seal of the 8S. P.C. K.] |

London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C, | 1891.

Title as above verso blank 1 1. contents verso
blank 1 1.text (mostly in Chipewyan, roman
characters, with headings and instructions in
English) pp. 1-276, 16°.

Morning prayer, pp. 1-13.—Evening prayer,
pp. 14-23.—The creed of St. Athanasius (itt
English), pp. 28-26.—The litany, pp. 26-32.—
Prayers and thatiksgivings ttpon several occa:
sions, pp. 33-41. — The collects, epistles, and
gospels, pp. 42-187.—Holy communion, pp. 188=
208.—Baptism of infants, pp. 209-221.—Baptism
of such as are of riper years, pp. 222-229.-—Cat-
echism, pp. 230-236. —Confirmation, pp. 236-
238. — Solemnization of matrimony, pp. 239-
247.— Visitation and-communion of the sick,
pp. 248-258.— Burial of the dead, pp. 259-266,—
The churching of women (or the thanksgiving
of women after childbirth), pp. 266-269.— A com-
mination, or denouncing of God's anger and
judgments against sinners (partly in English
and partly in Chipewyan), pp. 269-276.

Copies seen: Pilling.

Thave not been very successful in ascertaining
the dates of the works by Archdeacon Kirkby,
who writes me concerning them as follows:
‘Being printed, for the most part, in England,
with no one to correct the proofs, many errors
creptin, and in some cases two or three editions
had to be printed before we could get them
even approximately correct. In this way the
same book was printed two or three times,
which would give to it so many dates.”

William W. Kirkby was born at Ham-
ford, Lincolnshire, in 1827, and received his
earlier education at a grammar school. When
about 18 years old he went to the diocesan
school at Litchfield to prepare for the duties
of a teacher, which he desired to become. His
stay at Litchfield was very happy, and after
two years his friend, the Rey. C. C. Layard, ree-
tor of Mayfield, Staffordshire, offered him the
mastership of the village national school, which
Mr. Kirkby accepted. Whilst there a strong
desire to enter the mission field came into his
mind, and he offered his services to the secre-
tary of the church missionary society. The
offer was accepted, and in the spring of 1851
Mr. Kirkby entered St. John’s College, London,
to prepare for his new duties. In May, 1852, a

. sudden call came for a teacher to go at once to

Red River, and the committee selected Mr.
Kirkby for the post. He had not yet completed
his studies, but on the 6th of June of that year
embarked on the Hudson Bay Company's ship,
taking his bride of a few days with him, for
Red River. The voyage was made in safety,
and the young couple reached their destination
the 12th of October, and in a few days after-

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. AY

Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

wards he entered upon his duties. On the 24th
of December, 1854, Mr. Kirkby was ordained to
the ministry by the Right Reverend David
Anderson, D. D., the first bishop of Rupert's
Land, and at once took temporary charge of St.
Andrew’s church and parish.

In 1852 Mr. Kirkby was appointed to the
mission of Red River, arriving there in the
autemn of that year. His duties were to take
charge of a model training school and to su-
perintend the work of education in the colony,
in those parishes belonging to the church
missionary society. Shortly afterwards Mr.
Kirkby, in addition to his other duties, was
appointed assistant minister of St. Andrews,
then the largest parish in the settlement, and
continued there four years. In the meanwhile
the church had spread northwards and west-
wards to Fairford, Cumberland, Lac la Rouge,
and the English River, 700 miles from Red
River, and then at a single bound it went into
the great McKenzie Valley. Archdeacon Hun-
ter went thither on an exploratory tour in 1858,
and the next year the bishop appointed Mr.
Kirkby to take charge of the work. Heatonce
proceeded there, and made Fort Simpson his
headquarters. This fort stands in latitude 62°
N., longitude 121° W., at the confluence of the
Liard and Slave rivers. He began his work
with mnch encouragement and hope. The first
care was the language, and then the erection of
suitable buildings for church and school pur-
poses. These latter were soon supplied by the
kindness and liberality of the Hudson Bay
Company's officers, who took an interest in the
work. In the summer of 1862 Mr. Kirkby
resolved to carry the gospel within the Arctic
Circle, and if possible into Alaska. Securing
a good canoe and tworeliable Indians he set off,
following the ice down the McKenzie to Peel
River Fort, the last trading post of the com-
pany and a great rendezvous of the Indians.
After a short stay here he left his cande and,
accompanied by two guides, set out to walk
over the mountains. Up and down they went,
over several ridges rising from 700 to 2,800 feet,
and at last, by a sudden descent of 1,000 feet
into the valley, he reached La Pierre's house
and another of the Fur Company's forts. Here
Mr. Kirkbyremained until the 30th of June, in-
structing the Indians and learning the Tukudh
language, a kindred one to the Tinné. He then
embarked in the company’s boat on the Rat
River, and then down the Porcupine River, a
tributary of the Yukon. ‘Two miles above the
confluence of these Fort Yukon stands. This
journey occupied three months, and at the close
of it Mr. Kirkby writes: ‘‘ I have traveled over
at least 3,000 miles; have been honored of God
to carry the gospel far within the Arctic Circle
and toa people who had never heard it before.”
The work at the Yukon was then given to the
Rey. R. McDonald and Mr, Kirkby devoted his
time at Fort Simpson tothe language. He trans-
lated two of the gospels and completed a little

ATH 4

Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued.

manual containing prayers, hymns, catechism,
and short bible lessons, such as the Indians
could readily understand. He also collected
materials for a grammar and vocabulary for the
use of others. The acquisition of the language
was thus rendered easier for future mission-
aries who might enter the field. In 1869 Mr.
Kirkby, having been seventeen years in the
field, went to England to place his children at
school. Upon his return to the country, in
1870, he was appointed to York Factory, Hud-
son Bay, that he might meet the Chipewyans
of Churchill. Here he labored for nine years,
and then retired from the mission to make a
home for his children in the civilized world; and
this he has done, being now stationed at the
village of Rye, near New York.

Klatskenai. See Tlatskenai.

Koltschane:
Tribal names See Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Baer (IX. E. von).
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary 3uschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)

Kovar (Dr. Emil). Ueber die Bedeutung
des possessivischen Pronomen fiir die
Ausdrucksweise des substantivischen
Attributes.

In Zeitschrift fiir Volkerpsychologie und
Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 16, pp. 386-394, Berlin,
1886. (*)

Examples in a number of American lan-
guages, among them the Athapascan, p. 390.

Title from Prof. A. F. Chamberlain, from copy
in the library of Toronto University.

Krusenstern (Adam Johann von). Wor-
ter-Sammlungen | aus den Sprachen
| einiger Volker | des | dstlichen
Asiens | und | der Nordwest-Kiiste von
Amerika. | Bekannt gemacht | von | A.
J.v. Krusenstern |. Capitain der Rus-
sisch kaiserlichen Marine. |

St Petersburg. | Gedruckt in der
Druckerey der Admiralitit | 1813.

Title verso note 11. Vorbericht pp. i-xi, half-
title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, Druckfehler
verso blank 1 1. 4°. _

W ortersammlung aus der Sprache der Kinai
(from Dawidoff, Resanoff, and Lisiansky), pp.
57-68.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, Brit-
ish Museum, Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wat
kinson, Wellesley.

Kutchin. Vocabulary of the Hong Kut-
chin language.

Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only; in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

Contains about 130 words, entered on one of
the Smithsonian forms of the standard vocabu-
lary.

50

Kutchin:

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Kutchin — Continued.

General discussion See Bancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary See Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Numerals Buschmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Numerals Dall (W. H.) Vocabulary - Ross (R. B.)
Relationships Herdesty (W. L.) Vocabulary Whymper (F.)
Tribal names Latham (R. G.) Words Daa (L. K.)
Vocabulary sancroft (H. H.) Words Ellis (R.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Vocabulary Dall (W, H.) Kwalhiokwa:

Vocabulary Kennicott (I.) Vocabulary See Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Kutehin. Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.) Vocabulary Hale (H.)
Vocabulary Murray (A. H.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)

L.

L. J.C.et M. I. Titles of anonymous | Latham (R. G.)— Continued.

works beginning with these letters are
entered in this bibliography under
the next following word of title.

Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous
contributions to the ethnography of
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D.

In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 2,
pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. (Congress.)

Table of words showing aflinities between

the Ahnenium and a number of other Amer-
ican languages, among them the Kenay, pp. 32-
34.
— On the languages of the Oregon ter-
ritory. By R.G. Latham, M.D. Read
before the Society on the 11th Decem-
ber, 1844.

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1,
pp. 154-166. Edinburgh, [1848], 8°. (Congress.)

A table of 10 Sussee words showing miscel-
laneous affinities with a number of other Amer-
ican languages, among them the Kenay, Taculli,
and Chipewyan, pp. 160-161.

——On fhe ethnography of Russian
America. By R.G. Latham, M.D. Read
before the Society 19th February, 1845.

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1,
pp. 182-191, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.)

General discussion upon the classification of
the languages of the above-named region, and a
list of the vocabularies which haye been
printed. Reference is made to the Kenay,
Atnah, and Inkalite.

—— The | natural history | of | the vari-
eties of man. | By | Robert Gordon
Latham, M.D., F. R.S8., | late fellow of
King’s college, Cambridge; | one of the
vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci-
ety, London; | corresponding member
to the Ethnological society, | New
York, ete. | [Monogram in shield. ] |
London: | John Van Voorst, Pater-
noster row, | M.%).“4"L [1850].

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printers
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-Xxi,
bibliography pp. xiii-xv, explanation of plates
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. xix-xxviii, text
pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, list of works by Dr.
Latham verso blank 11. 8°.

Division F, American Mongolide (pp. 287-
460), includes : Comparative vocabulary (38
words) of the Loucheux and Kenay, pp. 297-
298; comments on the northern Athabaskans,
pp. 302-308; comparative vocabulary of the
Chippewyan, Tlatskanai, and Umkwa (60
words), pp. 308-310; of the Beaver and Chippe-
wyan (50 words and phrases), pp. 370, 371.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames.

—— The | ethnology | of | the British

colonies | and | dependencies. | By | R.
G. Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | corre-
sponding member to the Ethuvlogical
society, New York, | etc. ete [Mono-
gram in shield. ] |

London: | John Van Voorst, Pater-
noster row. | M. DCCC. LI [1851].

Tifle verso printers 1 1. contents pp. v—vi,
preface verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-264, list of
works by Dr. Latham ete. 11. 16°.

Chapter vi, Dependencies in America. (pp.
224-264), contains a list of the divisions and
subdivisions of the Athabaskans, pp. 224-227.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames.

The | native races | of | the Russian
empire. | By | R.G. Latham, M.D., F.
R.8., &e., | author of [&c. two lines. ]
| With a large coloured map, | Taken
from that of the Imperial Geographical
Society of St. Petersburg, | and other
illustrations. |

London: | Hippolyte Bailliere, 219,
Regent street; | and 290, Broadway,
New York, U. 8. | Paris: J. B. Bail-
liere, rue Hautefeuille. | Madrid: Bailly
Bailliere, calle del Principe, | 1854.

-ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Latham (R. G.) — Continued. *
Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. notice
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v—viii, large map,
text pp. 1-340, 12°.
The tribes of Russian America (pp. 289-297)
contains a brief account of the linguistic affin-
ities of the various divisions, including the
Athabaskans, pp. 291-294.
Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames.
On the Languages of New Califor-
nia. By R.G. Latham, M.D.

In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc.vol. 6,
pp. 72-86, London, 1854, 8°.

(Congress.)

Comments upon the Athabascans, pp. 74-75.— |
A few words of Hoopah, Navajo, and Jicorilla, |

p. 8.

— On the languages of
Western, and Central America.
G. Latham, M. D.

In Philological Soc. [of London], Trans. 1856,
pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.)

The Athabascan Group (pp. 65-70) contains
lists of tribal divisions of the Takulhi, p. 66;
Kutshin, p. 67; Kenai, p. 67; Atna, pp. 67-68;
Koltshani, Ugalents, Atna, p. 68.—General dis-
cussion of the Athabaskan, pp. 68-70.—Com-
parative vocabulary of the Navaho and Apatch
(27 words), pp. 96-97.—Table of words showing
affinities between the several Pueblo languages
and the Navahoand Jicorilla, pp. 99, 100.

By R.

— Opuscula. | Essays | chiefly | philo-
logical and ethnographical | by | Rob-
ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D., F.
R.S., ete. | late fellow of Kings college,
Cambridge, late professor of English |
in University college, London, late

assistant physician | at the Middlesex |

hospital. |

Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta
street, Covent garden, London | and |
20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh.

| Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860.

Title verso printer 11. preface pp. iii-iv, con-
tents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda and cor-
rigenda pp. 378-418, 8°.

A reprint of a number of papers read before
the ethnological and philological societies of
London.

Addenda and corrigenda (1859) (pp. 378-418)
contains: Comparative vocabulary of the Nay-
aho and Pinaleno, p. 385; of the Beaver Indians
and Chippewyan, p. 413.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton,
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling,
Watxiason.

At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no.

639, bronght $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438,
sold for $1.

Elements | of | comparative philol-
ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M.D.,
F.R.S., &c., | late fellow of

King’s

(Read May the 9th.) |

Northern, |

Leclerc (Charles).

51

Latham (R. G.)—Continued.

college, Cambridge; and late professor
of English | in Uriversity college, Lon-
don. |

London: | Walton and Maberly, |
Upper Gower street, and Ivy lane,

-aternoster row; | Longman, Green,
Longman, Roberts, and Green, | Pater-
noster row. | 1862. | The Right of
Translation is Reserved. =

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xi,
contents pp. Xili-xx, tabular view of languages
and dialects pp. xxi-xxviii, chief authorities pp.
XXiX-xxxii, errata verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-
752, addenda and corrigenda pp. 753-757, index
pp. 758-774, list of works by Dr. Latham verso
blank 1 1, 8°.

Chapter lv, Languages of America, The Es-
kimo, The Athabaskan dialects [ete.] (pp. 384-
403), contains: Divisions of the Takulli, p. 388;
of the Kutshin with English definitions, p.
389.—Athabaskan tribal names with meanings,
p. 390. — Comparative vocabulary (35 words) of
the Kenay, Kutshin, Slave, and Dog-rib, pp.
390-391; of the Chepewyan and Takulli (47
words), pp. 391-392; of the Ugalents, Atna,
and Kolstshani, pp. 392-393; of the Tlatskanai,
Kwaliokwa, and Umkwa (30 words), p. 394; of
the Navaho, Apatsh, and Pinaleno (27 words),
pp. 394-395; of the Hoopah and Jecorilla (12
words), p. 395.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con-
gress, Eames, Watkinson.

Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the
tev. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage
of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24,
1812. In 1819 he was entered at Eton. Two years
afterwards he was admitted on the founda-
tion, and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took
his fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was
his first passion and his last, though for botany
he had a very strong taste. He died March 9,
1888.—Theodore Watts in The Athenceum, March
17, 1888.

Bibliotheca | ameri-
cana | Catalogue raisonné | d’une tres-
précieuse | collection de livres anciens
| et modernes | sur Amérique et les
Philippines | Classés par ordre alpha-
bétique de noms d’Auteurs. | Rédigé
par Ch. Leclere. | [Design.] |

Paris | Maisonnenve & Cre | 15, quai
Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LX VII [1867]

Cover title as above, half-title verso details of
sale 11. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface
pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°.

Tnecludes titles of a number of works contain-
ing material relating to the Athapasean lan-
guages.

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling.

At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought

D2

Leclerc (C'.) — Continued.
10s.; at the Squier sale, no. 651, $1.50. Leclere,
1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in
1889, 4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought
$2.75.

—- Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire,
géographie, | voyages, archéologie et
linguistique | des | deux Amériques |
et | des iles Philippines | rédigée | Par
Ch. Leclere | [Design] |

Paris | Maisonneuve et Ci*, libraires-
éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1
1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos
pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xviii-xx, cata-
logue pp. 1-643, supplément pp. 645-694, index
pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°.

The linguistic part of this volume occupies
pp. 537-643; it is arranged under names of lan-
guages and contains titles of books relating to
the following: Langues américaines en général,
pp. 537-550; Apache, p. 553; Athapasca, p. 554;
Deéné, pp. 578-579.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Congress,
Eames, Harvard, Pilling.

Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12s.; another
copy, no. 12173, large paper, 1l. 1s. Leclerc’s
Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, prices it 15 fr., and
no. 2332, acopy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large-
paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12s.
Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr.

[——]Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire,
géographie, | voyages, archéologie et
linguistique | des | deux Amériques |
Supplément | Ne I[-2]. Novembre 1881

| [Design.] |

Paris | Maisonneuve & C®, libraires-
éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25 | 1881
[-1887]

2 parts: cover title as above, title as above
verso blank 1 1. advertisement 1 1. text pp. 1-
102, colophon verso blank 1 1.; printed cover,
title differing somewhat from the above (verso
blank) 11. text pp. 3-127, 8°.

These supplements have no separate section
devoted to works relating to American lan-
guages, but titles of works containing material
relating to Athapascan languages appear
passim.

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling.

Maisonneuve, in 1889, prices each of the two
supplements 3 fr.

[

] Catalogue | des | livres de fonds
| et en nombre | Histoire, Archéologie,
| Ethnographie et Linguistique de
l'Europe, | de l’Asie, de Afrique, | de
VAmérique et de lVOcéanie. | [Design.] |

Paris | Maisonneuve freres et Ch.
Leclere, éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire—
quai Malaquais, 5 | (Ancienne maison

Th. Barrois) | 1885[-1888-1889]

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

| Leclere (C.) — Continued.

3 parts: printed cover as above verso can-
tents, title as above verso note 1 1. advertisement
verso blank 11. table verso blank 11. text pp. 1-
153; printed cover differing slightly from above,
verso contents, titlelike printed cover versonote
1 1. text pp. 3-161, contents p. [162]; printed
cover, title verso notice 1 1. text pp. 3-170, table
| Be:

Contain titles of a number of American lin-
guistic works, among them a few Athapascan.

Copies seen: Pilling.

There were issues for 1878 and 1887 also.
(Eames.)

Lefroy (Sir John Henry). A Vocabulary
of Chepewyan and Dog-Rib Words.
In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe-

dition, vol. 2, pp. 400-.02, London, 1851, 8°.

A vocabulary of 45 words in each of the above-
named languages. The first was collected at
Great Slave Lake from an interpreter, the sec-
ond from Nanette, an interpreter at Fort Simp-
son, both in 1844.
| Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work, for titles of which see Richardson (J.)

| Legends:

| Chippewyan See Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Loucheux Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Peau de Liévre Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Slave Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

[Legoff (Rev. Laurent).] Promissiones
Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B.
Marg. M. Alacoque. | Dégayé Margrit
Mari bépade ekkoredyain, Jesus |
ttahoneltte dene‘a hourzhzi, tta yed-
ziyé | padasanoudelni waléssi, Don
aneltte sin: Addi:

[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper.
1888. ]

A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as
above and containing twelve ‘* Promises of Our
Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary,” in the Mon-
tagnais language, on the verso of which is a
colored picture of the sacred heart with in-
scription, in English, below. Mr. Kemper has
published the same Promises on similar cards
in many languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

' —— Cours | Winstructions | en] langue

montagnaise | par | le rev. pere Legoft,

Ptre | oblat de Marie immaculée |
Montreal | imprimerie J. Fournier,

162, rue Montealm | 1889
Cover title as above, letter to pére Legoff

from t Vital J. Ev. de St-Albert O.M.I. (dated

from Ile a la Crosse, le 26 septembre 1887, ap-
proving the work) recto blank 11. title as above
verso blank 1 1. text (in roman characters with
some special characters, headings in Freneh)

pp. 3-444, table des matiéres pp. i-v, errata p.

[vi], 8°. :-
Symbole des apotres, Mystére de la ste-tri-

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 53

Legoff (L.) — Continued. Legoff (L.) — Continued.

nité, eréation, ete. (instructions 1-47), pp. 3-
229.—Décalogue (48-56), pp. 229-263. — Vertus
théologales (57-59), pp. 263-274.—Sur la priére
(60-67), pp. 274-307. — Grandes vérités (68-81),
pp. 307-370.— Sermons détachés ou de circon-
“tance (82-100), pp. 371-44.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Gatschet, Pilling, Wellesley.
Grammaire | de la | langue monta-
gnaise | par| le rev. pere Laurent
Legoff, ptre | oblat de Marie imma-
culée |

Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 1889

|
|
|
|

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank |
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop’s ap- |

proval verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1
1. introduction pp. 9-24, text pp. 25-342, table of
contents pp. 343-351, errata verso blank 1 1.
folding table of verbs between pp. 110-i11, 8°.

General remarks concerning the Montagnais |
and their language, pp. 9-13.— Montagnais |

alphabet and words, pp. 13-24.—Of the article
and other determinatives, pp. 25-28.—Noun or
substantive, pp. 29-44.—Prononns, pp. 45-63.—
Adverbs, pp. 64-86.—Prepositions and postposi-
tions, pp. 87-95.—Conjunctions, pp. 96-98.—In-
terjections, pp. 99-101. — Adjectives, pp. 103-
117.—Verbs, pp. 118-326.— Terms of relation-
ship, pp. 327-331.—Names of parts of the body,

pp. 331-336.—Names of parts of the bodies of |

fishes and birds, pp. 336-337.—Sentences, the
most commonly employed in conversation, pp.
338-342.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling, Wellesley.

Reviewed by Gatschet (A.5S.), in the Amer-
ican Antiquarian, vol. 11, p. 389, Nov., 1889.
(Pilling.)

— Histoire | de | l’ancien testament |
racontée aux Montagnais | par | le rev.

pere Laurent Legoff, ptre | oblat de

Marie immaculée |

Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 1889

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop's ap-
proval verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1
1. text in roman characters pp. 7-200, table of
contents pp. 201-214, errata 1 p. 8°.

The text consists of thirty-three chapters,
earrying the bible narrative from the creation
of the world to the time of Jesus Christ.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,

Pilling, Wellesley.
Katolik | Deneya ‘tiye dittlisse |
Livre de priéres | en langue monta-
gnaise | Par le Rév. Pere Legoft, O. M. I.
[Two lines Latin; two lines Monta-
gnais] | [Oblate seal] |

Montreal | C. O. Beauchemin & fils,
Libraires-Imprimeurs, | 256 et 258 rue
Saint-Paul. | 1890 | [Two lines Mon-
tagnais }

Cover title as above, title as above verso ap-
probation of + Vital J. Grandin O. M. L.
Evéque de St-Albert 1 1. alphabet (in roman
characters) p. 3, systéme alphabétique monta-
enais [syllabary], pp. 4-5, text (roman charac-
ters, with a few special ones; headings in
French) pp. 7-398, table pp. 399-404, 16°.

Anciennes priéres du matin et du soir, pp. 7-
16. — Priéres corrigées. pp. 17-36. — Maniére
d’administrer le baptéme, pp. 37-46.—La sainte
messe, pp. 47-78.—Chemin de la croix, pp. 79-
108.—Devotions, etc. pp. 109-126.—Catéchisme,
pp. 127-189.— A ppendice au catéchisme, pp. 190-
222.—Cantiques. pp. 223-394.— Hymn set to
music, pp. 395-398.

Copies seen: Kames,Gatschet, Pilling, Welles-

ley.
Livre | de priéres | en langue mon-
tagnaise | [One line syllabie charac-
ters] | Par le Rév. Pere Legoff, O. M.
I. | [Twolines French; two lines syla-
bie characters] |.

Montréal. | C.O. Beauchemin & fils,
Libraires-Imprimeurs, | 256 et 258 rue
Saint-Paul. | 1890 | [Two lines sy]abie
characters |

Cover title as above, title verso approbation
of + Vital J. Grandin O. M. I. Evéque de St-
Albert 11.roman alphabet p.3, systéme alpha-
bétique montagnais [syllabary] pp. 4-5, text (in
syllabie characters, with French headings) pp.
7-433, table pp. 435-440, 16°.

Contents as under the next previous title ex-
cept that there is no ‘‘appendice” to the cate-
chism, and the four pages of music are omitted.

Copies seen: Kames, Gatschet, Pilling, Welles-
ley.

Pére Legoff was born at Landéda, diocese of
Quimper, Finistére. He pursued his classical
studies at the college of Lesneven, and his theo-
logical studies partly at the Seminary of Quim-
per, partly at Autun, at the scholasticate of the
congregation of the Virgin Mary, to which he
belongs. Ordained a prieston the 26thof May,
1866, he immediately received instructions and
left France for America the 5th of the following
July. He arrived at St. Boniface on the 14th of
October, and was sent from there to St. Joseph,
near Pembina, where he remained until the
21st of May, 1867. On his return to St. Boni-
face he received orders to go to the mission of
St. Peter,on Lake Caribou, where he arrived
the 4th of October, remaining until the 15th of
June, 1870, when he left for the Ile A la Crosse,
where he arrived at the end of July. There he
remained until July, 1881, during which time
he composed the books titled above. His health
failing, he proceeded to St. Boniface, where
he received medical treatment for nine months.
In May, 1882, he started for his mission, reach-
ing there July 15, where he has since remained,
except during the time spent in Montreal while
his books were going through the press.

54 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Lenox: This word following a title or within paren-
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the
work referred to has been seen by the compiler
in the Lenox Library, New York City.

Lesley (Joseph Peter). On the insensible
gradation of words, by J.P. Lesley.

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proe. vol. 7, pp.
129-155, Philadelphia, 1861, 8°. (Congress.)
Contains a few words in Chippewyan.

Lessons and prayers | in the | Tenni or
Slavi language | of the | Indians of
Mackenzie river, | in the | north-west
territory of Canada, | [Seal of the S.
P.C.K.] |

[London:] Society for promoting |

christian knowledge, | Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1890.]

Title verso blank 1 1. text in the Tenni lan-
guage with English headings pp. 3-81, 16°.
Possibly by Rev. W. D. Reeve, or Bishop Bom-
pas.

Lessons (1-66), pp. 3-66.—F amily prayers, pp.
67-76.— Private prayers, pp. 76-51.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

Lipan:
Lord’s prayer See Bancroft (H. H.)
Lord's prayer Coleccion.
Lord's prayer Pimentel (F.)
Vocabulary Gatschet (A.S.)
Words Bollaert (W.)

MICHHCKI =(IOPIHi). =[Lisiansky (Capt.
Urey).] Wyremecrsie | pokprb cBbra Bb |
1803. 4.5. 1806 rojaxb, | no MoBesrbuito |
ero uMmeparopeKaro BeamyectBa | AreKcanapa
Hepsaro, | na Kopadah | Hess, | moa navaane
TBOMb | 101d Kaluranbielirenanta, NbN
kauutana | 1-ro pa ra m Kapiaepa | lpia
Jucancwaro, | Yacrs nepsaa[—sropaa ]. |

CawKrncTepoy prs, Bb THoOrpavin O. Apex-
eaepa, | 1812.

Translation.—V oyage | around the world | in
the years 1803.4,5 and 1806, | by order of | his
imperial majesty | Alexander I, | on the ship |
Neva, | under command | of captain-lieutenant
of the navy, now captain | of the Ist rank and
knight | Urey Lisiansky. | Vol. I{-IT]. |

St. Petersburg, in the printing-office of Th.
Drechsler, | 1812.

2 vols. 8°.

Vocabulary (about 500 words) of the lan-
guages of the northwestern parts of America,
Russian-Kadiak-Kenai, vol. 2, pp. 154-181.

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress.

—— A | voyage round the world, | in |
the years 1803, 4, 5, & 6; | performed |
by order of hisimperial majesty | Alex-
ander the First, emperor of Russia, | in
| the ship Neva, | by | Urey Lisiansky,

Lisiansky (U.) — Continued.

| captain in the Russian navy, and |
knight of the orders of St. George and
St. Vladimer, |

London: | Printed for John Booth,
Duke street, Portland place; and |
Longman, Hurst, Rees,Orme, & Brown,
Paternoster row;|by 8S. Hamilton,
Weybridge, Surrey. | 1814. ~

Pp. i-xxi, 1 1. pp. 1-888, maps, 4°.

Linguistic contents as under next previous
title, pp. 829-337.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzum, Brit-
ish Museum, Congress.
‘ ro copy at the Pinart sale, no, 1372, brought
ya hos

These yocabularies reprinted in Davidson
(G.), Report relative to * * * Alaska, in Coast
Survey, Ann. Rept. 1867, pp. 293-298, Washing-
ton, 1869, 4°; again in Davidson (G.), Report
relative to * * * Alaska, in Ex, Doc. 77, 40th
Cong., 2d sess., pp. 328-333; and again in
Davidson (G.), in Coast Survey, Coast Pilot of
Alaska, pp. 215-221, Washington, 1869, 8°. For
extracts see Schott (W.); Zagoskin (L. A.);
Zelenoi (S. J.)

Loew (Dr. Oscar). Vocabulary of the

Apache and of the Navajo.

In Gatschet (A. S.), Zwoélf Sprachen aus
dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas, pp. 98-115,
Weimar, 1876, 8°.

Contains about 400 words each. Scattered
throughout the same work are many phrases,
remarks on grammatie construction, etc., all
from Dr. Loew's manuscripts.

— Voeabulary of the Arivaipa lan-

guage.

In Wheeler (G. M.), Report upon U.S. Geog.
Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 469, Washington,
1879, 4°.

Contains 211 words in the first division and
80 words and sentencesin the second. Collected
in Arizona, September, 1879.

— Vocabulary of the Navajo language.

In Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon U.S. Geog.
Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 469, Washington,
1879, 4°.

Contains 217 words in the first division and 26
additional words and sentences in the second.
Collected in New Mexico, June, 1873.

Lord’s. The Lord’s Prayer | In one hun-

dred and thirty-one tongues. | Contain-
ing all the principal languages | spoken
| in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. |

London: | St. Paul’s Publishing Com-
pany, | 12, Paternoster Square. [n.d.]

Title verso blank 1 1. preface (signed F, Pin-
cott, fellow of the Royal Asiatic Society) pp.
1-2, contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-62, 12°.

Lord’s prayer in the Chippewyan or Tinné
(roman and syllabic), p. 61.

Copies seen: Church Missionary Society.

ATHAPASCAN
Lord’s prayer:
Chippewyan See Apostolides (S.)
Chippewyan Jergholtz (G. F.)
Chippewyan 3ompas (W. C.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
Chippewyan Lord’s.
Chippewyan Rost (R.)
Dog Rib Bompas (W. W.)
Lipan Bancrott (H. H.)
Lipan Coleccion.
Lipan Pimentel (¥.)
Slave Bergholtz (G. F.)
Slave Kirkby (W. W.)
Slave Reeve (W. D.)
Slave Rost (R.)
Tinné 3ompas (W. C.)
Tukudh Bompas (W.C.)
Tukudh Rost (R.)
Lototen. See Tututen.
Loucheux:
Dictionary See Petitot (E.F.S. J.)
Grammatic comments Miiller (F.)
Graminatic treatise Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Legends Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Relationships Morgan (L. H.)
Songs Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Text Promissiones.
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary 3uschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Isbester (J. A.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Words Daa (LL. K.)
Words Gibbs (G.)
Words Petitot (KE. F.S. J.)

Lubbock (Sir John). The | origin of

civilisation | and the | primitive con-
dition of man. | Mental and social con-
dition of savages. | By | sir John Lub-
bock, Bart., M. P., F. R. S. | author
[&e. two lines.] |

London: | Longmans, Green, and co.
| 1870.

Half-title verso printers 1 1. frontispiece 1 1.
title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—viii, con-
tents p. ix, list of illustrations pp. xi-xii, list
of principal works quoted pp. xili-xvi, text
pp. 1-323, appendix pp. 325-862, notes pp. 363-
365, index pp. 367-380, four other plates, 8°.

A few words in Tahkali, Tlatskanai, and
Athabascan, p. 288.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con-
gress, Eames.

— The | origin of civilisation | and the
| primitive condition of man. | Mental
and social condition of savages. | By |

sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R.S.
| Author [&c. two lines. ] |

New York: | D. Appleton and com-
pany, | 90, 92 & 94 Grand street. |
1870.

LANGUAGES. 55

| Lubbock (J.) — Continued.

Half-title verso blank 1 1. frontispiece 1 1.
title verso blank 1 1. preface to the American
edition pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v—vili, contents
p. ix, illustrations pp. xi-xii, list of principal

| works quoted pp. xili-xvi, text pp. 1-323, ap-

pendix pp. 325-262, notes pp. 363-365, index pp.

| 367-380, four other plates, 12°.

| Linguistics as under title next above, p. 288.

Copies seen: Pilling.

—— The | origin of civilisation | and the
| primitive condition of man. | Mental
and social condition of savages. | By |
sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F.R.S.

Author [&c. two lines.] | Second

edition with additions. |

London: | Longmans, Green, and co.
| 1870.

Pp. i-xyi, 1-426, 8°.

Linguistics as under titles above, p. 327.

Copies seen: British Museum.

| —— The | origin of civilisation | and the

| primitive condition of man. | Mental
end social condition of savages. | By |

| sir John Lubbock, Bart., M.P., F.R.
S. | Vice Chancellor [&c. three lines. ]

| Third edition, with numerous addi-

tions. |
| London: | Longmans, Green, and co,
| 1875.
Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 416-
417.

Copies seen: British Museum.
—— The | origin of civilisation | and the
| primitive condition of man. | Mental
and social condition of savages. | By |
Sir John Lubbock, Bart. M. P. F.R.S.
| D.C. L. LL.D. | President [&ec. five
lines.] | Fourth edition, with numerous
| additions. |
London: | Longmans, Green, and co.
| 1882.
Half-title verso list of works *‘ by the same
author’’11. frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers
1 1. preface pp. v—viii, contents pp. ix—xiii,
illustrations pp. xv-xvi, list of the principal
works quoted pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1-480, appen-
dix pp. 481-524, notes pp. 525-533, mdex pp. 5385—
548, five other plates, 8°.
Linguistics as under titles above, p. 427.
Copies seen: Eames.
—— The | origin of civilisation | and the
| primitive condition of man | Mental
and social condition of savages | By |
sir John Lubbock, bart. | M.P., F.R.
S., D.C. L., LL.D. | Author [&c. four
lines] | Fifth Edition, with numerous
Additions |

56

Lubbock (,J.) — Continued.

London | Longmans, Green, and co |
1889 | All rights reserved

Half-title verso printers 1]. frontispiece 1 1.
title verso blank 1 1. preface (dated February,
1870) pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, illustrations
pp. xvii-xviii, list of principal works quoted
pp. Xix-xxiii, text pp. 1486, appendix pp. 487-—
529, notes pp. 531-539, index pp. 541-554, list of
works by the same author verso blank 1 1. five
other plates, 8°.

Linguistics as under titles above, p. 432.

Copies seen: Kames.
Lucy-Fossarieu (M.P.de). Extrait | du
compte sténographiqne | du
Congres international | des sciences
ethnographiques, | tenu & Paris du 15
au 17 juillet 1878. | Les langues indi-
ennes | de Ja Californie. | Etude de
philologie ethnographique, | par M. P.
de Lucy-Fossarieu, | membre du con-
seil central de )’Institution ethnogra-
phique, | lauréat de la Société améri-
caine de France. | [Design.] | 7

Paris. | Imprimerie nationale. | M
DCCC LXXXTI [1881].

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1
1. title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-55, 8°.

Voeabulary of the Loloten or Tutatamys, pp.
20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 54.

Copies seen: Brinton, Pilling.

rendu

Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter-
ature | of | American aboriginal lan-
guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. |
With additions and corrections | by
professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by
Nicolas Triibner. | :

London: | Triibner and co., 60, Pater-
noster row. | MDCCCLVIITI [1858].

Half-title ‘‘ Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica I’
verso blank 1 1]. title as above verso printer 1 1.
preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. ed-
itor’s advertisement pp. ix-xii, biographical
memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph-
ical notices pp. xv-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, ad-
denda pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp.
257-258, 8°. Arranged alphabetically by lan-
guages. Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and
Nicolas Triibner, pp. 210-246.

Contains a list of grammars and vocabularies,
and among others of the following peoples:

American languages generally, pp. xv-xxiv;
Apaches, pp. 8, 211; Athapascan, pp. 14, 211;
Atnah, pp. 15,212; Beaver, p.18; Chepewyan,
pp. 35-36, 215-216; Dogrib, p. 66; Hoo-pah, p. 82;
Hu‘son’s Bay, pp. 83-84, 223; Kinai, pp. 92-93,
225; Koltschanes, p. 96; Kutchin, Loucheux,
pp. 99, 226; Lipan, p. 226; Navajos, pp. 132-133,
233; Pinalenos, p. 150; Sicannis, p. 175; Sussee,
p. 178; Tacullies, pp. 178-179, 240; Tah-lewah, p.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued.

179; Ticorillas (Jicarillas), p. 186, 241; Tlats-
kanai, p. 189; Umpqua, pp. 195, 244.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames, Pilling.

At the Fischer sale, no. 990,a copy brought
5s.6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the
Squier sale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906,
$2.38. Priced by Leclere, 1878, no. 2075. 15 fr.
The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr.,.and the
Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50.

Dr. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed the
plan and purport of this work that little more
remains for me to add beyond the mere state-
ment of the origin of my connection with the
publication, and the mention of such additions
‘for which I am alone responsible, and which,
during its progress through the press, have
gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of
the whole. This is but an act of justice to the
memory of Dr. Ludewig; because at the time of
his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172
pages were printed off, and these constitute the
only portion of the work which had the benefit
of his valuable personal and final revision.

Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in
New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr.
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he,
like myself, had been making bibliographical
memoranda for years of all books which serve
to illustrate the history of spoken language. As
a first section of amore extended work on the lit-
erary history of language generally, he had pre-
pareda bibliographical memoir of the remains of
the aboriginal languages of America. The man-
uscript had been deposited by him in the library
of the Ethnological Society at New York, but
at my request he at once most kindly placed it
at my disposal, stipulating only that it should
be printed in Europe, under my personal super-
intendence.

Upon my return to England, I lost no time in
carrying out the trust thus confided to me, in-
tending then to confine myself simply to pro-
ducing a correct copy of my friend’s manuscript.
But it soon became obvious that the transcript
had been hastily made, and but for the valu-
able assistance of literary friends, both in this
country and in America, the work would prob-
ably have been abandoned. My thanks are more
particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to Prof.
William W. Turner, of Washington, by whose
considerate and valuable coéperation many dif-
ficulties were cleared away and my editorial
labors greatly lightened. This encouraged me
to spare neither personal labor nor expense in
the attempt to render the work as perfect as
possible; with what success must be left to
the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of liter-
ary research.—Editor’s advertisement.

Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in this
country [England], was held in considerable
esteem as a jurist, both in Germany and the
United States of America. Born at Dresden in
1809, with but little exception he continued to

ATHAPASCAN

Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued.
reside in his native city until 1844, when he
emigrated to America; but, though in both
countries he practiced law as a profession, his
bent was the study of literary history, which
was evidenced by his ‘‘ Livre des Ana, Essai
de Catalogue Manuel,” published at his own
cost in 1837, and by his ‘‘ Bibliothekonomie,”’
which appeared a few years later. ;
But, even whilst thus engaged, he delighted in
investigating the rise and progress of the land
of his subsequent adoption, and his researches
into the vexed question of the origin of the
peopling of America gained him the highest
consideration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as
aman of original and inquiring mind. He was
a contributor to Naumann’s ‘* Serapzeum ;’’ and
amongst the chief of his contributions to that
journal may be mentioned those on ‘“ American
Libraries,”’ on the ‘‘Aids to American Bibliog-
raphy,” and on the ‘‘ Book-Trade of the United
States of America.”’ In 1846 appeared his ‘ Lit-
erature of American Local History,” a work of
much importance and which required no small
amount of labor and perseverance, owing to
the necessity of consulting the many and widely
scattered materials, which had to be sought
out from apparently the most unlikely channels.
These studies formed a natural induction to
the present work on ‘‘ The Literature of Ameri-
can Aboriginal Lagguages,"’ which occupied
his leisure concurrently with the others, and the
printing of which was commenced in August,
1856, but which he did not live to see launched
upon the world; for at the date of his death, on
the 12th of December following, only 172 pages
wereain type. It had been a labor of love with
him for years; and if ever author were mindful

LANGUAGES. 5T

Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued.

of the nonum prematur in annum, he was when
he deposited his manuscript in the library of the
American Ethnological Society, diffident him-
self as toits merits and value on a subject of
such paramountinterest. He had satisfied him-
self that in due time the reward of his patient
industry might be the production of some more
extended national work on the subject, and
with this he was contented; for it was a dis-
tinguishing feature in his character, notwith-
standing his great and varied knowledge and
brilliant acquirements, to disregard his own
toil, even amounting to drudgery if needful, if
he could in any way assist in the promulgation
of literature and science.

Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of
many of the most distinguished European and
American literary societies. and few men were
held in greater consideration by scholars both
in America and Germany, as will readily be
acknowledged should his voluminous corre-
spondence ever see the light. In private life he
was distinguished by the best qualities which
endear a man’s memory to those who survive
him: he was a kind and affectionate husband
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and
ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied
to him for advice upon matters appertaining to
literature, his loss will long be felt by a most
extended circle of friends, and in him Germany
mourns one of the best representatives of her
learned men in America, a genuine type of a
class in which, with singular felicity, to genius
of the highest order is combined a painstaking
and plodding perseverance but seldom met
with beyond the confines of ‘‘the Father-
land.’’—Biographic memoir.

M.

McDonald (fer. Robert). [Terms of
relationship of the Tukuthe, collected
by R. McDonald, esq., a factor of the
company, Peel River Fort, Hudson’s
Bay Territory, June, 1865.]

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity
and aftinity of the human family, pp. 293-382,
lines 68, Washington, 1871, 4°.

A selection | from the | book of com-
mon prayer, | according to the use of
the | United Church of England and
Ireland. | Translated into | Tukudh, |

by the rev. R. M‘Donald, | missionary
of the Church missionary society. |

[Seal of the S. P. C. K.] |

London: | Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, | 77, Great Queen
street, Lincoln’s-inn-fields; | 4, Royal
exchange; and 48, Piccadilly. | 1873.

Title verso printers 1 1. text with headings in
English pp. 1-123, 18°.

Order for morning prayer, pp. 1-9.—Order for

McDonald (R.) — Continued.
evening prayer, pp. 10-18.—Prayers, pp. 19-
20.—Order of the administration of the Lord’s
supper, pp. 20-53.—Baptism of infants, pp. 54—
66; of adults, pp. 66-78.—Solemnization of mat-
rimony, pp. 79-93.—Burial of the dead, pp. 94-
104.—Chilig [hymns, nos. i-xxx], pp. 105-123.
Copies seen: Church Missionary Society,
Eames, Pilling, Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge.
] Nuwheh kukwadhud Jesus Christ
| vih kwunduk nirzi | Matthew, Mark,
Luke, John | ha rsiotitinyokhai kirre
| kwitinyithutluth kwikit. | John
rsiotitinyoo vih etunetle | tig ha |
Tukudh tsha zit | thleteteitazya. |
London, | 1874.
Colophon: London: printed by Wm. Clowes
and sons, Stamford street | and Charing cross.
Literal translation.—Our lord Jesus Christ |
the gospel of | Matthew, Mark, Luke, John |

by them written | epistle first of | John written
by him | intothe | Tukudh tongue | translated.

58

McDonald (R.) — Continued.

Title verso blank 1 1. text (with chapter titles
in English) pp. 8-267, 12°.

Matthew, pp. 3-75.—Mark, pp. 76-121.—Luke, |

pp. 122-199.—John, pp. 199-257.—Epistles of
John i-iii, pp. 257-267.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.
Ettunetle choh | kwunduk | nyuk-
wun treltsei. | Rev. M. Ostervald, |

kirkhe. | Ven. archdeacon McDonald, |

| kirkhe thleteteitazya Takudh tsha
zit. | [Seal of the 8. P. C. K.] |
London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, | Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885. ]
Title verso blank 1 1. text (Osterwald’s
abridgment of the history of the bible; with

the exception of chapter titles in English, en-

tirely in the Takudh language) pp. 3-23, 16°.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

chik | ako | sakrament rsikotitinyoo |

ako chizi | thlelchil nutinde ako kindi |

| kwunttlutritili | Ingland thlelchil |

tungittiyin kwikit. | Takudh_ tsha |
zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdeacon |
McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe. | [Seal of

the S. P. C. K.] |

London: | Society for promoting |

christian knowledge, | Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W. C. [1885. ]
English title: Book of common prayer | and
| administration of the sacraments, | and other
| rites and ceremonies of the church | accord-
ing to the use of the | church of England. |

(The Preface and Tables are printed in Eng- |
lish, and the Epistles | and Gospels are not in- |
serted, except those taken from the Old | Tes- |

tament, which are given at the end. The
Psalter, the Form | of Prayer to be used at Sea,
the Ordination Service, and the| Articles of
Religion are omitted from this Edition.) |
Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven.
archdeacon McDonald, D. D.| [Seal of the
S.P. C.K.) |

London: | Society for promoting christian
knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing
cross, W.C. [1885.]}

Takudh title verso 1.1 recto blank, English

title recto 1.2 verso blank, preface, concerning

the service of the church, of ceremonies, etc. 2
ll. proper lessons ete. 4 ll. tables and rules 4 Il.
text (with the exception of a few headings in
English, entirely in the Takudh language) pp.
1-221, 16°.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

Some copies differ in title-page and collation,
as follows:

Ettunetle | tutthug enjit gichin- |

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

McDonald (R.) — Continued.

Ettunetle | tutthug enjit gichinchik
| ako | sakrament rsikotitinyoo | ako
chizi | thlelchil nutinde ako kindi |
kwunttlutritli | Ingland thlelechil |
tungittiyin kwikit. | (The Epistles and
Gospels are not inserted.) | Takudh
tsha zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdea-
con McDonald, D.D., | kirkhe. | [Seal
| ofthe SP. ©. 7Keag

London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.]

English title: Book of common prayer |
and | administration of the sacraments | and
other | rites and ceremonies of the church |
according to the use of the | Church of Eng-
land. | (The Preface and ‘Tables are printed in
English, and the Epistles and Gospels are not
inserted, except those taken from the Old |
Testament, which are given at the end.) |
Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven.
archdeacon McDonald, D. D. | [Seal of the
S.P.C.K.] |

London: | Society for promoting christian
knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing
cross, W.C. [1885.] °

Takudh title verso 1. 1 recto blank, English
title recto 1. 2 verso blaftk, text (with the excep-
tion of a few headings in English, entirely in
the Takudh language) pp. 1-221, 16°.

The preface and tables mentioned on the
English title-page are omitted from the only
copy I have seen.
Copies seen: Pilling.
Ochikthud ettunetle trootshid, |
ako | ettunetle choh trorzi ochikthud |
ettunetle | ako | thlukwinadhun ket-
chid trorzi kah | dr. Watts, | kirkhe. |
Thleteteitazya | archdeacon McDon-
| ald, D.D., | kirkhe. |
| London: | printed by the Religious
| tract society. | 1885.
|

Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in the
Takudh language) pp. 3-17, 16°.

Catechism, pp. 3-8.—Old Testament pas-
sages, pp. 9-13.—New Testament passages, pp.
14-17.

Copiés seen: Pilling.

| [——] Tukudh hymns.

[London: Society for promoting
christian knowledge. 1885.]

Colophon: Printed by William Clowes and
sons, limited, London and Beccles.

No title-page or heading, title above from
outside cover, syllabarium pp. i-iv, text (en-
tirely in the ‘Tukudh language) pp. 1-74, 16°.

Chilig [hymns, nos. i-lyxvi], pp. 1-58.—
Doxologies, nos. i-iv, p.59.—Canticles, pp. 60-
65.—Catechism, pp. 66-74. A

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 59

McDonald (R.) — Continued.
— The | new testament | of | our lord

McDonald (R.) — Continued.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro-

a ee

moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.
A later edition, with title-page. as follows:

— Chilig | Takudh tshah zit. | Hymns |
| in Takudh language. | Composed and |

translated | by the | ven. archdeacon
McDonald, D.D. | [Seal of the 8. P. C.
K.] |
London: | Society for promoting

christian knowledge, | Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C. | 1890.

Colophon: Printed by William Clowes and
sons, limited, | London and Beccles.

Title on cover ‘‘ Takudh hymns,”’ inside title
as above verso blank 1 1. syllabarium pp. ili—vi,

text (entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 1-89, |
eolophon p. [90], 16°. The textual matter of |

pp. 1-58 of this edition agrees page for page
with those pages in the edition titled next
above; though the matter has been entirely
reset, I think.

Chilig [hymns, nos. 1-94], pp. 1-73.—Doxol- |

ogies, nos. i-iv, p.74.—Canticles, pp. 75-80.—
Ochikthut etunetle [catechism], pp. 81-89.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

— Zzehkko enjit gichinchik | nekwazzi

ttrin ihthlog kenjit | ako gichinchik |
ttrin kittekookwichiltshei kenjit kah.
| Bp. Oxenden vut sun kwut sut |
thleteteitazya | chizi gichinchik kah |
tikyinehiknut ako trinyunnut enjit. |
Chutruii kenjit gichinchik tthui, | ako
| chunkyo rsotitinyoo enjit gichinchik,
| archdeacon McDonald. | Kirkhe. |
[Seal of the S. P. C. K.] |
London: | Society for promoting
christian knowledge, Northumberland
avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.]
Title verso blank I 1. text (Oxenden’s family
prayers, entirely in the Tukudh language, with
the exception of a few phrases in English) pp.
3-50, 16°.
Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdeacon
M*Donald, D. D. | kirkhe. | [Seal of
the 8. P.C. K.] |

Winnipeg, Man.: | Printed by Robt.
D. Richardson | for the | Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge, |
London. | 1886.

Title verso blank 11. text (with the exception
of headings in English and Latin, entirely in
the Takudh language) pp. 1-195, 16°.

Copies seen: Fames, Pilling, Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley.

David vi psalmnut. | Takudh tsha |

and saviour | Jesus Christ. | Translated
into Takudh by | ven. archdeacon
MeDonald, D.D. |

London: | printed for the British
and foreign bible society. | 1886.

Title verso blank 11. text (with chapter des-
ignations in English) pp. 5-576, 16°.

Matthew, pp. 5-76.—Mark, pp. 77-122.—Luke,
pp- 123-200.—John, pp. 200-257.—Acts, pp. 259-
333.—Epistles, pp. 333-537.—Revelation, pp. 538-
576.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

On page 251 of his work entitled ‘‘ The In-
dians,’’ Toronto, 1889, Rey. John McLean com-
ments on asyllabary by Archdeacon McDonald
as follows:

‘Several years ago the Venerable Archdea-
con McDonald, whose mission is on the Yukon
and who for a term of years dwelt one mile
withif? the Arctic Circle, invented a very elab-
orate syHabary, which he applied tothe Tukudh
language, one of the family of the Hyperborean
languages. The syllabary consisted of 400 syl-
lables, which, when thoroughly memorized,
enabled the Tukudh Indians to read their own
language with perfect ease. Having translated
the New ‘Testament and Prayer Book, he
utilized his syllabic system, and so accurate
was its construction that in four months the
natives could read the Word of God. Great
benefits flowed to the people from this invention,
as they speedily learned the truths of morality
and religion for themselves.”

Having never seen any publication in the
Tukudh language printed in what is usually
termed a syllabary, my interest was aroused,
and under date of March 9, 1889, I wrote Mr.
McLean for such further particulars as he
might beable to furnish. Under date of March
28 he replied as follows :

‘‘My statement is based upon the following:
The archdeacon was in Winnipeg three or four
years ago and was interviewed by a reporter
of the Manitoba Free Press. The report of that
interview was a long one, which I have pre-
served in my scrapbook, In this report is the
following: ‘A syllabary has been made of the
syllables made use of in the language. While
the syllables of the Cree language number only
about 32, the syllabary required for the Tukudh
contains about 500 syllables; and this, notwith-
standing the apparent difficulty, some of the
Indians bave learned in a fortnight. These
syllables are written out in Roman letters.
Some of the more intelligent have learned to
read the gospels fairly within three months.’
I have an interview held with the archdeacon’s
brother, and several references to the archdea-
con in letters which he wrote himself and were
printed in the newspapers; also letters and
notes of travel by Hudson Bay Company’s
ofticers. This, however, is the only reference

60

McDonald (R.) — Continued.

to the syllabary; but, as it was so explicit, I
felt that surely there could be no doubt con-
cerning it. Should you find it to be incorrect I
would feel obliged if you would kindly let me
know, as [am very desirous of being accurate.”

Under date of August 6, 1890, Mr. MeLean
again wrote me, as follows:

“When first [read the accountof Archdeacon
MeDonald’s syilabary I was under the impres-
sion that it was composed of characters similar
to the Evans characters,in the Tukudh lan-
guage. Iam not now of that opinion. I think
he must arrange the Roman characters in the
form of a syllabary and by this means teach
the Indians to read rapidly.”’

In his letter was inclosed a clipping from the
Regina Leader of July 8, 1890, published at
Regina, Assiniboia, N. W. 'T., reading as fol-
lows:

““Over one year ago a famous American eth-
nologist wrote to the Rey. Dr. McLean, Moose
Jaw, calling in question some statemguts made
by him in his book on The Indians of Canada,
relating to the existence of a syllabary of the
Takudh language. Dr. McLean replied that he
had excellent authority for his statement, but
that he would write at once to Dr. R. MeDonald,
of Peel River, inventor of the syllabary, and
learn particulars. As Dr. MeDonald’s mission
house for a time was one mile within the Arctic
Circle it was expected that it would take two
years to receive a reply to the letter. An an-

swer has just been received, within thirteen |

months, and a copy of the syllabary, the con-
tents of the letter corroborating Dr. McLean's
statements in his book ‘The Indians of Can-
ada,’ and in his latest work, just published,
‘James Evans, Inventor of the Syllabie Sys-
tem of the Cree Language.’ The following is
a copy of the letter:
“<Sr. MATTHEW'S,
‘““PREL RIVER, January 22, '90.

““The Rev. John MeLean :

“DEAR Smr: I send you a copy of the sylla-
bary referred to. You will observe that very
few of the rows after the first page are com-
plete, simply through want of space. This will
show that there is no exaggeration. As to the
time taken in learning to read in the Takudh
tongue by means of the syllabary, instead of
exaggerating, the fact is it is understated rather
than otherwise in some cases; for instance,
there is one that learnt the syllabary in three
days and to read the gospels in about a month.
I may say that Ido not claim great credit for
the invention of the syllabary. It was sug-
gested by Evans's syllabic characters.

“*With high consideration,
“Yours respectfully,
““*R. McDonaLp, D. D.,
‘“*Arehdeacon.’”

Mr. McLean was correct as to the make-up of
the syllabary. Inthe‘: Ttukudh Hymns,” titled
above, the ‘“‘syllabarium”’ is given in the pre-
liminary pages and consists simply of combi-

|
|

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

McDonald (R.) — Continued.
nations of two, three, four, and five Roman
characters, such as ba, be, bi, zoo, zou, zei,
mui, zit, Dhoo, Dhou, Dhei, Kdha, Tdhoo,
Kthou, ete.

For a lengthy description and a fac-simile of
the Evans syllabary referred to, see the Bib-
liography of the Algonquian Languages, pp.
186 et seq.

McElroy (Patrick D.) Comparative
vocabulary of the English and Jica-
rilla Apache languages. Compiled at
Cimarron, Colfax County, New Mexico.
By Patrick D, McElroy. 1875,

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washing-
ton, D.C.

The first 5 1. of this manuseript consist of a
letter from the author, in which he includes a
“Vocabulary of numerals as far as seven
thousand.” The succeeding 9 11. comprise the
‘“Comparative vocabulary’? issued by the
Smithsonian Institution to collectors, known as
* Blank no. 170,” containing 211 words (in Eng-
lish, Spanish, French, and Latin), of which
equivalents were desired, nearly all of which
Mr. McElroy has given.

Under the title on the first page is the fol-
lowing certificate :

‘The within was prepared by P. D. McElroy,
interpreter at the Cimarron Indian Agency,
New Mexico, and has been tested and found to
be correct. -

‘“ALEXR. G. IRVINE,
‘U.S. Indian Agent.
“W.E. M. Arny,
“U.S. Indian Agent, New Mexico.”

McIntosh (Robert). See Gatschet (A.
8.)

Mackenzie (Sir Alexander). Voyages |
from | Montreal, | on the river St.
Laurence, | through the | continent of
North America, | to the | Frozen and
Pacific oceans; | In the Years 1789 and
1793. | With a preliminary account | of
the rise, progress, and present state of
| the fur trade | of that country. | Illus-
trated with maps. | By Alexander
Mackenzie, esq. |

London: | printed for T, Cadell, jun.
and W. Davies, Strand; Cobbett and
Morgan, | Pall-mall; and W. Creech, at
Edinburgh. | By R. Noble, Old-Bailey.

| M. DCCC. I [1801].

Half-title verso blank 1.1. portrait 1 1. title
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 L.
preface pp. iii-viii, general history of the fur
trade etc. pp. i-cx xxii, text pp. 1-412, errata 11.
3 maps, 4°.

Some account of the Chepewyan Indians (pp.

ATHAPASCAN

Mackenzie (A.) —Continued.
exvi-exxxii) includes ‘‘ Examples of the Chep-
ewyan tongue,” a vocabulary of 140 words and
phrases, pp. exxix-cxxxii. — Vocabulary (24
words) of the Nagailer or Chin Indians, and of
the Atnah or Carrier Indians, pp. 257-258. The
Atnah given here is Salishan, not Athapascan.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mu-
seum, Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Geological
Survey, Trumbull, Watkinson.

Stevens's Nuggets, no. 1775, priced acopy 10s.
62. At the Fischer sale, no. 1006, it brought. 5s. ;
another copy, no. 2532, 2s.6d.; at the Field sale,
no. 1447, $2.38; at the Squier sale, no. 709, $1.62 ;
at the Murphy sale, no. 1548, $2.25. Priced by
Quaritch, no. 12206, 7s. 6d.; no. 28953, a half-
russia copy, 1l.; Clarke & co. 1886, no. 404),
$5.50; Stevens, 1887, 11. 7s. 6d.

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the
river St. Laurence, | through the |
continent of North America, | to the |
Frozen and Pacific oceans :| in the years
1789 and 1793. | With a preliminary
accountof | the rise, progress, and pres-
ent state of | the fur trade | of | that

country. | Illustrated with a map. | By |

Alexander Mackenzie,
American edition. |

New-York: | printed and sold by G.
I’. Hopkins, at Washington’s head, No.
118, Pearl-street. | 1802.

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank
11. preface to the London edition pp. v-viii,
text pp. 1-296, map, 8°.

Linguistics as in the edition of 1801 titled
next above, pp. 91-94, 271.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum.

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the
river St. Laurence, | through the |
continent of North America, | to the |
Frozen and Pacific oceans; |in the years
1789 and 1793. | With a preliminary
account | of the rise, progress, and pres-
ent state | of | the fur trade | of that
country. | Illustrated with | a general
map of the country. | By sir Alexander
Mackenzie. |

Philadelphia: | published by John
Morgan. | R. Carr, printer. | 1802.

2 vols. in one: half-title verso blank 1 1. title
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref.
ace pp. i-viii, text pp. i-exxvi. 1-113; 115-392,
map, 8°.

Linguistics as in the London edition of 1801
titled above, pp. exiii-cxxvi, 216.

Copies seen: Geological Survey

Some copies have on the title-page the
words: ‘‘ Illustrated with a general map of the
country and a portrait of the author.” (*)

At the Field sale, a copy, no. 1448, brought
$2.63,

Esq. | First |

LANGUAGES. 61

Mackenzie (A.) — Continued.

— Voyages | d’Alex.tte Mackenzie;
dans Vintérieur | de | VAmérique Sep-
tentrionale, | Faits en 1789, 1792 et
1793; | Le1.«t, de Montréal au fort Chi-
piouyan et 4 la mer Glaciale; | Le 2.™°*,
du fort Chipiouyan jusqu’aux bords de
VOcéan | pacifique. | Précédés Vun Ta-
bleau historique et politique sur | le
commerce des pelleteries, dans le Ca-
nada. | Traduits de Anglais, | Par J.
Castéra, | Avec des Notes et un Itiné-
raire, tirés en partie des | papiers du
vice-amiral Bougainville. | Tome Pre-
mier [-II1]. |

Paris, | Dentu, Imprimeur-Libraire,
Palais du Tribunal, | galeries de bois,

n.° 240. | An X.—1802.

3 vols. maps, 8°.

Linguistics as inthe first edition titled above,
vol. 1, pp. 304-310, vol. 3, p. 20.

Copies seen: Astor, Congress.

At the Fischer sale, no. 2533, a copy brought
ls. Priced by Gagnon, Quebec, 1888, $3.

For title of an extract from this edition see

under date of 1807 below.

Alexander Mackenzie’s Esq. | Reisen
| von | Montreal durch Nordwestameri-
| ka | nach dem | Eismeer und der Siid-
| See |in den Jahren 1789 und 1793. |
Nebst | einer Geschichte des Pelzhan-
| dels in Canada. | Aus dem Englischen.
| Mit einer allgemeinen Karte und dem
Bild- | nisse des Verfassers. |

Berlin und Hamburg. | 1802.

Pp. i-ix, 11-408, map, 8°.

Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 133-135,
360.
Copies seen: British Museum.

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the
river St. Laurence, | through the |
continent of North America, | to the |
Frozen and Pacific oceans; | In the
Years 1789 and 1793. | With a prelim-
inary account | of the rise, progress,
and present state of | the fur trade | of
that country. | With original notes by
Bougainville, and Volney, | Members of
the French senate. | Illustrated with
maps. | By Alexander Mackenzie, esq.
| Vol. I[-If]. |

London: | printed for T. Cadell, jun.
' and W. Davies, Strand; | Cobbett and
Morgan, Pall-mall; and W. Creech, | at
Edinburgh. | By R. Noble, Old-bailey.
M. DCCC. II [1802].

2 vols, in one: half-title verso blank 1 1. title

62

Mackenzie (A.) — Continued,
verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref-
ace pp. vii-xiv, text pp. 1-284. contents pp. 285- |
290; half-title verso blank 1 1. title (varying
somewhat in punctuation from that of vol. 1)
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-310 (wrongly num”
bered 210), notes pp. 311-812, appendix pp. 313—- |
325, contents pp. 326-332, maps, 8°.
Linguistic contents as in the first edition |
titled above, vol. 1, pp. 158-162, vol. 2, pp. 148-
149. |
Copies seen: Congress, Geological Survey.
Clarke & co. 1886, priced a copy, no. 4050, $3.50.
— Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the |
river St. Laurence, | through the | |
continent of North-America, | to the |
Frozen and Pacific oceans: | in the years
1789 and 1793. | With a Preliminary |
Account of|the rise, progress, and |
present state of the | fur trade | of that
country. | Illustrated with a map. | By
Alexander Mackenzie, esq. | Third
American edition. |
New-York: | published by Evert
Duyckinck, bookseller. Lewis Nichols,
printer. | 1803.
Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank
11. preface pp. v-viii, text pp. 9-437, 16°.
Linguistic contents as in preyious editions |
titled above, pp. 110, 314. |
Copies seen: Congress.

Tableau | historique et politique | |
du commerce des pelleteries | dans le |
Canada, | depuis 1608 jusqu’a nos jours,
| Contenant beaucoup de détails sur
les nations sau- | vages qui ’habitent,
et sur les vastes contrées qui y | sont
contignés; | Avee un Vocabulaire de la
langue de plusieurs peuples de ces |
vastes contrées. | Par Alexandre Mac-
kenzie. | Traduit de Anglais, | par J.
Castéra. Orné du portrait de Vauteur. |

Paris, | Dentu, Lnprim.-Lib."®, rnedu
Pont-de-Lody, n.° 3. | M.D. CCC. VII
[1807].

Half-title 11. title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-
310, table des matiéres 1 unnumbered page, 8°.
An extract from vol.1 of the Paris edition of
1802, titled above.

Linguistic contents as in previous editions,
pp. 804-310.

Copies seen: Congress.

Leclerc, 1867, sold a copy, no. 920, for 4 fr.;
priced by him, 1878, no. 756, 20 fr.

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the
river St. Laurence, | through the |
continent of North America, | to the |
Frozen and Pacific oceans; | in the
years 1789 and 1793. | With a prelimi-

M'‘GLean (John).

McLean (fev. John).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Mackenzie (A.) — Continued.

nary account | of the rise, progress, and
present state | of| the fur trade | of
that country. | Illustrated with maps
and a portrait of the author. | By sir
Alexander Mackenzie. | Vol. I{-IT]. |

New-York: | published by W. B. Gil-
ley. | 1814.

2 vols.:-3 p. ll. pp.i-vili, i-exxvi, 1-113;-171.
pp. 115-392, 8°.

Linguistic contents as under previous titles,
vol. 1, pp. ¢xxili-exxvi, 247.

Copies seen ; Congress.

Sir Alexander Mackenzie, explorer, born in

Inverness, Scotland, about 1755; died in Dal-
housie, Scotland, March 12, 1820. In his youth
he emigrated to Canada. In June, 1789, he set
out on his expedition. At the western end of
Great Slave Lake he entered a river, to which
he gave his name, and explored it until July 12,
when he reached the Arctic Ocean. He then
returned to Fort Chippewyan, where he arrived
on September 27. In October, 1792, he under-
took a more hazardous expedition to the west-
ern coast of North America, and succeeded in
reaching Cape Menzies, on the Pacific Ocean. He
returned to England in 1801 and was knighted
the following year.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am.
Biog.
Notes | of a | twenty-
five years’ service | in the | Hudson’s
bay territory. | By John M‘Lean. | In
two volumes. | Vol. I{-II]. |

London:) Richard Bentley, new Bur-
lington street, | Publisher in Ordinary
to Her Majesty. | 1849.

2 vols.: half-title verso printer 11. title verso
blank 1 1. preface (dated Ist March, 1849) pp. v-
viii, contents pp. ix—xii, text pp. 18-308; title
verso printer 1 1. contents pp. iii-vii, text pp. 9-
328, 12°. ;

Vocabulary of the principal Indian dialects
in use among the tribes in the Hudson’s Bay
Territory, Sauteu, or Ogibois, Cree, Beaver
Indian, and Chippewayan, in parallel columns,
about 130 words each, vol. 2, pp. 323-328.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit-
ish Museum, Congress, Eames, National Mu-

seum.

At the Field sale, no. 1450,a half-morocco copy,
uneut, brought $3.75; at the Murphy sale, no.
1558, a defective copy, $1.50.
American Indian
literature,

Tn Canadian Methodist Mag. vol. 21, pp. 456-
463, Toronto, 1885, 8°. (Pilling.)

A general account of the subject, including
references toa number of writers and works on
the Athapascan.

Indian languages and literature in
Manitoba, North-west Territories and
British Columbia,

ATHAPASCAN

McLean (J.) — Continued.

In Canadian Institute, Proc. third series, vol.
5, pp. 215-218, Toronto, 1888, 8°.

Contains (1) list of languages in Manitoba,
Keewatin, and North-west Territories; (2) lan-
guages in British Columbia; and (3) the lan-
guages of which vocabularies and grammars
have been published, the authors and place of
publication, the latter containing a number of
references to the Athapascan.

— The Indians | their manners and eus-
toms. | By | John McLean, M. Ay Phe Ds
| (Robin Rustler.) | With Eighteen
full-page Llustrations. |

Toronto: | William Briggs, 78 & 80
King street east. | C. W. Coates, Mon-
treal. 8S. F. Huestis, Halifax. | 1889.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-

viii, contents pp. ix-x, list of illustrations verso |

blank 1 1. text pp. 18-351, 12°.

Chapter vii, Indian languages and literature,
pp. 235-258. This consists first of a notice of the
development of Indian languages from picture-
writing through ideographic symbols to pho-
netic signs classified in alphabets.
field of literature in general devoted to the
Indians is scanned, enumerating works of
special interest to the student of philology,
commencing on p. 241. This includes titles of
works in a number of American languages,
among them the Tukudh. Indian syllabies
(Tukudh, Cherokee, Cree), pp. 201-253.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Powell.

Rey. John McLean was born in Kilmarnoch,
Ayrshire, Scotland, Oct. 30, 1852; came to Can-
ada in 1873, and was graduated B. A. from Vie-
toria University, Cobourg, Ontario. Some years
afterward his alma mater conferred on him the

degree of M. A. In 1874 he entered the ministry |

of the Methodist church. In 1880, at Hamilton,
Ontario, he was ordained for special work

among the Blackfoot Indians, leaving in June |

of the same year for Fort MacLeod, Northwest
Territory, accompanied by his wife. At this
point were gathered about 700 Blood Indians,
which number was subsequently increased by
the arrival of Bloods and Blackfeet from Mon-
tana to 8,500. Mr. McLean settled upon the
reserve set apart for these Indians and dili-
gently set to work to master their language,
history, etc., and on these subjects he has pub-
lished a number of articles in the magazines
and society publications. At the request of the
anthropological committee of the British Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, Dr.
McLean has for several years prepared notes on
the language, customs, and traditions of the
Blackfoot Confederacy, and the results of this
labor are partly given in one of the reports of
the committee. Although burdened with the
labors of a missionary, he found time to prepare
a post-graduate course in history and took the
degree of Ph. D.at the Wesleyan University,

Then the |

LANGUAGES. 63

McLean (J.) — Continued.
Bloomington, I1l., in 1888. Besides the articles
which have appeared under his own name, Dr.
McLean has written extensively for the press
under the nom de plume of Robin Rustler. He
is now (February, 1892) stationed at Moose Jaw,
Northwest Verritory, having left the Indian
work in July, 1889. He has for several years
been inspector of schools, and is now a member

| of the board of education and of the board of

examiners for the Northwest Territory.

_M’ Murray (Alexander H.) See Murray
(A. H.)

| M’Pherson (Murdoch). Vocabulary of
the Chepewyan language.

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi-
tion, vol. 2, pp. 882-385, London, 1851, 8°.

Contains about 100 words and the numerals
1-300.

Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work; see Richardson (J.)

M’Pherson (Vrs. Murdoch).
ardson (.J.)

See Rich-

|

| Maisonneuve. This word following a title or in-
cluded within parentheses after a note indicates
that a copy of the work referred to has been
seen by the compiler in the bookstore of Mai-
sonneuve et Cie., Paris, France.

| Manual of devgtion in the Beaver Indian
| dialect. See Bompas (W.C.)

| Massachusetts Historical Society: These words
following a title or within parentheses after a
note indicate that a copy of the work referred
to has been seen by the compiler in the library
of that society, Boston, Mass.

| Matthews (Dr. Washington). A part of
the Navajo’s mythology. By W. Mat-
thews.
| In American Antiquarian, vol. 5, pp. 207-224,
Chicago, 1883, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.)
Contains many Navajo terms and names of
mythic personages passim.
Issued separately as follows:

A Part of the Nayajos’ Mythology. |
By W. Matthews. | From the American
Antiquarian for April, 1883.

(Chicago: 1883. ]

Half-title on cover as above, no inside title;
text pp. 1-18, 8°.
Linguistic contents as under title next above.
Copies seen: Pilling.

{[——] A night with the Navajos.
Zay Elin.

In Forest and Stream, vol. 23, pp. 282-283,
New York, Nov. 6, 1884, folio. (Bureau of Eth-
nology.)

Contains a number of Navajo words with
meanings passim.

By

64

Matthews (W.) — Continued.
— Mythic dry-paintings of the Nav-
ajos. By Dr. W. Matthews.
In American Naturalist, vol. 19, pp. 931-939,
Philadelphia, 1885, 8°. (Congress.)
Contains a number of Navajo terms and
proper names passim.

The origin of the Utes.
myth.

In American Antiquarian, vol. 7, pp. 271-274,
Chicago, 1885, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.)
A number of Navajo words and phrases.

A Navajo

— Navajo names for plants. By Dr. W.
Matthews, U.S. A.
In American Naturalist, vol. 20, pp. 767-777,
Philadelphia, 1886, 8°. (Pilling.)
Many Navajo words with English meanings
and explanations.

deities and demons of the
By Dr. W. Matthews, U. S.

Some
Navajos.
Army.
In American Naturalist, vol. 20, pp. 841-850,
Philadelphia, 1886, 8°.
A number of Navajo words and names of
mythic personages, passim.
The mountain chant: a Navajo cere-
mony. By Dr. Washington Matthews,
U.S. A.

In Bureau of Ethnology, Fifth Ann. Rept. |

pp. 379-467, Washington, 1887, royal 8°.
ling.)

(Pil-

Original texts and translations of songs, pp. |
455-467, contain twenty-two songs and prayers |

with literal and free translations into Eng-
lish.—Numerous Navaje terms, including local
and mythic names, passim.

Issued separately, with title-page, as follows: |

The | mountain chant | a Navajo

ceremony | by | Dr. Washington Mat- |
thews, U. 8. A. | Extract from the fifth |
annual report of the Bureau of ethnol- |

ogy | [Vignette] |
Washington | Government printing
oftice | 1888 %

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1

]. no inside title, contents pp. 381-382, illustra-
tions p. 383, text pp. 385-467, royal 8°. One
hundred copies issued.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling.

—— The prayer of a Navajo shaman. By
Dr. Washington Matthews, U. S. A.,
Army medical museum.

In American Anthropologist, vol. 1, pp. 149-
170, Washington, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.)

The prayer in English (in 55 paragraphs),
with interlinear translation in Navajo, pp. 151-
163.— Glossary (127 words), alphabetic by Nay
ajo words, pp. 165-170.

Issued separately, with title-page, as follows:

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

THE

Matthews (W.) — Continued.
—— The prayer | of | a Navajo shaman.
| By | Dr. Washington Matthews, | U.
5S. army. | From the American Anthro-
pologist, Vol. I, No.2, April, 1888.
Washington, D. C.: | Judd & Det-
weiler, printers. | 1888.
Cover title as above, title as above verso
blank 11. text pp. 5-26, plate, 8°.
Linguistics as under title next above, pp. 7-
19, 21-26.
Copies seen: Pilling.

—— Navajo gambling songs. By Dr.
Washington Matthews, U.S. army.

In American Anthropologist, vol. 2, pp. 1-19,
Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.)
Contains twenty-one short songs in Navajo,
each followed by translation and notes.

Issued separately, also, without change,
| (Pilling.)

Noqoilpi, the gambler: a Navajo
myth.

In Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. 2, pp.
89-94, Boston and New York, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.)

A number of Navajo terms, passim.

Issued separately, also, without change.
(Pilling.)

| —— The gentile system of the Navajo
Indians.

In Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. 3, pp.
89-110, Boston and New York, 1890, 8°. (Pilling.)

List of the Navajo gentes (51), with meanings
in English, pp. 103-104.—Phratries ef the Nay-
ajos (from Tall Chanter, and a second list from
Capt. Bourke), p. 109.—Many Navajo terms
passim.

Issued separately, with title-page, as follows:

| —— The gentile system | of | the Nayajo
Indians | by | Washington Matthews,
M.D., LL.D. | major and surgeon,
United States army | Delivered as a
Lecture before the Anthropological |
Society, Washington, D.C.

[Boston and New York: 1890. ]

Half-title on cover as above, no inside title;
text pp. 89-110, 8°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen; Pilling.

—— [Texts, grammar, and dictionary of
the Navajo language. } (5),
Manuscript. Dr. Matthews, who is now
(1892) stationed at Ft. Wingate, N. M., is col-
lecting material for a monograph on the Navajo
Indians. Concerning the linguistic portion he
wrote me under date of September 22, 1891, as
follows:

‘*My work on the Navajo language is grow-
ing, but it is in such a chaotic state as yet that
lean not give you a very satisfactory account
of it. I have, I think, grammatic material te

ATHAPASCAN

Matthews (W.) — Continued.

fill 200 or 250 printed quarto pages, and I have
about 10,900 words in my dictionary. My cok
lection of -texts and_ tramslations—songs,
prayers, myths, rhuals,ete.—would forma good-
sized volume of themselves. It will take time
and leisure to put them in shape, however.”
Dr. Washington Matthews was born in Kil-
liney, a suburb of Dublin, Ireland, July 17,
1843. His mother dying, his father emigrated
to America while he was yet in his infancy,
and, after extensive travel in America, settled
first in Wisconsin, then a territory, and later
in Iowa. He was graduated in medicine at the
medical department of the State University of
Towa in the spring of 1864, and in 1888 received
the honorary degree of LL.D. from the same
university in recognition of his philologic
studies. In 1864 he entered the United States
service as an acting assistant surgeon, and
served as such until the close of the war. In
the summer of 1865 he again entered the mili-
tary service and has continued therein until
the present time, having been commissioned
major and surgeon Jwly 10, 1889 His service
has carried him over all the States and Terri-
tories west of the Mississippi and brought him

into contact with a majority of the tribes of |

that extensive region.

year he went to Fort Berthold, Dakota, where

he came in contact with Arickarees, Hidatsas, |

and Mandans. He resided, with some inter-
ruptions, in the neighborhood of these three
tribes for about six years, and gave special
attention to their languages and ethnography.
In the winter of 1870-’71 his manuscripts and
notes on these tribes had assumed extensive
proportions; but on the 28th of January, 1871,

his quarters at Fort Buford were destroyed by |

fire, and all his notes and manuscripts, with a
valuable collection of books of early travel and
exploration on the upper Missouri, were con-
sumed. In 1872 he went east, and in 1873 pub-
lished the Grammar and Dictionary of the
Language of the Hidatsa. From New York he
went to California, prepared a second edition
of his work, under the title of Ethnography
and Philology of the Hidatsa Indians, which
was issued from the Government Printing
Office in 1877, and spent some five years in the
more remote parts of California and on cam-
paigns against hostile Indians, in the course of
which he traveled extensively through Nevada,
Oregon, Idaho, and Washington, and met many
wild tribes whose languages and customs he
noted. In 1880 he went to New Mexico, where
he began to study the Navajo Indians. In 1884
he went to Washington, D. C., and remained
there on duty in the Army Medical Museum
until May, 1890. From Washington he made
two excursions into the Southwest in the pur-
suit of archeologic and ethnographic investi-
gations—one in the interest of the Bureau of
Ethnology, the other in the interest of the

ATH 5

His first serious study |
of the Indians began when he ascended the |
Upper Missouri in 1865. In the autumn of that |

LANGUAGES.

Mescalero Apache.

Midnooski.

Mimbreno Apache.

65

Matthews (W.) — Continued.

Hemenway Southwestern Archielogical Expe-
dition. While in the Army Medical Museum
his time was largely devoted to somatological
studies, particular attention being given to the
large collection of crania and other human
bones in the museum, and he has written an
extensive illustrated monograph on ‘The
Human Bones of the Hemenway Collection,”
which is yet unpublished. In 1890 he returned
to New Mexico, where he still remains.

See Apache.

See Ahtinneé.

Muhau (Dr. John J.) Vocabulary of the

Umpqua Valley people, Oregon.

Manuscript, 8 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on both sides; in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected during No-
vember, 1856. Recorded on one of the Smith-
sonian blanks of 170 words, equivalents of the
whole number being given.

In the same library are two copies of this
yocabulary, both by Dr. Geo. Gibbs, in one of
which (where he designates the language as
Hewut) he follows Dr. Milhau’s spelling, in the
other he uses an alphabetic notation of his own.

A third copy is in the same library, made by
Dr. Roehrig for comparison with the Willopah
vocabulary of Dr. Gibbs.

See Apache.

Montagnais:

Bible history See Legoff (L.)

Morgan (Lewis Henry).

Catechism Legoff (L.)
Catechism Perrault (C. O.)
Catechism Végréville (V. T.)
Dictionary Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Dictionary Végréville (V. T.)
Grammar Legoff (L.)
Grammar Végréville (V. T.)
Grammatic treatise Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Hymns Legoff (L.)

Hymns Perrault (C. 0.)
Prayer book Legoff (L.)

Prayer book Perrault (C. 0.)
Sermons Legoff (L.)

Songs Végréville (V. T.)
Sylabary Perrault (C. 0.)
Ten commandments Legoff (L.)

Text Legoftf (L.)

Tribal names Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Vocabulary Adam (L.)

Words Petitot (E. F.S.J.)

See also Athapascan; Chippewyan; Tinné.
Smithsonian
Contributions to Knowledge. | 218 |
Systems | of | consanguinity and affin-
ity | of the | human family. | By |
Lewis H. Morgan. |

Washington city: | published by the
Smithsonian institution. | 1871.

Colophon: Published by the Smithsonian in-
stitution, | Washington city, | June, 1870.

66

Morgan (L. H.) — Continued.

Title on cover as above, inside title differing
from above in imprint verso blank 1 1. adver-
tisement p. iii verso blank, preface pp. v-ix
verso blank, contents pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-583,
index pp. 585-590, 14 plates, 4°.

Also forms vol. 17 of Smithsonian Contribu-
tions to Knowledge. Such issues have no cover
title, but the general title of the series and 6
other prel. ll. preceding the inside title.

Chapter v, System of relationship of the
Ganowanian family continued. Athapasco-
Apache and other nations (pp. 230-253) includes
the following: A short comparative vocabulary
(23 words) of the Slave Lake Indians (from
Kennicott), Beaver Indians (from Kennicott),
Chepewyan, Dog Rib, and Kttchin (the three
latter from Richardson), p. 232.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

System of consanguinity and affinity of the |

Ganowanian family (pp. 291-382) includes the
following, collected by Mr. Morgan: Hare In-
dians (Té-nd/-tin-ne), lines 65; Red Knives
(Tal-sote’-e-na), lines 66.

Also the following:

Herdesty (W.L.), Relationships of the Kut-
chin or Loucheux, lines 67.

Kennicott (R.), Relationships of the Slave
Lake Indians, lines 64.

McDonald (R.). Relationships of the Tu-kit-
the, lines 68.

Copies seen: Astor, British Musum, Bureau
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trum-
bull.

At the Squier sale, no. 889, a copy sold for
$5.50. Quaritch, no. 12425,* priced a copy 41.

Lewis H. Morgan was bornin Aurora, Cayuga
County, N. Y., November 21, 1818. He was
graduated by Union College, Schenectady, inthe
classof 1840. Returning from college to Aurora,
Mr. Morgan joined a secret society composed of
the young men of the village and known as the
Grand Order of the Iroquois. This had a great
influence upon his future career and studies.
The order was instituted for sport and amuse-
ment, but its organization was modeled on the
governmental system of the Six Nations; and,
chiefly under Mr. Morgan's direction and lead-
ership, the objects of the order were extended,
if not entirely changed, and its purposes
improved. To become better acquainted with
the social polity of the Indians, young Morgan
visited the aborigines remaining in New York,
a mere remnant, but yet retaining to a great
extent their ancient laws and customs; and he
went so far as to be adopted as a member by the
Senecas. Before the council of the order, in
the years 1844, 1845, and 1846, he read a series of
papers on the Iroquois, which were published
under the nom de plume of ‘Skenandoah.”
Mr. Morgan died in Rochester, N. Y., Decem-
ber 17, 1881.

[Morice (Pere Adrien Gabriel).] The
New | Methodical, Easy and Complete
| Dene syllabary.
[Stuart’s Lake mission, B, C, 1890,]

THE

Morice (A. G.) — Continued.

2 separate leaves, verso of the first one
blank, 8°.

On the first leaf is given the syllabary with
explanatory notes; the second presents ‘* Some
of the Advantages of the New Syllabary.” See
the fac-similes on the three following pages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

[——] A New | Improved & Easy Alpha-
bet or Syllabary | suggested to the
‘Cherokee nation” | By a Friend | and
earnest sympathizer. |

Stuart’s Lake Mission Print No. 9.
[1890. ]

1 leaf, verso blank, 8°.

‘The sounds and orthography of the above
are those of the Cherokee Alphabet such as
reproduced in Pilling’s Iroquoian Bibliography.
Should they be incomplete or defective, the new
Syllabary can easily be completed or corrected
out of the Déné Alphabet, from which it is
extracted.”’

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

L

] Preces | Post privatam Missam’
recitandie. | [One line syllabic charac-
ters. |

[Stuart’s Lake mission, B. C. 1890. ]

1 leaf, verso blank, 8°.

A prayer in the Déné language, syllabic
characters, followed by a prayer in Latin, roman
characters.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

—— [Two lines syllabic characters. ] |
[Picture of the virgin and child.] |
[Three lines syllabic characters. ]

[Stuart’s Lake mission, B. C. 1890. ]

Transliteration: Pe teestles oetsdtceléh |
Jezi Kili hwoeztli ét hwotsen |

Hwol 1890t nahwotizet | Nakraztli ét| pel

Molis ceyinla.

Translation: With paper one-learns | Jesus

Christ was-born then since |
With-it 1890 times it-annually-revolved

[year] | Stuart’s-Lake there | father Morice

made-it.

Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in the
Déné language and in syllabic characters) pp.
3-32, sq. 16°. See the fac-simile of the title-
page on p. 70 of this bibliography.

The first book printed in these characters.
It is a sort of primer containing spelling and
elementary reading lessons.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

— [Two lines syllabic characters. ] |
[Oblate seal.] | [Three lines syllabic
characters. ]

[Stuart’s Lake mission, B. C. 1890.]
Transliteration : Loekateshisyaz keiskeez. |
Jezi Ki hweeztli 6t hwotseen | [Seal.] |

Hwo 1890t nahwotizmt | Nakraatli ét | pel
Molis weyinla,

rf

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 67
Tue NEw
Methodical, Easy and Complete
DENE SYLLABARY.

— ie & oe

bank OE IO U With A @ Er OU
SnGe a tS pA V Alone. ¥ CODD Q WAlone
H <i> SAV wl a CRAO- 19 i Seo
a seyvds a> a Ae we 4 1g (CS a ON ORD ao)
R Sb opsberAr wy «tt
W a> Sao eV L [OSB 0 a PS Pe
Hw <€ >>>RAY JO as 4 Sl a
f OS AD FAG BAB NO mea
eae Da Soe tre Cheri: HO ae ee
Th lS Dome lea) Te Bigs 2G
T De, 20). (0 (3)
Z Gh, wie y Gham &
mach 1) p, Gy GO oe Ta De G Dydd 2 OU-4
(1) 5 Scar i Us tee
KGKE333Mw ‘sh €BBBRB 5s
Poe ad Sb Ss Se MW fy -ch S&S BB BR DB
Po Se eS BM OW | Ts er Sse imlw
(2) || Ts @BBB RM W
N 0) 4 2) BE Ry 2
M E 33 3 % W «|| Hiatus - — Accessories. o *

EXPLANATORY NOTES.

(1) These letters are not differentiated in Dene. (2) v is the nasal n, (3) 2
is the French 7. (4) S is phonetically intermediate between ¢ and s.

The vowels as in Italian, except @ as the ein Fr. je, te. — Ther of Ar, Kr
is hardly perceptible. gy, y are very guttural. A is the result of uvular vibra-
tions. Kh, Th=k+h,t+h. @ almost = ty. f is a peculiarly sibilant.J. The
dot accompanying consonants represents the exploding sound (rendered by ¢ in-
corporated in the signs). * is prefixed to proper names, and o is suffixed to
syllables the vowel of which itis necessary to render long. The rest as in Engl,

68 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

SOME OF THE

Advantages of the New Syllabary.

I.— The direction of the curve or angle of each sign infallibly determines
the nature of the vowel added to the fundamental consonant of each syllable,
and this direction is always perceived without the least effort of the mind. In
the Cree Alphabet such as given in Petitot’s Grammaire raisonnee, this direc-
tion on which depends the vowel of the syllable is either difficult to discern or
governed by no fixed rules. Thus, in that Syllabary, C points to the right,
kL to the left, @ upwards, \ downwards, though the consonants expressed by
these differently turned signs are ALL in connection with the SAME vowel a. Hen-
ce confusion—with co-relative difficulty—for the mind of the pupil.

II.— All the cognate sounds are rendered in the new syllabics by similarly
formed characters the general shape of which denotes the phonetic group to
which they belong, while their intrinsic modifications determine the nature of
the particular sound they represent. Thus the dentals are expressed by a single
curve; the gutturals by a double curve; the soft sibilants by a curve with un-
dulating extremities; the hard sibilants by a double curve with like extrem-
ities, etc. Therefore our 30 sets of letters are practically reduced to 9, viz.:
JACdECPeCAC E. So that the pupil who has become familiar
with these 9 signs may almost be said to have mastered the whole Alphabet;
for another good point in its favor is that

III.— The modifications of each fundamental character take place internally
and in conformity with logical and therefore easily learnt rules. To illustrate
this remark, we will refer to the sign &. The student who already possesses
the aforesaid 9 principal signs will recognize it at sight—through its double
undulating curve—as a hard sibilant which, being affected by no modification,
must be given the primary hissing sound Sa. Let us now insert therein the
perpendicular line which, when used as an internal accretion to a sign, corres-
ponds to the h of the Roman Alphabet (as in < hra, € hwa, Q tha, & kha),
and we obtain & sha. Should we cross the end of its horizontal line, we will
thereby addar to that sign which will then become & tsha.or cha. In li-
ke manner, € may be changed into G tsa which in its turn is liable to be
transformed into & tsa. C, €&, etc. may also become C, &, etc. —This
logic and consequent facility are sadly wanting in the old Sylabary which is
made up of disconnected signs many of which are differentiated only by addi-
tional and external smaller signs (4 1S 1 SO b! be «<I “<I <1)
most of which are also used as non-syllabic letters, and as such sometimes ha-
ve in that same Alphabet a meaning quite different from that which is attribu-

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 69

ted to them when they are considered as mere accessories. This arbitrary
change of value joined to the fact that these modifying signs sometimes pre-
cede, sometimes follow, the main character must unavoidably confuse the mind
of the beginner and render the acquisition of reading unnecessarily difficult.

IV.— In our system, all the small signs (except o which, as its form indica-
tes, is zero when alone) are consonants without vowel, and in zo instance is any
of them used in another capacity They have always the same value, and the
method and logic which we have noticed in the formation of the main or syl-
labic signs have also presided to the composition of those which are merely
consonantal, Thus the non-syllabic gutiurals are expressed by vertical lines
(+ v); the nasals by semicircles (0 « v), &c. Note also the transformation of
S into s, sh; z into z, zh or J, etc. through the insertion of the 1 or modifying
h of the large characters. —The old Alphabet ‘not only lacks this method and
resulting simpiicity, but it would seem as if its inventor had purposedly con-
trived to render its acquisition unduly difficult to the white student by giving
to s the value of J, to z that of g, to h that of f, ete.

V.— The new Syllabary is complete, while it is universally conceded that
the Cree Alphabet lacks about half adozen sets of syllabic signs which are in-
dispensable in such delicate languages as the Dene. Those who know the num-
berless.and most ridiculous contresens this scarcity leads to need no other rea-
son to reject the whole system as practicaliy worthless, Besides, in connection
with none of its signs is there any provision for such important vowel sounds
as those of @ (French ¢ muet) and u (00, Fr. cu). Yet in several dialects &
characterizes the present tense and E the past, while the distinction between
0 and v is no less essential.

VI.— Lastly, we claim for our Syllabary a greater synthesis which renders
the writing shorter and, by avoiding the accumulation of non-syllabic signs,
makes the reading easier. For instance, the Chippewayaa word intan-chare,
“leaf” which with the old syllabics cannot be written without three consecu-
tive small signs (A\CIv&D) is simply Po@-Si> with the new system,

In conclusion, we may be permitted to state as illustrative of the practical
worth of the new Syllabary that through it Indians of common intelligence
have learnt to read in one week’s leasurely study before they had any Primer
or printed matter of any kind to help them on. We even know of a young
man who performed the feat in the space of two evenings,

70

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

BID 22D) Pt AB

Av 18907 CADD?

C&25) pr

—a— Di NHs pow

BBRSRGRGGGGG wm mimi mmm imme

FAC-SIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE'S DENE PRIMER,

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

ais OESDBIC2 BPssrz RA

*BDD >2D br AB

Mtechas0r Cl DOs

iO a a

ase D1 Ms PAS Gales (

si

C=

FAC-SIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE’S DENE CATECHISM.

71

12

Morice (A. G.) —Continned.

Translation: The-little-catechism drawn-on
(written). | Jesus-Christ was-born then since |
[Seal.] |

With4t 1890-times it-annually-revolved |
Stuart's-Lake there | fatherMorice made-it.

Title as above verso blank 1 1. text (entirely
in the Déné language and in syllabie charac-
ters) pp. 8-18, sq. 16°. See the fac-simile of the
title-page on p.71 of this bibliography.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

dome copies of this catechism differ in colla-
tion: Title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 41-
56. The author informs me that an edition of
500 of these was printed ‘‘to form part of a
‘Recueil de Priéres’ which I am not yet pre-
pared to publish.” (Eames, Pilling, Shea.)

The western Dénés—their manners
and customs. By the Rev. Father A.
G. Morice, O. M. I., Stuart’s Lake, B.C.
In Canadian Inst. Proce. third series, vol. 7
(whole no. vol. 25), pp. 109-174, Toronto, 1890, 8°.
(Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling, Wellesley.)
Classification of the Déné tribes, p. 113.—
Déné songs with music, 156-157.—Apologue
(three lines) in the language of the Carrier In-
dians (‘‘ written with the new signs” with
interlinear transliteration and followed by
English translation), p. 166.—Remarks on the
language of the western Dénés, pp. 166-167.

— The Déné languages. Considered in
Themselves and Incidentally in their
Relations to Non-American Idioms.
By the Rev. Father A. G. Morice, O. M. I.

Hh Canadian Inst. Trans. vol. 1, pp. 170-212.
Toronto, 1891, 8°. (Pilling.)

Introduction, pp. 170-171.—Phoneties and
graphic signs (pp. 172-175) includes “ the new
methodical easy and complete Déné syllabary,;”’
p. 175.—General characteristics of the Déné
languages, pp. 176-181.—The nouns; their vari-
eties and inflections, pp. 181-184.—The adjee-
tives and the pronouns, pp. 185-189.—The sim-
ple or primary verbs, pp. 189-195.—The com-
posite verbs, pp. 195-200.—Varieties of verbs,
pp. 200-204.—Miscellaneous notes. pp. 204-212.

Issued separately with half-title (The Déné
languages), on the verso of which begins the
text, paged as in the original article, 170-212.
(Eames, Gafschet, Pilling, Powell.)

It has also been: translated into French and
is in course of publication in the Missions de la
Congrégation des Missionnaires Oblats de
Marie Immaculée, Paris.

Le | petit catechisme | al’usage | des
sauvages porteurs | Texte & Traduc-
tion avee Notes | suivi des | prieres du
matin | et du soir | Par le R. P. Morice,
O.M.J. | [Two lines quotation] |
Mission | du lae Stuart | 1891

Colophon: Typographie de la Mission du Lac
Stuart. No. 10.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Morice (A. G.) — Continued.

Half-title (Le Petit Catechisme et prieres)
verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1.
avertissement pp. 5-6, text (Carrier and French,
usually on facing pages) pp. 8-143, (half-titles at
pp. 7,51 and 95). table des matieres p. 144, sq.
16°.

On each page of the work are given foot-notes
explanatory of peculiarities in the Carrier text
and of the translation.

Catechism, pp. 7-49.—Prayers for the morn-
ing, pp. 52-69.—Prayer for the evening, pp. 70-
73.—Divers prayers (pp. 74-93): Prayer on
arising, p. 74.— Prayer on retiring, p.75.—The
mysteries. of the rosary, pp. 76-79.—Salve,
Regina, p. 80.—Prayer to St. Joseph, pp. 81-83.—
Prayer for the dead, p. 84.—Acts for the bene-
diction of the holy sacrament, pp. 85-93, verso a
note in French by the author.—Cantiques (pp.
95-143): To the sacred eucharist, pp. 96-103.—
To the Holy Spirit, p. 104.—To the Holy Virgin,
pp. 105-112.—To St. Joseph, pp. 113-115.—To
the Holy Angels, pp. 116-117. — For various
occasions, pp. 118-143.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Powell.

—— [Teestles-Nahwoelnek, or Carrier

Review.

Stuart’s Lake, 1891. ]

Pp. 9-32, 8°.

An eight-page periodical, printed entirely in
the Déné syllabie characters invented by Pére
Morice. At this writing (January, 1892) but
three numbers have been issued—those for
October, November, and December, 1891. No.1
begins with page 9, the preceding pages being
held, I presume, for the preliminary matter
relating to the volume.

The contents are of a varied nature—the first
number, for example, containing: Indian or
local names, p. 9.—News from below [i. e. from
the colonized portion of British Columbia], p.
9.—News from the New World, p. 10; fromthe
Old World, p. 10.—Scripture text, p. 11.—Life
of St. Athanasius, p.11.—Bible questions and
answers, p. 12.--Letter from the bishop, p. 12.—
A picture and its explanation, p. 13.—Concern-
ing the Review, p. 13.—A story, pp. 14-15.—
Hymns, p. 15.—Useful information, ete., p. 16.

Copies seen: Pilling, Powell.

[——] Dictionnaire | de la Langue |

Chilkohtine. | Mission | du lac William.
| Avril 1884. (OS)

Manuseript; title verso blank 1 1. text pp.
1-170, double columns, 8°.

Contains about 5,000 words, which need
rearrangement and retranscription. It has
been prepared for publication as far as the let-
ter F. ;

] Pe | Kuti-Nitsil-in | pwgénni | gé
yatsélthik. [1884.] (*)

Literal translation: With | Above-Chief
[God] | his-word | after one-speaks.

Manuscript; pp. 1-42, 12°.

Contains 5 sermons in Chilkohtin.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 73

Morice (A. G.) — Continued. ones (A, G.) — Continued.
—— Dictionnaire] Des Verbes | De la | [——] Twelve | Short Lives of the Saints.

Langue Porteur | par | le R. P. A. G.
Morice, O.M. I. | Mission du lac Stuart
| 1887-18. . @)

Manuscript; title verso and following leaf |

blank, text pp. 1-128, double column, small 4°.
' A-C only finished.

[——] Grammaire | Des Parties conju- |

gables du Discours | de la Langue
Porteur. 1887. (=)
Manuscript; pp. 1-96, double column, broad 8°.
Contains four chapters, subdivided into 19
articles and 132 rules.

[

] Manuel | Du Sauvage | contenant
| Priéres, Instructions, Cantiques | Et
Catéchisme. | Mission du Lac Stuart |
1888. (*)

Manuscript; title verso blank, text pp. 1-120,
16°, in the Carrier language.

Contains: Part I. Morning and evening
prayers, examination of conscience, acts before
and after communion, acts and hymn for the
benediction and divers miscellaneous pray ers.—
Part IL. Instructions on confession and com-
munion and the reception of sacraments gener-
ally.—Part III. 45 hymns, all original.—Part
TV. The short catechism of Christian doctrine.

[ | Yakesta pe’ teestlees ra cetata hok-
ween natseehwelnek. [1889.] (*)
Literal translation: Sky-on-sits [God] _his-
paper after old-time about one-narrates.
Manuscript; pp. 1-55, 12°, being a free trans-
lation and adaptation of the book of Genesis,
in the Carrier dialect.

— Déné roots | By the Rev. Father A.
G. Morice, O.M.I. [1’890.] (*)
Manuscript; 30 pages, folio.
Introduction, 13 pp.—Voeabulary of 370 Eng-
lish words which are roots in Déné, with their
equivalents in 17 or 18 Déné dialects, 17 pp.

— Les Evangiles | Pour tous les
Dimanches | Et | Fétes d’obligation |
De l’Année | Traduits | Par le R. P. A.
G. Morice, O. M. I. | Mission du Lae
Stuart | 1890. ©)

Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text 78
pages, note-paper size.

Contains the selections from the gospels read
in Roman Catholic churches on all Sundays
and feasts of obligation through the whole
year, translated into the Carrier language.

[——] Twelve | Stories of adventure j in
Carrier. 1890. (*)
Manuscript; 60 pages, note-paper size, being
translations and adaptations of the most thrill-
ing stories found in English periodicals and
destined by the translator for publication in a
projected monthly review in the new syllabics.
See page 70 for title of the Review.

1891. (*)

Manuscript; 26 pages, 4°.

—— [Words, phrases, and sentences in

the Dené language. 1891.] @)
Manuscript in possession of its author, who
has prepared it for the use of the Bureau of
Ethnology. Recorded in a copy of Powell's
Introduction to the study of Indian languages.

Grammar | of | The Carrier Lan-
guage | With Notes | On Local Peeul-
iarities and Idiotisms | By Rev. A.G.
Morice, O. M. I. @)

Manuscript, 73 pages, broad 8°, begun in
February, 1891, and yet unfinished; in posses-
sion of its author, who tells me he has reached
the chapter on the pronoun.

Carrier Sociology and
Mythology indigenous or exotic? (*)

Manuscript, 30 pages folio, recently prepared
by its author for publication in the Transac-
tions of the Royal Society of Canada.

Contents: Introductory — Ethnological —
Sociological—Carrier sociology exotic; general
arguments—Carrier sociology exotic; proved
by facts—Carrier mythology partially exotic—
Creation myths.

The manuscripts titled above are in the
possession of their author, who has kindly
furnished me information concerning them, as
also the notes from which I have compiled the
following biographic notice:

Father Morice was born on the 27th of
August, 1859, at Saint-Mars-sur-Colmont,
France. After the usual elementary studies at
the Christian Brothers’ school at Oisseau,
where his family had removed. he was sent,
when 13 years of age, to the Ecclesiastical
College at Mayenne, with a view to prepare
himself for the priesthood. Feeling called to
the foreign missions, he subsequently joined
the Order of the Oblates of Mary Immaculate
(O. M. 1.) and made his final vows therein in
October, 1879. While still studying theology
and being as yet in minor orders, the famous
decrees of 1880 commanded the dispersion of the
members of such religious orders as had not
the official sanction of the French Government.
Previous to the execution of these decrees he
was sent by his superiors to British Columbia,
where he arrived on the 26th of July, 1880. At
the completion of his theological studies and
after he had learned a little of the English lan-
guage he was promoted to the priesthood, July
2, 1882, and given charge of the Chilkotin In-
dians, whose language he immediately pro-
ceeded to learn. After two years of study he
found himself able to preach to them without
the aid of aninterpreter. In 1885 he was sent to
his present station, Stuart’s Lake, where he
repeated—but with less difficulty, owing to the
grammatical affinity of the two languages—his
linguistic studies in the dialect of the Carrier.

74

Miiller (Friedrich). Grundriss | der |

Sprachwissenschaft | von | D". Fried-
rich Miiller | Professor[ &c. three lines. ]
| I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung
in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band.
| I. Abtheilung. | Nachtriige zum Grund-
riss ausden Jahren | 1877-1887]. |

Wien 1876[-1888]. | Alfred Holder | K.
K. Universitiits-Buchhiindler. | Rothen-
thurmstrasse 15.

4 vols. (vol.1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4
divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4
part 1 all published), each part and division
with an outside title and two inside titles, 8°.

Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American
languages, was originally issued in two divi-
sions, each with the following special title:

Die Sprachen | der | schlichthaarigen Rassen
| von | Dr. Friedrich Miller | Professor [&c.
eight lines.] | I. Abtheilung. | Die Sprachen der
australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der
amerikanischen Rasse. |

Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Hélder| K. K.
Hof- und Universitiits-Buchhindler | Rothen-
thurmstrasse 15.

Die Sprachen der amerikanischen Rassen;
Allgemeiner Charakter dieser Sprachen (in-
eluding some Athapascan examples), vol. 2,
first part, second division (1882), pp. 181-183.—

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Miiller (F.) — Continued.

Die Sprachen der Athapasken- (Tinne-) und
Kinai-Stiimme, pp. 184-192, treats of sounds,
roots, nouns, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and
numerals, making use of examples from the
Tschippewyan, Peau de liévre, Loucheux,
Tahkali, Tlatskanai, Umkwa, Apatshe, Navajo,
Hupa, and Kinai.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson.

Murray (Alexander H.) Vocabulary of
the Kutchin of the Yukon or Kutehi-
Kutchi, drawn up by Mr. M’Murray
[sic]; to which the Chepewyan syno-
nyms were added by Mr. M’Pherson.

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi-
tion, vol. 2, pp. 382-385, London, 1851, 8°.

A list of about 100 words and the numerals
1-800.

Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work; see Richardson (J.)

Collection of words having a similar
sound and signification in the Kutehin
and Dog-rib languages.

In Richardson (J.), Aretic searching expe-
dition, vol. 1, pp. 399-400, London, 1851, 8°.

A vocabulary of 22 words.

Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work; see Richardson (J.)

N.

Nabiltse:

| Navajo — Continued.

General discussion See Gibbs (G.) Numerals See Tolmie (W. F.) and
Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) Dawson (G. M.)
Vocabulary Dorsey (J. O.) | Prayer Matthews (W.)
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) Proper names Catlin (G.)
Vocabulary Hazen (W. B.) Proper names Matthews (W.)
Nagailer: | Proper names Smithsonian.
Vocabulary See Adelung (J.C.) and | Relationships Packard (R. L.)
Vater (J.S.) Songs Matthews (W.)
Vocabulary Mackenzie (A.) Text Matthews (W.)
Nahawny. See Nehawni. Vocabulary Arny (W. F. M.)
National Museum: These words following a | eee Elan Bancroft (H. H.)
title or within parentheses after a note indicate | Yiocabulary Beadle (J. H:)
that a copy of the work referred to has been Yenspaley Baschaay (J.C. E.)
seen by the compiler in the library of that insti- Vooabulary Cushing @ -H.)
ination) Wiashsaeton! (D.C: | Vocabulary Davis (W. W. H.)
i. Vocabulary Domenech (E. H. 1D.)
Natsun kaothet ... Saint Mark aH Vocabulary Eaton (J. H.)
Tinné. See Kirkby (W. W.) Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 8.)
Navajo: Vocabulary Loew (O.)
Dictionary See Matthews (W.) Vocabulary Matthews (W.)
General discussion Adelung (J. C.) and Vocabulary Nichols (A. 8.)
Vater (J.S.) | Vocabulary Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
General discussion 3ancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary Pino (P. B.)
General discussion Busehmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Powell (J. W.)
Gentes Matthews (W.) Vocabulary Schooleraft (H. R.)
Grammar Matthews (W.) Vocabulary Shaw (J. M.)
Grammatic comments Featherman (A.) | Vocabulary Simpson (J. H.)
Grammatie comments Miiller (F.) Vocabulary Thompson (A. H.)
Grammatic comments Wilson (E. F.) Vocabulary Turner (W. W.)
Numerals Seadle (J. TH.) | Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)
Numerals Gatschet (A.5S.) | Vocabulary Whipple (W. D.)
Numerals Haines (E. M ) | Vocabulary Willard (C. N.)

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES,

Navajo— Continued.

Vocabulary See Wilson (E. F.)
Words Barreiro (A.)
Words Daa (L. K.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Fatschet (A.S.)
Words Latham (R. G.)
Words Matthews (W.)
Words Tolmie (W. F.) and
Dawson (G. M.)
Words Wilson (D.)
Nehawni:
Vocabulary See Kennicott (R.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Vocabulary Ross (R. B.)
New Improved & Easy alphabet. See

Morice (A. G.)
New Methodical
bary. See Morice (A. G.)

Nichols (A. Sidney).
Navajo language.
Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the

Dene sylla-

Vocabulary of the

library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected

in New Mexico, 1867-1868.

Reeorded on one of the blank forms (no. 170)
of the Smithsonian Institution, issued to col-
leetors, and containing 211 words. Of these,
equivalents are given in about 180 cases.

Northern Indians. See Athapascan.

WNulato Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Numerals:
Ahtinné See Allen (H. T.)
Ahtinné Dall (W. H.)
Ahtinné Ellis (R.)
Apache Allen (H. T.)
Apache Baneroft (H. H.)
Apache Cremony (J. C.)
Apache Dugan (T.B.)
Apache Gatschet (A. 5.)
Apache Haines (E. M.)
Apache Haldeman (5S. 8.)
Apache Miiller (F.)
Apache Pimentel (F.)
Apache Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)
Chippewyan Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Chippewyan Classical.
Chippewyan Ellis (R.)
Chippewyan Haines (E. M.)
Chippewyan James (E.)

75

Numerals — Continued.

Chippewyan See Kirkby (W. W.)

Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan

Dog Rib

Miiller (F.)

Pott (A. F.)

Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Hupa Bancroft (H. H.)

Hupa Gatschet (A. 5S.)

Hupa Miiller (F.)

Hupa Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-

Kaiyuhkhotana
Kenai

son (G. M.)
Dall (W. H.)
Ellis (R.)

Kenai Erman (G. A.)

Kenai Miiller (F.)

Kutchin Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Kutehin Dall (W. H.)

Loucheux Miiller (F.)

Navajo Beadle (J. H.)

Navajo Gatschet (A. 5.)

Navajo Haines (E. M.)

Navajo Miiller (F.)

Navajo Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw

Peau de Liévre
Slave

son (G. M.)
Miiller (F.)
Ellis (R.)

Sussee Sullivan (J. W.)

Taeculli Ellis (R.)

Taculli Harmon (D. W.)

Taculli Miiller (F.)

Taculli Pott (A. F.)

Taculli Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Tahlewah 3ancroft (H. H.)

Tahlewah Ellis (R.)

Tahlewah Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Tinné Campbell (J.)

Tlatskenai Ellis (R.)

Tlatskenai Miiller (F.)

Ugalenzen Dall (W.H.)

Umpkwa Duflot de Mofras (E.)

Umpkwa Miller (F.)

Umpkwa Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G, M.)

Unakhotana Dall (W. H.)

Wailakki Bancroft (H. H.)

Wailakki Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-

son (G. M.)

Nuwheh kukwadhud Jesus Christ .
Tukudh. See McDonald (R.)

0.

°
O'Brian (—). A Vocabulary of Fort
Simpson Dog-Rib, by Mr. O’Brian, of
the Hudson’s Bay Company.
In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi-
tion, vol. 2, p. 398, London, 1851, 8°.
Contains about 75 words.
Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work; see Richardson (J.)
Vocabulary of the language of a

tribe dwelling near the sources of the |

O’Brian (—) — Continued.

River of the Mountains, and known to
the voyagers by the name of ‘ Mauvais
Monde,” and of the Dog-rib dialect,
drawn up by Mr. O’Brian, of the Hud-
son’s Bay Company’s service.

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe-
dition, vol. 2, pp. 899-400, London, 1851, 8°.

Contains about 50 words in each dialect,

76

O’Brian (—) — Continued.
Reprinted in the later editions of the same
work; see Richardson (J.)

Ochikthud ettunetle [Tukudh]. | See
McDonald (R.)

Orozco y Berra (Manuel). Geografia de
las lenguas | y | carta etnogréfica | de
México | precedidas de un ensayo de
clasificacion de las mismas lenguas | y
de apuntes para las inmigraciones de
las tribus | por el lic. | Manuel Orozeo
y Berra | [Five lines quotation] | [De-
sign. ] |

México | imprenta de J. M. Andrade
y F. Escalante | [C]Jalle de Tiburcio
num. 19 | 1864

Hait-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1
1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp.
vii-xiv, half-title (primera parte) verso blank 1
1. text pp. 3-387, index pp. 389-392, map, folio.

Chapter viii, Familia apache 6 yavipai, pp.
40-41, refers to the Yuman.—Section viii of
chapter xii, Familia apache, p.59, refers both
to the Athapascan and Yuman.—Chapter xxv,
Apaches. pp. 368-387, is a general discussion on
the geographic distribution of these peoples
and includes the Tontos, Chiricaguis, Gilenos,
Mimbrenos, Faraones, Mescaleros, Llaneros,
Lipanes, Navajés, Chemegue [Shoshonean],

Yuta [Shoshonean], Muca Oraive [Shosho- |

nean]}, and the Toboso (‘‘lengua perdida”’).

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum,
Boston Public, Brinton, British Museum, Con-
gress, Eames, Watkinson.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Our Forest Children. | Vol. 1, No. 1.
Shingwauk Home. February, 1887
[-Vol. IV. No.6. September, 1890].

Edited by Rey. E. F. Wilson and published
monthly at the Shingwauk Home, Sault Ste.
Marie, Ontario; sm. 4°. No.10 of vol. 1 is a
“Christmas number.” In 1888 a ‘Summer
number” appeared, no. 4 of vol. 2; also a
“Christmas munber,” ‘‘no. 10” of vol. 2,
although the next issue is numbered 10 also.
These special issues are larger than the regular
ones, and illustrated. The regular issues con-
sisted of 2 ll.or 4 pp. each until no. 3 of vol. 3
(for June, 1889), when the periodical was made a
16-page illustrated monthly. The first seven
numbers of vol. 1 were in size about 6 by 9
inches and were unpaged; with no.8 the size
was increased to about 8 by 10 inches, and the
pages numbered, each issue being paged inde-
pendently (1-4) until the beginning of vol. 2, from
which a single pagination continues (excepting
nos. 4 and 10) to no.1of vol. 3 (pp. 1-48), the
next no. being paged 5-8. No.3 of vol. 3 (June,
1889) begins a new series and a new and con-
tinuous pagination (pp. 1-256), each issue since
then having 16 pp. 4°, and being provided with
a cover. The last issue—that for September,
1890—says: “As has already been announced,
this is the last issue of ‘Our Forest Children.'
Next month, October, will appear the first num-
ber of the ‘Canadian Indian.’ [q.v.]

Reeve (W.D.), The Chipewyan Indians, vol,
2, pp. 6-7.

Wilson (E.F.), The Sarsee Indians, vol. 3,
pp. 97-102.

— The Navajo Indians, vol. 3, pp. 113-117.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

ae

Palliser (Capt. John). Exploration.—
British North America. | The | journals,

detailed reports, and observations | rel-

ative to | the exploration, | by captain
Palliser, | of | that portion of British
North America, | which, | in latitude,
lies between the British boundary line
and the | height of land or watershed of
the northern | or frozen ocean respec-
tively, | and | in longitude, between
the western shore of lake Superior and
| the Pacifie ocean, | During the Years
1857, 1858, 1859, and 1860. | Presented to
both Houses of Parliament by Command
of Her Majesty, | 19th May 1863. |
[English arms. ] |

London: | printed by George Edward
Eyre and William Spottiswoode, | print-
ers to the queen’s most excellent maj-
esty. | For her majesty’s stationery of-
fice. | 1863. | (Price 3s. 6d. )

| Palliser (J.) — Continued.

Printed cover as above, title as above
(omitting the price) verso blank 1 1. text pp.
3-325, colophon 1 p. folio.

Sullivan (J. W.), Vocabularies of the North-
west Indians, pp. 207-216.

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Geological
Survey.

Priced by Dufossé, Paris, 1887, no, 24911, 12 fr.

Packard (Robert Lawrence). Terms of re-
lationship used by the Navajo Indians.
Manuscript, 4 leaves. folio, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the
Navajo Reservation, New Mexico, in 1881. This
manuscript has been corrected and supple-
mented by Dr. Washington Matthews, Fort
Wingate, N. Mex.

Palmer (Dr. Edward). Vocabulary of
the Pinella and Ariva Apache language.
Manuscript; 5 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. It bears
the Smithsonian Institution receipt stamp of
Dec. 24, 1867.

a ee

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Ge

Palmer (E.) — Continued.

Contains the 180 words adopted by the Smith-
sonian Institution as a standard vocabulary.
Arranged four columns to the page, two of
English and two of Apache.

There is a copy of this vocabulary in the
same library, made by its compiler; 6 unnum-
bered leaves, folio, written on one side only.

Peau de Liévre:

Dictionary See Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Grammatic comments Miller (F.)
Grammatic treatise Petitot (EK. F.S. J.)

Legends Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Relationships Morgan (L. H.)

Text Promissiones.
Vocabulary Kennicott (R.)
Vocabulary Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Words Charencey (C. F. H.G.)
Words Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

[Perrault (Charles Ovide).] L. J.C. &

L

M. J. | Priéres, | Cantiques | et Caite-
chisme | en | langue Montagnaise ou
Chipeweyan. | [One line syllabic char-
acters.] | [Oblate seal.] |

Montreal: | Imprimerie de Louis Per-
rault. | 1857. @*)

Title verso approbation of | Alexandre, Evé-
que de St. Boniface, O. M.T. 1 1. text pp. 3-144,
18°.

Prayers, etc., pp. 3-46.—Syllabary, p. 47.—
Jantiques (22), pp.49-92.—Catechism. pp.93-144.

Title from Dr. J.H. Trumbull from copy in
his possession. Referring to the note under the
next succeeding title, descriptive of the addi-
tion of pp. 145-180, he says: ‘‘ My copy is in
the original binding, fresh and unused, and is
evidently complete as issued.”
JL. J.C. & M. J. | Prieres, | can-
tiqueset catechisme | en langue | Mon-
tagnaise ou Chipeweyan. | [One line
syllabic characters.] | [Oblate seal.] |

Montréal: | imprimerie de Louis Per- |

rault et compagnie. | 1865.

Title verso approbation of +f Alexandre
Evéque de St. Boniface, O. M.T.1 1. ‘‘ quelques
notes” signed Chs. Ovide Perrault pp. i-xi,
text in syllabic characters with French head-
ings in italics pp. 3-174, table des cantiques
(alternate lines Montagnais in syllabie charac-
ters and French in italics) pp. 175-179, 18°. Sig-
natures alternately in twelves and sixes. See
the fac-simile of the syllabary, p. 78.

In the preliminary *‘notes’’ the author in-
cludes a letter, ‘‘A Messieurs les Redacteurs
du Pays,” which contains the alphabet [sylla-
bary], p. iv, and an ‘‘exemple” of the charac-
ters with transliteration and translation into
French, p.v. Also a ‘‘ Lettre de Monseigneur
Farand, Evéque d’Anemour, & Chs. O. Per-
rault, Eer., Avocat de Montréal,’’ pp. vii-x,
giving examples and explanations of the syl-
labic characters ‘‘que nous employons pour les
langues sauvages.”

Perrault (C. O.) —Continued.

Prayers, pp. 1-17.—Way of the cross, pp. 18-
40.—Alphabet [syllabary], p.41.—Hymns (nos.
1-38), pp. 43-117.—Catéchisme, pp. 119-174.

Copies seen: Fames, O'Callaghan, Pilling,
Shea.

The copies of this work belonging to Mr.
Wilberforce Eames and myself differ from the
other two. They lack the six preliminary
leaves paged i-xi; and following page 179 are
pages 145-180 (signatures 9 in twelve and 10 in
six). Page 145 is headed ‘ Explications de
quelques Images propres a linstruction des
Montagnais,’’ embracing hymns nos. 1-13 in
syllabie characters, with headings in French, in
italics. These copies are in the original )bind-
ing and seem to be as issued from the press.
It is probable that the copies of this kind are
of the earlier issue. The first sheet is com-
plete ; the title-leaf is connected with leaf paged
23-24; the second leaf with leaf paged 21-22, &c.
The Explications appear to have been printed as
asupplement to the edition of 1857. The copies
left over were bound up with the edition of
1865. Subsequently, Ll presume, the six leaves
containing the quelques notes were inserted and
the book issued without the Lxplications.

A similar copy was priced by Dufossé in De-
cember, 1889 (no. 36739), 10 fr.; and another in
June, 1890 (no. 40911), at the same figure.

Petitot (Pére Emile Fortuné Stanislas
Joseph). Etude sur la nation monta-
gnaise par le R. P. Petitot de la Con-
erégation des Oblats de Marie Imma-
culée.

In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 1, pp. 129-
216; vol. 2, pp. 1-64, Lyon, 1868-1869, folio.
(Pilling.)

List of names of divisions of the Athapascan
family, with English signification, vol. 1, p.
136.—Langue montagnaise (general discussion),
pp. 159-160.—List of words showing affinities
in various Athapascan languages, pp. 215-216.—
Names of the months in Loucheux, Peau de
Liévre, and Montagnais, vol. 2, p. 48.—Many
Athapascan words, phrases, and sentences

passim.
Issued separately : Paris, A. Hennuyer et fils,
Paris, 1868, 63 pp. 12°. (*)

—— Déné Dindjies.

In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte-
rendu, premiére session, vol. 2, pp. 13-37, Nancy
et Paris, 1875, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.)

Comparisonof Déné-Dindjie terms with those
of various other languages, pp. 13-15.—Com-
parative table Navajo, Déné (different dialects),
and Dindjie, pp. 20-21.

Outils en pierre et en os du Mac-
Kenzie (cercle polaire arctique).

In Matériaux pour lhistoire primitive et
naturelle de Vhomme, pp. 398-405, Toulouse,
1875, 8°. (Pilling.)

Contains a number of Chippewyan and Eski-
mauan names of implements passim.

78 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

L tha |“) the | thi
Ly dha| 7] dhe oY dhi
C tta | Uf tte |} tti

C' ttha} (J tthe | (4) tthi
(CT tea | LJ tee | (1) ta

—> ttho
<) too

FAC-SIMILE OF THE SYLLABARY FROM PERRAULT'S MONTAGNAIS
PRAYER-BOOK OF 1865,

ATHAPASCAN

Petitot (E. F. S. J.) — Continued.

— Dictionnaire | de la | langue Dene-
Dindjié | dialectes | Montagnais ou
Chippéwayan, Peaux de Lievre et
Loucheux | renfermant en outre | un
grand nombre de termes propres a sept
autres dialectes de la méme langue |
précédé | Vune monographie des Denc-
Dindjié | Vune grammaire et de ta-
bleaux synoptiques des conjugaisons |
par | le R. P. E. Petitot | Missionnaire-
Oblat de Marie Immaculée, Officier
Académie, Membre correspondant de
VAcadémie de Nancy, | de la Société
(Anthropologie et Membre honoraire
de la Société de Philologie de Paris. |
[Two lines quotation.] | [Design.] |

aris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur |
libraire des sociétés Asiatiques
Paris, de Caleutta, de New-Haven
(Btats-Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) | de
l’Keole des langues Orientales vivantes,
de la Société philologique, ete. | 28,
rue Bonaparte, 28 | Maisonneuve, quai
Voltaire, 15 | San Francisco, A.-L. Ban-
croft and C°. | 1876

Cover title as above, omitting the design,
and with the addition of five lines at the be-
ginning (Bibliothéque | de | linguistique et
(ethnographie américaines | Publi¢epar Alph.
L. Pinart | Volume II), half-title verso notes 1
1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication
verso blank 11. preface pp.vii-ix, avant-propos
pp. xi-xviii, monographie des Déné-Dindjié
pp. xix-xxvi, essai sur lorigine des Deéneé-
Dindjié pp. xxvii-xlv, abreviations p. [xlvi],
précis de grammaire comparée des trois princi-
paux dialectes Déné-Dindjié pp. xlvii-lxxxv,
errata pp. lxxxvii-lxxxviii, text pp. 1-367, colo-
phon p. [368], 5 folded tables, 4°.

Comparative grammar of the Montagnais,
Peaux-de-liévre, and Loucheux, pp. Xxlvii-
Ixxxv.—Dictionary of the Déné-Dindjié in four
columns, French, Montagnais, Peaux-de-liévre,
and Loucheux, arranged alphabetically by
French words, pp. 1-367.—Tableau général des
verbes Montagnais, folded table no. 1.—Suite
des conjugaisons des verbes Montagnais, folded
table no. 2.—Tableau général des verbes Peaux
de Liévre, folded table no. [3].— Tableau gé-
néral des verbes Loucheux, folded table no.
1 [4]._Verbes Loucheux 4 désinences irrégu-
liéres, folded table no. 2 [5].

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft,
Pilling, Wellesley.

Fifty copies were issued ‘‘ sur papier de Hol-
lande extra,’ at 175 fr.; 150 copies ‘‘ sur papier
fort,” at 125 fr. ; and 150 copies ‘‘sur papier ordi-
naire,” for the use of the Mackenzie mission.

Monographie | des | Dené-Dindjié |

par | le r. p. E. Petitot | Missionnaire-

Oblat de Marie-Immaculée, Officier

de

Congress,

LANGUAGES. 79

Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued.
@Académie, | Membre correspondant
de l’Académie de Naney, | de la Société
dW Anthropologie | et Membre honoraire
de la Société de Philologie et d’Eth-
nographie de Paris. |

Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | li-
braire de lasociété Asiatique de Paris, |
de Vécole des langues orientales vi-
rantes et des sociétés Asiatiques de
Calcutta, | de New-Haven (Etats-
Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) | 28, rue
Bonaparte, 28 | 1876

Cover title as above, half-title verso printer
11. title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 1-109,
list of publications 11. 8°.

General discussion on language, pp. 1-6.—
General discussion of the Athapascan lan-
guages (pp. 7-22) includes a short comparative
vocabulary, French, Latin, Montagnais, Peaux
de Liévre, and Loucheux. p. 16.—A comparative
vocabulary of the Nabajo, Déné (de divers dia-
lectes) and WDindjié, p. 22. — Comparative
vocabulary of the Wakish (Tétes-Plates) and
Yukultas (Tétes-Longues), p. 104.—Compara-
tive vocabulary of the languages of the Haidas
(Kollouches, Iles Charlottes), Tonguas (IKol-
louches, Alaska), Yukultas (Tétes-Longues,
Colombie britannique), Wakish (Tétes-Plates,
Oregon), Dnainé (Atnans, Alaska), Dindjié
(Mackenzie), and Déné (Territoire du No.-O.),
p. 105.—Also seattered phrases and terms with
significations.

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Pilling.
Six légendes américaines identifiées a
Vhistoire de Moise et du peuple hébreu.
In Les Missions Catholiques, vol.10, pp.476-624,
vol. 11, pp. 1-160, Lyon, 1878-'79, folio. (Pilling.)
A legend from each of the following peoples:
Chippewyan, Peaux de Lievre, Loucheux, Sixi-
caques ou Pieds-noirs, Chaktas, Tzendales, in
all of which native words occur passim.
De Vorigine asiatique des Indiens
de Amérique arctique. Par le R. P.
Emile Petitot, O. M. I. Missionnaire au
Mackenzie, officier d’Académie, ete.
In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 12, pp. 429-
611, Lyon, 1879, folio. (Pilling, Wellesley.)
Many Athapascan terms passim.

—— De Vorigine asiatique des Indiens de
VAmérique arctique.
Tn Société Philologique, Actes, vol. 12, pp. 39-
76, Alengon, 1883, 8°.
Une version de la legende nationale de la
femme au metal chez les Deéneés (par-
allel columns French and Dene), pp. 41-46.
On the Athabasca District of the
Canadian North-west Territory. By
the Rey. Emile Petitot.
. In Royal Geog. Soc. Proc. vol. 5, pp. 633-655,
London, 1883, 8°. (Pilling.)

Contains a number of geographic, tribal, and
personal names.

80

Petitot (KE. F.8. J.) — Continued.

— De la formation du langage; mots
formés par le redoublement de racines
hétérogenes, quoique de signification
synonyme, c’est-a-dire par réitération
copulative.

In Association frangaise pour lavancement
des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen,
1883), pp. 697-701, Paris, 1884, 8°.
Survey, Pilling.)

Contains examples in a number of North
American languages, among them the Déne,
Atnan, and Dindjié.

(Geological

La femme au serpent.
Déné Chippewayans.

In Mélusine, Revue de Mythologie, littéra-
ture populaire, traditions et usages, vol. 2, no.
1, columns 19-21, Paris. April 5, 1884, 4°.
(Gatschet.)

The legend is first given in French, with the
“Texte original du conte chippewayan”’ fol-
lowing.

— On the Athapasca district of the
Canadian North-west Territory. By the
Rey. Emile Petitot.

In Montreal Nat. Hist. Soc. Record of Nat.
Hist. and Geology, pp. 27-53, Montreal, 1884, 4°.

Contains numerous names of rivers, lakes,
ete., in Chippewyan.

Reprinted with the same title in: Montreal
Nat. Hist. Soc. Canadian Record of Science, vol:
1, pp. 27-52, Montreal, 1884, 8°.

This latter magazine took the place of the
Record of Natural History and Geology above
mentioned, only one number of that serial hay-
ing been issued.

Légende des

Paralléle des coutumes et des croy-
ances de la famille Caraibo-Esquimaude
avec celles des peuples Altaiques et
Puniques.

In Association francaise pour l’avancement
des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen,
1883), pp. 686-697, Paris, 1884, 8°. (Geological
Survey, Pilling.)

A number of Déné words with French mean-
ings passim.

Mélanges américains. Vocabulaire
piéganiw. Deuxiéme dialecte des Nin-
nax ou Pieds-Noirs. Recueilli par
Emile F. 8. Petitot.

In Société Philologique, Actes, vol. 14, pp.
170-198, Alengon, 1885, 8°.
Petit vocabulaire Sarcis, pp. 195-198.
Traditions indiennes | du | Canada
nord-ouest | par | Emile Petitot |ancien
missionnaire | [Design] |

Paris | Maisonneuve fréeres et Ch.
Leclere | 25, quai Voltaire, 2[5] | 1886
| Tous droits réservés

Colophon: Achevé dimprimer le 19 Aofit
1886 | par G. Jacob imprimeur a Orléans | pour

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

THE

Petitot (EK. F.S. J.) — Continued.
Maisonneuve fréres| et Charles Leclere | li-
braires éditeurs | & Paris

Half-title of the series (Les | littératures po-
pulaires | tome xxiii) verso blank 1 1.title of the
series verso blank 1 1. half-title verso blank 1 1.
title as above verso blank 11, dedication verso
blank 1 1. introduction pp. i-xvii, remarque p.
[xviii], text pp. 1-507, index et concordance pp.
909-514, table des matiéres pp. 515-521, ouvrages
du méme auteur 1 1. colophon verso blank 1 1.
list of the series verso blank 1 1. 16°. Forms
vol. 23 of ‘‘Les littératures populaires de toutes
les nations.”

Deuxiéme partie, Légendes et traditions
des Dindjié ou Loucheux (pp. 13-102), besides
many terms passim, contains: Texte et traduc-
tion littérale de la premiére légende [inter
linear], pp. 95-100.—Héros et divinités des
Dindjié, pp. 101-102.

Troisiéme partie, Légendes et traditions
des Dénéd Peaux-de-Liévre (pp. 103-306), besides
many terms passim, includes: Texte et traduc-
tion littérale [interlinear of a legend], pp. 302-
303.—Liste des héros, des divinités et des
monstres Peaux-de-Liévre, pp. 304-306.

Quatriéme partie, Légendes et traditions
des Duné, Flanes-de-Chiens et Esclaves (pp. 307-
344), besides native terms passim, contains:
Texte et traduction littérale de la premiére
légende, pp. 341-343.—Héros et divinités des
Flanes-de-chiens, p. 344.

Cinquieme partie, Légendes des Déné
Tchippewayan (pp. 345-442), besides many
native words passim, includes: Texte et tra-
duction littérale de la premiére légende, pp.
437-440.—Heéros et divinités des Déné Techippe-
wayan, pp. 441-442.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Gatschet, Pilling, Powell.

The original texts of these traditions, with
literal translations, were subsequently pub-
lished as follows:

—— Traditions indiennes | du | Canada
nord-ouest | Textes originaux & tra-
duction littérale | par| Emile Petitot |
Ancien Missionnaire, Officier d@ Acadé-
mie, Membre de la | Société de Philolo-
gie, etc. | [Two lines quotation] |

Alengon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp.
et Lith. | Place d’Armes, 5. | 1888

In Société Philologique, Actes, vols. 16 & 17
(half-title 1 1. title as above 1 1.) pp. 169-614,
Alencon, 1888, 8°. (Eames, Wellesley.)

The whole work is in double columns,
French and the native language.

Deuxiéme partie, Traditions (1-10) des
Dindjié ou Loucheux (Bas-Mackenzie, Ander-
son et Montagnes-Rocheuses), pp. 175-253.

Troisiéme partie, Traditions (1-43) des Déné
Peaux-de-Liévre, pp. 255-414.—Observances et
superstitions (1-17), pp. 415-447.—Contes et
notions physiques (1-16), pp. 448-463.

Quatriéme partie, Traditions (1-9) des Duné
des Flanes-de-chiens, pp. 465-503.

—* -

ATHAPASCAN

Petitot (KE. F.S. J.) — Continued.
Cinquiéme partie, Traditions (1-17) des Dene
Tchippewayans, pp. 505-588. -
Issued separately, also, as follows :
Traditions indiennes | du | Canada
nord-ouest | Textes originaux & tra-
duction littérale | par | Emile Petitot,
| Ancien Missionnaire, Officier d’Aca-
démie, Membre dela | Société de Philo-
logie, etc. | [Two lines quotation] |
Alen¢on | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp.
et Lith | Place d’Armes, 5. | 1887
Cover title: Emile Petitot |!

| Textes originaux & traduction littérale |
[Two lines quotation] |
Alengon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp. et Lith.
| Place d’ Armes, 5, | 1888

Cover title as above, half-title verso print- |

exs 1 1. title as above verso ‘‘ Extrait du bulle-

tin" etc. 11. introduction pp. i-vi, | blank]. text |
pp. 1-439, table des chapitres pp. 441-446, colo-

phon verso blank 1 1. 8°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above,
pp. 7--85, 87-246, 247-279, 280-295, 297-335, 337-420.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Gatschet, Pilling.

The original manuscript of this work has
title as follows:
— 1862-1866 | Textes originaux et |
traductions Litterales | des | Traditions
et Legendes | des | habitans du nord-
ouest | du Canada | recueillies et tra-
duites | par | Emile Fortune Stanislas
Joseph | Petitot | Ancien [&e.
lines]

Manuscript, pp. 1-321, folio, in the library of

Traditions |
indiennes | du | Canada nord-onest | (1862-1882) |

two |

LANGUAGES.

81

| Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued.

the Comte de Charencey, Paris, France, under

whose auspices the work was published.

En route | pour | la mer glaciale |
par | Emile Petitot | Ancien mission-
naire, Officier d’Académie, | Lauréat
des Sociétés de géographie de Paris et
de Londres, | Membre de _ plusieurs
Sociétés savantes. | Ouvrage accom-
pagné de gravures apres les dessins
de auteur. | [Two lines quotation. ] |

Paris | Letouzey et Ané, éditeurs | 17,
rue du Vieux-Colombier | [1888] | Tous
droits réservés.

Cover title as above, half-title verso list

of works by the same author 1 1. portrait 1 1. |

title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso
errata 1 1. introduction pp. 1-3, text pp. 5-394,
list of engravings 1 p. 12°.

A few Tchippewayan, Iroquois, and other
terms and expressions passim.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling.

— La femme aux métaux, légende na-
tionale des Danites.
ATH 6

Meanx,
impr.

24 pp. 12°.
Autour du grand lac des Eselaves.

1888, Marguerith-Dupré,

eC)

Title from the same author’s

—— Quinze ans | sous le | cercle polaire

| Mackenzie, Anderson, Youkon | par
| Emile Petitot | Ancien Missionnaire,
Officier d’Académie, | Lauréat des
Sociétés de Géographie de Londres et de
Paris, | Membre de plusieurs Sociétés
savantes. | Ouvrage accompagné de 18
gravures de H. Blanchard | et dune
earte d’Erhard | d’aprés les dessins de

Yauteur | [Two lines quotation] |
[Design ]
Paris | E. Dentu, éditeur | libraire

de la Société des gens de lettres | 3,
Place de Valois, Palais-royal | 1889 |
(Tous droits réservés. )

Cover title differing somewhat from above,

half-title verso list of works by the same
author 1 1. continuation of list verso frontis-
piece 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedica-
tion verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. xi-xvi,
contents pp. xvil-xxi, list of illustrations verso
blank 11. text pp. 1-822, errata verso blank 11.
map, 12°.

Names of the sixteen seasons, or divisions of
the year, in the Peau-de-Liévre language. p.
87.—Names of the fifteen lunar months in the
Peau-de-Liévre language, p. 88.—Specimen of
Dindjié songs, with translation, p. 187.—
Words, sentences, and names of geographic
features in Esquimaux, Dindjié, and Peau-de-
Liévre or Deéné, passim, especially on pp. 16,
19, 34, 169, 180, 188, 189, 213.

Copies seen: Bureauof Ethnology, Gatschet,

Pilling.
Accord | des | mythologies | dans la
| cosmogonie des Danites arctiques |
par | Emile Petitot, Prétre | ex-mission-
naire et explorateur arctique | [Five
lines quotation] | [Device] |

Paris | Emile Bouillon, éditeur | 67,
rue Richelieu, 67 | 1890

Printed cover nearly like above, half-title
verso works by the same author 1 1. title as
above verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1
1. introduetion pp. i-xili, text pp. 1-452, notes
pp. 453-462, authors cited pp. 463-468, index pp.
469-488, table of contents pp. 489-490, errata
and omissa pp. 491-493, 12°.

Many Déné-Dindjié words passim.—Cosmo-
gonic table of the Mexicans, p. 460.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Gatschet, Pilling.

—— Origine Asiatique | des Esquimaux

| Nouvelle Etude ethnographique |
Par Emile Petitot | Ex-Missionnaire et

82

Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued.
Explorateur arctique, Curé de Mareuil-
les-Meaux (S.-et-M.) | [Two lines quo-
tation] | [Vignette] |

Rouen | imprimerie de Espérance
Cagniard | Rues Jeanne-Darc, 88, et
des Basnage, 5 | 1890.

Cover title as above, title as above (verso
“Extrait du Bulletin de la Société normande
de Géographie”’) 11. text pp. 3-33, sm. 4°.

On pp. 25-33 are given tables of words show-
ing similarities between the words of various
languages of the Old and New World. Among
the North American languages a number of
examples are given from the Dindjié, Peau-
de-Liévre, Ingalik, Slave, Tchippewyan, and
Apache.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling.

—— Autour du grand lac | des Esclaves

| par | Emile Petitot | ancien mission-
naire et explorateur arctique | Ouvrage
accompagné de gravures et d’une carte
par l’auteur | [Two lines quotation] |
[Design] |

Paris | Nouvelle librairie parisienne
| Albert Savine, éditeur | 12, rue des
Pyramides, 12 | 1891 | Tous droits ré-
servés.

Cover title: Emile Petitot | Autour | du
grand lac | des | Esclaves | Ouvrage accom-
pagné de gravures et dune carte par l’auteur
| [Iwo lines quotation] | [Design] |

Paris | Nouvelle librairie parisienne | Albert
Savine, éditeur | 12, rue des Pyramides, 12 |
Tous droits réservés.

Cover title, ouvrages d’Emile Petitot pp. i-iv,
errata pp. V-vi, half-title verso portrait of the
author 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedica-
tion verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. xi-xiii,
text pp. 1-358, notes pp. 359-364, table des
matiéres pp. 365-369, tables des gravures verso
blank 11. map, 12°.

Les Tchippewayans (pp. 1-180), besides many
native terms passim, contains, on pp. 97-11], a
general account of the Athapascan and their
divisions.—Les Flanes-de-chiens, pp. 183-314,
contains many native terms passim. — Les
Esclaves, pp. 315-358, includes many native
terms passim.—Nomenclature des peuplades
Danites, pp. 360-363.

Copies seen: Pilling.

— Comparative vocabulary of several

Athapascan languages.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded
at Fort Good Hope, McKenzie River, in the
sumuner of 1865.

Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no.
170) of 211 words. The first page is headed
Famille Montagnaise ou Déné (Chippewaya-
nanok des Crees); 3° Nation: Esclaves—Tribu
des Peaux de Liévre, The blank pages are

BIBLIOGRAPHY

OF THE

Petitot (KE. F.S. J.) — Continued.

ruled in four columns, headed respectively
“demi-tribu des Kat’a-gottiné (fleave McKen-
zie)’; ‘‘demi-tribu des Yeta-gottiné (mon-
tagnes-rocheuses)”; ‘‘demi-tribu des Katcho-
gottiné (limite des bois au N. E. de Good-
Hope)’’; ‘‘demi-tribu des Nnéa-gottiné (limite
des bois au S. E. de Anderson)”’.

The schedule in the first column is completely
filled, there are scarcely any words in the sec-
ond, the third is one-fourth filled, and in the
fourth about three-fourths of the words are
given.

Notes on the Montagnais or Chippe-
wayans. By Father Petitot.

Manuscript, 3 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Received
at the Smithsonian Institution, Oct. 11, 1865.

This material, which is in French, opens on
the first page with an account of the Monta-
gnais, their habitat, and division into nations
and tribes. The second and third pages con-
tain a short vocabulary of words (pére, mére,
enfant, ete.) with pronominal prefixes.
Comparative vocabulary of several
Déné languages.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded
at Fort Norman-Franklins, Great Bear Lake,
Jan. 11, 1869.

Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no,
170) of 211 words, to whicha score of words have
been added by Father Petitot. The blank pages
of the form have been ruled in four columns,
headed respectively :

Déné (homo) Chippayananok (des Crees),
Chippewyans (des Anglais), Montagnais (des
Frangais); Déné (homo) Kkayttchane othné
(des Chippewyan), Hare Indians (des Anglais),
Peaux de Liévre (des Frane¢ais) ; Dindjié (homo)
Déhkewi (des Peaux de Liévre), Kutchin (de

Richardson), Loucheux (des Frangais); Innok
(sing.) Innoit (plur. homo) Wiyaskimew (des
Crees), Otzelna, Ennahke (des Dénés), Hoskys
(des Anglais), Esquimaux (des Frangais).
[Manuscripts in the Athapascan
languages. | Ce

In response to a request for a list, with de-
tailed description, of his unpublished manu-
scripts, Father Petitot wrote me from Mareuil-
les-Meaux, France, April 24, 1889:

My linguistic manuscripts still in my hands
are as follows:

A Déné (Peau-de Liévre)—French vocabulary,
not comprising verbs. This I had not time to
finish while at the mission.

A work on the Déné (Peau-de-Liévre) roots,
in alphabetic order.

A work on the formation of language by jux-
taposition of roots synonymous but heteroge-
neous. This subject I treated casually at the
Rouen meeting of the French Association for
the Advancement of Science, Aug. 23, 1883.

A book of prayers for the use of the Indians
among whom I worked, It comprises Catholic

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued.
prayers in Esquimau and Déné (Peau-de- Liévre)
by myself; Dindjié by R. P. Seguin; Deéené
(Tchippewyan), by Archbishop Taché; and

Dané castor by R. P. J. Clut, now bishop of

Erindel.

An Esquimau Tchiglit catechism.

I was obliged to leave at my last residence,
St. Raphael, Saskatchewan, 75 leagues north of
It. Pitt, several manuscripts by myself, among
them the following:

A complete course of instructions and ser-
mons in the Déné Peau-de-Liévre, and many
instructions in Déné Tchippewyan.

A copy, written by myself, of the abridgment
of the bible in Déné Tchippewyan, by Mer.
Faraud, vicar apostolic of Mackenzie.

— Chants indiens du Canada | Nord-
Ouest | recueillis, classés et notés par
_| Emile Petitot | prétre missionnaire
au Mackenzie | de 1862 4 1882. | Offert
4 la Smithsonian Institution | avec les
hommages respectueux | de auteur |
Emile Petitot ptre | curé de Mareuil-
les-Meaux | (S. & M.) | 1889.

Manuscript, 7 by 11 inches in size; title as

above verso table 1 1. songs with musical notes
pp. 1-16; in the library of the compiler of this
bibliography.
_ Creesongs, p. 1.—Déné Tchippewayan songs,
pp. 2-3.—Deéns Esclave songs, pp. 3-5.—Duné
Flanes-de-Chien songs, pp. 6-7.—Déné Peau-de-
Liéyre songs, pp. 7-10.— Dindjié or Loucheux
songs, pp. 11-15.—Esquimaux Tchiglit songs,
pp. 15-16.

Emile Fortuné Stanislas Joseph Petitot was
born, December 3, 1838, at Grancey-le-Chateau,

department of Cote-d’Or, Burgundy, France. |

His studies were pursued at Marseilles, first at
the Institution St. Louis, and later at the
higherseminary of Marseilles, which he entered
in 1857. He was made deacon at Grenoble, and
priest at Marseilles March 15, 1862. A few
days thereafter he went to England and sailed
for America. At Montreal he found Mon-
seigneur Taché, bishop of St. Boniface, with
whom he set out for the Northwest, where he
was continuously engaged in missionary work
among the Indians and Eskimos until 1874,
when he returned to France to supervise the
publication of some of his works on linguistics
and geography. In 1876 he returned to the
missions and spent another period of nearly six
years in the Northwest. In 1882 he once more
returned to his native country, where he has
since remained. In 1886 he was appointed to
the curacy of Mareuil, near Meaux, which he
still retains. The many years he spent in the
inhospitable Northwest were busy and eventful
ones, and afforded an opportunity for geo-
graphic, linguistic, and ethnologic observations
and studies such as few have enjoyed. He was
the first missionary to visit Great Bear Lake,
which he did for the first time in 1866, He went

83

Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued.

on foot from Good Hope to Providance twice,
and made many tours in winter of forty or fifty
days’ length on snowshoes. He was the first
missionary to the Eskimos of the Northwest,
having visited them in 1865, at the mouth of
the Anderson, again in 1868 at the mouth of
the Mackenzie, and in 1870 and again in 1877 at
Fort McPherson on Peel River. In 1870 his
travels extended into Alaska. In 1878 illness
caused him to return south. He went on foot
to Athabaska, whence he passed to the Saskat-
chewan ina bark. In 1879 he established the
mission of St. Raphael, at Angling Lake, for
the Chippewyans of that region; there he
remained until his final departure for France in
January, 1882.

For an account of his linguistic work among
the Eskimauan and Algonquian tribes, see the
bibliographies of those families.

Petroff (Ivan). See Staffel (V.) and
Petroff (I. )

Pilling: This word following a title or within pa-
rentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to is in the possession of the
compiler of this bibliography.

Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson-
ian institution—Bureau of ethnology |
J.W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of
a | bibliography | of | the languages |
of the | North American Indians | by |
James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib-
uted only to collaborators) |

Washington | Government printing
oftice | 1885

Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W.
Powell p. iii, preface pp.v—viii, introduction pp.
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of li-
braries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii-
xxxviii, listof fac-similes pp. xxxix—xl, text pp.
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090,
index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135,
plates, 4°.

Arranged alphabetically by name of author,
translator, or first word of title. One hundred
and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side
of the sheet only.

——Some queer American characters.

By James C. Pilling.

In the Analostan Magazine, vol. 1, pp. 58-67,
Washington, 1891, 4°.

Contains an account of the various hiero-
glyphs, alphabets, and syllabaries in use among
the Indians, with a number of fac-similes,
among them one (reduced) of the title-page of
Father Morice’s Dene primer.

Pimentel (Francisco), Cuadro descrip-
tivo y comparativo | de las | lenguas
indigenas de México | por | D. Fran-
cisco Pimentel | socio de numero | de

la Sociedad Mexicana de geografia y

Pinaleno Apache.

84

Pimentel (I*.) — Continued.
estadistica. | [Two lines quotation. ] |
Tomo primero[-segundo].|[ Design. ] |

México | imprenta de Andrade y
Escalante | calle de Tiburcio numero
19. | 1862[-1865].

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso
blank 1 1. introduction pp.v-lii, half-titles versos
blank 2 ll. text pp. 5-539, index verso blank 1 1.;
half-title verso works ‘‘del mismo autor” 1 1.
title verso blank 11. advertencia pp. v—vi, half-
title verso blank 1 |. text pp. 3-427, note verso
blank 11. index verso blank 1 1.8°?.

Lord’s prayer in the Lipan (los Apaches son
una nacion barbara que recorren las provincias
del Norte de Mexico), vol. 2, p. 251.

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzeum,
British Museum, Congress, Eames, Watkinson.

Cuadro descriptivo y comparativo |
de las | lenguas indigenas de México, |
o tratado de filologia mexicana, | por |
Francisco Pimentel | miembro de varias
| sociedades cientificas y literarias de
México, | Europa y Estados Unidos de
America. | (Segunda edicion unica com-
pleta.) | Tomo Primero[-Tercero]. |

México. | Tipografia de Isidoro

Epstein | Calle de Nuevo-Mexico N°. 6.
| 1874[-1875].

3 vols.: printed cover nearly as above, half-
title verso notices 1 1. title as above verso blank
1 1. prologo pp. ili-xvi, text pp. 1-422, erratas
verso blank 1 1. indice pp. 425-426, printed
notices on back cover; printed cover, half-title
verso ‘‘obras del mismo autor”’ 1 1. title (1875)
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-468, erratas verso
blank 1 1. indice pp. 471-472, notice on back
cover; printed cover, half-title verso ‘ obras
del mismo autor ’’ 1 1. title (1875) verso blank 1
1. text pp. 5-565, erratas pp. 567-568, indice pp.
569-570, copyright notice verso blank 1 1. notice
on back cover, 8°.

El Apache, vol. 3, pp. 483-524, contains a
general account of the Apache languages and
dialects, including a comparative vocabulary in
Spanish, Apache, and Othomi (pp. 486-488), a
vocabulary of the Apache Mexicano with
Spanish definitions (pp. 512-514), the Apache
numerals 1-2000 (pp. 515-516), a comparison of
forty words in eight Apache dialects, viz,
Apache norte-americano, Apache mexicano,
Mimbreno (Copper mine), Pinaleno, Navajo,
Xicarilka (Faraon), Lipan, and Mescalero (pp.
516-521), and the Lord’s prayer in Lipan (p. 522).

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

See Apache.

Pinart (Alphonse L.) Alph. Pinart |
Sur | les Atnahs| Extrait de la Revue de
Philologie et WEthnographie, n° 2. |

Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur |
libraire des sociétés Asiatiques de

Pino (Pedro

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Pinart (A. L.) — Continued.

Paris, de Caleutta, de New-Haven |
(Etats-Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) |
28, rue Bonaparte, 28 | 1875

Cover title as above. no inside title; text pp.
TaS4RO:

The dialect treated is the Atnaxthynné.
General remarks, pp. 1-3.—Vocabulary of 275
words and phrases, alphabetically arranged by
Atnaxthynné words, pp. 3-8.

Copies seen: Pilling.

-—— Vocabulary of the Atnah lan-
guage. (*)

Manuscript, 90 pp. folio, in possession of its
author. Russian and Atnah. Collected at
Kadiak in 1872. Mayor may not belorg to the
Athapascan family of languages.

Some years ago, in response to a request of
mine for a list of the manuscript linguistic
material coHected by him, Mr. Pinart wrote me
as follows:

‘‘T have collected, during my fifteen years of
traveling, vocabularies, texts, songs, etc., gen-
eral linguistic materials in the following lan-

It is impossible at present
to give you the number of pages, ete., as most
of it is to be found among my note-books, and
has not been put in shape as yet.”

Among the languages mentioned by Mr.
Pinart were the Tlatskenai, Chiracahua
Apache, and White Mountain Apache.
Bautista). Exposicion |
Sucinta y Sencilla | de la Provineiay del
| Nuevo Mexico: | hecha | por su dipu-
tado en Cértes | Don Pedro Baptista
Pino, |con arregloa sus instrucciones. |

‘adiz: | Lmprenta del Estado-Mayor-

General. | Ano de 1812. (*)

51 pp. 8°.

“Del Nabajoe,”’ ten words and phrases, pp.
40-41,

Title from the late Dr. J. G. Shea, from copy
in his possession.

Noticias | historicas y estadisticas
| de la antigua provincia del | Nuevo-
Mexico, | presentadas por su diputado
en cortes | D. Pedro Bautista Pino, |

en Cadiz en ano de 1812. | Adicionadas
por el Lic. D. Antonio Barreiro en |

1839; y ultimamente anotadas por el
Lic. | Don José Agustin de Escudero, |

para la comision de estadistica militar
| de la |republica Mexicana. | [Five
lines quotation. ] |

México. | Imprenta de Lara, calle de
Ja Palma num 4. | 1849.

Title verso blank 1 J. dedication pp. i-iv, text
pp. 1-98, indice 2 ll. map, sm. 4°.

Del Navajoe, pp. 85-86, containsa short vocab-
ulary (ten words) with definitions in Spanish.

Copies seen ; British Museum, Congress, Shea,

guages or dialects.

ATHAPASCAN

Pope (Maj. F.L.) Vocabulary of words

from the Siecany language.

Manuscript, pp. 1-18, 4°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1865.

Contains about 280 words and phrases, in the
handwriting of Dr. Geo. Gibbs. The where-
abouts of the original I do not know. On the
first page is the following note:

‘«The tribe known as the Siccannies inhabit
the tract of country lying to the northwest of
Lake Tatla, in British Columbia, and their lan-

guage is nearly the same as that spoken by the

Connenaghs, or Nahonies, of the Upper Sti-
kine.”

Pott (August Friedrich). Die | quinare

und vigesimale | Ziihlmethode | bei

Voélkern aller Welttheile. {| Nebst aus-
fiihrlicheren Bermerkungen | iiber die
Zahlwirter Indogermanischen Stammes
| und einem Anhange iiber Fingerna-
men. | Von | Dr.August Friedrich Pott,
| ord. Prof. [&c. four lines. ] |

Halle, | C.A. Schwetschke und Sohn,

| 1847.

Cover title nearly as above, title as above
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. dedi-
catory notice 1 1. preface pp. vii-viii, text pp.
1-304, 8°.

Many North American languages are repre-
sented by numerals, finger names, etc., among
them the Chippewyan (from Mackenzie) and
Tacoullies (Carrier), p. 66.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, British

Museum, Eames, Watkinson.
Doppelung | (Reduplikation, Gemi-
nation)|als | eines der wichtigsten Bil-
dungsmittel der Sprache, | beleuchtet
| aus Sprachen aller Welttheile durch
| Aug. Friedr. Pott, Dr. | Prof. der
Allgemeinen Sprachwiss. an der Univ.
zu Halle [&c. two lines. | |

Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der
Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862.

Cover title as above, title as above verso quo-
tation 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v—vi,
text pp. 1-304, list of books on verso of back
cover, 8°.

Contains examples of reduplication in many
North American languages, among them the
Athapascan, p.37; Atnah, p. 42; Kenai, fip. 42,
54, 120; Taheuli, pp. 42, 62; Tlatskanai, p. 41, and
Umkwa, pp. 37, 42.

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames.

— Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprach-

wissenschaft.

In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine
Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354;
vol. 2, pp. 54-115, 209-251; vol. 3, pp. 110-126,
249-275; Supp., pp. 1-193; vol. 4, pp. 67-96; vol.
5, pp. 3-18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn,
1889, large8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.)

LANGUAGES. 85

| Pott (A. F.) — Continued.

The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4,
pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr.
Pott’s death, which occurred July 5, 1887. The
general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer,
states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued
from the manuscripts which he left, and thatitis
to close with the languages of Australia. In the
section of American linguistics publications in
all the more important stocks of North America
are mentioned, with brief characterization.

Powell: This word following a title or within

parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Major J. W. Powell,
Washington, D.C.

Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian ln-

guistic families of America north of
Mexico. By J. W. Powell

In Bureau of Ethnology, Seventh Annual
Report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°.

Athapascan family, with a list of synonyms
and principal tribes, derivation of the name,
habitat, ete., pp. 51-56.

Issued separately as follows:

—— Indian linguistic families of America

| north of Mexico | By | J. W. Powell |
Extract from theseventh annual report
of the Bureauof ethnology [Vignette]
Washington | Government printing

office | 1891.

Cover title as above, noinside title, half-title p.
1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal 8°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling, Powell.

——[Voeabulary of the Navajo language. ]

Manuscript, 8 ll. folio, written on one side
only. Collected at Fort Defiance, New Mexico,
in 1870. In possession of its author.

Contains about 100 words and the numerals
1-1000.

Powers (Stephen). The northern Cali-

fornia Indians.

In Overland Monthly, vol.-8, pp. 825-333, 425—-
435, 530-539; vol. 9, pp. 155-164, 805-313, 498-507,
April-December, 1872. Continued under the
title of ‘* The California Indians.” no. 7 to no. 13,
vol. 10, pp. 322-333, 535-545; vol. 11, pp. 105-116;
vol. 12, pp. 21-31, 412-424, 530-540; vol. 13, pp.
542-550. April, June, and August, 1873; Janu-
ary, May, June, and December, 1874. San Fran-
cisco, 1872-1874, 8°. (Hames.)

The first series consists of six articles, scat-
tered through whichare a few native terms. Ar-
ticle no. iv, vol. 9,pp.155-164, relates to the Hoopa
or Hoopaw Indians, and contains, on pp.157-158,
some remarks on the Hoopa language, a speci-
men of its vocabulary, and outlines of grammar.

Vocabularies of the Wailakki and
Hupa languages.
Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, written on

86 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Powers (S.) — Continued.
one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau
of Ethnology.

Each of these vocabularies contains the 211
words adopted by the Smithsonian Institution on
one of its later blanks as a standard vocabulary.

Prayer book:

Beaver See Bompas (W. C.)

Beaver Garrioch (A. C.)
Déné Morice (A. G.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.)
Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) and
Bompas (W. C.)
Montagnais Legoff (L.)
Montagnais Perrault (C. 0.)
Slave Kirkby (W. W.)
Slave Lessons.
Slave Reeve (W. D.)
Tukudh MeDonald (R.)
Prayers:
Beaver See Bompas (W. C.)

Chippewyan
Chippewyan

Bompas (W.C.)
Tuttle (C. R.)

Deéné Morice (A. G.)

Dog Rib Bompas (W. C.)

Navajo Matthews (W.)
Preces post privatam [Déné]. See

Morice (A. G.)

Prichard (James Cowles). Researches |
into the | physical history | of | man-
kind. | By | James Cowles Prichard,
M.D. F.R.S. M.R.I.A. | correspond-
ing member [&e. three lines. ] | Third
edition. | Vol. I[-V]. |

London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and
Piper, | Paternoster row; | and J. and
A. Arch, | Cornhill. | 1836[-1847].

5 vols. 8°. The words ‘‘ Third edition,” which
are contained on the titles of vols. 1-4 (dated
respectively 1836, 1837, 1841, 1844), are not on the
title of vol. 5. Vol. 3 was originally issued witha
title numbered “ Vol. I1I.—Part I.” This title
was afterward canceled, and a new one (num-
bered ‘ Vol. III.”’) substituted in its place. Vol.
1 was reissued with a new title containing the
words ‘Fourth edition” and bearing the im-
print ‘‘ London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper,

| Paternoster row. | 1841.” (Astor); and again
“Fourth edition. | Vol. I. | London: | Houlston
and Stoneman, | 65, Paternoster row. | 1851.”
(Coneress.) According to Sabin’s Dictionary
(no. 65477, note), vol. 2 also appeared in a
“Fourth edition,’ with the latter imprint.
These several issues differ only in the insertion
of new titles in the places of the original titles.

Of the Languages of the Nations inhabiting
the Western Coast of North America (pp. 488—
441) contains on p. 440 a short comparative
vocabulary of the Esquimaux, Kinai, and Ugal-

jachmutzi.
Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum,

Congress, Eames.

The earlier editions, London, 1813, 8°, and
London, 1826, 2 vols., 8°, contain no Athapascan
material.

catechisme en
langue montagnaise. See Perrault (C.
O.)

Primer:
Beaver

| Priéres,- cantiques et

See Bompas (W. C.)

Chippewyan Bompas (W.C.)

Déné Morice (A. G.)

Dog Rib Bompas (W. C.)
Tinné Bompas (W. C.)
Tukudh Bompas (W.C.)

Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu Christi
factae B. Marg. M. Alacoque. | Nawpwé-
kakwadhet Jesukri dakay Mareuerite
| Marie Alacoque pat kudjozji, tchan-
tinkeet | chidzji ttset siékinidheni
kwendjet kudjidhizji.

[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper.
1890.]

A small ecard, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as
above and containing twelve ‘ Promises of Our
Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the
Louchéux language, on the verso of which is a
colored picture of the sacred heart, with in-
scription in English below.

Mr. Kemper has published the same ‘‘ prom-
ises”’ on similar cards in many languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu Christi
factae B. Marg. M. Alacoque. | Na*ett-
selikagower Jesukri dekayé Marguerite

| Marie Alacoque pa kudezi; ménik*é
sedzéé | ttsem sokéyéniwen
kudezi.

[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper.
1890. ]

A small ecard, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as
above and containing twelve ‘‘ Promises of
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the
Peau de Liévre language, on the verso of
which is a colored picture of the sacred heart
with inscription in Latin below.

Mr. Kemper has published the same ‘‘ prom-
ises’’ on similar cards in many languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

{ Mon-

kupa

Promissiones domini nostri
tagnais]. See Legoff (L.)

Proper names:

Apache See Catlin (G.)
Apache Cremony (J. C.)
Apache White (J. B.)
Athapascan Catlin (G.)
Athapascan Petitot (E. F. S.J.)

Dog Rib
Chippewyan

Catlin (G.)
Catlin (G.)

Navajo Catlin (G.)

Navajo Matthews (W.)

Navajo Smithsonian.

Taeulli Anderson (A. C.)

Umpkwa Stanley (J. M.)
Psalm book:

Tukudh See McDonald (R.)

re

:

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Quaritch: This word following a title or included
within parentheses after a note indicates that
a copy of the work referred to has been seen

by the compiler in the bookstore of Bernard |

Quaritch, London, Eng.

Quaritch (Bernard). A general | cata-
logue of books, | offered to the public
at the aftixed prices | by | Bernard
Quaritch. |

London: | 15 Piccadilly. | 1880.

Title verso printers 1 1. preface (dated July,
1880) pp. iii-iv, table of contents pp. v—x, cata-
logue pp. 1-2166, general index pp. 2167-2395, 8°.
Includes the parts issued with the numbers 309-
330, from July, 1877, to November, 1879.

American languages, pp. 1261-1269, contains
titles of a few works containing material
relating to the Athapasecan languages.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress,
Eames.

Catalogue | of books on the | history,
geography, | and of | the philology | of
| America, Australasia, Asia, Africa. |

I. Historical geography, voyages, and |

travels. | II. History, ethnology, and
philology | of America. | III. History,
topography, and ethnology | of Asia,
Polynesia, and Africa. | Offered for Cash
at the affixed net prices by | Bernard
Quaritch. |

London: | 15 Piccadilly, June 1885 to
October 1886. | 1886.

Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747-
3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on the back:
QUARITCH’S | GENERAL | CATALOGUE | PART XII.
| VOYAGES | AND | TRAVELS { AMERICANA | AND |
ORIENTALIA | LONDON 1886. This volume com-
prises nos. 362-364 (June, July, and August,
1885) of the paper-covered series, with the addi-
tion of a special title and a general index.

American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains

87

Q.

| Quaritch (B.) — Continued.
titles of books relating to the Athapascan lan-
guages.

The complete ‘t General Catalogue,” of which
the above is a part, comprises 15 volumes bound
in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4066. Each
volume has its own special title and index, with
the title of the series and the number of the part
lettered on the back. It was originally issued
as nos. 332-375 of the paper-covered series, from
November, 1880, to August, 1887, at which date
the publication was discontinued.

Copies seen: Eames.

A large paper edition as follows:

A general | catalogue of books | of-
fered to the public at the affixed prices
| by | Bernard Quaritch | Vol. I[-VT] |

London: | 15 Piccadilly, | 1887.

6 vols. royal 8°.
nounced. but it has not yet (March, 1892) ap-
peared.

American languages, as under the preceding
title, vol. 5, pp. 8011-3042.

Copies seen: Lenox.

This edition was published at 15/. for the set,
including the seventh or index volume.

An index volume was an-

— No. 86. London, December, 1887. | A
rough list | of | valuable and rare

hooks, | comprising | the choicest por-
tions of Various Libraries, | and many
very cheap works of every class of Lit-
erature, | at greatly reduced prices, |
offered by | Bernard Quaritch, 15, Pic-
eadilly, W.

Printed cover (with title: ‘* The miscellane-
ous and the musical library of Mr. William
Chappell,” ete.), catalogue with heading as
above, pp. 1-128, 8°.

American languages, pp. 1-13, contains titles
of afew works giving information relating to
the Athapascan languages.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Ru.

Radloff (Leopold). Einige kritische
Bemerkungen iiber Hrn. Buschmann’s
Behandlung der Kinai-Sprache; von
Leopold Radloft.

In Académie Imp, des Sciences, Mélanges
russes, vol. 3, pp. 364-399, St. Petersburg, 1857,
8°. (Kames.) F

The grammatical sketch of the Kinai in this
article is extracted from the works of Lisi-
ansky, Resanow, Dawydow. and Wrangell.

At the end of the article is the note: (Aus
dem Bull. hist.-phil., T. xiv, No. 17, 18, 19).

Radloff (L.) — Continued.
Mémoires | de | Académie impé-
riale des sciences de St.-Pétersbourg,
VII* série. | Tome XXI, N°8. | Leopold
Radloft’s | Woérterbuch der Kinai-
Sprache | herausgegeben | von | A.
Schiefner. | (Lu le 5 mars 1874.) |
St.-Pétersbourg, 1874. | Comimission-
naires de VAcadémie Impériale des
sciences: | & St.-Pétersbonre: | MM.
Eggers et Ci, H. Schmitzdorti, | J.

838

Radloff (L.) — Continued.

Issakof et Tcherkessof; | 4 Riga: | M.
N. Kymmel; |4& Odessa: |M. A. E.
_ Kechribardshi; | & Leipzig: | M. Léo-
pold Voss. | Prix: 40 Kop.=15 Negr.

Cover title as above, title as above verso
notices 1 1]. preface (by A. Schiefner) pp. i-x,
text pp. 1-338, 4°.

3rief grammatic sketch, with songs, pp. i-
x. — German-Kinai dictionary (double col-
mnns), pp. 1-32.—Numerals, 1-1000, pp. 32-33.

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress,

Eames, Pilling.
Reeve (drehdeacon W. VD.) The | lord’s
prayer, apostles’ creed, | &c. | in the |
Slavi language. ; Compiled | by the
rev. W. D. Reeve. |

London: | Church missionary house,

| Salisbury square, | 1881

Title verso printers 1 1. half-title (‘‘ Syllaba-
rium”’) p. [3] the verso p. [4] giving the sylla-
bary, ‘Syllabarium” in roman characters
p. [5], text (alternate pages syllabic and roman
characters) pp. 6-11, 16°.

Christ’s love (hymn) in syllabie characters,
p. 6; same in roman, p.7.—The Lord's prayer,
ten commandments in brief, syllabic, p. 8; same
in roman, p. 9.—The apostles’ creed, and a
prayer, syllabic, p.10; same in roman, p. 11.

Copies seen: Church Missionary Society,
Eames, Pilling.

— The Chipewyan Indians.

In Our Forest Children, vol. 2, pp. 6-7, Shing-
wauk Home [Sault Ste, Marie, Ontario], April
1888, 4°.

Contains a list of Chipewyan tribes and
twenty-nine Chipewyan words and short sen-
tences with English meanings.

—— See Bompas(W.C.) and Reeve (W.
D.), in the Addenda.

The index entries under Bible, page 8, refer-
ring to this author are incorrect; they should
read ‘‘Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)”
Titles of the works referred to will be found in
the Addenda.

— See Hymns.

—— See Lessons.

Relationships:

Apache See Morgan (L. H.)
Apache White (J. B.)
Athapascan Dorsey (J. 0.)
Kutchin Herdesty (W. L.)
Loucheux Morgan (L. H.)
Navajo Packard (R. L.)
Peau de Liévre Morgan (L. H.)
Slave Kennicott (R.)
Slave Morgan (L. H.)
Tukudh MeDonald (R.)
Tukudh Morgan (L. H.)

Richardson (Sir John). Arctic | search-
ing expedition: | a | journal of a boat-

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

\

Richardson (J.) — Continued.

voyage | through Rupert’s land to the
Arctic sea, | insearchof | the discovery
ships under command of |sir John
Franklin. | With an appendix on the
physical geography of North America.
| By sir John Richardson,C. B.,F.R.S. |
inspector of naval hospitals and fleets,
| ete. ete. etc. | In two volumes. | Vol.
I{-II]}. | Published by authority. |

London: | Longman, Brown, Green,
and Longmans. | 1851.

2vols.: frontispiece 1 1. title verso notice and
printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1-418
verso printers, eight other plates; frontispiece
1 1. title verso printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-vii,
text pp. 1-157,appendix pp. 159-402, explanation
of plates 1 & If pp. 408-416, postseript pp. 417-
426, folded map, 8°.

Chap. xii, On the Kutchin or Louchenx, vol.
1, pp. 877-413, contains a number of tribal names
with English meanings.—Chapter xiii, Of the
’Tinné or Chepewyans, vol. 2, pp. 1-32, contains
a number of tribal names with definitions.—
Vocabulary of the Chepewyan of Athabasca.
(about 330 words and phrases collected from
Mrs. McPherson), vol. 2, pp. 387-395.—Dog-rib
vocabulary (32 words, collected by Sir John
Richardson at Ft. Confidence), vol. 2, pp. 395-
396.—Dog-rib vocabulary (60 words colleeted by
an officer of the Hudson Bay Co. at Ft. Simp-
son), vol. 2, p. 397.

Contains also the following:

Lefroy (J. H.), Vocabulary of Chepewyan and
Dog-rib words, vol. 2, pp. 400-402.

McPherson (M.), Vocabulary of the Chepe-
wyan, vol. 2, pp. 382-385.

Murray (A. H.), Comparative vocabulary of
the Kutechin and Dog-rib, vol. 1, pp. 399-400,

— Vocabulary of the Kutchin of the
Yukon, vol. 2, pp. 382-385.

O’Brian (—), Vocabulary of Fort Simpson
Dog-rib, vol. 2, p. 398.
Vocabulary of the Mauvais Monde and
of the Dog-rib of the River of the Mountain,
vol. 2, pp. 397-400.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe-
neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Geo-
logieal Survey, Trumbull.

—— Arctic | searching expedition: | a |

journal of a boat-voyage through Ru-
pert’s | land and the Arctic sea, | in
search of the discovery ships under
command of | sir John Franklin. | With
an appendix on the physical geogra- | —
phy of North America. | By sir John
Richardson, C. B., F. R. 8., | inspector
of naval hospitals and fleets, | ete.,ete.,
ete. |

New York: | Harper and_ brothers,
publishers, | 82 Cliff street. | 1852,

Richardson (J.) — Continued.

Rivington (—). See Gilbert (—) and

Roehrig (I. L. O.) [A comparative

—— [A comparative vocabulary of the

ATHAPASCAN

Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-xi, text
pp. 13-336, appendix pp. 837-516, advertisements
pp. 1-6, 1-3, 3 unnumbered pp. 8°.

Linguistics as in the original edition titled
next above, pp. 262-277, 422-443, 501-509.

Copies seen: Harvard, Gen. A. W. Greely,
Washington, D.C.

Arctic | searching expedition: | a |

journal of a boat-voyage through Ru-
pert’s | land and the Arctic sea, | in
search of the discovery ships under
command of | sir John Franklin. | With
an appendix on the physical geogra- |

phy of North America. | By sir John
Richardson, C. B., F. R.S., | inspector of
naval hospitals and fleets, | etc., etc.,
ete. |

New York: | Harper and_ brothers,

publishers, | 529 & 331 Pearl street,
Franklin square. | 1854. ee)

516 pp. 8°. Title from Gen. A. W. Greely.

Field’s sale catalogue, no. 1971, mentions an
edition, New York, Harper & Brothers, 1856, 516
pp. 12°.

Rivington (—).

vocabulary of the Chepewyan (accord-
ing to R. B. Ross), the Chipewyan
(according to Kennicott), the Slave
Indians (according to Kennicott), the
Hare Indians of Fort Good Hope
(according to Kennicott), and the Hare
Indians of Great Bear Lake (according
to Petitot), with remarks on each by
F.L.O. Roehrig. January 15, 1874.]

Manuscript, 22 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The vocabularies, 180 words each (copied
from manuscripts at that time in the library
of the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel
columns and occupy 9 leaves. These are fol-
lowed by 13 pages of ‘‘remarks,”’ each vocab-
ulary being treated of separately.

languages of the Kutchin tribes, em-
bracing the Kut-cha-kut-chin (accord-
ing to Herdesty); the Kut-cha-kut-
chin (according to Kennicott’s manu-
script), and the Kut-cha-kut-chin (from
a printed copy of Kennicott), with
remarks by F. L.O. Roehrig. January
15, 1874. ]

Manuscript, 17 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The three vocabularies, of 180 words each
(copied from manuscripts then in the library of

the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel

LANGUAGES. 89

Roehrig (I. L. O.) — Continued.

columns, occupy the first 9 leaves, and are fol-
lowed by Dr. Roehrig’s remarks, 8 l1., in which
he treats of each vocabulary separately.

—— [A comparative vocabulary of the

Nahawney, or Indians of the mountains
northwest of Fort Liard (according to
Kennicott), and of the Nehawney of

Nehawney River (according to R. B.
Ross), with remarks by F. L. O.
Roehrig. February, 1874].

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The vocabularies, consisting of 180 words
each (copied from manuscripts then in the
library of the Smithsonian Institution), are in
parallel columns, followed by a third column
headed ‘‘remarks,’’ which are comparatively
fewin number; they occupy 9 pages. Follow-
ing these are 5 pages, containing two sets of
“remarks,” also by Prof. Roehrig, two pages of
which refer to the vocabulary of Kennicott and
three to that of Ross.

—— [A comparative vocabulary of the

Taheulli (according to Anderson, in
Hale’s exploring expedition) and of
the Kenai (from the governor of Rus-
sian America), with remarks by F.L.
O. Roehrig. February, 1874. ]

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered pages, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The vocabularies (the first of 180 words, the
second of 60) are in parallel columns and oc-
cupy 10 pages. ‘These are followed by 4 pages
containing two sets of ‘remarks,’ the first
three pages relating to the vocabulary of Ander-
son and one to that last mentioned in the title.

—— [A comparative vocabulary of the

Hong-kutchin (with the original
spelling of the anonymous vocabulary),
the Natsit kutchin (according to k. B.
Ross), and another Kutchin dialect
(not specified ; according to R. B. Ross),
with remarks by F. L. O. Roehrig.
August 17, 1874. ]

Manuscript, 15 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The vocabularies, 180 werds each (copied
from manuscripts then in the library of the
Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel col-
umns, occupying 9 leaves, followed by the
remarks, by Dr. Roehrig, each set of words
being treated of separately.

— [A comparative vocabulary of the

Sikani and Beaver Indians, embracing
the Si-kan-i (according to R. R. Ross);
the Si-kan-i (according to F. L. Pope);
the Sikani of the mountains south of
Fort Liard; and the Beaver Indians of
Peace River west of Lake Athabasca

90

Roehrig (F. L. 0.) — Continued.

(according to Kennicott);withremarks |

by F. L. O. Roehrig. August 20, 1874.]

Manuscript, 16 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.
«© The vocabularies, 180 words each (copied from
manuseripts then in the library of the Smith-
sonian Institution), are in parallel columns and
occupy 9 leaves; these are followed by 7 leaves
containing remarks on each by Dr. Roehrig.

While in charge of the philologie collections
made by the Smithsonian Institution Dr. Gibbs
was accustomed to refer the material relating
to the several linguistic families to specialists
throughout the country, in order that he might
have the benefit of their knowledge of the sub-
ject. In pursuance of this policy Prof. Roehrig
was called upon for assistance, and the col-
lections relating to a number of families in the
northwest were sent to him for criticism, among
them the Athapascan.

The various manuscripts noted above under
the head of ‘‘ Remarks” are the result of this
plan.

Rogue River:
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Tribal names

See Barnhardt (W. H.)
Dorsey (J. 0.)
Dorsey (J. O.)

Rogue River John. See Dorsey (J. O.)
Rooney (Jake).
Ross (Alexander).

See Dorsey (J. 0.)
See Dorsey (J. O.)

Ross (R. B.) Vocabulary of the pure
Chepewyan,or language of the Cariboo-
eaters and Yellowknives.

Manuscript. 6 unnumbered leaves, written
on one side only, folio, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

Recorded on one of the ‘‘ standard vocabu-
lary” forms of the Smithsonian Institution, con-
taining 180 words, equivalents of all of which
are given. The manuscript is in the hand-
writing of Dr. Geo. Gibbs.

— Vocabulary of the Kutcha Kutehin,
Yukon River.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only, in the library of the

Bureau of Ethnology. Procured from Mr.
Herdesty, who had resided among these

Indians about ten years.

tecorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion's standard vocabulary forms of 180 words,
equivalents of nearly all of which are given.
The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs.

— Vocabulary of the Natsit Kutchin
(Strong Men) language.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Procured from an Indian
who had been several years in the Hudson Bay
Company’s service.

Recorded on one of the forms of the Smith-

| Rost (Reinhold).

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Ross (R. B.) — Continued.
sonian Institution's standard vocabulary of 180
words, nearly all the blanks being filled. The
handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs.

Vocabulary of the
Nehaunay River.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only. in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected from amem-
ber of one of the tribes residing in the moun-
tainoys country between the Liard ‘and Mac-
kenzie rivers.

Nehaunay of

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion’s standard vocabulary forms of 180 words,
eq uivalents of nearly all of which are given.
The manuscript is in the handwriting of Dr.
Gibbs.

Si-kan’-i lan-

Vocabulary of the
guage.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, written on
one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau
of Ethnology.

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms of
180 words, equivalents of allof which are given.

Vocabulary of a dialect of the Tin-
néan language.

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio,
written on one side only, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion’s forms of a standard vocabulary of 180
words, equivalents of nearly all of them being
given. The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs.

The | lord’s prayer |
In Three Hundred Languages | com-
prising the | leading languages and
their principal dialects | throughout
the world | with the places where
spoken | With a preface by Reinhold
Rost, | C.1.E., LL. D., PH.D. |

London | Gilbert and Rivington |
Limited | St. John’s house, Clerkenwell,

1.C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) |

Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 Il. eon-
tents 11. text pp. 1-88, 4°.

The Lord’s prayer in a number of American
languages, among them the Chippewyan (sylla-
bic), p. 14; Chippewyan or Tinne (roman), p. 14;
Slavé-Indian (roman), p.75; Slavé-Indian (syl-
labic), p.75; Tukudh, p. 84.

Copies seen: Eames.

—— The | lord’s prayer | In Three Hun-
dred Languages | comprising — the |
leading languages and their principal
dialects | throughout the world | with
the places where spoken | With a pref-
ace by Reinhold Rost, | C. I. B., LL.D.,
PH. D. | Second edition |

London | Gilbert and

Rivington |

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 91

Rost (R.)— Continued.
Limited | St. John’s house,Clerkenwell,
E.C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) |

| Ruby (Charles). Vocabulary of the
Chiracahua-Apache language.
Manuscript, 3 unnumbered leaves, folio,

Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 ll.con- |

tents 1 1. text pp. 1-88, 4°. :
Linguistic contents asunder title next above.
Copies seen: Pilling.

5.

Schomburgk (IR. H.) — Continned.

Sabin (Joseph). A | dictionary | of |

|

Books relating to America, | from its |

discovery to the present time. | By
Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XIX]. |
(Three lines quotation. ] |

New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau
street. | 1868[-1891].

19 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication.
Parts e¢xv-cxvi, now in press (March, 1892),
have reached the entry ‘‘Smith,” and will com-
mence vol. 20.
Eames.

Now edited by Mr. Wilberforce

Contains titles of many books in and relating |

to the Athapasean languages.
Copies seen:
Survey, Lenox.

See Field (T. W.)

St. Mark [in the Tinné language].
Kirkby (W. W.)

Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction
to the | science of language. | By | A. |
H. Sayce, | deputy professor of compar-
ative philology in the university of

Oxford. | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-IT].
| [Design.] |

London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1,
Paternoster square. | 1880.

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso
quotationand notice 1 1. preface pp. v—viii, table
of contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-441, colo-

phon verso blank 1 1.: half-title verso blank 1 }.

title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of
contents verso blank 1 |. text pp. 1-352, selected |

list of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421, 12°.

A few Hoopah and Navaho words, with ex-

planations, vol. 1, p. 121.
Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames.
Schomburgk (Sir Robert Herman). Con-
tributions to the Philological Ethnog-
raphy of South America. By Sir R. H.
Schomburgk.

Tn Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vol. 3,
pp. 228-237, London, 1848, 8°.

Affinity of words in the Guinau with other

languages and dialects in America, pp. 236-237,
contains. among others, examples in Atnah.

language [South America].
In Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vol. 4,
pp. 217-222, London, 1850, 8°.

Congress, Eames, Geological

See

A vocabulary of the Maiangkong

Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe).

written on one side only, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded, Sept., 1886,
with the assistance of Mickey Free, interpre-
ter.

Contains the word for sun in the languages
of the Chippewyan, Kinai, and ‘‘ Tribes of the
northwest coast of America.”

Robert Herman Schomburek. a German ex-
plorer, was born in Freiburg on the Unstruth,
Prussia, June 4, 1804; died in Schiéneberg. near
Berlin, Mareh 11,1865. He entered commercial
life, and in 1826 came to the United States,
where, after working as a clerk in Boston and
Philadelphia, he became a partner in 1828 in a
tobacco manufactory at Richmond, Va. The
factory was burned and Schomburgk was
ruined. After wnsuccessftl ventures in the
West Indies and Central America, he went to
the island of Anegada, one of the Virgin
group, where he undertook te make a survey of
Although he did not possess the
special knowledge that is required for such a

the coast.

work, he performed it well, and his reports pro-
cured him in 1834, from the Geographical Soci-
ety of London and some botanists, means to
explore the interior of British Guiana, which
was then entirely unknown. After a thorough
exploration during 1833-1839, he went to London
in the summer of 1839 with valuable collections
of animals and plants, mostly new species.
Schomburgk sailed again from London for
Georgetown in December, 1840, as president of
a commission to determine the boundary line
between British Guiana and Brazil, and to
make further geographical and ethnological
observations. He was joined there by his
brother, Moritz Richard. On their return to
London in June, 1844, Schomburgk presented a
report of his journey to the Geographical
Society, for which the queen knighted him in
1845. After a few months’ rest he was given
an appointment in the colonial department
and sent tomake researches upon the idioms of
the aborigines of South America. In 1848 he
read before the British Association a paper in
which he proposed an alphabetical system for
the Indian dialects.—A ppleton’s Cyclop. of Am.
Biog.

Historical
| and | statistical information, | re-
specting the | history, condition and
prospects | of the | Indian tribes of the
United States: | collected and prepared
under the direction | of the | bureau of
Indian affairs, | per act of Congress of
March 3d, 1847, | by Henry R. School-

92

Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued.

eraft, LL.D. | Illustrated by 8S. East-
man, capt. U.S. A. | Published by Au-
thority of Congress. | Part I[-VI]. |

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo &
company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot
& co.) | 1851[-1857].

Engraved title: |Engraving.] | Historical |
and | statistical information | respecting the |
history, condition and prospects | of the | In-
dian tribes of the United States :| Collected and

prepared under the | direction of the bureau of

Indian affairs per act of Congress | of March 3"
1847, | by Henry R. Schooleraft L. L. D. | Mus-
trated by | S. Eastman, capt. U.S. army. | [Coat
of arms.] | Published by authority of Congress.
| Part I[-VI). |

Philadelphia: | Lippineott, Grambo & co.

6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words
“Historical and statistical’ are left off the
title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse-
quently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the
abridged title beginning ‘‘ Information respect-
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the
Indian tribes,” making it uniform with the
other parts.

Two editions with these title-pages were pub-
lished by the same house, one on thinner and
somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols. 1-5
were issued.

Part 1, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re-
searches, respecting | the red man of America)
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso
blank 1 1. printed title as above verso blank 1 1.
introductory documents pp. iii-vi, preface pp.
vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xili-
Xviii, text pp. 138-524, appendix pp. 525-568,
plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered
1-76.

Part 11, 1852. Half-title (as in part 1) verso
blank L1. engraved title (Information respecting
the history condition and prospects, ete.) verso
blank 1 1. printed title (Information respecting
the history, condition and prospects, ete.) verso
printers 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. introdue-
tory document pp. vii-xiv, contents pp. Xv-xxii,
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608,
plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2
plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet and its
application.

Part ul, 1853. Half-title (as in part I) verso
blank 1].engraved title (as in part 11) verso blank
11. printed title (as in part Il) verso printers 1 1.
third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. 1x,
contents pp. Xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii-x viii,
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 1-21,
25-45.

Part Iv, 1854. Half-title (as in part 1) verso
blank 11. engraved title (asin part 1t) verso blank
1 1. printed title (as in part 11) verso blank 1 1.
dedication pp. v—vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list
of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xili-xxiii, list of
plates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and
Maps numbered 1-42.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued.

Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part 1) verso
blank 1 1. engraved title (as in part I) verso
blank 1 |. printed title (as in part 11) verso blank
11. dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix—xii,
list of divisions p. xiii, synopsis of general
contents of vols. I-V pp. xv-xvi, contents pp.
XVii-xxii, list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp.
25-625, appendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps
numbered 1-8, 10-36.

Part vi, 1857. Half-title (General history | of
the | North American Indians) verso blank 1 1.
portrait 11. printed title (History | of the! Indian
tribes of the United States: | their | present
condition and prospects, | and a sketch of their
| ancient status. | Published by order of Con-
gress, | under the direction of the Department of
theinterior—Indian bureau. | By | Henry Rowe
Schoolcraft, LL. D. | Member [&e. six lines.] |
With Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | In one
volume. | Part vi. of the series. | Philadelphia:
| J. B. Lippincott & co. | 1857.) verso blank 1 1.
inscription verso blank 1 1. letter to the Presi-
dent pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix—x, preface pp. xi-
xvi, contents pp. Xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp.
XXV1i-xXxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756,
fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the
other volumes, and three tables.

Eaton (J. H.), Vocabulary of the Navajo,
vol. 4, pp. 416-431.

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indiaitami-
lies of languages, vol. 3, pp. 397-402.

Gibbs (G.), Observations on some of the
Indian dialects of northern California, vol. 3,
pp. 420-423.

— Vocabularies of Indian languages in
northwest California, vol. 8, pp. 428-445.

Henry (C. C.). Vocabulary of the Apache,
vol. 5, pp. 578-589.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe-
neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames,
National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull.

At the Fischer sale, no. 1581, Quariteh bought
a copy for 41. 10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold
for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the
Squier copy, no. 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the
Ramirez copy,no. 773 (5 vols.), 51.5s.; the Pinart
copy, no. 828 (5 vols. in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy
copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no.
30017, 101. 10s.; Dy Clarke & co. 1886, $65; by
Quaritch, im 1888, 151.

Reissued with title-pages as follows:

— Archives| of| Aboriginal Knowledge,
| Containing all the | Original Papers
laid before Congress | respecting the |
History, Antiquities, Language, Eth-
nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti-
tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian
Tribes of the United States | by | Henry
R. Schooleraft, LL. D. | With Tlustra-
tions. | Onvendun ih ieuw muzzinyegun
un.—Algonquin. | In six volumes, |.
Volume I[-VI]. |

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 93

Schoolcraft (H. R.)— Continued. | Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued.

=

[——] The | Indian tribes

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott &
Co. | 1860.

Engraved title: Information | respecting the
| History, Condition and Prospects | of the |
Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected
and prepared under the | Bureau of Indian
Affairs | By Henry R. Schooleraft L. L. D. |
Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An-
tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological
Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.t
S. Eastman, U.S.A. and other eminent artists. |
[| Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con-
gress. |

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co.

6 vols. maps and plates, 4°.

This edition agrees in the text page for page
with the original titled above, and contains in
addition an index to each volume.

Copies seen: Congress.

Partially reprinted, with title as follows:

of the | United
States: | their | history, antiquities,
customs, religion, arts, language, | tra-
ditions, oral legends, and myths. | Ed-
ited by | FrancisS. Drake. | Illustrated
with one hundred fine engravings on
steel. | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-IJ]. |

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott &
co. | London: 16 Southampton street,
Covent Garden. | 1884.

2 vols.: portrait 11. title verso copyright 1 1.
preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list of plates
pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text pp. 25-458:
frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. con-
tents pp. 3-6, list of plates p.7, text pp. 9-445,
index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°.

“In the following pages the attempt has been
made to place before the public in a convenient
and accessible form the results of the life-long
labors in the field of aboriginal research of the
late Henry R. Schoolcraft.”

Chapter II, Language, literature, and pic-
tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general
remarks on the Indian languages.

Copies seen: Congress.

Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25.

Henry Rowe Schoolcraft. ethnologist, born in
| Watervliet] Albany county. N. Y.,March 28,
1793; died in Washington, D. C., December 10,
1864. Was educated at Middlebury College,
Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the
studies of chemistry and mineralogy. In
1817-18 he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas,
and returned with a large collection of geolog-
ical and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he
was appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass’s
exploring expedition to Lake Superior and the
headwaters of Mississippi River. He was secre-
tary of a commission to treat with the Indians
at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illinois
and along Wabash and Miami rivers, was in
1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes of

the lake region, establishing himself at Sault
Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mackinaw,
where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston,
granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway
chief, who had received her education in
Europe. In 1828 he founded the Michigan his-
torical society, and in 1831 the Algie society.
From 1828 till 1832 he was a member of the ter-
ritorial legislature of Michigan. In 1832 heleda
government expedition, which followed the Mis-
sissippi River up to its source in Itasca Lake.
In 1836 he negotiated a treaty with the Indians
on the upper lakes for the cession to the United
States of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He
was then appointed acting superintendent of
Indian affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent
for the northern department. On his return
from Europe in 1842 he made a tour through
western Virginia, Ohio,and Canada. He was
appointed by the New York legislature in 1345
a commissioner to take the census of the Indians
in the State, and collect information concerning
the Six Nations. After the performance of
this task, Congress authorized him, on March 3,
1847, to obtain through the Indian bureau
reports relating to all the Indian tribes of the
country, and to collate and edit the information.
In this work he spent the remaining years of
his life. Through his influence many laws
were enacted for the protection and benefit of
the Indians. Numerous scientific societies in
the United States and Europe elected him to
membership, and the University of Geneva
gave him the degree of LL.D. in 1846. He was
the author of numerous poems, lectures, and
reports on Indian subjects, besides thirty-one
larger works. Twoof his lectures before the
Algic society at Detroit on the ‘Grammatical
Construetion of the Indian Languages’ were
translated into French by Peter 8S. Duponcean,
and gained for their author a gold medal from
the French institute.

To the five volumes of Indian researches com-
piled under the direction of the war department
he added a sixth, containing the post-Columbian
history of the Indians and of their relations
with Europeans (Philadelphia, 1857). He had
collected material for two additional volumes,
but the government suddenly suspended the
publication of the work.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of
Am. Biog.

Schott (W.) Ueber ethnographische

Ergebnisse der Sagoskinschen Reise,
von W. Schott.

InErman (A.), Archiv fiir wissenschaftliche
Kunde von Russland, vol. 7, pp. 480-512, Berlin,
1849, 8°.

Voeabulary of the Inkilik and Inkalit-Ingel-
mut (from Zagoskin), pp. 481-487.

Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on

the indigenous tribes of the N. W.
coast of America. By John Scouler,
M. D., Fo. 8.) é&c.

94 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Scouler (J.)— Continued. | Sikani:

In Royal Geog. Soe. of London, Jour., vol. 11, |
pp. 215-251, London, 1841, 8°. (Geological Sur-
vey.) |

Vocabulary of the Umpqua: spoken on the |
River Umpqua, about 100 words (obtained from
Dr. Tolinie), pp. 287-241. |

— On the Indian tribes inhabiting the
north-west coastof America. By Jobn |
Secowler, M.D.,F. L. 8. Communicated |
by the Ethnological Society. |

In Edinburgh New Philosoph. Jour. vol. 41,
pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846, 8°.

Includes a brief discussion of the Athapas- |
cans, pp. 170-171.

Reprinted in Ethnological Soc. of London, |
Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, London [1848], 8°. (Con- |
gress.) Linguistics as above, pp. 280-231.

Seguin (R.P.) Catechism in the Dindjié |

language. (<)

Manuscript in possession of Father Emile
Petitot, Mareuil-les-Meaux, France, who has
kindly furnished me the above title. See
Petitot (E. F. S.J.)

Sentences:
Ahtinné See Allen (H. T.)
Apache Bancroft (H. H.)
Apache White ¢J. B.)
Athapascan Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Tinné Campbell (J.)
Sermons:
Déné Seu Morice (A. G.)
Montagnais Legoff (L.)
Taculli Morice (A. G.)

Shaw (fev. J. M.) Vocabulary of the
Navajo language.

Manuscript, pp. 1-25, 4°, in the library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

Recorded on a form compiled by H. R. School-
craft, containing 350 English words and the
numerals 1-30, 40, 50, 60, ete. Equivalents of
most of these are given.

Shea: This word following a title or within paren-
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the
work referred to was seen by the compiler in
the library of the late Dr. J. G. Shea, Elizabeth,
N.J.

Sherwood (Lieut. W.L.) Vocabulary of
the Sierra Blanca and Coyotero dialect
of the Apaches, with notes.

Manuscript, 7 unnumbered leaves, folio, in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

The first leaf of the manuscript, written on
both sides,is devoted to remarks concerning
the negatives, pronouns, method of counting,
and as to the alphabet used. The remaining
leaves, written on one side only, contain the
vocabulary (about 275 words) arranged in four
columns to the page, two of English and two
of the Apache. There is noindication of place

or date of record.

Sierra Blanca Apache. see Apache.

Vocabulary See Buschmann (J.C.E.)
Vocabulary Howse (J.)
Vocabulary Pope (F. L.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.)
Vocabulary Ross (R. B.)

Words Daa (L. K.)

Simpson (Lieut. James Hervey). Journal

of a military reconnaissance from Santa
Fé, New Mexico, to the Navajo country,
made with the troops under the com-
mand of Brevet Lieutenant Colonel
John M. Washington, chief of the 9th
military department, and governor of
New Mexico, in 1849, by James H. Simp-
son, A. M., First Lieutenant Corps of
Topographical Engineers.

In Reports of Secretary of War: Senate ex.
doc. No. 64, 8ist Cong., Ist sess., pp. 56-168,
Washington, 1850, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.)

A comparative vocabulary of words in the

languages of the Pueblo or civilized Indians of
New Mexico and of the wild tribes inhabiting
its borders, pp. 140-143, includes 40 words of the
Navajo (no. 7). obtained by Lieut. Simpson from
a friendly Navajo chief, by name Tus-ca-ho-
gont-le (Mexican name Sandoval), and 35 words
of the Ticorilla, a branch of the Apaches (no.
8), obtained by Lieut. Simpson from an Apache
Indian, a prisoner in the guard-house at Santa
He:
Journal | of a | military reconnais-
sance, | from | Santa Fe, New Mexico,
| to the | Navajo country, | made with
the | troops under command of brevet
lieutenant colonel John | M. Washing-
ton, chief of ninth military department,
| and governor of New Mexico, in 1849.
| By | James H. Simpson, A. M., | first
lieutenant corps of topographical
engineers. |

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo
and co., | successors to Grigg, Elliot
and co. | 1852.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. cor-
respondence pp. 3-7, text pp. 9-188, list of plates
pp. 139-140, map, plates, 8°.

Linguistic contents as under next preceding
title, pp. 128-130.

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mu-
seum, Eames, Trumbull.

James Hervey Simpson, soldier, born in New
Jersey March 9, 1813, died in St. Paul, Minn.,
March 2,1883. He was graduated at the U.S.
military academy in 1832,and assigned to the
artillery. During the Florida war he was aide
to Gen. Abraham Eustis. He was made first
lieutenant in the corps of topographical engi-
neers on July 7, 1838, engaged in surveying ths
northern lakes and the western plains; was pro-

4

a a ee a oe

=—6- eS ee

ili

ATHAPASCAN

Simpson (J. H.) —Continued.

moted captain on March 8, 1853; served as chief
topographical engineer with the army in Utah,
and in 1859 explored a new route from Salt Lake
City to the Pacitic coast, the reports of which
he was busy in preparing till the beginning of
the civilwar. He served as chief topographical
engineer of the Department of the Shenandoah,
was promoted major on Aug. 6, 1861, was made
colonel of the 4th New Jersey volunteers on
Aug. 12, 1861, and took part in the peninsular
campaign, being engaged at West Point and at
Gaines Mills, where he was taken prisoner.
After his exchange in August, 1862, he resigned
his volunteer commission in order to act as chiet
topographical engineer, and afterward as chief
engineer of the department of the Ohio, where
he was employed in making and repairing rail-
roads and erecting temporary fortifications. He
was promoted lieutenant-colonel of engineers
on June 1, 1863, had general charge of fortifica-
tions in Kentucky from that time till the close
of the war, was brevetted colonel and brigadier-
general in March. 1865, and was chief engineer
of the interior department, having charge of
the inspection of the Union Pacific railroad till
1867. He afterward superintended defensive
works at Key West, Mobile, and other places,
surveys of rivers and harbors, the improve-
ment of navigation in the Mississippi and other
western rivers, and the construction of bridges
at Little Rock, Ark., St. Louis, Mo., Clinton,
Towa, and other places. Gen. Simpson was the
author of ‘‘ Shortest Route to California across
the Great Basin of Utah” (Philadelphia, 1869)
and ‘‘ Essay on Coronado’s March in Search of
the Seven Cities of Cibola” (1869).—<A ppleton’s
Cyclop. of Ain: Biog.

Simpson (William). See Dorsey (J.O.)

Slave:
Bible, four gospels See Bompas (W. C.)
Bible, Matthew Reeve (W. D.)
Bible, Mark Reeve (W. D.)
Bible passages 3ritish.
Bible passages Gilbert & Rivington.
Catechism Kirkby (W. W.)
Hymn book Hymns.
Hymn book Kirkby (W. W.)
Hymns Reeve (W. D.)
Legends Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Lord’s prayer Bergholtz (G. F.)
Lord’s prayer Kirkby (W. W.)
Lord’s prayer Reeve (W. D.)
Lord's prayer Rost (R.)
Numerals Ellis (R.)
Prayer book Kirkby (W. W.)
Prayer book Lessons.
Prayer book Reeve (W. D.)
Relationships Kennicott (R.)
Relationships Morgan (L. H.)
Songs Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Ten commandments Kirkby (W. W.)
Ten commandments Reeve (W. D.)
Vocabulary Kennicott (R.).
Vocabulary Kirkby (W. W.)

Vocabulary Latham (R, G.)

LANGUAGES. 95

| Slave — Continued.

Vocabulary See Morgan (L. H.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.)
} Words Ellis (R.)

Slavi. See Slave.

Smart (Capt. Charles). Notes on the
“Tonto” Apaches. By Charles Smart,
brevet captain and assistant surgeon
U.S. Army, Fort McDowell, Arizona.

In Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. for 1867, pp.

417-419, Washington, 1868, 8°. (Pilling.)

Preceding the article is this note: ‘‘A partial
vocabulary of the language accompanied the
original, which will appear elsewhere.”
sume the following is meant:

Vocabulary of the Coyotero Apaches,

with notes.

Manuscript, 3 unnumbered leaves, folio. in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected Sept. 13, 1866, at Fort MeDowell, Ariz.

Contains 173 words.

There is in the same library a copy of this

I pre-

manuscript, recorded on one of the standard
vocabulary forms of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion, 6 ll. folio.

Smith River John. See Dorsey (J. O.)

Smithsonian Institution: These words following
a title or included within parentheses after a
note indicate that a copy of the work referred
to has been seen by the compiler in the library
of that institution, Washington, D.C.

Smithsonian Institution, Smithsonian
Photo-
graphic portraits | of | North American
Indians | in the gallery of the | Smith-
sonian institution. | [Seal of the insti-
tution. | |

Washington: | Smithsonian institu-
tion. | 1867.

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 6-42, 8°.

Names of persons of a number of tribes of

miscellaneous collections. 216

American Indians, with definitions, among
them the Navajo.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling,
Smithsonian Institution.

Some copiesare printed on one side of the leaf
only. (Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Smithson-
jan Institution.)

Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge:
These words following a title or included within
parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of that institution, London,

England.

Solomon (Coquille). See Dorsey (J. 0.)
Songs:

Chippewyan — See Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Déné Morice (A. G.)

Loucheux Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Montagnais Végréville (V. T.)

Navajo Matthews (W.)

Slave Petitot (E. F, S.J.)

96

BIBLIOGRAPHY

OF THE

Staffeief (Vladimir) and Petroff (I.) | Steiger (E.) — Continued.

[ Words, phrases, and sentences in the
language of the Kankiina’ or Kanku-
nats Kogtana, on the shores of Cook
Inlet, south of North Foreland. ]
Manuscript, pp. 77-227, 4°,.in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C.
Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition,
most of the schedules of which, except those

relating to relationships, are almost completely |

filled.
clear and distinct handwriting.

The alphabet adopted by the Bureau of Eth-
nology has been followed.

Stanley (J.M.) Portraits | of | North
American Indians, | with sketches of
scenery, etc., | painted by | J. M. Stan-
ley. | Deposited with | the Smith-
sonian institution, | [Seal of the insti-
tution. ] |

Washington: | Smithsonian institu-
tion. | December, 1852. :

Printed cover as above, title as above verso
printers 1 1. preface verso contents 1 1. text pp.
5-72, index pp. 73-76, 8°.

Forms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous
Collections, 53; also part of vol. 2 of the same
series, Washington, 1862.

Contains the names of personages of many
Indian tribes of the United States, to a number
of which is added the English signification.
Among the people represented are the Ump-
quas, p. 59.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,

GeologicalSurvey, Pilling, Powell, Smithsonian
Institution.
Steiger (E.) Steiger’s | bibliotheca glot-
tica, | part first. | A catalogue of | Dic-
tionaries, Grammars, Readers, Exposi-
tors,etc. | of mostly modern languages
| spoken in all parts of the earth, |
except of | English, French, German,
and Spanish. | First division: | Abenaki
to Hebrew. |

E. Steiger, | 22 & 24 Frankfort Street,

| New York. [1874.]

Half-title on cover, title as above verso printer
1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso blank 1 1.
text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 Il. colophon on
back cover, 12°.

Titles of works in Athapasean, p. 14.

The second division of the first part was not
published. Part second is on the English lan-
guage and part third on the German language.

Tn his notice the compiler states: ‘‘ This com-

There are several thousand entries, in a

pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at a
complete linguistic bibliography, but solely as
a bookseller’s catalogue for business purposes,
with special regard to the study of philology in
America.”

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Stuart (Jake). See Dorsey (J. 0.)

Sullivan (John W.) Indian tribes and

vocabularies.
In Palliser (J.), Journal, detailed reports
British North America, pp. 199-216,
London, 1863, folio.
Vocabulary (words and phrases) and numerals
1-200 of the Sursee Indians, pp. 208-210.

Sursee:

General discussion See Balbi(A.)
Grammatic comments Wilson (EF. F.)

Numerals Sullivan (J. W.)
Vocabulary Balbi (A.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C.E.)
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.)
Vocabulary Jéhan (L. F.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Vocabulary Sullivan (J. W.)
Vocabulary Umfreville (E.)
Vocabulary Wilson (E. F.)
Words Adelung (J.C.) and

Vater (J.S.)

Sussee. See Sursee.

Syllabarium [for the Chippewyan lan-

guage |.
[London: Society for promoting
christian knowledge. 188-?]

1 sheet, 25 by 20 inches, with heading as
above, verso blank.

The first division contains in one column the
roman consonants: w, b, ch, d, g, k, kl, 1, m,n, s,
sh, t, th, tth, tz,y. The second division con-
tains in four columns the syllabie characters
for the same, each colamn headed by its
respective vowel termination, a, e. i, 0. The
third division contains the additional marks,
contractions, and final consonants, in syllabic
and roman characters.

This syHabarium is nearly identical with
that in Kirkby’s Chipewyan gospels of 1878,
the only variation being in the third division,
which contains two additional marks or con-
tractions.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

Syllabary :
Athapascan See Morice (A. G.)
Chippewyan Syllabarium.
Chippewyan Tuttle (C. R.)
Montagnais Perrault (C. 0.)

Taché

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

(Mgr. Alexandre Antoine).
Esquisse | sur le | nord-ouest de ? Ame-
rique | par | Mgr. Taché, Evéque de St.
Boniface, 1868. |

Montreal | typographie du Nouveau
monde | 23, rue St. Vincent. | 1869

Cover title: Esquisse | sur le | nord-ouest de
l’Amerique | par | Mgr. Taché, Evéque de St.
Boniface, 1868. |

Montreal: | Charles Payette, Libraire-Edi-
teur | Rue St. Paul, No. 250. | 1869

Cover title as above, title as above verso
blank 1 1. text pp. 3-146, 8°.

A short account of the Famille des Tschip-
peweyans ou Montagnais, pp. 86-91.

Copies seen: British Museum, Pilling, Shea.

— Sketch | of the | North-west of
America. | By Mgr. Taché | Bishop of
St. Boniface, | 1868. | Translated from
the French, by Captain D. R. Cameron,
| Royal Artillery. |

Montreal: | Printed by John Lovell

St. Nicholas Street, | 1870.

Pp. 1-216, 8°,

Linguistics as in the French edition titled
next above, p. 123,

Copies seen: Quebec Historical Society.

See Petitot (E. F.S. J.)

Alexandre Antoine Taché, Canadian R. C.
archbishop, born in Riviére du Loup, Canada,
July 23, 1823, was graduated at the college of
St. Hyacinth and studied theology in the Sem-
inary of Montreal. He returned to St. Hya-
cinth as professor of mathematics, but. after
teaching a few months, went to Montreal and
became a monk of the Oblate order. He vol-
unteered at once for missionary service among
the Indians of the Red River, and reached St.
Boniface on August 25, 1845. He was raised to
the priesthood on October 12 following. InJuly,
1846, he set ont for Tle a la Crosse, and, after
spending a few months at this mission, he went
to labor among the Indians that lived around
the lakes, several hundred miles to the north-
west. Although only twenty-six years old, he
was recommended for the post of coadjutor
bishop of St. Boniface in 1850. He was sum-
moned to France by the superior of the Oblate
Fathers and consecrated bishop on November
23,1851. After a visit to Rome he returned to
Canada in February, 1852, and on September 10
reached Tle ala Crosse, which he had deter-
mined to make the center of his labors in the
northwest. He became bishop of St. Boniface
June 7,1853. St. Boniface was erected into a
metropolitan see on Sept. 22, 1871, and Bishop
Taché was appointed archbishop.—4 ppleton's
Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

ATH i

97

A

Taculli. [Vocabularies of some of the

Indian tribes of northwest America. ]

Manuscript, 2 vols. 82 pp. folio. Seen at the
sale of the library of the late Mr. Geo. Brinley,
the sale catalogue of which says they came
from the library of Dr. John Pickering, to
whom, probably, they were presented by Mr.
Duponcean. They were presented ‘‘to Peter
S. Duponceau, Esq., with J. K. Townshend's
respects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River,
September, 1835."

Among these is one of the Carrier or Taeculli
Indians of New Caledonia, containing 342 words
and phrases.

Taculli:

Bible, Genesis See Morice (A. G.)

General discussion Balbi(A.)

General discussion Bancroft (H. H.)
Gentes Hale (H.)
Grammatic comments Miiller (F.)
Numerals Ellis (1.)

Numerals Harmon (D. W.)
Numerals Pott (A. F.)
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) and

Dawson (G. M.)

Proper names Anderson (A. C.)

Sermons Morice (A. G.)
Text Morice (A. G.)
Tribal names Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.)
Vocabulary Balbi (A.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann(J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.)
Vocabulary Harmon (D. W.)
Vocabulary Jéhan (L. F.)
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.)

Taenlli.

Tolmie (W.F.) and
Dawson (G.M.) 7

Turner (W. W.)

Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary Whipple (A. W. )
Vocabulary Wilson (KE. F.)
Words Daa (L. K.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Gatschet (A.5S.)
Words Latham (R. G.)
Words Lubbock (J.)
Words Pott (A. F.)
Words Tolmie (W.F.) and
Dawson (G. M.)
Tahkali. See Taculli.
Tahlewah:
General discussion See Gibbs (G.)
Numerals Bancroft (H. H.)
Numerals Ellis (R.) y
Numerals Tolmie (W.F.) and

Dawson (G. M.)
Crook (G.)
Gibbs (G.)

Vocabulary
Vocabuwary

Takudh. See Tukudh.

Thompson (Edward).

98

Ten commandments:

Beaver
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Dog Rib

See Garrioch (A. C.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Kirkby (W. W.)

J3ompas (W.C.)

Montagnais Legoff (L.)
Slave Kirkby (W. W.)
Slave Reeve (W. D.)

Tenan Kutchin. See Kutchin.
Tenana. See Kutchin.
Tenana Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Ten Kate (Dr. Herman Frederick Car-

vel), jr. Reizen en Onderzoekingen |
in | Noord-Amerika | van | Dt. H. F.C.
Ten Kate J". | Met een kaart en twee
uistlaande platen. |

Leiden, E. J. Brill. | 1885.

Cover title as above, half-title reverse blank
11. title as above reverse blank 11.3 other prel.
ll. pp. 1-464, errata 1 p. map, 2 plates, 8°.

Onder de Apaches (pp. 165-208) contains a
short vocabulary on p. 196, and a few words
passim.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology.

Texts:
Apache See Bancroft (H. H.)
Chippewyan Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Déné Morice (A. G.)
Loucheux Promissiones.
Montagnais Legoff (L.)

Nayajo Matthews (W.)
Peau de Liévre Promissiones.
Taculli Morice (A. G.)
Tukudh MeDonald (R.)

Thompson (Almon Harris). Vocabulary
of the Navajo language.

Manuscript, 511. 12°, and 811. 4°, in the library
of the Bureau of Ethnology.

Contains about 275 words.

Thompson (Coquille).
O.)

See Dorsey (J.

A short vocabu-
lary of the Language spoke among the
Northern Indians inhabiting the North-
west Part of Hudson’s Bay, as it was
taken at different times from the
Mouths of Nabiana and Zazana, two
Indians, who were on board His
Majesty’s Ship the Furnace in the year
1742, by Edward Thompson, Surgeon
of the said Ship.

In Dobbs (A.), An account of the countries
adjoining to Hudson’s Bay, pp. 206-211, London,
1744, 4°.

About 280 words and phrases of the Chepe-
wyan language. The main portion is alpha-
betically arranged by English words, followed
by “The Northern Indian Way of Counting”
and ‘‘The Parts belonging to a Man.”

Partly reprinted in Whipple (A. W.), Explo-
rations and Surveys, pp. 54-85, Washington,
1855, 4°,

Tinné.

Tinne primer.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Vocabulary of the Tahko [or
Tahko-Tinné] language,
Manuscript, 1 leaf folio, written on both
sides, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology.
Recorded on a printed form containing 60
English words, equivalents of all of which are
given in the Tahko. Probably by Dr. Tolmie.

Tinné:

Bible, Mark
Bible, John
Bible passages

See Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
American.
Bible Society.
Bompas (W.C.)

Bible passages
Bible passages
Bible passages British.

Bible passages Gilbert & Rivington.
General discussion Bancroft (H. H.)
General discussion Bompas (W. C.)
General discussion Brinton (D. G.)
General discussion Faulmann (K.)
Lord’s prayer 3ompas (W. C.)
Numerals Campbell (J.)
Primer Bompas (W.C.)
Sentences Campbell (J.)

Tribal names Dall (W. H.)

Tribal names Richardson (J.)
‘Tribal names Tuttle (C. R.)

Vocabulary Bompas (W. C.)
Vocabulary Campbell (J.)
Vocabulary Dawson (G. M.)
Vocabulary Dorsey (J. O.)
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.)
Vocabulary Ross (R. B.)
Vocabulary Tinné,

Tolmie (W. F.)
Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Words Brinton (D. G.)
Words Crane (A.)
Words Gatschet (A.5S.)
Words Hale (H.)

See also Athapascan; Chippewyan; Déné;
Montagnais.

See Bompas (W.C.)

Tlatskenai:
Grammatic comments See Miiller (F.)
Numerals Ellis (R.)
Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.)
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann(J.C.E.)
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.)
Vocabulary Hale (H.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Turner (W. W.)
Words Daa (L. K.)
Words Ellis (R.)
Words Farrar (F. W.)
Words Lubbock (J.)
Words Pott (A. F.)
Words Wilson (D.)

Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). VYocabu-

lary of the Umpqua; speken on the
River Umpqua. 5

In Scouler (J.), Observations on the indig-
enous tribes, &c., in Royal Geog. Soc, Jour, vol.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES> 99

Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued.

11, pp. 237-241, London, 1841, 8°. (Geological Sur-
vey.)
Contains about 100 words.

— Vocabulary of the Tahko Tinneh

language.
Manuscript, 1 leaf folio, 60 words, in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

—and Dawson (G. M.) Geological

and natural history survey of Canada.

| Alfred R. C. Selwyn, F.R.S., F.G.S.,
Director. | Comparative vocabularies
| of the | Indian tribes | of | British
Columbia, | with a map illustrating
distribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie,
| Licentiate of the Faculty of Physi-
cians and Surgeons, Glasgow. | And |
George M. Dawson, D.8., A. S. R. M., F.
G.S., &e. | [Coat of arms.] | Published
by authority of Parliament. |

Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1884.

Cover title nearly as above, title as above
verso blank 1 1. letter of transmittal signed by
G. M. Dawson verso blank 1 1. preface signed
by G. M. Dawson pp. 5B-7B, introductory note
signed by W. F. Tolmie pp. 9B-12B, text pp.
14B-131B, map, 8°.

Comparative vocabulary, 225 words of five
languages, among them the Tinné, Tshilkotin
tribe (Dawson), Tinne, Nakoontloon sept (Tol-
mie and Dawson), Tinné, Takulli or Teheili
tribe (Dawson), pp. 62B-73B.— Supplementary
list of 162 words in Tshilkotin and Takulli, pp.
74B-77B.—Notes on the Tinné, their habitat,
and a partial list of Tinné septs or tribes, pp.
122B-1238.—Comparative table of some words
(28) in Tshimsian, Haida, Thlinkit, and Tinne,
p.126B.—Comparative table of afew of the words
(68) in the foregoing vocabularies (9 columns,
the last of which, containing a few words only,
is the Tinné), p. 1278.—Comparison of a few
words (4) in various Indian languages of North
America (from various sources), among them
the Navajo, Umkwa, Apache, Chepewyan, Dog-
rib and Takulli, pp. 128B-129B.— Comparison
of numerals (1-4) pertaining to families from
localities widely separated —Tshilkotin, Ta-
kulli, Navajo, Wailakki, Hupa, Tolowa, Chep-
ewyan, Dogrib, Umkwa and Apache, p. 131B.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver-
ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died De-
cember 8, 1886, after an illness of only three
days, at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B.
C. He was educated at Glasgow University,
where he graduated in August. 1832. On Sep-
tember 12 of the same year he accepted a posi-
tion as surgeon and clerk with the Hudson's
Bay Company, and left home for the Columbia
River, arriving at Vancouver in the spring of
1833. Vancouver was then the chief post of
the Hudson’s Bay Company on this coast. In

Tolowa.

Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued.

1841 he visited his native land, but returned in
1842 overland via the plains and the Columbia,
and was placed in charge of the Hudson’s Bay
posts on Puget Sound. He here took a promi-
nent part, during the Indian war of 1855-'56, in
pacifying the Indians. Being an excellent lin-
guist he had acquired a knowledge of the native
tongues, and was instrumental in bringing
about peace between the whites and the Indi-
ans. He was appointed chief factor of the Hud-
son’s Bay Company in 1855, removed to Van-
couver Island in 1859, when he went into stock-
raising, being the first to introduce thorough-
bred stock into British Columbia; was a mem-
ber of the local legislature two terms, until
1878; was a member of the first board of educa-
tion for several years, exercising a great influ-
ence in educational matters; held many offices
of trust, and was always a valued and respected
citizen.

Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for
his contributions to the history and linguistics
of the native races of the West Coast, and
dated his interest in ethnological matters from
his contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited
the West Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes
exploring expedition. He afterwards trans-
mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes
to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some of
which were published in Contributions to
North American Ethnology. In 1884 he pub-
lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a
nearly complete series of short vocabularies of
the principal languages met with in British
Columbia, and his name is to be found fre-
quently quoted as an authority on the history
of the Northwest Coast and its ethnology.
He frequently contributed to the press upon
public questions and events now historical.

See Tahlewah.

Tribal names:

Ahtinné See Latham (R. G.)
Apache Balbi (A.)
Apache Higgins (N.S.)
Apache Jéhan (L. F.)
Apache White (J. B.)
Athapascan Gallatin (A.)
Athapascan Latham (R. G.)
Athapascan Petitot (E. F.S.J.)
Chippewyan Anderson (A. C.)
Coquille Dorsey (J.O.)
Déné Morice (A. G.)
Kenai Gallatin (A.)
Kenai Latham (R. G.)
Koltschane Latham (R. G.)
Kutchin Latham-(R. G.)
Montagnais Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Rogue River Dorsey (J.O.)
Taculli Latham (R. G.)
Tinné Dall (W. H.)
Tinné Richardson (J.)
Tinné Tuttle (C. R.)
Ugalenzen Latham (R. G.)

Truax (W.B.) See Arny (W.F.M.)

Triibner & Co.

100

A catalogue | of | an
extensive collection | of | valuable new
and second-hand books, | English and
foreign, | in | antiquities, architecture,
books of prints, history, | natural his-
tory, and every other branch of ancient
| and modern literature, but more par-
ticularly rich in | books on languages,
on bibliography and on | North and
South America. | On sale at the low
prices affixed | by | Triibner & co., |
60, Paternoster Row, London.

Colophon: Printed by F. A. Brock-
haus, Leipzig. [1856.]

Cover title as above verso contents etc. no
inside title; text pp. 1-159, colophor p. [160], 8°.

American languages, pp. 44-47, contains titles
and prices of a few works relating to the Ath-
apascan languages.

Copies seen: Bureauot Ethnology.
—— A | catalogue | of | a large assem-
blage of books, | appertaining to | lin-
guistic literature, | (many of them very
rare), |in the | Ancient and Modern
Languages. | [Design.] |

Now on sale by Triibner & co. | 60,
Paternoster row, London. | 1860. |
(Price One Shilling, which will be
allowed to Purchasers. )

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp.
1-100, 8°.

‘American languages,’’ pp. 16-22, includes
titles of a few works in Athapascan.
Copies seen: Harvard.
Registered for Transmission Abroad,
Triibner’s | American and Oriental
Literary Record. | A monthly register
| Of the most important Works pub-
lished in North and South America, in |
India, China, and the British Colonies:
with occasional Notes on German, |
Dutch, Danish, French, Italian, Span-
ish, Portuguese, and Russian Books. |
No. 1[—Nos. 145-6. Vol. XII. Nos. 11 &
12]. March 16, 1865 [—-December, 1879].
Price 6d. | Subscription | 5s. per An-
num, | Post Free.

[London: Triibner & co, 1865-1879. |

12 vols. in 9, large 8°. No title-pages; head-
ingsonly. No.1 tonos. 23 & 24 (March 30, 1867)
are paged 1-424; no. 25 (May 15, 1867) to no. 60
(August-25, 1870) are paged 1-816. The number-
ing by volumes begins with no. 6L (September
26, 1870), which is marked vol. VI, no.1. Vols.
VI to XIL contain pp. 1-196; 1-272; 1-204; 1-184;
1-176; 1-152; 1-164. In addition there is a
special number for September, 1874 (pp. 1-72),
and an extrano. 128" for October, 1877 (pp, 1-16) ;

- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Trubner & Co.—Continued.

alsosupplementary and other leaves. Continued
under the following title:

Triibner’s | American, European & Oriental
| Literary Record. | A register of the most im-
portant works | published in | Northand South
America, India, China, Europe, | and the British
colonies. | With Occasional Notes on German,
Dutch, Danish, French, Italian, Spanish, | Por-
tuguese, Russian, and Hungarian Literature. |
New series. Vol. I[-IX].] January to Decem-
ber, 1880[-January to December, 1888]. |

London: | Triitbner & co., 57 and 59, Ludgate
hill. [1880-1888. ]

9 vols. large 8°. Including no. 147-8 to no.
242, each volume with a separate title and leaf
of contents and its own pagination. Continned
as follows:

Triibner’s record, | a journal | devoted tothe
| Literature of the East, | with notes and lists
of current | American, European and Colonial
Publications. | No. 243[-251]. Third series.
Vol.I. Part1[-Vol. Il. Part 3]. Price 2s.

[London: Triibner & co. March, 1889—April,
1891. |

2 vols.; printed covers as above, no title-
pages, large 8°. Published irregularly.

Titles of works in and relating to the Atha-
pascan languages are scattered through the
periodical, together with notes on the subject.
A list of ‘Works on the aboriginal languages of
America,” vol. 8 (first series), pp. 185-189, in-
cludes titles under the special heading of Atha-
pask, p. 186.

Copies seen: Eames.

—— Bibliotheca Hispano-Americana, | A

| catalogue | of | Spanish books | printed
in | Mexico, Guatemala, Honduras, the
Antilles, | Venezuela, Columbia, Eeua-
dor, Peru, Chili, | Uruguay, and the Ar-
gentine Republic; |and of | Portuguese
hooks printed in Brazil. | Followed by a
collection of | works on the aboriginal
languages | of America. |

On Sale at the affixed Prices, by—
Triibner & co., | 18 & 60, Paternoster
London, | 1870. | One shilling and row,
sixpence.

Cover title as above verso contents 1 1. no in-
side title; catalogue pp. 1-184, colophon verso
advertisements 1 1. 16°.

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer-
ica, pp. 162-184, contains a list of books (alpha-
betically arranged by languages) on this smb-
ject, including the Athapascan, pp. 168-169.
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

A | catalogue | of | dictionaries and
grammars | of the! Principal Languages
and Dialects | of the World. | For sale
by | Triibner & co. |

London: | Triibner & co., 8 & 60 Pa-
ternoster row. | 1872,

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES.

Triibner & Co. — Continued.

Cover title as above, title as above verso
printers 1 1. notice reverse blank 1 1. catalogu>
pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 1. advertise-
ments verso blank 1 1.a list of works relating
to the science of language ete. pp. 1-16, 8°.

Contains a few titles of works relating to
the Athapascan languages, p. 6.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

A later edition as follows:

——Triibner’s | catalogue | of | dictiona-
ries and grammars | of the | Principal
Languages and Dialects of the World. |
Second edition, | considerably enlarged
and revised, with an alphabetical in-
dex. | A guide for students and book-
sellers. | [Monogram. ] |

London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59,
Ludgate hill. | 1882.

Cover title as above, title as above verso list
of catalogues 11. notice and preface to the sec-
ond edition p. iii, index pp. iv-viii, text pp.
1-168, additions pp. 169-170, Triibner’s Oriental
& Linguistic Publications pp. 1-95, 8°.

Contains titles of works in American lan-
guages (general), p. 3; Athapascan, p, 18;
Kinai, p. 94.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

——No. 1[-12]. January 1874[-May,
1875]. | A catalogue | of | choice, rare,
and curious books, | selected from the
stock | of | Triibner & Co., | 57 & 59,
Ludgate hill, London.

{[London: Triibner & co. 1874-1875, ]

12 parts: no titles, headings only; catalogue
(paged continuously) pp. 1-192, large 8°. This
series of catalogues was prepared by Mr. James
George Stuart Burges Bohn. See T'riibner’s
American, European, & Oriental Literary Ree-
ord, new series, vol. 1, pp. 10-11 (February, 1880).

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer-
ica, no. 8, pp. 113-118, including titles under the
heading Athapask, p. 115.

Copies seen: Eames.

Triibner (Nicolas), editor,
(H.E.)

Mr. Nicolas Triibner was born at Heidel-
berg June 17, 1817. On being removed from
school, in 1832, as his father was unable to send
him toa university, he was placed in the estab-
lishment of Mr. Mohr, the university book-
seller of his native town. Six or seven years
later he entered the house of Vandenhoeck &
Ruprecht, at Géttingen. In 1840 he moved to
Hoffman & Campe’s, at Hamburg, and in 1842
to Wilmann’s, at Frankfort, who had a large
foreign trade, especially with England. Here
he met the late Mr. William Longman, who
offered him a situation in the London house.
This he accepted, and accordingly went to
England in 1843 as foreign corresponding clerk
of Messrs. Longman’s. In 1851 Mr. Triibner
started business on his own account, and soon

See Ludewig

101

Triibner (N.) — Continued.
acquired a widely spread reputation In the liter-
ary world by his publications of oriental works.
He did much for American bibliography, also
for that of Australia, and was elected a member
of several learned societies in the United States.
He died suddenly March 30, 1884.

Trumbull: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Dr.J. Hammond Traum-
bull, Hartford, Conn.

Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond). On
Numerals in American Indian Lan-
guages, and the Indian Mode of Count-
ing. By J. Hammond Trumbull, of
Hartford, Conn.

In American Philolog. Ass, Trans. 1874, pp.
41-76, Hartford, 1875, 8°,

Examples in Chepewyan,
Apache,

Issued separately, also, as follows:

Nayajo, and

—— On | numerals | in American Indian
languages, | and the | Indian mode of
counting. | By J. Hammond Trumbull,
LL. D. | (From the Transactions of the
Am. Philologica] Association, 1874.) |

Hartford, Conn. | 1875.

Half-title on cover, title as above verso blank
11, text pp. 1-36, 89,

Contains numerals, with comments thereon,
in many American languages, among them a
number of the Athapascan.

Copies seen: Brinton, British Museum,
Eames. Pilling, Powell, Trumbull.

Priced by Quaritch, no. 12565, 7s, 6d.

— Indian languages of America.

In Johnson’s New Universal Cyclopedia,
vol. 2, pp. 1155-1161, New York, 1877, 8°.
(Bureau of Ethnology, Congress.)

A general discussion of the subject, in-
cluding comments on the Athapascan family.

[ ——] Catalogue | of the | American Li-
brary | of thelate | mr. George Brinley,
| of Hartford, Conn. | Part I. | America
in general | New France Canada ete, |
the British colonies to 1776 | New Eng-
land | [-Part IV. | Psalms and hymns
music science and art| [&c. ten lines] |

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock-
wood & Brainard Company | 1878
[-1886]

4 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr.J.H.Trumbull.
The fifth and last part is said to be in prepara-
tion.

Indian languages: general treatises, and cal-
lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast,
p. 141.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was
born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821.

Tukudh:

102

Trumbull (J. H.) — Continued.

He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to
ill health, he was not graduated with his class,
his name was enrolled among its members in
1850, and he was given the degree of A.M. He
settled in Hartford in 1847, and was assistant
secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, and
secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in
1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the
Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre-
sponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected
its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of
the Watkinson free library of Hartford, and its
librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of
the Wadsworth athenzeum since 1864. Dr. Trum-
bull was an original member of the American
Philological Association in 1869, and its presi-
dent in 1874-1875. Hehas been a member of the
American Oriental Sociéty since 1860 and the
American Ethnological Society since 1867, and
honorary member of many State historical soci-
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National
Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted
special attention to the subject of the Indian
languages of North America. He has prepared
a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's
Indian Bible, and is probably the only Amer- |
ican scholar that is now able to read that work.
In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan-
guages of North America at Yale, but loss of |
health and other labors soon compelled his res- |
ignation. The degree of LL. D. was conferred
on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard in 1887,
while Columbia gave him an L. H, D. in 1887,—
Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Bible, New test.
Bible, gospels

See McDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)

Bible, John i-iii,
Bible history
Bible passages
Bible passages
Bible passages
Bible passages
Bible passages
Bible passages
Catechism
General discussion
Hymn book
Hymns

Lord's prayer
Lord’s prayer
Prayer book
Primer

Psalm book
Relationships
Relationships
Text

Words

Tukudh hymns.
Tukudh primer.

Turner (William Wadden).

tive vocabulary

McDonald (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
American.
Bible Society.
Bompas (W.C.)
British.
Church.
Gilbert & Rivington.
McDonald (R.)
Bompas (W. C.)
MeDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Rost (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
Bompas (W.C.)
MeDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)
Morgan (L. H.)
McDonald (R.)
Wilson (E. F.)

See McDonald (R.)
See Bompas (W. C.)

[Compara-
of languages of the

Athapascan family. ]

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Turner (W. W.) — Continued.

Manuscript, 12 unnumbered leaves, written
on both sides, folio, in the library of the Bureau
of Ethnology.

The vocabulary contains 364 English words,
equivalents of which are given in whole or in
part in the following languages: Tacully or
Carrier (from Harmon, p. 403), Tahkali (from
Hale, p. 569), Tlatskanai (from Hale, p. 569),
Umkwa (from Hale, p. 569), Umpqua (from
Tolmie, in Royal Geog. Soc. Journal), Apache
(from Bartlett, in Whipple), Pinal Lleno (from
Whipple), Jicorilla (from Simpson), Navajo
(from Simpson), Navajo (from Eaton. in School-
craft, vol. 4), Hoopah (from Gibbs, in School-
craft, vol. 3).

See Whipple (A. W.), Ewbank
(T.), and Turner (W. W.)

William Wadden Turner, philologist, born
in London, England, October 23,1810; died in
Washington, D. C., November 29, 1859. He
came to New York in 1818, and, after a public-
school education, was apprenticed to the ear-
penter’s trade, but subsequently became a
printer. At the age of twenty-six he was master
of the French, Latin, German, and Hebrew.
Afterward he studied Arabic with Prof. Isaac
Nordheimer, and they proposed to write
together an Arabie grammar, but, receiving no
encouragement, they prepared instead A Crit-
ical Grammar of the Hebrew Language (2 vols.,
New York, 1838) and Chrestomathy : or A Gram-
matical Analysis of Selections fromthe Hebrew
Scriptures, with an Exercise in Hebrew Compo-
sition (1838); also a Hebrew and Chaldee Con-
cordance to the Old Testament (1842). In order
to superintend the printing of these books, Mr.
Turner removed to New Haven, as the only
sufficient supply of oriental type was to be
found there and at Andover. He was engaged
in setting the type during the day, and spent
his evenings in preparing the manuscript. On
the completion of the works, Mr. Turner added
to his linguistic attainments a knowledge of
Sanskrit and most of the other chief Asiatic lan-
guages, and later he turned his attention tothe
languages of the North American Indians. He
editeda Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Lan-
guage of Oregon (1853), and Grammar and Die-
tionary of the Yoruba Language (1858), which
was issued by the Smithsonian Institution. In
1842 he was elected professor of oriental litera-
ture in Union theological seminary, New York
city, and he continued in that office until 1882,
when he was called to Washington by the com-
missioner of patents to take charge of the
library of that department. He was a member
of the American oriental society and secretary
of the National institute for the promotion of
science. Mr. Turner was considered in his day
the most skillful proof-reader in the United
States. In addition to the literary labors that
have been already mentioned, he translated
from the German Friedrich L. G. von Raumer’s
America and the American People (New York,

:
:

ATHAPASCAN

Turner (W. W.) —Continued.

1845), and was associated with Dr. P.J. Kauf-
mann in the translation of the twelfth German
edition of Ferdinand Mackeldey’s Compendium
of Modern Civil Law (London, 1845). He also
translated William Freund’s Latin-German
Lexicon for Ethan A. Andrews’s Latin-English
Lexicon (New York, 1851).—Appleton’s Cyclop.
of Am. Biog.

Tuttle (Charles R.) Our north land: |
being a full account of the | Canadian |

north-west and Hudson’s bay ronte, |
together with | a narrative of the ex-
periences of the Hudson’s bay | expedi-

tion of 1884, | including | a description |
of the climate, resources, and the char- |

acteristics of | the native inhabitants
between the 50th parallel | and the
Arctic circle. | By Charles R. Tuttle, |
Of the Hudson’s Bay Expedition [&e.

a2

Ugalenzen:
Numerals See Dall (W. H.)
Tribal names Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Adelung (J.C.) and Vater

(J.S.)

Vocabulary Baer (IK. E. von).
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.)
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Vocabulary Dall (W. H.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Words Buschmann (J.C. E,)
Words Daa (L. K.)

Ululuk Inkalik. See Inkalik.

Umfreville (Edward).
‘state | of | Hudson’s bay. | Containing

The | present

a full description of | that settlement,
and the adjacent country; | and like-
wise of | the fur trade, | with hints for
its improvement, &c. &c. | To which
are added, | remarks and observations
made in the inland | parts, during a
residence of near four years; | a speci-
men of five Indian languages; and a |
journal of a journey from Montreal to
New- | York. | By Edward Umfreville ;
| eleven years in the service of the
Hudson’s bay com-| pany, and four
years in the Canada | fur trade. |
London: | printed for Charles Stalker,
No. 4, Stationers- | court, Ludgate
-street. | MDCCXC[1790].
Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1
1. contents pp. i-vii, dedicatory remarks pp. 1-2,
prefatory advertisement pp. 3-10, text pp. 11-

128, 133-230, list of books 1 1. plate and two
folded tables, 8°.

LANGUAGES.

108

Tuttle (C. R.) —Continued.

two lines.] | Illustrated with Maps and
Engravings. |

Toronto: | C. Blackett Robinson, 5
Jordan street. | 1885.

Half-title (Our north land) verso blank 1 1.
title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v—-vi, con-
tents pp. vii-xiv, index to illustrations pp. xv—
xvi, text: pp. 17-581, appendix pp. 583-589, two
maps, 8°.

Apostles’ creed in Chippewyan, sylabio
characters, p. 131,—List of Tinneh dialects, pp.
300-301.—Chippewyan sylabarium, p. 379.

Coptes seen: Kames, Pilling.

Tututen:
Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.,)
Vocabulary Dorsey (J. 0.)
Vocabulary iverette (W. E.)
Vocabulary Hubbard (—)
Vocabulary Kautz (A. V.)
Vocabulary Lucy-Fossarieu (M., P. de).

Umfreville (E.) — Continued.

“A specimen of sundry Indian languages
spoken in the inland parts of Hudson’s Bay
between that coast and the coast of California,”
being a vocabulary of 44 words of several
American languages, among them the Sussee,
on folded sheet facing p. 202.

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit-
ish Museum, Brown, Congress, Eames, Shea.

Priced in Stevens's Nuggets, no. 2722, 7s. 6d,
At the Field sale, no. 2407, acopy brought $1.50;
at the Squier sale, no. 1446, $1.63. Priced by
Quariteh, no. 28280, 11. 4s. e
Eduard Umfreville | iiber | den ge-
genwiirtigen Zustand | der | Hudsons-
bay, | der dortigen | Etablissements |
und ihres Handels, | nebst | einer Be-
schreibung | des Innern von Neu Wal-
lis, | und einer | Reise von Montreal
nach Neu York. | Aus dem Englischen. |
Mit | einer eigenen neuen Charte, einer
kurzen Geographie | dieser Linder und
mehreren Erliuterungen | herausgege-
ben | von | E. A. W. Zimmerman, |

Hofrath und Professor in Braun-
schweig. |
Helmstadt, bey Fleckeisen. 1791.

Title verso blank 1 1. introduction preface
ete. pp. iii-xxvi, text pp. 1-164, map, 8°.

Vocabulary of the Sussee, p. 148.

Copies seen: Brown, Harvard.

Umpkwa:

General discussion See Gallatin (A.)
General discussion Gatschet (A.S.)
Gentes Hale (H.)
Grammatic comments Miiller (I*.)

104

Umpkwa — Continued.

See Duflot de Mofras (E.)
Tolmie (W. F.) and

Dawson (G. M.)

Stanley (J. M.)
Anderson (A. C.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Barnhardt (W. H.)
Busechmann (J.C. E.)
Gallatin (A.)
Gatschet (A.S.)

Numerals
Numerals

Proper names
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Voeabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Vocabulary Hale (H.)
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
Vocabulary Milhau (J. J.)

Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Linguarum
totius orbis | Index | alphabeticus, |
quarum | Grammaticae, Lexica, | col-
lectiones vocabulorum | recensentur, |
patria significatur, historia adum-
bratur | a | Joanne Severino Vatero, |
Theol. Doct. et Profess. Bibliothecario
Reg., Ord. | S. Wladiniri equite. |

Berolini | In officina libraria
Nicolai. | MDCCCXYV [1815].

Second title: Litteratur | der | Grammatiken,
Lexica | und | Wo6rtersammlungen | aller
Sprachen der Erde | nach | alphabetischer Ord-
nung der Sprachen, | mit einer | gedringten
Uebersicht | des Vaterlandes, der Schicksale |
und Verwandtschaft derselben | von | Dr.
Johann Severin Vater, | Professor und Biblio-
thekar zu Koénigsberg des S. Wladimir- | Or-
dens Ritter. | ©

Berlin | in der Nicolaischen Bnuehhandlung.
| 1815.

Latin title verso 1. 1 recto blank, German title
recto 1.2 verso blank, dedication verso blank 1
1. address to the king 1 1. preface pp. i-ii, to
the reader pp. iii-iv, half-title verso blank 1 1.
text pp. 38-259, 8°. Alphabetically arranged by
names of languages, double columns, German
and Latin.

Notices of works in Chepewyan, pp. 42-43.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling.

A later edition in German as follows:

Fr.

Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, Lex-
ika | und | Woértersammlungen | aller
Sprachen der Erde | von | Johann Se-
verin Vater. | Zweite, vollig umgear-
beitete Ausgabe | von | B. Jiilg. |

Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen
Buchhandlung.

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank
1 1. preface (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1 Decem-
ber 1846) pp. v-x, titles of general works on the

subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Nis

Vater (J.S.) — Continued.

OF THE

Umpkwa — Continued.

Vocabulary See Scouler (J.)

Voeabulary Tolmie (W. F.)

Voeabulary Turner (W. W.)

Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.)

‘Words Daa (L. K.)

Words Ellis (R.)

Words Pott (A. F.)

Words Tolmie (W. F.) and
Dawson (G. M.)

Unakhotana:

Numerals See Dall (W. H.)

Voeabulary Bancroft (H. H.)

Vocabulary Dall (W. H.)

by names of languages) pp. 1-450, additions and
corrections pp. 451-541, subject index pp. 542-
563, author index pp. 564-592, errata 2 11. 8°.

Notices of works in Atnah (Kinn-Indianer),
pp. 88,459; Atnaer, p.459; Chepewyan, pp. 63,
473; Inkiiliichliiaten, pp. 497-498; Kinai
(Ugaljasehmutzi), pp. 204, 504; Sussee (Sursee),
p. 385; Tacullies, p.389; Umpqua, p. 427.

Copies seen; Congress, Eames, Harvard.

At the Fischer sale. no. 1710, acopy sold for 1s,

Véegréville (Pére Valentin Théodore),

[Manuscripts relating to the Monta-

gnais, Chippewyan or Dené lan-
guage. | 1G)

In response to a request for a list of his
papers relating to the Athapascan languages,
Father Végréville, under date of Apr. 23, 1891,
furnished me the following:

1. Monograph on the Dené-Dindjié. Ethno-
graphie notes. Points of resemblance or non-
resemblance with the other nations, savage or
civilized.

2. Grammar of the Montagnais, Chipweyan,
or Dené. This grammar is composed of three
parts: The first, after the prolegomena, treats
of the noun, the adjective, the verb, ete., and
of their diverse accidences; the second gives
the syntax; the third, or etymology, treats of
the composition and decomposition of words.
It serves to abridge the dictionaries consider-
ably.

The tables of verbs, though much less com-
plicated than in the Assinniboine and the Cree,
are yet of considerable extent, for two reasons:
First, because of the great number of para-
digms produced by the union of the personal
termination with the preceding affix; and,
second, the irregularity of the terminal root in
the immense majority of the verbs, which T
had to arrange in groups that divide and sub-
divide.

3. The Montagnais-French dictionary, con-
taining about 18,000 words, out of which one
might form more than 100,000 by means of the
rules laid down in the grammar, third part.

:
:

oo.

i.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 105

Véeréville (V. T.) — Continued.

4. All the material necessary for the compo-
sition of the French-Montagnais dictionary,
which will be as large as the preceding.

5. Several other works: Songs, catechism,
instructions, historic epitome of religion.

It grieves me to have to say that for the
present all my scientific and literary work is
stopped. A task more serious and more
important is imposed upon me. . . . I am
the only priest to minister at Fort Saskat-
chewan, where I go every fortnight, a dis-
tance of 22 miles. On the intervening Sundays
I am needed at Edmonton, where the pastor
understands only English and French, and
leaves to my care three-fourths of his congre-
gation, who speak Cree. I am the only mis-
sionary who speaks the language of the Assin-
niboines, and I am obliged, once or twice each
year, to spend some weeks among them, some
40 miles from here. You will not be surprised,
therefore, when I tell you that it is nearly two
years since I have had any time to devote to
my manuscripts, and very little even to my cor-
respondence.

Father Valentin Théodore Végréville, mis-
sionary, Oblate of Mary Immaculate, was born
at Chatres, Canton of Evron, Department of
Mayenne, France, September 17, 1829. He made
his studies successively at Evron, Laval, Le
Mans. and Marseilles, where he was ordained
priest in 1852. He had already been made an

O. M. I. religious, when, by way of Havre, New |

York, Montreal, Chicago, and St. Paul, he went
to St. Boniface, then capital of all the North-
west. He commenced to exercise the apostolic
ministry in that locality and the environs
among the half-breeds and peoples of divers
nationalities (1852-1853) and prepared to pene-
trate more deeply into the North. During
1853-1857 he gave his attention to the Monta-
gnais (Tchipeweyans) and to the Cris (Crees) of
TleAlaCrosse. ‘The winter of 1857-58 he passed
again at St. Boniface. In 1858 he returned to
Tle A la Crosse, leaving there in 1860 to found
the mission of Lae Caribou, in the midst of the
Montagnais, and visiting thence the Crees found
farther to the south. Returning south to St.
Boniface, he went in 1865 to Lae la Biche,
where he ministered to the Indians and mixed
populations speaking the Montagnais and
Cree. In1874 and 1875 he served the mission of
St. Joachim (Edmonton). In 1875, 1876, and
1877 he gave his attention to the Assimiboines
and to the persons speaking Cree and French
of Lac Ste. Anne. In 1877 and 1878 he built N.
D.de Lourdes (Fort Saskatchewan), and then
returned to Lac Ste. Anne (1878-1880). In 1880 he
descended the Saskatschewan River, stopping
at St. Laurent, whence he soon departed to
establish successively the following missions:
St. Eugéne (1880), St. Antoine de Padoue
(Batoche) (1881), Ste. Anne in the town of Prince
Albert (1882), St. Lonis de Langevin (1883). The
first half of the year 1885 found him going from
one of these missions to another according as

| Végréville (V. T.) — Continued.

his presence seemed required in those times of
trouble and war. In the month of July, 1885,
he ascended again toward Edmonton, and as-
sumed charge of the Mission of St. Christopher.
Numerous visits in the neighborhood of the
posts designated above complete the lists of
wanderings of this missionary. He is now sta-
tioned at St. Albert, Alberta.

Vocabulary :
Ahtinné See Allen (H. T.)
Ahtinné Baer (K. E. von).
Ahtinné Bancroft (H. H.)
Ahtinné Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Ahtinné Dall (W. H.)
Ahtinné Gallatin (A.)
Alhtinné Jéhan (L. F.)
Ahtinné Latham (R. G.)
Ahtinné Pinart (A. L.)
Ahtinné Wrangell (I. von).
Apache Allen (H. 'T.)
Apache Bancroft (H. H.)
Apache Bartlett (J. R.)
Apache Bourke (J. G.)
Apache Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Apache Chapin (G.)
Apache Cremony (J. C.)
Apache Froebel (J.)
Apache Gatschet (A.5.)
Apache Gilbert (G. K.)
Apache Henry (C.C.)
Apache Higgins (N.S.)
Apache Hoffman (W.J.)
Apache Loew (O.)
Apache McElroy (P. D.)
Apache Palmer (E.)
Apache Pimentel (I*.)
Apache Ruby (C.)
Apache Schoolcraft (H. R.)
Apache Sherwood (W. L.)
Apache Simpson (J. H.)
Apache Smart (C.)
Apache Ten Kate (H. F.C.)
Apache Turner (W. W.)
Apache Whipple (A.-W.)
Apache White (J. B.)
Apache Wilson (E. F.)
Apache Yarrow (H.C.)
Athapascan Athapasean.
Athapascan Bancrott (H. H.)
Beaver Bancroft (H. H.)
Beaver Bompas (W. C.)
Beaver Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Beaver Garrioch (A. C.)
Beaver Howse (J.)
Beaver Kennicott (R.)

Seaver Latham (R. G.)

Beaver M’'Lean (J.)

Beaver Morgan (L. H.)

Beaver Roebrig (F. L. 0.)

Chippewyan Adelung (J.C.) and Vater
(J.S.)

Chippewyan Anderson (A.C.)

Chippewyan Balbi(A.)

Chippewyan Bancroft (H. H.)

106 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Vocabulary — Continued. Vocabulary — Continued.
Chippewyan See Bompas (W. C.) Kenai See Latham (R. G.)
Chippewyan Buschmann (J.C. E.) Kenai Lisiansky (U.)
Chippewyan Gallatin (A.) Kenai Prichard (J. C.)
Chippewyan Howse (J.) Kenai Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Chippewyan Jéhan (L. F.) Kenai Staffeief (V.) and Petroff
Chippewyan Kennicott (R.) (1.)

Chippewyan Latham (R. G.) Kenai Wowodsky (—).
Chippewyan Lefroy (J. H.) Koltschane Baer (KX. E. von).
Chippewyan Mackenzie (A.) Koltschane Bancroft (H. H.)
Chippewyan M’Lean (J.) Koltschane Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Chippewyan McPherson (H.) Koltschane Latham (R. G.)
Chippewyan Reeve (W.D.) Kutehin 3ancroft (H. H.)
Chippewyan Richardson (J.) Kutechin Busehmann (J.C. E.)
Chippewyan Roehrig (F. L. 0.) Kutechin Dall (W. H.)
Chippewyan Ross (RK. B.) Kutchin Kennicott (R.)
Chippewyan Thompson (E.) Kutehin Kutehin.
Chippewyan Whipple (A. W.) Kutechin Morgan (L. H.)
Chippewyan Wilson (E. F.) Kutehin Murray (A. H.)
Coquille Abbott (G. H.) Kutehin Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Coquille Dorsey (J.O.) Kutchin Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Déné Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Kutechin Ross (R. B.)
Dog Rib Bancroft (H. H.) Knutehin Whymper (F.)
Dog Rib Buschmann (J.C. E.) Kwalhiokwa Bancroft (H. H.)
Dog Rib Latham (R. G.) Kwalhiokwa Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Dog Rib Lefroy (J. H.) Kwalhiokwa Hale (H.)
Dog Rib Morgan (L. H.) Kwalhiokwa Latham (R. G.)
Dog Rib Murray (A. H.) Lipan Gatschet (A.S.)
Dog Rib O'Brian (—). Loucheux Bancroft (H. 5.)
Dog Rib Richardson (J.) Loucheux Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Dog Rib Whipple (A. W.) Loucheux Isbester (J. A.)
Henagi Anderson (A. C.) Loucheux Latham (R. G.)
Henagi Hamilton (A.5.) Montagnais Adam (L.)
Hudson Bay Adehing (J. C.) and Vater Nabiltse Anderson (A. C.)
(J.S.) Nabiltse Dorsey (J. 0.)
Hudson Bay Whipple (A. W.) Nabiltse Gibbs (G.)
Hupa Anderson (A. C.) Nabiltse Hazen (W.B.)
Hupa Azpell (T. F.) Nagailer Adelung (J. C.) and Vater
Hupa Bancroft (H. H.) (J.S.) :
Hupa Buschmann (J.C. E.) Nagailer Mackenzie (A.)
Hupa Crook (G.) Navajo Arny (W. F.M.)
Hupa Curtin (J.) Nayajo Bancroft (H. H.)
Hupa Gatschet (A.5.) Navajo Beadle (J. H.)
Hupa Latham (R. G.) Navajo Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Hupa Powers (S.) Navajo Cushing (F. H.)
Hupa Turner (W. W.) Navajo Davis (W. W. H.)
Hupa Whipple (A. W.) Navajo Domenech (E. H. D.)
Inkalik Bancroft (H. H.) Navajo Eaton (J. H.)
Inkalik Buschmann (J.C E.) Navajo Gatschet (A.S.)
Inkalik Dall (W. H.) Navajo Loew (O.)
Inkalik Schott (W.) Navajo Matthews (W.)
Inkalik Zagoskin (L. A.) Navajo Nichols (A.58.)
Kaiyuhkhotana Dall (W. H.) Navajo Petitot (E. F.S.J.)
Kenai Adelung (J.C.) and Vater Navajo Pino (P. B.)
(J.5.) Navajo Powell (J. W.)
Kenai Baer (K. E. von). Navajo Schooleraft (H. R.)
Kenai Balbi (A.) Navajo Shaw (J. M.)
Kenai Bancroft (H. H.) Navajo Simpson (J. H.)
Kenai 3uschmann (J.C. E.) Navajo Thompson (A. H.)
Kenai Dall (W. H.) Navajo Turner (W. W.)
Kenai Davidoftf (G. L.) Navajo Whipple (A. W.)
Kenai Davidson (G.) Navajo Whipple (W. D.)
Kenai De Meulen (E.) Navajo Willard (C. N.)
Kenai Gallatin (A.) Navajo Wilson (E. F.)
Kenai Jéhan (L. F.) Nehawni Kennicott (R.)
Kenai Krusenstern (A. J.von). Nehawni Roehrig (F. L. 0.)

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 107

Vocabulary — Continued.
Nehawni See Ross (R. B.)
Peau de Liévre Kennicott (R.)
Pean de Liévre Petitot (E.F.S. J.)
Peau de Liévre Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Rogue River Barnhardt (W. H.)
Rogue River Dorsey (J.O.)

Sikani Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Sikani Howse (.J.)

Sikani Pope (F. L.)

Sikani toehrig (F. L. O.)

Sikani Ross (R. B.)

Slave Kennicott (R.)

Slave Kirkby (W. W.)

Slave Latham (R. G.)

Slave Morgan (L. H.)

Slave Roehrig (F. L. 0.)

Sursee Balbi (A.)

Sursee Bancroft (H. H.)

Sursee Buschmann (J.C. E.)

Sursee Gallatin (A.)

Sursee Jéhan (L. F.)

Sursee Latham (R. G.)

Sursee Petitot (E. F. S.J.)

Sursee Sullivan (J. W.)

Sursee Umfreville (E.)

Sursee Wilson (E. F.)

Taeulli Anderson (A. C.)

Taculli Balbi (A.)

Taeulli Bancroft (H. H.)

Taculli Buschmann (J. C. E.)

Taculli Gallatin (A.)

Taeulli Harmon (D. W.)

Taculli Jéhan (L. F.)

Taculli Roehrig (F. L. 0.)

Taculli Taculli.

Taculli Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)

Taculli Turner (W. W.)

Taculli Whipple (A. W.)

Vocabulary — Continued.

Tinné See Dorsey (J. 0.)

Tinné Pinart (A. L.)

Tinné Ross (R. B.)

Tinné Tinné.

Tinné Tolmie (W. F.)

Tinné Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-

son (G. M.)

Tlatskenai Anderson (A. C.)
Tlatskenai 3anecroft (H. H.)
Tlatskenai suschmann (J.C. E.)
Tlatskenai Gallatin (A.)
Tlatskenai Hale (H.)

Tlatskenai Latham (R. G.)
Tlatskenai Turner (W. W.)

; Tututen Anderson (A. C.)
Tututen Dorsey (J. 0.)
Tututen Everette (W. E.)

-Tututen Hubbard (—).
Tututen Kautz (A. V.)
Tututen Luecy-Fossarieu (M. P. de).
Ugalenzen Adelung (J. C.) and Vater

(J.S.)
Ugalenzen Baer (I. E. von).
Ugalenzen Bancroft (H. H.)
Ugalenzen Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Ugalenzen Dall (W. H.)
Ugalenzen Latham (R. G.)
Umpkwa Anderson (A. C.)
Umpkwa dancroft (H. H.)
Umpkwa sarnhardt (W. H.)
Umpkwa Suschmann (J.C. E.) .
Umpkwa Gallatin (A.)
Umpkwa Gatschet (A.S.)
Umpkwa Hale (H.)
Umpkwa Latham (R. G.)
Umpkwa Milhau (J. J.)
Umpkwa Scouler (J.)
Umpkwa Tolmie (W. F.)
Umpkwa Turner (W. W.)
Umpkwa Whipple (A. W.)
Unakhotana Bancroft (H. H.)
Unakhotana Dall (W. H.)
Wailakki Powers (S.)
Willopah Anderson (A, C.)
Willopah Gibbs (G.)

W:

Taculli Wilson (E. F.)
Tahlewah Crook (G.)
Tahlewah Gibbs (G.)
Tinné Bompas (W.C.)
Tinné Campbell (J.)
Tinné Dawson (G. M.)
Wailakki :
Numerals See Bancroft (H. H.)
Numerals Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.)
Vocabulary Powers (8.)

Warner (James), s7. See Dorsey (J. 0.)

Watkinson: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn.

Wellesley: This word following a title or within
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of
the work referred to has been seen by the com-
piler in the library of Wellesley college, Wel-
lesley, Mass.

Wentzel (W.F.) Letters to the Hon.
Roderic McKenzie, 1807-1824.

In Masson (L. R.), Les bourgeois de la Com-
pagnie du nord-ouest [part 2], pp. 67-153, Que-
bee, 1889, sm. 4°.

Vocabulary (260 words) of the Beaver lan-
guage, pp. 97-104.

Wheeler (Capt. George Montague).
[Seal.] | Engineer department, U. S.
army. | Report | wpon | United States
Geographical Surveys | westof the one
hundredth meridian, | in charge of |
capt. Geo. M. Wheeler, | Corps of en-
gineers, U.S. army, | under the direc-

108

Wheeler (G. M.) — Continued.

tion of | the chief of engineers, U. S.
army. | Published by anthority of the
honorable the Secretary of war, | in
accordance with acts of Congress of
June 23, 1874, and February 15, 1875. | In
seven volumes and one supplement,
accompanied by one | topographic and
one geologic atlas. | Vol. I1.—Geograph-
ical report{-VII.—Archeology ]. |

Washington: | Government printing
office. | 1889[1875-1889. |

7 vols. and supplement to vol. 3, 4°.

The dates of the respective volumes are: I,
1889; II, 1877; ITI, 1875; 111, supplement, 1881;
IV, 1877; V,1875; VI, 1878; VII, 1879.

Gatschet (A.S.), Appendix. Linguistics, vol.
7, pp. 399-485.

Copies seen: British Museum,
Geological Survey, National Museum, Pilling,
Trumbull.

Whipple (Amiel Weeks), Ewbank (T.),
and Turner (W. W.) Explorations
and surveys for a railroad route from
the Mississippi river to the
ocean. | War department. | Route near
the thirty-fifth parallel, under the com-
mand of lieut. A. W. Whipple, | topo-
graphical engineers, in 1853 and 1854. |

Report | upon! the Indian tribes, | by |

lieut. A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank,
esq., and prof. Wm. W. Turner. |

Washington, D.C., | 1855.

Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1
1. illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 7-127,
Included in ‘‘ Reports of ex-
plorations and surveys for a railroad from the
Mississippi river to the Pacific ocean,” vol. 3,
‘of which it forms the third part; it was also
issued separately, without the plates.

Chapter V, Vocabularies of North American

seven plates, 4°.

Languages (collected by A. W. Whipple; clas- |

sified, with accompanying remarks, by Wm. W.
Turner), pp. 54-103, contains, under the heading
Apache, parallel vocabularies of the Navajo
and Pinal Lefio (225 words each, collected by
Whipple), pp. 81-83.—Remarks on the vocabu-
laries (by Turner), pp. 83-85. — Comparative
vocabulary of 25 words of Hudson’s Bay (from
Dobbs), Chepewyan (from Mackenzie), Dog-
tib (from Richardson), Tacully (from Harmon),
Umkwa (from Hale), Hoopah (from Sehool-
eratt), Navajo (from Schooleraft), and Apache
(from Bartlett's manuscript), pp. 84-85.

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames,
Pilling.

At the sale of Prof. W.W.Turner’s library in
New York, May, 1860 (nos, 294-296), eight copies
of the separate edition were sold. Mr. T. W.
Field’s copy (no. 2523) sold in 1875 for $1.75.

Amiel Weeks Whipple, soldier, born in Green-
wich, Mass., in 1818, died in Washington, D.

Congress, |

Pacifie

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Whipple (Gen. William Denison).

| White (Dr. John B.)

OF THE

Whipple (A. W.)— Continued.

C., May 7, 1863. He studied at Amherst; was
graduated at the U.S. military academy in 1841;
was engaged immediately afterward in the
hydrographic survey of Patapsco River, and in
1842 in surveying the approaches to New
Orleans and the harbor of Portsmoutb, N. H.
In 1844 he was detailed as assistant astronomer
upon the northeastern boundary survey, and in
1845 he was employed in determining the north-
ern boundaries of New York, Vermont, and
New Hampshire. In 1849 he was appointed
assistant astronomer in the Mexican boundary
commission, and in 1853 he had charge of the
Pacific railroad survey along the 35th parallel.
Tn 1856 he was appointed engineer for the south-
ern light-house district and superintendent of
the improvement of St. Clair flats in St. Mary’s
river. At the opening of the civil war he at
once applied for service in the field, and was
assigned as chief topographical engineer on the
staff of Gen. Irvin MecDowell.—Appleton’s
Cyclop. of Am. Biog.

Vo-
cabulary of the Navajo language by
General William D. Whipple, stationed
at Fort Defiance, New Mexico.

Manuscript, 2 leaves, written on one side
only, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol-
ogy.

Contains 40 words only.

An appended note says: ‘‘ Transmitted to
Geo. Gibbs, from Louisville, Ky., by General
Geo. H. Thomas, with a letter of transmittal
dated March 5, 1868.”’

Vocabulary of the
[Coyotero] Apache.

In Gatschet(A.S.), Zw6lf Sprachen aus dem
Siidwesten Nordamerikas, pp. 99-115, Weimar,
1876, 8°.

Contains about 400 words.

—— Classified list of the prepositions,

pronouns, &c., of the Apache language.

Manuscript, 2 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau
of Ethnology.

Degrees of relationships in the lan-
guage of the Apache tribe.

Manuscript, 2 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of
Ethnology.

Names of the different Indian tribes
in Arizona, and the names by whieh
they are called by the Apaches.

Manuscript, 5 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of
Ethnology.

Remarks on the general relations of
the Apache language.

Manuscript, 7 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of
Ethnology.

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 109

White (J. B.) — Continued.

Sentences in Apache, with a classifi-
cation of men, women, and children,
with the Apache names.

Manuscript, 25 pages, 12°, in the library of
the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank
book.

[Vocabulary of the Apache and
Tonto language, with notes, by Dr.
John B. White. ]

Manuscript, pp. 1-110, 12°, in the library of

the Bureau of Ethnology.

Recorded in a blank book, the first page of
which contains an abbreviation of the above

title; pp. 2-3 are blank. Notes, p. 4.—Cur- |

rency in use by the Apaches, p. 5.—Indian

wearing apparel, p. 5.—Tontoe numerals, p. 6.— |
Apache numerals, p. 7.—Vocabulary of the Ton- |

toe and Apache, alphabetically arranged by
English words, pp. 8-89.—The Tontoe words
are on the outer margins of the versos of the
leaves, the inner margin containing running
notes and comments. The English words are

on the left-hand margin of the rectos and the |
Apache words on the right-hand or outer mar- |
gin.—Tribal relationships, pp. 90-91.—Imple- |
ments of war, seasons of the year, p.92.—Pro- |
nouns, adverbs, and adjectives, p. 93.—Anat- |
omy, pp. 94,96.—Sentences in Apache, pp. 95, |

97.—Trees, p. 98.— Animals, pp. 99-102.—Towns,

camps, &c., pp. 103-104.— Vegetables, p. 105.— |

Musical instruments, p. 106.

These manuscripts were collected by Dr. |

White while serving as agency physician at the
San Carlos Indian reservation, New Mexico,
from October, 1873, until November, 1875.

White Mountain Apache. See Apache.

venture | in the | territory of Alaska, |

formerly Russian America—now ceded |

to the | United States—and in various

Whymper (F.) — Continued.

Copies seen: Boston Public, British Museum,
Congress.

At the Field sale, catalogue no. 2539, a copy
brought $2.75.
Travel and adventure | in the |
territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian
America—now ceded to the | United
States—and in various other | parts of
the north Pacific. | By Frederick
Whymper. | [Design.] | With map and
illustrations. |

New York: | Harper & brothers, pub-
lishers, | Franklin squarés | 1869.

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica-
tion verso blank 1 1. preface pp. xi-xii, contents
pp- Xili-xviii, list of illustrations p. xix, text pp.
21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and plates,
So

Linguistics asin London edition, pp. 341-350.

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum,
Powell.

Reprinted 1871, pp. xix, 21-353, 8°.

The French edition, Paris, 1871, 8°, contains
no Athapascan material. (Pilling.)

—— Russian America, or ‘‘ Alaska”: the

Natives of the Youkon River and adja-
cent country. By Frederick Whymper,
Esq.

In Ethnological Soc. of London Trans. vol. 7,
pp. 167-185, London, 1869, 8°.

Kuteh-a-kutchin vocabulary, compiled by
the late Major Kennicott, pp. 183-185.

| Willard (Celeste N.) Vocabulary of the

Whymper (Frederick). Travel and ad- |

other | parts of the north Pacific. | By |

Frederick Whymper. | [Design.] |
With map and illustrations. |

London: | John Murray, Albemarle |
street. | 1868./The right of Translation

is reserved.

Half-title verso blank 11. title verso printers |

1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-
ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustrations p:
[xx], text pp. 1-306, appendix pp. 307-331, map,
plates, 8°.

Appendix V. Indian dialects of Northern
Alaska (late Russian America), pp. 318-328,
contains: Co-yukon vocabulary, words from
the Co-yukon dialect, spoken (with slight vari-
ations) on the Yukon River for at least 500
miles of its lower and middle course (Ingelete,
a variety of same dialect), pp. 320-321.

Kennicott (R.), Kotch-d-kutchin vocabulary,
pp. 322-328,

Navajo language.

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leayes, folio; in
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col-
lected in 1869.

Recorded on one of the standard vocabulary
forms, no. 170, of the Smithsonian Institution,
containing 211 English words, equivalents of
nearly all of which are given in the Navajo.

| Willopah:
Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.)
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.)

| Wilson (Daniel). Prehistoric man | Re-

searches into the origin of civilisation
| in the old and the new world | By |
Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor of
history and English literature in Uni-
versity college, Toronto; | author of the
“Archeology and prehistoric annals of
Scotland,” ete. | In two volumes. |
Volume I[-IT]J. |

Cambridge: | Macmillan and co., |
and 23, Henrietta street, Covent gar-
den, | London, | 1862. | (The right of
Translation is reserved. )

110

Wilson (D.) — Continued.

’

— Prehistoric

Wilson (Rev. Edward Francis).

2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored
frontispiece 1 1. title verso printer 1 1. dedication
verso blank 1 1. preface pp.vii-xvi, contents pp.
Xvii-xviii, text pp. 1-488, plan; half-title verso
design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso
printer 1 1. contents pp. v—vi, text pp. 1-475, ap-
pendix pp. 478-483, index pp. 485-499, verso
advertisement, 8°.

Word for ‘‘mother,’’ in several American In-
dian languages, including the Tlatskanai, Na-
vajo, and Kenay, vol. 1, p.71.

Copies seen: British Museum,
Eames, Watkinson.

Congress,

Prehistoric man | Researches into
the origin of civilisation | in the old
and the new world | By | Daniel Wil-
son, LL.D. | professor [&c. two lines. ]
| Second edition. |

London: | Macmillan and co, | 1865, |
(The right of Translation is reserved.)

Half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece
11. title verso printer 1 1. dedication verso blank
11. contents pp. vii-xiii, colored plate 1 1. illus-
trations pp. xv-xvi, preface (dated 29th April,
1865) pp. xvii-xvili, preface to the first edition
pp. xix-xxvi, half-title verso blank 11. text pp.
1-622, index pp. 628-635, 8°.
Linguistics as under previous title, p, 59,

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames.

the Origin of Civilisation | in the Old
and the New World | By | Daniel Wil-
son, LL. D., F. R.S. E. | professor [&e.
two lines.] | Third edition, revised and
enlarged, | with illustrations, | In two
volumes. | Vol, I[-IT). |

London: | Macmillan and Co, 1876, |
(The right of Translation is reserved.)

2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored
frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. dedica-
tion verso blank 1 1. preface (dated 18th Novem-
ber, 1875) pp. vii-vili,contents pp. ix—xiii, illus-
trations pp. xiv-xv, text pp. 1-399; half-title
verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-ix, illustrations
pp. x-xi, text pp. 1-386, index pp. 387-401, works
by the same author ete. 11. 8°.

Linguistics as under previous titles, vol. 2,
p. 373.

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Har-
vard.
The
Sarcee Indians. By Rey. E. F. Wilson:

In Our Forest Children, vol. 3, no. 9 (new
series no. 7), pp. 97-102, Shingwauk Home, On-
tario, December, 1889, 4°.

Graminatical notes, p. 101.—Vocabulary (112
words and phrases), pp. 101-102.

Mr. Wilson acknowledges his indebtedness
to Rey, H, W, Gibbon Stocken, Church of Eng-

man | Researches into

|
|
|
|
|

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

Wilson (E. F.) — Continued.

land missionary to the Sarcees, for information
and valuable notes.

Report on the Sarcee Indians, by the
Rev. E. F. Wilson.

In Fourth Report of the committee . . .

appointed for the purpose of investigating

languages of the North-Western
Tribes of the Dominion of Canada; in British
Ass. Ady. Sci. Report of the fifty-eighth meet-
ing, pp. 233-255, London, 1889, 8°.

Vocabulary (160 words and short sentences),
English and Sarcee, pp. 249-252.—Notes on the
language, pp. 252-253.
Mr. H. Hale, pp. 253-255.

Followed by notes by

The committee report issued separately,
without title-page, repaged 1-23. (Eames,
Pilling.)

[——] An Indian history.
[Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario. 1889.]

No title, heading as above, pp. 1-15, 8°. A.
circular distributed for gathering information,
linguistic and ethnologic, regarding any partic-
war tribe of Indians. On the first page the
author says he is ‘trying to collect material
with a view to publishing a short popular his-
tory of some one hundred or so of the best
known Indian tribes, together with a little in-
sight into the vocabulary and grammatical
structure of each of their languages.” Page
2, pronunciation; pp. 3-7, words and sentences,
three columns, the first English, the second ex-
amples from various Indian languages, among
them the Tukuth, Sarcee, and Apache; the
third is left blank for filling in the particular
language desired; pp. 7-10, questions concern-
ing language, with examples from several lan-
guages; pp. 11-14, questions of history; p. 15,
“A few particulars about the Indians.”

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

The Navajo Indians. By Rev. E. F.
Wilson.

In Our Forest Children, vol. 3, no.10 (new
series no. 8), pp. 115-117, Shingwauk Home,
Ontario, January, 1890, 4°.

Grammatical notes, p. 116.—Vocabulary (84
words and phrases), pp. 116-117.

A comparative vocabulary.
In Canadian Indian, vol. 1 (no. 4), pp. 104-107,
Owen Sound, Ontario, January, 1891, 8°.

A vocabulary of ten words in about 56 lan-
guages, mostly North American, and including
the Chipewyan, Takulli, Tukuth, Sarcee,
Navajo, and Apache.

Rev. Edward Francis Wilson, son of the late

tev. Daniel Wilson, Islington, prebendary of
St. Paul’s Cathedral, and grandson of Daniel
Wilson, bishop of Caleutta, was born in London
December 7, 1844, and at the age of 17 left school
and emigrated to Canada for the purpose of lead-
ing an agricultural life; soon after his arrival
he was led to take an interest in the Indians,
and resolved to become amissionary. After two

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 111
Wilson (E. F.) — Continued. Words — Continued.
years of preparation, much of which time was | Kenai See Jéhan (L. F.)
spent among the Indians, he returned to Eng- | Kenai Latham (R. G.)
land, and in December, 1867, was ordained dea- | Kenai Pott (A. F.)
con, Shortly thereafter it was arranged that he Kenai Schomburgk (R. H.)
should return to Canada as a missionary to the Kenai Wilson (D.)
Ojibway Indians, under the auspices of the | Kutchin Daa (L. K.)
Church Missionary Society, which he did in Kutehin Ellis (R.)
July. 1868. He has labored among the Indians Lipan Bollaert (W.)
ever since, building two homes—the Shingwauk Loucheux Daa (L. K.)
Home, at Sault Ste. Marie, and the Wawanosh Loucheux Gibbs (G.)
Home, two miles from the former—and pre- Loucheux Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
paring linguistic works. | Montagnais Petitot (E. F.S.J.)
Wisconsin Historical Society: These words fol- | Navajo Barreiro (A.)
lowing a title or within parentheses after a Navajo Daa (L. K.)
note indicate that a copy of the work referred Navajo Ellis (R.)
to has been seen by the compiler in the library | Navajo Gatschet (A. S.)
of that institution, Madison, Wis. Navajo Latham (R.)
Woodruff (Dr. Charles E.) Dances of Navajo Matthews (W.)
the Hupa Indians. By Dr. Charles E. Navajo Tolmie ie F.) and Daw-
Woodruff, U. 8. A. 126 aes
5 : ‘ avajo Wilson (D.)
In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 53- Peattde higwre Charencey (C. F. H. G.)
61, Washington, 1892, 8°... (Pilling.) PeaudeLiévre —Petitot (E:F.S.J:)
Hupa names of [four] dances, p. 55. Sikani Daa (L. K.)
Words: Slave Ellis (R.)
Ahtinné See Daa (L. K.) Sursee Adelung (J. C. E.) and
Ahtinné Ellis (R.) Vater (J.5.)
Ahtinné Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Taculli Daa (L. K.)
Abtinné Pott (A. F.) | Taeculli Ellis (R.)
Ahtinné Schomburgk (R. H.) | Taculli Gatschet (A.S.)
Apache Bourke (J. G.) Taculli Latham (R. G.)
Apache Daa (L. K.) Taculli Lubbock (J.)
Apache Ellis (R.) Taculli Pott (A. F.)
Apache Gatschet (A.5.) Taculli Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
Apache Latham (R. G.) son (G. M.)
Apache Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- Tinné Brinton (D. G.)
son (G. M.) Tinné Crane (A.)
Apache Wilson (E. F.) Tinné Gatschet (A. S.)
Athapascan Brinton (D. G.) Tinné Hale (H.)
Athapascan Daa (L. K.) Tlatskenai Daa (L. K.)
Athapascan Ellis (R.) Tatskenai Ellis (R.)
Athapascan Hearne (S.) Tlatskenai Farrar (F. W.)
Athapascan Kovir (E.) Tlatskenai Lubbock (J.)
Athapascan Lubbock (J.) Tlatskenai Pott (A. F.)
Athapascan Pott (A. F.) Tlatskenai Wilson (D.)
Beaver Daa (L. EK.) Tukudh Wilson (E. F.)
Chippewyan Charencey (C. F. 1. G.) Ugalenzen Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Chippewyan Ellis (R.) Ugalenzen Daa (L. K.)
Chippewyan Latham (R. G.) Umpkwa Daa (L. K.)
Chippewyan Leslie (J. P.) Umpkwa Ellis (R.)
Chippewyan Schomburgk (R. H.) Umpkwa Pott (A. F.)
Chippewyan Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- Umpkwa Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw-
son (G. M.) son (G. M.)
Déné Charencey (C. F. H. G.)
Dog Rib Daa (L. K.) Wowodsky (Gov. —). Vocabulary of
Dog Rib Helis) (R.) | the [Kenai] language of Cook’s Inlet
Dog Rib Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- | Bay
son (G. M.) e ws
Hupa Ellis (R.) Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on both
Hupa Gatschet (A.S.) sides, inthe library of the Bureauof Ethnology.
Hupa Latham (R. G.) Recorded on a blank form containing 60 Eng-
TInkalik Buschmann (J. C. E.) lish words, equivalents of allof which are given
Kenai Buschmann (J, C. E.) | in the Kenai.
Kenai Daa (L. K.) There is in the same library a copy of this
Kenai Ellis (R.) vocabulary, 2 ll. folio, made by Dr. Gibbs,

112

Wrangell (Admiral Ferdinand von), Ob-
servations recueillies par Jl Anniral
Wrangell sur les habitants des Cotes
Nord-ouest de V Amérique; extraites du
russe par M.le prince Emanuel Galitzin.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

THE

Wrangell (I. von)—Continued.
In Nouvelles annales des voyages, vol. 1, 1853
(vol. 137 of the collection). pp. 195-221, Paris, n.
d. 8°.
Short vocabulary of the Mednoyskie [Copper
Islanders] and the Ougalantsi, p. 199.

XO:

Xicarilla Apache. See Apache.

Yarrow (Dr. Henry Crécy). Vocabulary
of the Jicarillia language.

In Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon U.S. Geog.
Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 470, Washington,
1879, 4°.

Consists of 211 words in the first division
and six in the second. Collected at Tierra
Amarilla, New Mexico, September, 1874.

3ATOCKHHD (.fetr. Jaspentin ArEKchii). [Za-
goskin (Lieut. Laurenti Alexie).] Te-
mexojsad ONC | YaCTH pyCCKHX Baas bail |
Bb Amepnké. | Ipouszegeunan | Jeiitenantoms
J. 3arocknnbims | Bb 1842, 1843 n 1844 ro-
Aax.| Cb MepkaTopeKolo KapTot rpaBi poBan How
Ha wbAW.—actb neppaa[-Btopaa]. |
Canktnetepoyprs. | Heyarano Bb tHHorpasiit
Kapila kpaiia. | 1847[-1848].

Translation: Pedestrian exploration | of

parts of the Russian possessions | in America.

| Accomplished | by Lieutenant L. Zagoskin |
in the years 1842, 1843 and 1844. | With a Mer-
eator’s chart engraved on copper. | Part first
{-second]. | St. Petersburg. | Printed in the
printing office of Karl Krai. | 1847[-1848].

2 vols.: 1 p.1. pp. 1-183; 1 p.1. pp. 1-120, 1-15,
1-45, 8°.

Vocabulary of the Inkilik and Inkalit Yugel-
mut, vol. 2, appendix, pp. 17-20.—List of vil-
lages, with population statistics, vol. 2, appen-
dix, pp. 39-41.—List of birds in Koikhpagmiut
and Inkilik, vol. 2, appendix, pp. 42-43.

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum.

The vocabularies are reprinted in Busch-
mann (J. C. E.), Der athapaskische Sprach-
stamm, pp. 269-312.

3EJEHOI (Cement Hangs) [Zelendi (Semidn
Tliich)]. Waprievenie 13> qnepanka 1ciiTenaara
3arockMna, BeseHnaro Bb dKCHeAMYIN, CcoBep-
WeHHOH = HMb HO MaTepHKy c'bBepo-sana Ano

BEJEHOM (C. H.)—Continuea.
Avepiku, nravo Bb coopatin P. T. 0. 82
flupapa 1847 roga. (Coctapaexo A. 44. C. H.
3e.1eHbIM®. )

Translation: Extract from the diary of
Lieutenant Zagoskin, kept during a journey
made by him on the mainland of Northwest
America. Read before the Russian Geographie
Society, January 8, 1847. (Compiled by active
member S. I. Zelen6yi,)

In Zapiski (ete.), Journal of the Russian
Geographical Society, vol. 2, pp. 135-202, with
map, St. Petersburg, 18—? 8°.

Collection of words (150) of two Ttynai peo-
ple (Inkalik and Inkalit), pp. 177-181.

Issued separately also. Only the separate
seen. (Yale College.)

Hspacuenie usb AWesltn’ a 1ciiTenanra 3aro-
CKHHA, BeJenHaro Bb aKcHeAYiN, CORepleR-
Hoi MMB 00 MATepHKYy cheepo-3anay noit
Ameptku. (Coctaprzeno J. U1. C. 1. 3erenbiws. )

In Russian Geographical Society Journal,
vols. 1 and 2 (second edition), pp. 211-266, St.
Petersburg, 1849, 8°.

Comparative vocabulary in parallel columns,
Russian, Inkalik proper, and Inkalit, pp. 246-
249.

—— Auszug aus dem Tagebuche des
Lieutenants Sagoskin iiber seine Expe-
dition auf dem festen Lande des nord-
westlichen Amerikas.

In Denkschriften der Russischen Geogra-
phischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg, Band
1, Weimar, 1849, 8°. (A translation, from the

Russian, of vols. 1 and 2 of the Memoirs of the
Russian Geographical Society.) 3)

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp.
359-374.

Title from Bancroft’s Native races.

Zzehkko enjit gichinchik [Tukudh]. See
McDonald (R.)

ADDENDA:

Apostolides (S.) Our lord’s prayer | in
| One Hundred Different Languages. |
Compiled by 8. Apostolides. | [Text
from Acts ii. 8, two lines.] | Second
edition. |

London: | printed and published by

W. M. Watts, | 80, Gray’s-inn road. |

[1871.]

Title verso notice of entry 1 1. index 1 1.
half-title verso blank 11. text (printed on one
side only) 11. 17-116, 12°.

Lord’s prayer in Chipewyan (syllabic char-
acters), 1. 32.

Copies seen: Eames.

For title of earlier edition, see page 4 of this
bibliography.

Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). Allgemeiner
ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas
der Vilker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung
von neiinzehn Karten, | auf denen die,
um die Mitte des neiinzehnten Jahr-
hunderts statt findende | geographische
Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach-
verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker
des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in
die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie
der neiien Welt abgebildet und versinn-
licht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von |
D‘ Heinrich Berghaus. |

Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha.
| 1852.

Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus’
physikaliScher Atlas, etc.) versol. 1 recto blank,
title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19
maps, folio.

I. Die nordischen Vélker, 3. Athapascas,
treats of the habitat, tribal divisions, speech
relations, ete., of the Sah-issah-deinnihs, Bi-
ber-Indianer, Daho-Deinnih, Idtschahtawaht-
Deinnih, Kantschu-Deinnihs, Tleingchah-
Deinnihs, Tontsawhot-Deinnihs, Tahkali,
Nauscud-Deinnihs, Slouacus-Deinnihs and
Negailers, pp. 53-54.—Map no. 17 is entitled
‘‘Ethnographische Karte von Nordamerika,”’
“Nach Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Cla-
vigero, Hervas, Hale, Isbester, &c.”

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology.

ATH—8

|

[Bompas (Bishop William Carpenter). ]

The acts of the apostles. | Translated
into the Teni (or Slavé) language | of
the Indians of Mackenzie river, |
north-west Canada. | By | The right
rev. the bishop | of Mackenzie river. |

London: | British and foreign bible
society. | 1890.

Title as above verso ‘‘ The acts of the apos-
tles in Teni’’ 11. text (entirely in Teni, roman

* characters) pp. 3-84, 16°.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

For title of the four gospels in Slavé (roman
characters), by this author, see page 10 of this
bibliography.

[——] The epistles [and revelation]. |

Translated into the Teni (or Slavé)
language | of the Indiansof Mackenzie
river, | north-west Canada. | By | The
right rey. the bishop | of Mackenzie
river. |

London: | British and foreign bible
society. | 1891.

Title as above verso ‘‘ The epistles in Teni”’
1 1. text (entirely in Teni, roman characters)
pp. 38-269, colophon p. [270], 16°.

Romans, pp. 3-35.—I and IT Corinthians, pp.
36-89.—Galatians, pp. 90-101.—Ephesians, pp.
102-112.—Philippians, pp. 113-120.—Colossians,
pp. 121-128.—I and II Thessalonians, pp. 129-
140.—I and IIT Timothy, pp. 141-157.—Titus, pp.
158-161.—Philemon, pp. 162-163.--Hebrews, pp.
164-187.—James, pp. 188-196.—I and IT Peter,
pp. 197-211.—I, II, and III John, pp. 212-224,.—
Jude, pp. 225-227.—Revelation, pp. 228-269.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.
and Reeve (W.D.)] The | gospel
of St. Matthew | translated into the |
Slave language | for | the Indians of
north-west America. | In the Sylabie
Character. |

London: | printed for the British
and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic-
toria street. | 1886.

Title verso blank 11. text (entirely in syllabic
characters) pp. 1-86, 12°. Some copies were
issued without the title-page.

113

114

[Bompas (W.C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]—

Continued.

This gespel and the remaining portion of the
new testament were translated by Bishop
Bompas and transliterated into syllabic char-
acters by Mr. Reeve.

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley.

{ — ] The | gospel of St. Mark |
translated into the | Slavé language, |
for | Indians of north-west America. |
In the SyHabie Character. |

London: | printed for the British
and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic-
toria street. | 1886.

Title verso blank 1 1. half-title (one line in |

syllabic characters and at bottom ‘‘ Gospel of

St. Mark”) on the verso of which begins the |

text [p.86] in syilabic characters followed by
pp. 87-136, 12°.

Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, Pilling, Welles-
ley.
| —— ] The | gospel of St. Luke |
translated into the | Slavé language, |
for | Indians of north-west America |
Tn the Sylabie Character. |

London: | printed for the British and
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria |

street. | 1890.

Title as above verso printers 1 1. half-title |

(‘The Gospel of St. Luke, in Skavi’ and one
line syllabie characters) verso beginning of
text [p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters
pp. 2-92, 12°.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.
{[—. ] The | gospel of St. John, |
translated into the | Slavé language, |
for | Indians of north-west America. |
In the Syllabie Character, |

London: | printed for the British and

foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria |

street. | 1890.
Title as above verso printers 1 1. half-title
(‘The Gospel of St.John, in Slavi” and one

line syllabic characters) verso beginning of text |

[p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters pp. 2-
67, 12°.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

] The | acts of the apostles, |
and the epistles [and revelation], |
translated into the | Tenni or Slayvé
language, | for | Indians of Mackenzie
river, north-west | Canada. | By the
Right Rev. | the bishop of Mackenzie
river. | In the Sylabic Character. |

London: | printed for the British and
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria
street. | 1891.

BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE

[Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]—
Continued.

Title as above verso printers 1 1. text (en-
tirely in syllabic characters) pp. 1-374, 12°.

Acts, pp. 1-87.—Romans, pp. 88-123.—I and
IT Corinthians, pp. 124-182.—Galatians, pp. 183-
194.—Ephesians, pp. 195-206.—Philippians, pp.
207-214. — Colossians, pp. 215-222.—I and If
Thessalonians, pp. 223-235.—I and II Timothy,
pp. 236-253.—Titus, pp. 254-258. —Philemon, pp.
259-260.— Hebrews, pp. 261-286. —James, pp.
287-296.—I and II Peter, pp. 297-312.—I, II, and
III John, pp. 313-326. — Jude, pp. 327-829,—

Revelation, pp. 330-374.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. ,

Erman (Georg Adolph), editor. Archiv |
fiir | wissenschaftliche Kunde | von |
Russland. | Herausgegeben | von | A.
Erman. | Erster[—Fiinfundzwanzigster]
Band. | 1841[-1867]. | Mit dreiTafeln. |

Berlin, | gedruckt und verlegt von
G, Reimer. [n.d.]

25 vols, 8°,

Schott (W.), Ueher ethnographische Ergeb-
nisse der Sagoskinschen Reise, vol.7, pp. 480-
512,

Copies seen: Congress,

Hale (Horatio). Language as a test of
Mental Capacity. By Horatio Hale,
M.A. (Read May 26, 1891.)

In Royal Soc. of Canada, Trans.and Prac,
vol. 9, pp. 77-112, Montreal, 1892 (?), 49.

A general discussion upon American and
Australian languages, The Athapascan family
is the most fully treated of the American
tongues—the Déné Dindjié, Navajo, Tinné,
and Hupa with many examples, comments
upon primary roots, grammatic forms, ete,
principally from Petitot.

Issued separately as follows:

—— Language as a test of mental capac.
ity: | being an attempt to demonstrate
the | true basis of anthropology. | By
Horatio Hale, M. A., F.R.S.C, | Hon-
orary Member [&e. six lines.] | From
the transactions of the Royal society
of Canada, vol. ix, sec. ii, 1891.

[Montreal. Dawson brothers, 1892?]

Half-title on cover as above, no inside title,
text pp. 77-112, 4°.

Linguistic contents as under title next above,

Copies seen: Pilling, Powell.

Klaproth (Heinrich Julius von). See
Merian (A. A. von) and Klaproth (H.
J. yon), on next page.

McDonald (Rev. Robert). Mosis | vit
ettunettle ttyig | Genesis, Exodus, Le-
vitikus. | Genesis ettunettle. | Arch-
deacon MeDonald, D. D., | kirkhe
thleteteitazya. |

—— The fourth and fifth books of Moses, |

ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES, WS

McDonald (R.)—Continued.

London: | printed for the British
and foreign bible society. | 1890.

Title (verso ‘Archdeacon MeDonald’s version
of Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, in Tukudh)’’ 1 },
text (entirely in Tukudh, roman characters)
pp. 3-282, colophon p. [283] verso blank, 16°.

Genesis, pp, 3-113.—Exodus, pp. 114-211.—
Leviticus, pp, 212-282.

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling.

called | Numbers, and Deuteronomy. |
Moses vit ettunetle ttyig ako | ttank-
thut nikendo | Trigwitittittshi ako
Deuteronomi kutrahnyoo. | Tukudh
ttsha zit thleteteitazya. | By | arch-
deacon McDonald, D.D. |

London: | printed for the British
and foreign bible society | 1891.

Title (verso ‘Archdeacon Me Donald’s version
of Numbers, Deuteronomy, in Tukudh”) 1 1.
text (entirely in Tukudh, roman characters)
pp. 3-191, colophon p. [192], 16°.

Numbers, pp. 3-103.—Deuteronomy, pp. 104—

TOIT
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Under date of Jan, 28, 1892, Mr. McDonald
informs me that he has sent to the British and
Foreign Bible Society for publication the books
of Joshua, Judges, Ruth, and Samuel J, in
Tukudh.

[——] SyHNabary [in Tukndh],

[London: Society for promoting
christian knowledge. 1886.]

No title-page, heading only; text pp. 1-3, sq.
16°. For description of this syllabary see pp.
59-60 of this bibliography.

Copies seen: Pilling.

Maisonneuve (J.) Catalogue | des |

livres des fonds | et en nombre | His-
toire, Archéologie | Ethnographie et
Linguistique de Europe | de l’Asie,
de VAfrique | de VAmérique et de
VOcéanie | [Vignette] |

Paris | J. Maisonneuve, libraire-édi-
teur | 25, quai Voltaire, 25 | (Ancienne
Maison Th. Barrois) | 1892

Cover title as above verso list of grammars,
title as above verso note 1 1. text pp. 3-127, back
cover verso list of catalogues, 8°.

Linguistique générale (including titles of a
number of books referring to American lan-
guages), pp. 30-44.—Gramumaires, Dictionnaires,
Textes et Traductions (pp. 45-127) include titles
of works in Déné Dindjié, p.72; Montagnais,
p- 111.

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling.

Masson (L.R.) Les | bourgeois | de la

Compagnie | du nord-ouest | recits de
voyages, lettres et rapports inédits

Masson (L. R.)—Continued.

relatifs | au nord-ouest canadien | Pu-
bliés avec une | esquisse historique | et
des Annotations | par | L. R. Masson |
Premiére Série | [Monogram] |

Québec | de Vimprimerie générale A,
Coté et Cie | 1889

Cover title as above, title as aboye verso
blank 1 1. introduction pp. lii-vi, contents pp.
vii-ix, half-title (Récits de voyage, lettres et
rapports inédits relatifs au nord-ouest cana-
dien) verso blank 1]. contents verso blank 11.
half-title (Reminiscences by the honorable
Roderic McKenzie, being chiefly a synopsis of
letters from Sir Alexander Mackengie) verso
blank 11. text pp. 7-66, half-title (Mr. W. F.
Wentzel, Letters to the Hon, Roderic McKen-
zie, 1807-1824) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 69-153,
half-title yerso blank 11. text pp. 155-413, errata
p. [414], announcement of second series verso
blank 11. map, sm. 4°,

Wentzel (W. F.), Letters tothe Hon. Roderic
McKenzie, pp. 67-153.

Copies seen: Major Edmund Mallet, Wash-
ington, D.C.

[Merian (baron Andreas Adolf von)
and Klaproth (H. J. von).] Triparti-
tvm | sev | de analogia lingvarvm li-
bellvs [Continvatio I-IIT] |

Typis Haykulianis divendente Ca-
rolo Beck | Viennae MDCCCXX[-
MDCCCXXII] [1820-1823]

4 yols,: title verso quotation 1 1. prefatory
notice verso quotation 1 1. text pp, 1-193, 1
folded leaf of numerals verso blank; Continva-
tio I (1821), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp.
197-314, 1 folded leaf of numerals verso blank;
Continvatio IT (1822), title verso quotation 1 1.
text pp. 317-585, 3 unnumbered pages, one of
which is on a folded leaf; Continvatio IIT
(1823), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 589-
807, 1 unnumbered page of numerals, oblong
folio.

The work is a comparative vocabulary in
various languages of words having a similar
sound and meaning. Each ono of the four vol-
umes is arranged under a separate alphabet,
and with five columes to a page. The first
column, headed Germ., contains words in Ger-
man, Dutch, English, Danish, Swedish, ete. ;
the second column, headed Slav., contains
words in Slavonic, Russian, Polish, Bohemian,
etc.; the third column, headed Gal., contains
words in Latin, Greek, French, Italian, Span-
ish, Welsh, Irish, Breton, etc.; the fourth col-
umn, headed Miata, contains words in miscel-
laneous European, Asiatic, African, American,
and Oceanic languages; and the fifth column,
headed Notwlae, contains explanations.

Among the American languages in which
examples are given is the Kinai.

Copies seen: Eames.

: then pe .

i"s J }
= ’
¢
- ‘t,, +
? .
f
j ,
7 ' 4
> se
‘
= * ‘ #
¥ hes
j s * i
Marin "
; Payee
= :
=
z f
‘
7
: 7" , q
‘ F "
‘
2 i
¥
F ‘ - ©
¢ ey ‘ 7 j
pay
%) i ¥ E : re -
- r
b Pe =
eit; rier e ae \ J
‘ ;
Vy Greys f
f .
‘ ne, =
} £ ae oeay é -
’ = :
i
ie 5 k
¢ i) _ ”
As é i]
p s e? ‘ m- ‘
¢ . as helt o p
_ : ‘ 4
: waft hike Shark BLP ’ 7igas
er as a Pe sare 4
‘ “is - %
Se pr dh yak 45h Y us Fgh hs? ‘ ;
~ ‘is 2 | i 2. Ld y . *y J - ; oy Tie “ wees ; Ege
$ : Est ire k rt he hs i 5 ial
- 4
= ari a.
vy ne ih 4 4 i
y r se canoe Nighi EAPO

Cera é wink 4

iv Said Majid We alte oF fi. ‘
AF ath Raft eee

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX,

1744 Athapasean Vocabulary Dobbs (A.)
1744 Chippewyan Vocabulary Thompson (E.)
1790 Sursee Vocabulary Umfreville (E.)
1791 Sursee Vocabulary Umfreville (E.)
1795 Athapasecan Words Hearne (S.)
1796 Athapascan Words Hearne (S.)
1801 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1802 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1802 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1802 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1802 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1802 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1803 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1806-1817 Various Vocabularies Adelung (J. C.) and Vater
(J. 8.)

1807 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1810-1812 Kenai Vocabulary Davidoff (G. I.)
1811 Chippewyan Numerals Classical.
1812 Kenai Vocabulary Lisiansky (U.)
1812 Navajo Words Pino (P. B.)
1813 Kenai Vocabulary Krusenstern (A. J. von).
1814 Kenai Vocabulary Lisiansky (U.)
1814 Various Vocabularies McKenzie (A.)
1815 Chippewyan Bibliography Vater (J. 5.)
1820 Taecuhi Vocabulary, numerals Harmon (D. W.)
1820-1823 Kenai Words Merian (A. A. von).
1826 Various Various Balbi (A.)
1830 Chippewyan Numerals James (E.)
1830 Chippewyan Numerals James (E.)
1832 Navajo Vocabulary Bareiro (A.)
1835 Taculli Vocabulary Taculli.
1836 Various Various Gallatin (A.)
1836-1847 Kenai Vocabulary Prichard (J. C.)
1839 Various Vocabularies Baer (K. E. von).

| 1840 z a James (E.), note.
1841 Tinné Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.)
1841 Umpkwa Vocabulary Scouler (J.)
1841 Umpkwa Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.)
1841-1847 Inkalik Vocabulary Erman (G. A.)
1844 Umpkwa Numerals Dutiot du Mofras (E.)
1844 Various Vocabularies Latham (R. G.)
1846 Athapascan General discussion Scouler (J.)
1846 Kenai Vocabulary Latham (R. G.)
1846 Taculli Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.)

| 1846 Various Various Hale (H.)

2 1846 Various Various Hale (H.)

> 1847 Athapascan 3ibliographic Vater (J. 5.)

~ 1847 Chippewyan, Tacully Numerals Pott (A. F.)
1847 Inkalik Vocabulary Zelenoi (S. I.)
1847-1848 Inkalik Vocabulary Zagoskin (L.)
1848 Ahtinné Words Schomburgk (R. H.)
1848 Athapascan General discussion Latham (R. G.)
1848 Taculli Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.), note.

117

118

1848
1849
1849
1849
1849
1849
1850
1850
1850
1850
1850
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851
1851-1857
1852
1852
1852
1852
1852
1853
1853
1853
1853
1853
1854
1854
1854
1854
1854
1854
1855
1855
1855
1855
1855
1855
1856
1856
1856
1856
1856
1856
1856
1856
1857
1857
1857
1857
1857
1857-1858
1858
1858
1858
1858
1858
1859
1859
1859

Various
Chippewyan
Inkalik

Inkalik

Inkalik

Navajo
Chippewyan, Kenai
Loucheux
Navajo, Apache
Various
Various
Apache

Apache
Athapascan
Chippewyan

Chippewyan, Dog Rib

Dog Rib
Dog Rib
Kutebin
Kutchin, Dog Rib
Various
Various
Hupa
Navajo, Apache
Umpkwa
Various
Various
Athapascan
Hupa, Tabhlewah
Various
Various
Various
Athapascan
Midnoosky
Navajo
Various
Various
Various
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Tututen
Various

2
Athapascan
Henagi
Umpqua
Various
Various
Various
Various
Willopah
Kenai
Montagnais
Nabiltse
Navajo
Various
Apache
Athapascan
Apache
Athapascan
Coquille
Various
Athapascan
Various
Various

CHRONOLOGIC

Various
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Words
Words
Vocabulary
Vocabularies

Comparative vocabularies

Vocabularies
General discussion
Vocabulary

Tribal names
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
Personal names
General discussion
Vocabularies
Tribal names
Vocabularies
General discussion
Words

Words

Tribal names
Vocabulary

Vocabulary, numerals

Vocabularies
Words
Words
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Comparative vocabularies

Vocabulary
Vocabularies
g
Bibliographic

Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Various
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabulary
Gramimatic treatise
Prayer book
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Words
Vocabulary
Bibliography
Vovrabulary
Concordance
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
General discussion
Vocabularies
Vocabularies

INDEX.

Gaitlatin (A.)
McLean (J.)

Schott (W.)

Zelenoi (S. I.)
Zelenoi (5S. I.)

Pino (P. B.)
Schomburgk (R. H.)
Isbester (J. A.)
Simpson (J. H.)
Latham (R. G.)
Howse (J.)
Berghaus (H.)
Bartlett (J. R.)
Latham (R. G.)
MePherson (M.)
Letroy (J. H.)
O'Brian (—).
O'Brian (—).
Murray (A. H.)
Murray (A. H.)
Richardson (J.)
Schooleraft (H. R.)
Gibbs (G.)

Simpson (J. H.)
Stanley (J. M.)
Berghaus (H.)
Richardson (J.)
Gallatin (A.)

Gibbs (G.)

Gibbs (G.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Latham (R. G.)
Wrangell (F. von).
Eaton (J. H.)
Richardson (J.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Latham (R. G.)
Bartlett (J. R.)
Henry (C.C.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Kautz (A. V.)
Whipple (A. W.)
James (E.), note.
Triibner & Co.
Hamilton (A. S$.)
Milhau (J. J.)
Latham (R. G.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Richardson (J.), note.
Gibbs (G.)
Radloff (L.)
Perrault (C. O.)
Hazen (W. B.)
Davis (W. H.)
Daa (L. K.)
Froebel (J.), note.
Ludewig (H. E.)
Froebel (J.)
Anderson (A. C.)
Abbott (G. H.)
Jéhan (L. F.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Barnhardt (W. H.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)

1859

185-2

185-?
185-?
185-?
185-?
1860
1860
1360
1360
1360
1860?
1860
1860
1860
1860
1860
1861
1861
1961
1862
1862
1862
1862
1862
1862
1362
1862
1862-1865
1862-1866
186:
18633

1363

1863
1863,
1863
1863
1864
1364
1865
1865

1865
1865
1865
1865-1879
1866
1866

1866
1867
1867
1867
1867
1867
1867-1868
1868
1868
1868
1868
1868
1368
1868
1868-1891
1868-1869
1869
1869
1869

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

Various
Athapascan
Hupa
Nabiltse
Navajo
Tahlewah
Apache
Athapascan
Athapascan
Lipan
Navajo
Tinné
Tututen
Various
Various
Various
Various
Apache
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Beaver
Chippewyan
Nehawni
Peau de Liévre
Slave
Various
Various
Various
Lipan
Various
Apache
Apache
Chippewyan
Sursee
Taculli
Various
Various
Various
Various
Montaguais
Montagnais
Sikani
Various
Various
Athapascan
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Loucheux
Navajo
Navajo
Apache
Apache
Inkalik
Kenai
Kutchin
Navajo
Tinné
Athapascan
Athepascan, Montagnais
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan

Vocabularies
Comparative vocabularies
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Numerals
Bibliographic
Various

Lord’s prayer
Vocabulary
Seripture passage
Vocabulary
Comparative vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Vocabulary
Various

Words
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Prayer book
Various

Words

Words

Lord’s prayer
Legends
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
General discussion
Various

Various

General discussion
Vocabularies
General discussion
Prayer book
Vocabulary
Comparative vocabularies
Words
Bibliographic
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Tribal names
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Words

Personal names
Vocabulary
General discussion
Numerals
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Scripture passage
Bibliographic
Various

Words

General discussion
Lord s prayer

Busehmann (J.C. E.)
Turner (W. W.)
Crook (G,)

Gibbs (G.)

Shaw (J. M.)

Crook (G.)
Haldeman (S. S.)
Triibner & Co.
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Coleccion.

Domenech (EK. H. D.)
British and Foreign,
Hubbard (—).
Latham (R. G.)
Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Schooleraft (H. R.)
Froebel (J.), note.
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Lesley (J. P.)
Kennicott (R.)
Kennicott (R.)
Kennicott (R.)
Kennicott (R.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Latham (R. G.)

Pott (A, TF.)

Wilson (D.)
Pimentel (¥.)

Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Cremony (J. C.)
Cremony (J. C€.)
Pallison (J.)
Sullivan (J. W.)
Anderson (A. ©.)
Buschmann (J.C. E.)
Buschmann (J. C. E.)
Orozco y Berra (M.)
Jéhan (L. F.)

Petitot (EK. F. S.J.)
Perrault (C. O.)

Pope (F. 1.)

Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Wilsen (D.)

Tribmer & Co.
Higgins (N. S.)
Smart (C.)

Faraud (H. J.)
Chapin (G.)

Palmer (E.)

Leclere (C.)

Gibbs (G.)
Smithsonian.

Nichols (A. 8

Smart (C.)

Cremony (J C.)
Whimper (F.)
Davidson (G.)
Kennicott (R.)
Whipple (W. D.)
British and Foreign:
Sabin (J.)

Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Kennicott (R.)
Taché (A. A.)
Apostolides (S.)

1t$

120

1869

1869

1869

1869
1869

1869
1869?
1869
1869
1869?
186-?
186-?
1S70
1870

1870

1870

1870

1870

1870
1870?
1870

1870

1870

1870

1870

1870

1870
1s7i
4871

1871

1871
1871?
1871

1871

1871

1871
1871-1872
1872
1872
1872
1872?
1872-1874
1878
1873
1873?
1873

1873

1873
1873-1875
1873-1875
1873-1875
1873-1875
1873-1875
1873-1875
1S74
1874.

1874

1874

1874

1874

1874

1874

1874

1874

1874
1874-1875

Déné
Inkalit
Kenai
Kenai
Kutehin
Kutehin
Kutchin
Kutchin
Navajo
Slave
Chippewyan
Slave
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Hupa
Kenai
Navajo
Navajo
Slave
Tinné
Tlatskenai
Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Chippewyan
Lipan
Kutchin
Kutehin
Slave

Slave
Tukudh
Various
Various
Kenai
Ahtinné
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Hupa
Athapascan
Navajo
Navajo
Tlatskenai
Tukudh
Various
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache

Apache, Tonto

Athapascan
Kenai
Kutchin
Kutehin
Navajo
Nehawni

Sikani, Beaver
Taculli, Kenai

Tinné
Taukudh
Various

Apache, Lipa

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

Comparative vocabularies
Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Grammatic comments
Prayer book
Bibliographic

Tribal names

General discussion
Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Vocabulary

Prayer book

St. John

‘Words

Vocabularies, numerals
Vocabularies, numerals
Words

Words

Words

Lord’s prayer

Words

Relationships
Vocabulary

Prayer book
Relationships
Relationships

Proper names
Relationships

Numerals

Vocabulary
Bibliographic

Words

Prayer book

Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Vocabulary, numerals
Vocabulary, numerals
Words

Prayer book

Numerals

General discussion
Grammatic notes
Relationships

Sentences

Tribal names
Vocabularies
Bibliographic

Grammar, dictionary
Comparative vocabularies
Comparative vocabularies
Vocabulary

Comparative vocabularies
Comparative vocabularies
Comparative vocabularies
St. Mark

Four gospels
Comparative vocabularies

Petitot (E. F. 8. J.)
Whimper (F.)
Davidson (G.)
Davidson (G.)
Kennicott (R.), note.
Kennicott (R.), note.
Kennicott (R.)
Whimper (F.)
Willard (C. N.)
Kennicott (R.)
Grandin (—).
Kirkby (W. W.)
Triibner & Co.
Faraud (H. J.)
Taché (A. A.)
Azpell (T. F.)
De Meulen (E.)
Powell (J. W.)
Thompson (A. H.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Farrar (F. W.)
Dall (W. H.)
Dall (W. H.)
Lubbock (J.)
Lubbock (J.)
Lubbock (J.)
Apostolides (S.)
Bollaert (W.)
Herdesty (W. L.)
Kennicott (R.), note.
Kirkby (W. W.)
Kennicott (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
Catlin (G.)
Morgan (L. H.) t
Erman (G. A.)
Pinart (A. L.)
Triibner & Co.
Bastian (P. W. A.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Powers (S.)
Field (T. W.)
Beadle (J. H.)
Beadle (J. H.)
Farrar (F. W.)
McDonald (R.)
Ellis (R.)
White (J. B.)
White (J. B.)
White (J. B.)
White (J. B.)
White (J. B.)
White (J. B.)
Steiger (E.)
Radloff (L.)
Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Roehrig (F. L. O.)
Arny (W. F. M.)
Roehrig (F. L. 0.)
Roehrig (F. L. O.)
Roehrig (F. L. O.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
MeDonald (R.)
Roehrig (F. L. 0.)

Vocabularies, Lord’s prayer Pimentel (F.)

:

ss .:.” . o

aso

a

“.

~~ =. ee

—

we

lh te

—

=

Vera Shee
ive ale aie ue

1874-1875
1874-1876
1874-1876
1875
1875
1875
1875
1875
1875
1875
1875
1876
1876
1876
1876
1876
1876
1876?
1876?
1876
1876
1876
1877
1877
1877
1877

1877

1877
1877-1878
1878
1878

1878

1878

1878

1878

1878

1878

1878

1878
1878?
1878?
1878?
1878-1886
1878-1879
1879
1879
i879
1879
1879
1879
1879
1879?
1879
1879

1879

187-2
187-?
187-2
187-2
187-2
187-2
187-?
187-?
187-?
1880

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

Athapascan
Various
Various
Ahtinné
Apache
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Déné, Navajo
Tinné

Various
Various
Ahtinné, Hupa
Apache
Apache, Navajo
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Déné

Tinné

Tinné

Tinné

Various
Various
Athapascan
Athapascan
Hupa

Tinné

Tinné
Umpkwa
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Montagnais
Montagnais
Tinné
Tlatskenai
Tukudh, Chippewyan
Tukudh, Chippewyan
Tukudh, Chippewyan
Athapascan
Various
Apache
Apache
Apache
Apache, Navajo
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Navajo

Slave

Tinné
Beaver
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Déné

Dog Rib
Tinné
Tukudh
Apache

Bibliographic
Various
Various
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Words
Vocabularies
Scripture passage
Words
Words
Numerals
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
Monograph
General discussion
Dictionary, grammar
Scripture passage
Scripture passage
Scripture passage
Various
Words
General discussion
General discussion
Vocabulary
Tribal names
Tribal names
Vocabulary
General discussion
Bibliography
General discussion
General discussion
Four gospels
yeneral discussion
General discussion
Grammatic treatise
Grammatic treatise
Seripture passage
Words
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Lord’s prayer
Bibliographic
Legends
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabularies
Words
Words
Words
Prayer book
Vocabulary
Prayer book

Scripture passage
Primer
Baptismal card
Baptismal card
Prayer book
Primer

Bible texts
Primer
Primer

Primer
Vocabulary

Triibner & Co.
Bancroft (H. H.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Pinart (A. L.)
McElroy (P. D.)
Field (T. W.)
Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
British and Foreign.
Ellis (R.)

Lubbock (J.)

Ellis (R.)

White (J. B.)

Loew (O.)

Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Anderson (A. C.)
Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Bible Society.
British and Foreign.
American.

Gatschet (A. 5.)
Wilson (D.)

Beach (W. W.)
Trumbull (J. H.)
Powers (S.)
Gatschet (A. S.)
Gatschet (A. S.)
Gatschet (A. 8.)
Miiller (F.)

Leclere (C.)

Bates (H. W.)
Keane (A. H.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Dunean (D.)
Duncan (D.), note.
Adam (L.)

Adam (L.)

British and Foreign.
Farrar (F. W.)
Bible Society.

B ible Society, note.
Bible Society, note.
Trumbull (J. H.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Gilbert (G. K.)
Loew (0O.)

Yarrow (H. C.)
Gatschet (A. S.)
Campbell (J.)
Campbell (J.)
Petitot (EK. F. 8. J.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Loew (O.)

121

Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas

(Ww. C.)
American, note.
Bompas (W. C.)
Church Miss. Soe.
Church Miss. Soe.
Kirkby (W. W.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Grouard (E.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Hoftman (W. J.)

122

1880
1880
1880
1880
1880
1881
1881
1881
1881
1881
1881
1881
183.
1881
1881-1887
1882
1882
1882
1882
1882
1882
1882

1882
1882
1882
1882
1882
1883
1883
1883
1883
1883
1883
1883
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884
1884

1884
1884-1889
1885
1883

1885

1885

Athapascan
Beaver

Hupa, Navajo
Tinné

Tinné
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Navajo
Navajo, Apache
Slave

Tinné

Tinné
Tututen
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan

Montagnais, Peau de Liévre
Montagnais, Peau de Liévre

Slave

Tinné
Tinné
Tututen
Various
Various
Apache
Athapascan
Athapascan
Déné
Navajo
Navajo -
Slave
Apache
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapasean
Athapascan
Athapascan
Chilkotin
Chilkotin
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan, Slave
Coquille
Déné

Lipan
Navajo
Navajo
Rogue River
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tututen
Various

Yukiteé
Athapascan
Apache
Apathascan
Athapascan
Athapascan

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX,

Bibliographic
Prayer book
Words

General discussion
Words

Hymn book

New Testament
Prayer book
Relationships
Vocabularies
Prayer book
Scripture passage
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Bibliographic
General discussion
xyeneral discussion
Tribal names
‘Words

Words

Prayer book

Scripture passage
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Various
Words
Vocabulary
Words
Words

Text

Words
Words

Four gospels
Vocabulary
General discussion
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Dictionary
Sermons
Text

Words
Lord's prayer
Vocabulary
Words
Vocabulary
Words
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Scripture passage
Vocabulary

Vocabulary, numerals
Vocabulary, numerals

Vocabulary
Vocabularies

Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Vocabulary
Bibliographic
Bibliographic
General discussion

Quaritch (B.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Sayce (A. H.)
Faulmann (K.)
Campbell (J.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Packard (R. L.)
Gatschet (A. 8S.)
Reeve (W. D.)

Church Miss. Gleaner.

Campbell (J.)

Lucy-Fossarieu (N. P. de).

Leclere (C.)
Triibner & Co.
Bates (H. W.)
Keane (A. H.), note.
Drake (S. G.)

Charencey (C. F. H. G. de).
Charencey (C F. H. G. de).
Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas

(W. C.)
British and Foreign,
Campbell (J.)
Everette (W. E.)
Bancroft (H. H.)
Lubbock (J.)
Gatschet (A. 8.)
Petitot (E. F. 8. J.)
Petitot (E. F. 8. J.)
Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Bompas (W. C.)
Gatschet (S.)
Schooleraft (H. R.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Dorsey (J. 0.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Petitot (E. F. 5. J.)
Petitot (E. F. S. J.)
Bergholtz (G. F.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Petitot (E. F. 8. J.)
Gatschet (A. 8.)
Matthews (W.)
Gatschet (A. 8.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
American, note.
Dorsey (J. 0.)
Campbell (J.)
Campbell (J.)
Dorsey (J. O.)

Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson

(G. M.)
Dorsey (J. O.)
Pott (A. F.) ;
Ten Kate (H. F. C.)
McLean (J.)
Pilling (J. C.)
Bates (H. W.)

er eer Ae

-*

ee,

1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1885
1886
1885
1885-1888
1885-1889
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886

1886

1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1886
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887
1887-1898
1887-1891
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888?
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
#688

Athapascan
Beaver
Chippewyan
Navajo
Navajo
Sursee
‘Tinné
Tinné, Tukudh
Tinné, Tukudh
Tukudh
Tukudh
Tukudh
Tukudh
Tukudh
Tukudh
Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Athapascan
Ahtinné, Hupa
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Athapasean
Beaver
Beaver
Beaver
Navajo
Navajo
Slave

Slave

Tinné
Tukudh
Tukudh
Various
Various
Various
Apache
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Carrier
Midnoosky
Nayajo
Tlatskenai
Various
Chippewyan, Sursee
Carrier
Athapascan
Athapascan
Carrier
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Montagnais
Montagnais
Navajo
Navajo
Navajo
Tinné

Tinné
Tinné, Tukudh

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

General discussion
Vocabulary
Syllabices

Words

Words
Vocabulary
General discussion
Lord’s prayer
Scripture passage
Hymn book
Prayer book
Prayer book

Tract

Tract

Tract

Scripture passages
Scripture passages
Scripture passages
Seripture passages
Various
Bibliographic
Numerals
Vocabulary
Words
Bibliographic
Words

Prayer book

St. Mark

St. Mark

Words

Words

Mark

Matthew

General discussion
New testament
Psalms

Legends «
Scripture passages
Scripture passages
Numerals
Bibliographic
Bibliographic
Bibliographic
Grammar

Various

Songs, prayers
Words

Legends
Vocabularies
Dictionary
Bibliographic
Grammatic comments
Prayer book
Vocabulary
Words

Words

Text

Text

Songs, prayers
Vocabulary, prayers
Vocabulary, prayers
Words

Words

Scripture passages

123

Keane (A. H.), note.
Garrioch (A. C.)
Tuttle (C. R.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Dall (W. H.)
American.
American, note.
McDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
McDonald (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
British.
British.
British.
British.
Featherman (A.)
Leclere (C.)
Ellis (R.)
Ruby (C.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Quaritch (B.)
Kovar (E.)
Garrioch (A. C.)
Garrioch (A. C.)
Garrioch (A. C.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve
(W. D.)
Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve
(W. D.)
Dall (W.H.)
MeDonald (R.)
MeDonald (R.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
British and Foreign, note.
Gilbert & Rivington.
Dugan (T. B.)
Dufossé (E.)
Quaritch (B.)
Quaritch (B.)
Morice (A. G.)
Allen (H. T.)
Matthews (W.)
Farrar (F. W.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Our.
Morice (A. G.)
McLean (J.)
Grasserie (R. de la).
Morice (A. G.)
Reeve (W. D.)
Petitot (E. F. S.J.)
Petitot (E. F.$. J.)
Clut (J.)
Legoff (L.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Brinton (D. G.)
Brinton (D. G.)
American, note.

124

1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
1888
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
1889
188-?
188-?
188-?
188-?
188-?
188-?
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890

1890

1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1890

Tinné, Tukudh

Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Athapascan
Athapascan
Beaver
Carrier
Déné

Hupa
Midnoosky
Midnoosky
Montagnais
Montagnais
Montagnais
Navajo
Navajo
Sursee
Sursee

Tinné, Tukudh

Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Apache
Chippewyan
Deéné

Déné
Navajo
Tinné
Apache
Apache
Apache
Athapascan
Carrier
Carrier
Chippewyan
Déné

Déné

Déné

Déné

Déné

Deéné

Déné

Déné
Loucheux
Montagnais
Montagnais
Navajo
Navajo

Peau de Liévre

Slave

Slave

Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné
Tukudh

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

Scripture passages

Legends

Scripture passages
Various

Vocabularies
Vocabularies
Ribliographic
Grammatic notes
Vocabulary

Genesis
3ibliographic
Vocabulary
Various

Various

Bible history
Grainmar
Instructions
Songs

Songs

Grammatic notes

Vocabulary
Scripture passages

Songs

Scripture pasgages
Various

Words

Words

Vocabulary
Syllabary

Roots
Vocabulary

Vocabulary
Words

Gentes

Words

Words

‘Words

Bible texts
Stories
Vocabulary
Catechism

General discussion
Prayer

Primer

Roots

Syllabary

Syllabary
Words

Text

Prayer book

Prayer book
Gentes
Vocabulary
Text

John

Luke

Acts

Hymn book
Prayer book
Pronouns
Pronouns
Vocabulary
Worés
Geneses, etc.

Bompas (W.C.)
Petitot (E. F.8. J.)
3ritish and Foreign.
Haines (E. M.)
Dawson (G. M.)
Dawson (G. M.)
McLean (J.}
Dorsey (J.O.)
Masson (L. R.)
Morice (A. G.)
Pilling (J. C.)
Curtin (J.)
Allen (H. T.)
Allen (H. T.)
Legoff (L.)
Legoff (L.)
Legoff (L.)
Matthews (W.)
Matthews (W.)
Wilson (E. 8.)
Wilson (E. F.)
American.
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
British and Foreign.
Petitot (E. F.S.J.)
Lubbock (J.)
Wilson (E. F.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Syllabarium>
Petitot (E. F.S.J.), note.
Petitot (E. F.S. J.), note.
Cushing (F. H.)
Crane (A.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Bourke (J. G.)
Grasserie (R. de la).
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Morice (A. G.)
Petitot (E. F.S. J.)
Promissiones.
Legoff (L.)
Legoff (L.)
Matthews (W.)
Wilson (E. F.)
Promissiones.
Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve
(W. D.)
Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve
(W. D.)
Bompas (W.C.)
Hymns.
Lessons.
Hale (H.)
Hale (H.)
Boipas (W. C.)
Brinton (D. G.)
MeDonald (R.)

1890
1890
1890
1890
1890
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1891

1891
1891

1891
1891
1891
1891
1891
1892
1892
1892
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—?
18—

Tukudh
Tukudh
Various
Various
Various
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Athapascan
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Déné

Déné

Déné Dindjie
Montagnais
Montagnais
Montagnais
Montagnais
Montagnais
Navajo
Tinné

Tinné
Tinné

Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Various
Apache
Athapascan
Chippewyan
Chippewyan
Déné

Deéné

Déné

Kenai
Kutechin
Kutechin
Kutechin
Nehawni
Sikani
Tinné
Tinné
Tinné

CHRONOLOGIC INDEX.

Numbers, ete.
Hymn book
Scripture passages
Village names
Words

General discussion
Tribal divisions
Tribal divisions
Words

Catechism

General discussion
Grammar
Periodical

Text

Grammatic treatise
Vocabulary
General discussion
Catechism
Dictionary
Dictionary
Grammar
Religious instructions
Grammar, dictionary
Acts, etc.

Epistles
Prayer book

Comparative vocabularies
Comparative vocabularies

General discussion
Lord's prayer
Lord’s prayer
Bibliographic
General discussion
General discussion
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

Lord's prayer
Vocabulary

Bible

Catechism
Catechism
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

St. Mark
Vocabulary
Vocabulary

>)

125

MeDonaid (R.)

McDonald (R.)

British and Foreign, note.

Dorsey (J. 0.)

Petitot (E. F. S.J.)

Brinton (D. G.)

Powell (J. W.)

Powell (J. W.)

Gabelentz (H. G. C. von der).

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Morice (A. G.)

Végréville (V. T.), note,

Végréville (V. T.), note.

Végréville (V. T.), note.

Végréville (V. T.), note.

Végréville (V. T.), note.

Végréville (V. T.), note.

Matthews (W.)

Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve
(GW: D3)

Bompas (W. C.)

Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas
(W.C.)

Canadian.

Wilson (E. F.)

Petitot (E. F.8. J.)

Rost (R.)

Rost (R.)

Maisonneuve (J.)

Hale (H.)

Hale (H.)

Sherwood (W. L.)

Athapascan,

Lord's.

Ross (R. B.)

Faraud (H.J.)

* Clut (J.)

Seguin (R. P.)
Wowodsky (—).
Kutchin.

Ross (R. B.)
Ross (R. B.)
Ross (R. B.)
Ross (R. B.)
Kirkby (W. W.)
Ross (R. B.)
Tinné.

Thi bot ey

KP PSL Ee

ble!

F,